Tesys T Ethernet Ip

TeSys T LTM R Ethernet Modbus TCP/EtherNet IP
1639505EN-05 04/2015
TeSys T LTM R Ethernet

Modbus TCP/EtherNet IP
Motor Management Controller
User Manual
04/2015
1639505EN-05
www.schneider-electric.com
The information provided in this documentation contains general descriptions and/or technical character-
istics of the performance of the products contained herein. This documentation is not intended as a
substitute for and is not to be used for determining suitability or reliability of these products for specific user
applications. It is the duty of any such user or integrator to perform the appropriate and complete risk
analysis, evaluation and testing of the products with respect to the relevant specific application or use
thereof. Neither Schneider Electric nor any of its affiliates or subsidiaries shall be responsible or liable for
misuse of the information contained herein. If you have any suggestions for improvements or amendments
or have found errors in this publication, please notify us.
No part of this document may be reproduced in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical,
including photocopying, without express written permission of Schneider Electric.
All pertinent state, regional, and local safety regulations must be observed when installing and using this
product. For reasons of safety and to help ensure compliance with documented system data, only the
manufacturer should perform repairs to components.
When devices are used for applications with technical safety requirements, the relevant instructions must
be followed.
Failure to use Schneider Electric software or approved software with our hardware products may result in
injury, harm, or improper operating results.
Failure to observe this information can result in injury or equipment damage.
© 2015 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.
2 1639505EN-05 04/2015
Table of Contents
Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
About the Book. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Chapter 1 Introducing the TeSys T Motor Management System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Presentation of the TeSys T Motor Management System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
EtherNet/IP and Modbus/TCP Communication Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
System Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Physical Description of the LTM R Ethernet Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Physical Description of the LTM E Expansion Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Chapter 2 Metering and Monitoring Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
2.1 Measurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Line Currents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Ground Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Average Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Current Phase Imbalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Thermal Capacity Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Motor Temperature Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Line-to-Line Voltages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Line Voltage Imbalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Average Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Power Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Active Power and Reactive Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Active Power Consumption and Reactive Power Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
2.2 System and Device Monitoring Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Controller Internal Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Controller Internal Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Control Command Error Diagnostic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Wiring Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Configuration Checksum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Communication Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Time to Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
LTM R Configuration Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
LTM E Configuration Fault and Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
External Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
2.3 Fault and Warning Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Introducing Fault and Warning Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
All Faults Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
All Warnings Counter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Auto-Reset Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Protection Faults and Warnings Counters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Control Command Errors Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Wiring Faults Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Communication Loss Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Internal Fault Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Fault History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
2.4 Motor History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Motor Starts Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Motor Starts Per Hour Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Load Sheddings Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
1639505EN-05 04/2015 3
Auto Restart Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Motor Last Start Current Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Motor Last Start Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Operating Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
2.5 System Operating Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Motor State. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Minimum Wait Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Chapter 3 Motor Protection Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
3.1 Motor Protection Functions Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Motor Protection Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
3.2 Thermal Motor Protection Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Thermal Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Thermal Overload - Inverse Thermal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Thermal Overload - Definite Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Motor Temperature Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Motor Temperature Sensor - PTC Binary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Motor Temperature Sensor - PT100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Motor Temperature Sensor - PTC Analog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Motor Temperature Sensor - NTC Analog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Rapid Cycle Lockout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
3.3 Current Motor Protection Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Current Phase Imbalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Current Phase Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Current Phase Reversal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Long Start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Jam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Undercurrent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Overcurrent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Ground Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Internal Ground Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
External Ground Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
3.4 Voltage Motor Protection Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Voltage Phase Imbalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Voltage Phase Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Voltage Phase Reversal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Undervoltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Overvoltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Voltage Dip Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Load Shedding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Automatic Restart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
3.5 Power Motor Protection Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Underpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Overpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Under Power Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Over Power Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Chapter 4 Motor Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
4.1 Control Channels and Operating States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Control Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Operating States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Start Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
4.2 Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Control Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Predefined Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Control Wiring and Fault Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
4 1639505EN-05 04/2015
Overload Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Independent Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Reverser Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Two-Step Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Two-Speed Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Custom Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
4.3 Fault Management and Clear Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Fault Management - Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Manual Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Automatic Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Remote Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Fault and Warning Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
LTM R Controller Clear Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Chapter 5 Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
5.1 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
General Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Wiring - Generalities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Wiring - Current Transformers (CTs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Wiring - Ground Fault Current Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Wiring - Temperature Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Wiring - Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Wiring - Logic Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Wiring - Logic Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Connecting to an HMI Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
5.2 Wiring of the Ethernet Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Ethernet Network Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Ethernet Network Port Wiring Terminal Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Ethernet Architecture Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Wiring of the Ethernet Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Chapter 6 Commissioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Commissioning Overview / Handling Unrecoverable FDR Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
First Power-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Required and Optional Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
FLC (Full Load Current) Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Ethernet Protocol Communication Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Verifying System Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Verify Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Chapter 7 Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
7.1 Using the LTM R Controller Stand-Alone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Hardware Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Stand-Alone Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
7.2 Using the LTM CU Control Operator Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Presentation of the LTM CU Control Operator Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
7.3 Configuring the Magelis® XBTN410 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Configuration of the HMI Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Installing Magelis® XBT L1000 Programming Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Download 1-to-many Software Application Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Transferring Application Software Files to Magelis® XBTN410 HMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
1639505EN-05 04/2015 5
7.4 Using the Magelis® XBTN410 HMI (1-to-many). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Physical Description (1-to-many) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Command Lines (1-to-many) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Navigating the Menu Structure (1-to-many) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Editing Values (1-to-many). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Executing a Value Write Command (1-to-many) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Menu Structure (1-to-many) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Menu Structure - Home Page (1-to-many). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Menu Structure - All LTM R Controllers and the HMI (1-to-many) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Controller Page (1-to-many). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Settings (1-to-many). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Statistics (1-to-many) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Product ID (1-to-many). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Monitoring (1-to-many). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Fault Management (1-to-many) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Service Commands (1-to-many) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
7.5 Using SoMove with the TeSys T DTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Presentation of SoMove with the TeSys T DTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Installing SoMove and the TeSys DTM Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
7.6 Using Ethernet Services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Configuration of the LTM R Ethernet Network Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Ethernet Link Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Master IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
IP Addressing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Faulty Device Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Discovery Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Ethernet Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Simple Network Management Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
7.7 Using the Modbus®/TCP Communication Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Modbus®/TCP Protocol Principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Modbus®/TCP Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Modbus Exception Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
I/O Scanning Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
7.8 Using the EtherNet/IP Communication Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
EtherNet/IP Protocol Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Connections and Data Exchange. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Device Profiles and EDS Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Object Dictionary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Identity Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Message Router Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Assembly Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Connection Manager Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
TCP/IP Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Ethernet Link Object. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Control Supervisor Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Overload Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Periodically Kept Acyclic Words (PKW) Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
TeSys T Monitoring Control Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
EtherNet/IP Interface Diagnostic Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
I/O Connection Diagnostic Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Explicit Connection Diagnostic Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Explicit Connection Diagnostic List Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
6 1639505EN-05 04/2015
7.9 Communication Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Communication Parameter Clear Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Simplified Control and Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Organization of Communication Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Data Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Data Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Identification Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Statistics Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Monitoring Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Configuration Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Command Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
User Map Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Custom Logic Variables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Mirroring Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
7.10 Using the Standard Web Server User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Description of the Standard Web Server User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Home Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Login Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Documentation Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Monitoring Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Product Status Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Metering Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Diagnostics Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Ethernet Basic Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Ethernet Extended Diagnostics Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
RSTP Bridge Statistics Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
RSTP Port Statistics Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Faults & Warnings Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Fault History Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Maintenance Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Counters Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Setup Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Product Thermal Settings Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Product Current Settings Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Product Voltage Settings Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Product Power Settings Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
RSTP Configuration Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Communication Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Password Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Chapter 8 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Detecting Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Preventive Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Replacing an LTM R Controller and LTM E Expansion Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Communication Warnings and Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Appendices ...................................................... 467
Appendix A Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Technical Specifications of the LTM R Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Technical Specifications of the LTM E Expansion Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Characteristics of the Metering and Monitoring Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Recommended Contactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Appendix B Configurable Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Main Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
1639505EN-05 04/2015 7
Thermal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
HMI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Appendix C Wiring Diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
C.1 IEC Format Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Overload Mode Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
Independent Mode Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
Reverser Mode Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Two-Step Wye-Delta Mode Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Two-Step Primary Resistor Mode Wiring Diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Two-Step Autotransformer Mode Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Two-Speed Dahlander Mode Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Two-Speed Pole Changing Mode Wiring Diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
C.2 NEMA Format Wiring Diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
Overload Mode Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Independent Mode Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
Reverser Mode Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Two-Step Wye-Delta Mode Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
Two-Step Primary Resistor Mode Wiring Diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
Two-Step Autotransformer Mode Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
Two-Speed Mode Wiring Diagrams: Single Winding (Consequent Pole) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
Two-Speed Mode Wiring Diagrams: Separate Winding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
8 1639505EN-05 04/2015
Safety Information
Important Information
NOTICE
Read these instructions carefully, and look at the equipment to become familiar with the device before
trying to install, operate, or maintain it. The following special messages may appear throughout this
documentation or on the equipment to warn of potential hazards or to call attention to information that
clarifies or simplifies a procedure.
PLEASE NOTE
Electrical equipment should be installed, operated, serviced, and maintained only by qualified personnel.
No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any consequences arising out of the use of this
material.
A qualified person is one who has skills and knowledge related to the construction and operation of
electrical equipment and its installation, and has received safety training to recognize and avoid the
hazards involved.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 9
10 1639505EN-05 04/2015
About the Book
At a Glance
Document Scope
This manual describes the Ethernet TCP/IP version of the TeSys® T LTM R motor management controller
and LTM E expansion module. This version allows the communication over an Ethernet network using
either Modbus/TCP communication protocol or EtherNet/IP communication protocol.
The purpose of this manual is to:
z describe and explain the monitoring, protection, and control functions of the LTM R controller and
LTM E expansion module
z provide all the information necessary to implement and support a solution that best meets your
application requirements
The manual describes the 4 key parts of a successful system implementation:
z installing the LTM R controller and LTM E expansion module
z commissioning the LTM R controller by setting essential parameter values
z using the LTM R controller and LTM E expansion module, both with and without additional human-
machine interface devices
z maintaining the LTM R controller and LTM E expansion module
This manual is intended for:

z design engineers
z system integrators
z system operators
z maintenance engineers
Validity Note
This manual is valid for all LTM R Ethernet TCP/IP controllers. Some functions are available depending on
the software version of the controller.
Related Documents
Title of Documentation Reference Number

TeSys T LTM R••• Instruction Sheet AAV7709901
TeSys T LTM E••• Instruction Sheet AAV7950501
TeSys T LTM CU Control Operator Unit User’s Manual 1639581
TeSys T LTM CU Instruction Sheet AAV6665701
Tesys T DTM online help 1672614
XBT-N User Manual 1681029
XBT-N Instruction Sheet 1681014
BMXBOC0401 Ethernet Communication Module, User Manual S1A34009
Electrical Installation Guide (Wiki version) www.electrical-installation.org
Okken Solution Guide DESY014EN
Blokset Solution Guide ESBED297701EN
Highly Dependable Ethernet Architectures in Intelligent Power and Ethernet_WP
Motor Control Centres (iPMCC) Guide
You can download these technical publications and other technical information from our website at
www.schneider-electric.com.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 11
12 1639505EN-05 04/2015
Introduction
1639505EN-05 04/2015
Chapter 1
Introducing the TeSys T Motor Management System
Introducing the TeSys T Motor Management System
Overview
This chapter introduces the TeSys T motor management system and its companion devices.
What Is in This Chapter?

This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
Presentation of the TeSys T Motor Management System 14
EtherNet/IP and Modbus/TCP Communication Protocols 20
System Selection Guide 21
Physical Description of the LTM R Ethernet Controller 24
Physical Description of the LTM E Expansion Module 26
1639505EN-05 04/2015 13
Introduction
Presentation of the TeSys T Motor Management System
Aim of the Product

The TeSys T motor management system offers protection, control, and monitoring capabilities for single-
phase and 3-phase AC induction motors.
The system is flexible, modular, and can be configured to meet the requirements of applications in industry.
The system is designed to meet the needs for integrated protections systems with open communications
and a global architecture.
Highly accurate sensors and solid-state full motor protection provide better utilization of the motor.
Complete monitoring functions enable analysis of motor operating conditions and faster responses to
prevent system downtime.
The system offers diagnostic and statistics functions and configurable warnings and faults, allowing better
prediction of component maintenance, and provides data to continuously improve the entire system.
Examples of Supported Machine Segments

The motor management system supports the following machine segments:
Machine Segment Examples

Process and special machine segments Water and waste water treatment
z water treatment (blowers and agitators)
Metal, Minerals, and Mining

z cement
z glass
z steel
z ore extraction
Oil and gas
z oil and gas processing
z petrochemical
z refinery, offshore platform
Microelectronic
Pharmaceutical
Chemical industry
z cosmetics
z detergents
z fertilizers
z paint
Transportation industry
z automotive transfer lines
z airports
Other industry
z tunnel machines
z cranes
Complex machine segments Includes highly automated or coordinated machines used in:
z pumping systems
z paper conversion
z printing lines
z HVAC
Supported Industries
The motor management system supports the following industries and associated business sectors:
Industry Sectors Application

Building z office buildings Control and manage the building facilities:
z shopping centers z critical HVAC systems
z industrial buildings z water
z ships z air
z hospitals z gas
z cultural facilities z electricity
z airports z steam
14 1639505EN-05 04/2015
Introduction
Industry Sectors Application

Industry z metal, mineral, and mining: cement, z control and monitor pump motors
glass, steel, ore-extraction z control ventilation
z microelectronic z control load traction and movements
z petrochemical z view status and communicate with machines
z ethanol z process and communicate the data captured
z chemical: pulp and paper industry z remotely manage data for one or several sites via
z pharmaceutical the Internet
z food and beverage
Energy and z water treatment and transportation z control and monitor pump motors
Infrastructure z transportation infrastructure for people z control ventilation
and freight: airports, road tunnels, z remotely control wind turbine
subways, and tramways z remotely manage data for one or several sites via
z power generation and transport the Internet
TeSys T Motor Management System

The 2 main hardware components of the system are the LTM R controller and the LTM E expansion
module.
The system can be configured and controlled:
z using an HMI (Human Machine Interface) device: Magelis® XBT or TeSys® T LTM CU
z using a PC running SoMove with the TeSys T DTM.
z using a PLC connected to the system via the communication network
z using the Ethernet Web server
Components such as external motor load current transformers and ground current transformers add
additional range to the system.
LTM R Controller
The microprocessor-based LTM R controller is the central component in the system that manages the
control, protection, and monitoring functions of single-phase or 3-phase AC induction motors.
The LTM R controller is designed to work over various fieldbus protocols. This manual focuses only on
systems designed to communicate over an Ethernet network either through Modbus/TCP communication
protocol or through EtherNet/IP communication protocol.
The range includes 6 LTM R controller models communicating over the Ethernet network.
LTM R Controller Functional Description Reference Number

z current sensing 0.4...100 A LTMR08EBD (24 VDC,
z single-phase or 3-phase current inputs 0.4...8 A FLC)
z 6 discrete logic inputs
LTMR27EBD (24 VDC,
z 4 relay outputs: 3 SPST, 1 DPST 1.35...27 A FLC)
z connections for a ground current sensor
z connection for a motor temperature sensor LTMR100EBD (24 VDC,
z connection for network 5...100 A FLC)
z connection for HMI device or expansion module LTMR08EFM (100...240 VAC,
z current protection, metering and monitoring functions 0.4...8 A FLC)
z motor control functions
LTMR27EFM (100...240 VAC,
z power indicator and communication protocol
selection indicator 1.35...27 A FLC)
z fault and warning LED indicators LTMR100EFM (100...240 VAC,
z network communication and alarm indicators 5...100 A FLC)
z HMI communication LED indicator
z test and reset function
LTM R controllers communicating over an Ethernet network can communicate either using the
Modbus/TCP communication protocol or using the EtherNet/IP communication protocol.
Both protocols are loaded in the controller. The controller is pre-configured to communicate through
Modbus/TCP protocol. Changing its configuration allows to switch to EtherNet/IP protocol.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 15
Introduction
LTM E Expansion Module

There are 2 models of LTM E expansion modules that provide voltage monitoring functionality and 4
additional logic inputs. The LTM E expansion modules are powered by the LTM R controller via a
connector cable.
LTM E Functional Description Reference Number

Expansion Module
z voltage sensing 110...690 VAC LTMEV40BD (24 VDC
z 3-phase voltage inputs logic inputs)
z 4 additional discrete logic inputs LTMEV40FM
z additional voltage protection, metering and monitoring functions
(100...240 VAC logic
z power LED indicator
inputs)
z logic input status LED indicators
Additional components required for an optional expansion module:
z LTM R controller to LTM E connection cable
HMI Device: Magelis® XBTN410

The system uses the Magelis® XBTN410 HMI device with a liquid crystal display.
Magelis® XBTN410 Functional Description Reference Number
z configures the system through menu entries XBTN410 (HMI)

z displays parameters, warnings, and faults
XBTZ938 (cable)
Additional components required for an optional HMI device:
XBTL1000 (software)
z separate power source
z LTM R/LTM E to HMI communication cable
z Magelis XBTL1000 programming software
HMI Device: LTM CU Control Operator Unit

The system uses the TeSys®T LTM CU Control Operator Unit HMI device with a liquid crystal display and
contextual navigation keys. The LTM CU is internally powered by the LTM R. Refer to the TeSys T
LTM CU Control Operator Unit User Manual for more information.
LTM CU Functional Description Reference Number

Control Operator Unit
z configures the system through menu entries LTM CU
z displays parameters, warnings, and faults
LTM9CU•0
z control the motor
(HMI communication cable)
Additional components required for an optional HMI TCSMCNAM3M002P
device:
(cable kit)
z LTM R/LTM E to HMI communication cable
LTM9KCU
Kit for portable LTM CU
16 1639505EN-05 04/2015
Introduction
SoMove with the TeSys T DTM

SoMove software is a Microsoft® Windows®-based application, using the open FDT/DTM technology.
SoMove contains many DTMs. A specific DTM exists for the TeSys T motor management system.
SoMove with the Functional Description Reference Number

TeSys T DTM
z configure the system through menu entries SoMove with the TeSys T DTM
z display parameters, warnings, and faults
TCSMCNAM3M002P
SoMove
TM
z control the motor
(cable kit)
z enable customization of operating modes
Additional components required for the SoMove FDT
container:
z a PC
z separate power source
z LTM R / LTM E / LTM CU to PC communication cables
Load Current Transformers

External load current transformers expand the current range for use with motors greater than 100 full load
Amperes.
Schneider Electric Load Primary Secondary Inside Diameter Reference Number

Current Transformers mm in.
100 1 35 1.38 LT6CT1001
200 1 35 1.38 LT6CT2001
400 1 35 1.38 LT6CT4001
800 1 35 1.38 LT6CT8001
Note: The following current transformers are also available: Schneider Electric
LUTC0301, LUTC0501, LUTC1001, LUTC2001, LUTC4001, and LUTC8001.
Lug-lug kit provides bus bars and lug terminals that adapt the pass through wiring windows and provide
line and load terminations for the power circuit.
Square D Lug-lug Kit Description Reference Number

Square D Lug-lug Kit MLPL9999
1639505EN-05 04/2015 17
Introduction
Ground Fault Current Transformers

External ground fault current transformers measure ground fault conditions.
Schneider Electric Vigirex™ Type Maximum Inside Diameter Transformation Reference

Ground Current Transformers Current mm in. Ratio Number
TA30 65 A 30 1.18 1000:1 50437

PA50 85 A 50 1.97 50438
IA80 160 A 80 3.15 50439
MA120 250 A 120 4.72 50440
SA200 400 A 200 7.87 50441
PA300 630 A 300 11.81 50442
POA 85 A 46 1.81 50485
GOA 250 A 110 4.33 50486
Cables
System components require cables to connect to other components and communicate with the network.
Cable Description Reference Number

Connecting jumper 0.04 m (1.57 in.) length, for side by side LTMCC004
connection of the LTM R and LTM E
LTM R to LTM E RJ45 connector cable 0.3 m (11.81 in.) length LTM9CEXP03
LTM R to LTM E RJ45 connector cable 1.0 m (3.28 ft) length LTM9CEXP10
Category 5 shielded/unshielded twisted pair network connection 490 NTW 000 •••
cable with 2 RJ45 connectors
LTM R/LTM E to Magelis® HMI device connection cable XBTZ938

2.5 m (8.20 ft) length
18 1639505EN-05 04/2015
Introduction
Cable Description Reference Number

LTM R/LTM E to LTM CU HMI device connection cable LTM9CU10
LTM R/LTM E to LTM CU HMI device connection cable LTM9CU30
Cable kit, includes LTM E / LTM R / LTM CU to PC TCSMCNAM3M002P

communication cable 2.5 m (8.2 ft) length
1639505EN-05 04/2015 19
Introduction
EtherNet/IP and Modbus/TCP Communication Protocols
Communication Protocols Structure

The User Application uses the Ethernet communication protocol, which is developed on five main layers
known and standardized as OSI (Open System Interconnect) layers.
z Physical layer: handles the transmission and reception of the unstructured row bit stream over the
physical medium.
z Data Link layer : provides error-free transfer of data frames from one node to another over the Physical
layer.
z Network layer: controls the operations of the subnet, selecting which physical path the data takes.
z Transport layer: ensures that messages are delivered error-free, in sequence and with no losses or
duplications.
z Application layer: serves as the window for users and application processes to access the network
services.
LTM R EtherNet/IP User Application

The User Application is an assembly tool to automate or customize the building, the configuring, and the
network access of products.
The User Application contains three levels:
z Profiles: automated Overload Relay and customized Motor Starter.
z Overload relay profile provides a standardized data structure for overload protection fault status and
reset.
z Motor starter profile provides a standardized interface to control and monitor an AC motor. It contains
overload relay profile.
z Object Library: Parameters and Assembly
z Parameters: selection of all the customization settings for the building of the products, with or without
profile association.
z Assembly: building of automated or customized the network access of products.
z Data Management Services: Explicit Messaging and I/O Messaging

z Explicit Messaging sends automated messages across the network to a specific device and awaits
a reply.
z I/O Messaging sends cyclic disregarded messages across the network.
Parameters in Object Library

There are two methods to access specific parameters:
z Explicit messaging: user application uses.
z I/O messaging: User application uses PKW mechanism.
20 1639505EN-05 04/2015
Introduction
System Selection Guide
Overview
This section describes the LTM R controller with and without the optional LTM E expansion module for
metering and monitoring, protection, and control functions.
z Metering and Monitoring functions
z measurement
z fault and warning counters
z system and device monitoring faults
z motor history
z system operating status
z Protection functions
z thermal motor protection
z current motor protection
z voltage and power motor protection
z Control functions
z control channels (local/remote control source selection)
z operating modes
z fault management
Metering Functions
The following table lists the equipment required to support the metering functions of the motor
management system:
Function LTM R Controller LTM R with LTM E

Measurement
Line currents X X
Ground current X X
Average current X X
Current phase imbalance X X
Thermal capacity level X X
Motor temperature sensor X X
Frequency – X
Line-to-line voltage – X
Line voltage imbalance – X
Average voltage – X
Power factor – X
Active power – X
Reactive power – X
Active power consumption – X
Reactive power consumption – X
System and Device Monitoring Faults
Controller internal faults X X
Controller internal temperature X X
Control command error diagnostic X X
Wiring fault - Temperature sensor connections X X
Wiring fault - Current connections X X
Wiring fault - Voltage connections – X
Configuration checksum X X
Communication loss X X
Time to trip X X
Fault and warning counters
X The function is available
– The function is not available
1639505EN-05 04/2015 21
Introduction
Function LTM R Controller LTM R with LTM E

Protection fault counts X X
Protection warning counts X X
Diagnostic fault counts X X
Motor control function counts X X
Fault history X X
Motor History
Motor starts / O1 starts / O2 starts X X
Operating time X X
Motor starts per hour X X
Motor last start current ratio X X
Motor last start duration X X
System Operating Status
Motor running X X
Motor ready X X
Motor starting X X
Minimum wait time X X
Protection Functions
The following table lists the equipment required to support the protection functions of the motor
management system:
Functions LTM R Controller LTM R with LTM E

Thermal overload X X
Current phase imbalance X X
Current phase loss X X
Current phase reversal X X
Long start X X
Jam X X
Undercurrent X X
Overcurrent X X
Ground current X X
Motor temperature sensor X X
Rapid cycle lockout X X
Voltage phase imbalance – X
Voltage phase loss – X
Voltage phase reversal – X
Undervoltage – X
Overvoltage – X
Load shedding – X
Underpower – X
Overpower – X
Under power factor – X
Over power factor – X
22 1639505EN-05 04/2015
Introduction
Control Functions
The following table lists the equipment required to support the control functions of the motor management
system:
Control functions LTM R Controller LTM R with LTM E

Motor control channels
Terminal strip X X
HMI X X
Remote X X
Operating mode
Overload X X
Independent X X
Reverser X X
Two-step X X
Two-speed X X
Custom X X
Fault Management
Manual reset X X
Automatic reset X X
Remote reset X X
1639505EN-05 04/2015 23
Introduction
Physical Description of the LTM R Ethernet Controller
Overview
The microprocessor-based LTM R controller provides control, protection and monitoring for single-phase
and 3-phase AC induction motors.
Phase Current Inputs

The LTM R controller includes internal current transformers for measuring the motor load phase current
directly from the motor load power cables or from secondaries of external current transformers.
1 Windows for phase current measurement
Front Face
The LTM R controller front face includes the following features:
1 Test / Reset button

2 LTM E / HMI port with RJ45 connector connecting the LTM R controller to an HMI, PC, or LTM E expansion module
3 Ethernet port number 1 with RJ45 connector connecting the LTM R controller to a Modbus/TCP network
4 Ethernet port number 2 with RJ45 connector connecting the LTM R controller to a Modbus/TCP network
24 1639505EN-05 04/2015
Introduction
5 LTM R status-indicating LEDs

6 Plug-in terminal: control power, logic inputs, and commons
7 Plug-in terminal: double pole/single throw (DPST) output relay
8 Plug-in terminal output relay
9 Plug-in terminal: ground fault input and temperature sensor input
10 Rotary switches (Tens and Ones) for IP addressing
11 Ethernet port link and activity LEDs
12 MAC address
Test / Reset Button

The Test / Reset button performs a reset, self test, or places the LTM R controller in an internal fault state.
For a detailed description of the test/rest button functions, see Test / Reset, page 269.
HMI Device/Expansion Module/PC Port

This port connects the LTM R controller to the following devices over the HMI port using an RJ45
connector:
z an expansion module
z a PC running SoMove with the TeSys T DTM
z a Magelis® XBTN410 HMI
LTM R status-indicating LEDs
LED name Description

HMI Comm Communication between LTM R controller and HMI device, PC, or LTM E expansion module
Power LTM R controller power or internal fault condition, motor status and configured communication
protocol
Alarm/MS Protection warning or fault, or internal fault indicator
Fallback Indicates communication loss between the LTM R controller and network or HMI control source
STS/NS Network status indicator
Ethernet Port Link and Activity LEDs
LED name Description

LK/ACT Ethernet link status
Ethernet communication activity status
1639505EN-05 04/2015 25
Introduction
Physical Description of the LTM E Expansion Module
Overview
The LTM E expansion module extends the monitoring and control functions of the LTM R controller by
providing voltage measurement and additional logic inputs:
z 3 phase voltage inputs
z 4 additional discrete logic inputs
LTM E Expansion module LTM E Expansion module connected to an LTM R controller
Front Face
The LTM E expansion module front face includes the following features:
4
2T05334
LV1 LV2 LV3
LTMEV40FM
1
HMI
LTMR
Power I.7 I.8 I.9 I.10

3
I.7 C7 I.8 C8 I.9 C9 I.10 C10
1 Port with RJ45 connector to HMI or PC

2 Port with RJ45 connector to LTM R controller
3 Status-indicating LEDs
4 Plug-in terminal: voltage inputs
5 Plug-in terminal: logic inputs and common
NOTE: Logic inputs are externally powered according to input voltage ratings.
26 1639505EN-05 04/2015
Introduction
Status-indicating LEDs
LED name Description Appearance Status

Power Power/Fault status Green Power on, no faults
Red Power on, faults
Off Not powered
I.7 Logic Input I.7 status Yellow Activated
Off Not activated
Off Not activated
Off Not activated
Off Not activated
1639505EN-05 04/2015 27
Introduction
28 1639505EN-05 04/2015
Metering and Monitoring Functions
1639505EN-05 04/2015
Chapter 2
Overview
The LTM R controller provides measurement, metering, and monitoring in support of the current,
temperature, and ground fault protection functions. When connected to an LTM E expansion module, the
LTM R controller also provides voltage and power measurement functions.

This chapter contains the following sections:
Section Topic Page
2.1 Measurement 30
2.2 System and Device Monitoring Faults 45
2.3 Fault and Warning Counters 59
2.4 Motor History 70
2.5 System Operating Status 78
1639505EN-05 04/2015 29
Section 2.1
Measurement
Measurement
Overview
The LTM R controller uses these measurements to perform protection, control, monitoring, and logic
functions. Each measurement is detailed in this section.
The measurements can be accessed via:
z an HMI device
z a PLC via the network port
What Is in This Section?

This section contains the following topics:
Topic Page
Line Currents 31
Ground Current 32
Average Current 34
Current Phase Imbalance 35
Thermal Capacity Level 36
Motor Temperature Sensor 37
Frequency 38
Line-to-Line Voltages 39
Line Voltage Imbalance 40
Average Voltage 41
Power Factor 42
Active Power and Reactive Power 43
Active Power Consumption and Reactive Power Consumption 44
30 1639505EN-05 04/2015
Line Currents
Description
The LTM R controller measures line currents and provides the value of each phase in amperes and as a
percentage of Full Load Current (FLC).
The line currents function returns the rms value in amperes of the phase currents from the 3 CT inputs:
z L1: phase 1 current
The LTM R controller performs true rms calculations for line currents up to the 7th harmonic.
Single-phase current is measured from L1 and L3.
Line Current Characteristics

The line currents function has the following characteristics:
Characteristic Value
Unit A
Accuracy z +/- 1 % for 8 A and 27 A models
z +/- 2 % for 100 A models
Resolution 0.01 A
Refresh interval 100 ms
Line Current Ratio
The L1, L2 and L3 current ratio parameter provides the phase current as a percentage of FLC.
Line Current Ratio Formulas

The line current value for the phase is compared to the FLC parameter setting, where FLC is FLC1 or
FLC2, whichever is active at that time.
Calculated Measurement Formula

Line current ratio 100 x Ln / FLC
Where:
z FLC = FLC1 or FLC2 parameter setting, whichever is active at the time
z Ln = L1, L2, or L3 current value in amperes
Line Current Ratio Characteristics

The line current ratio function has the following characteristics:
Unit % of FLC
Accuracy See Line Current Characteristics, page 31
Resolution 1% FLC
1639505EN-05 04/2015 31
Ground Current
Description
The LTM R controller measures ground currents and provides values in Amperes and as a percentage of
FLCmin.
z The internal ground current (Igr∑) is calculated by the LTM R controller from the 3 line currents
measured by the load current transformers. It reports 0 when the current falls below 10 % of FLCmin.
z The external ground current (Igr) is measured by the external ground current transformer connected to
Z1 and Z2 terminals.
Configurable Parameters
The control channel configuration has the following configurable parameter settings:
Parameter Setting Range Factory Setting

Ground Current Mode z Internal Internal
z External
Ground Current Ratio z None None

z 100:1
z 200:1.5
z 1000:1
z 2000:1
z Other Ratio
Ground CT Primary z 1…65,535 1
Ground CT Secondary z 1…65,535 1
External Ground Current Formula

The external ground current value depends on the parameter settings:

External ground current (Current through Z1-Z2) x (Ground CT Primary) / (Ground CT Secondary)
Ground Current Characteristics

The ground current function has the following characteristics:
Internal Ground Current (IgrΣ) External Ground Current (Igr)
Unit A A
Accuracy
LTM R 08xxx Igr ≥ 0.3 A +/– 10 % The greater of +/– 5 % or +/– 0.01 A
0.2 A ≤ Igr ≤ 0.3 A +/– 15 %
0.1 A ≤ Igr ≤ 0.2 A +/– 20 %
Igr < 0.1 A N/A(1)
LTM R 27xxx Igr ≥ 0.5 A +/– 10 %
0.3 A ≤ Igr ≤ 0.5 A +/– 15 %
0.2 A ≤ Igr ≤ 0.3 A +/– 20 %
Igr < 0.2 A N/A(1)
LTM R 100xxx Igr ≥ 1.0 A +/– 10 %
0.5 A ≤ Igr ≤ 1.0 A +/– 15 %
0.3 A ≤ Igr ≤ 0.5 A +/– 20 %
Igr < 0.3 A N/A(1)
Resolution 0.01 A 0.01 A
Refresh interval 100 ms 100 ms
(1) For currents of this magnitude or lower, the internal ground current function should not be used. Instead, use
external ground current transformers.
32 1639505EN-05 04/2015
Ground Current Ratio

The Ground Current Ratio parameter provides the ground current value as a percentage of FLCmin.
Ground Current Ratio Formulas

The ground current value is compared to FLCmin.

Ground current ratio 100 x ground current / FLCmin
Ground Current Ratio Characteristics

The ground current ratio function has the following characteristics:
Unit 0…2,000 % of FLCmin
Accuracy See Ground Current Characteristics, above
Resolution 0.1 % FLCmin
1639505EN-05 04/2015 33
Average Current
Description
The LTM R controller calculates average current and provides the value for phase in amperes and as a
percentage of FLC.
The average current function returns the rms value of the average current.
Average Current Formulas

The LTM R controller calculates the average current using the measured line currents. The measured
values are internally summed using the following formula:

Average current, three phase motor Iavg = (L1 + L2 + L3) / 3
Average current, single-phase motor Iavg = (L1 + L3) / 2
Average Current Characteristics

The average current function has the following characteristics:
Unit A
Resolution 0.01 A
Average Current Ratio

The Average Current Ratio parameter provides the average current value as a percentage of FLC.
Average Current Ratio Formulas

The average current value for the phase is compared to the FLC parameter setting, where FLC is FLC1 or
FLC2, whichever is active at that time.

Average current ratio 100 x lavg / FLC
Where:
z FLC = FLC1 or FLC2 parameter setting, whichever is active at the time
z lavg = average current value in amperes
Average Current Ratio Characteristics

The average current ratio function has the following characteristics:
Unit % of FLC
Accuracy See Average Current Characteristics, above
Resolution 1 % FLC
34 1639505EN-05 04/2015
Current Phase Imbalance
Description
The current phase imbalance function measures the maximum percentage of deviation between the
average current and the individual phase currents.
Formulas
The current phase imbalance measurement is based on imbalance ratio calculated from the following
formulas:

Imbalance ratio of current in phase 1 (in %) Ii1 = (| L1 - Iavg | x 100) / Iavg
Current imbalance ratio for three phase (in %) Iimb = Max(Ii1, Ii2, Ii3)
Characteristics
The line current imbalance function has the following characteristics:
Unit %
Accuracy z +/- 1.5% for 8 A and 27 A models
z +/- 3% for 100 A models
Resolution 1%
1639505EN-05 04/2015 35
Thermal Capacity Level
Description
The thermal capacity level function uses two thermal models to calculate the amount of thermal capacity
used: one for copper stator and rotor windings of the motor and the other for the iron frame of the motor.
The thermal model with the maximum utilized capacity is reported.
This function also estimates and displays:
z the time remaining before a thermal overload fault is triggered (see Time to Trip, page 55), and
z the time remaining until the fault condition is cleared after a thermal overload fault has been triggered
(see Minimum Wait Time, page 80).
Trip Current Characteristics

The thermal capacity level function uses one of the following selected trip current characteristics (TCCs):
z definite time
z inverse thermal (factory setting)
Thermal Capacity Level Models

Both copper and iron models use the maximum measured phase current and the Motor Trip Class
parameter value to generate a non-scaled thermal image. The reported thermal capacity level is calculated
by scaling the thermal image to FLC.
Thermal Capacity Level Characteristics

The thermal capacity level function has the following characteristics:
Unit %
Accuracy +/– 1 %
Resolution 1%
36 1639505EN-05 04/2015
Motor Temperature Sensor
Description
The motor temperature sensor function displays:
z The resistance value in ohms measured by a PTC or NTC resistance temperature sensor.
z The temperature value in °C or °F measured by a PT100 temperature sensor.
Refer to the product documentation for the specific temperature sensor being used. One of 4 types of
temperature sensors can be used:
z PTC Binary
z PT100
z PTC Analog
z NTC Analog
Characteristics
The motor temperature sensor function has the following characteristics:
Characteristic PT100 Temperature Sensor Other Temperature Sensor

Unit °C or °F, according to the value of the HMI Ω
Display Temperature Sensor Degree CF
parameter
Accuracy +/- 2 % +/– 2 %
Resolution 1 °C or 1 °F 0.1 Ω
1639505EN-05 04/2015 37
Frequency
Description
The frequency function provides the value measured based on the line voltage measurements. If the
frequency is unstable (+/– 2 Hz variations), the value reported is 0 until the frequency stabilizes.
If no LTM E expansion module is present, the frequency value is 0.
Characteristics
The frequency function has the following characteristics:
Unit Hz
Accuracy +/– 2%
Resolution 0.1 Hz
38 1639505EN-05 04/2015
Line-to-Line Voltages
Description
The line-to-line voltages function provides the rms value of the phase-to-phase voltage (V1 to V2, V2 to
V3, and V3 to V1):
z L1-L2 voltage: phase 1 to phase 2 voltage
The expansion module performs true rms calculations for line-to-line voltage up to the 7th harmonic.
Single phase voltage is measured from L1 and L3.
Characteristics
The line-to-line voltages function has the following characteristics:
Unit VAC
Accuracy +/- 1 %
Resolution 1 VAC
1639505EN-05 04/2015 39
Line Voltage Imbalance
Description
The line voltage imbalance function displays the maximum percentage of deviation between the average
voltage and the individual line voltages.
Formulas
The line voltage imbalance calculated measurement is based on the following formulas:

Imbalance ratio of voltage in phase 1 in % Vi1 = 100 x | V1 - Vavg | / Vavg
Voltage imbalance ratio for three phase in % Vimb = Max (Vi1, Vi2, Vi3)
Where:
z V1 = L1-L2 voltage (phase 1 to phase 2 voltage)
z Vavg = average voltage
Characteristics
The line voltage imbalance function has the following characteristics:
Unit %
Accuracy +/– 1.5 %
Resolution 1%
40 1639505EN-05 04/2015
Average Voltage
Description
The LTM R controller calculates average voltage and provides the value in volts. The average voltage
function returns the rms value of the average voltage.
Formulas
The LTM R controller calculates average voltage using the measured line-to-line voltages. The measured
values are internally summed using the following formula:

Average voltage, three phase motor Vavg = (L1-L2 voltage + L2-L3 voltage + L3-L1 voltage) / 3
Average voltage, single-phase motor Vavg = L3-L1 voltage
Characteristics
The average voltage function has the following characteristics:
Unit VAC
Accuracy +/- 1%
Resolution 1 VAC
1639505EN-05 04/2015 41
Power Factor
Description
The power factor function displays the phase displacement between the phase currents and phase
voltages.
Formula
The Power Factor parameter (also called cosine phi or cos ϕ) represents the absolute value of the ratio of
Active Power to Apparent Power.
The following diagram displays an example of the average rms current sinusoidal curve lagging slightly
behind the average rms voltage sinusoidal curve, and the phase angle difference between the 2 curves:
After the phase angle (ϕ) is measured, the power factor can be calculated as the cosine of the phase angle
(ϕ)—the ratio of side a (Active Power) over the hypotenuse h (Apparent Power):
Characteristics
The active power function has the following characteristics:
Accuracy +/- 10 % for cos ϕ ≥ 0.6
Resolution 0.01
Refresh interval 30 ms (typical)(1)
(1) The refresh interval depends on the frequency.
42 1639505EN-05 04/2015
Active Power and Reactive Power
Description
The calculation of the active power and reactive power is based on the:
z average rms phase voltage of L1, L2, L3
z average rms phase current of L1, L2, L3
z power factor
z number of phases
Formulas
Active power, also known as true power, measures average rms power. It is derived from the following
formulas:

Active power for three phase motor √3 x lavg x Vavg x cosϕ
Active power for single-phase motor lavg x Vavg x cosϕ
Where:
z Iavg = Average rms current
z Vavg = Average rms voltage
The reactive power measurement is derived from the following formulas:

Reactive power for three phase motor √3 x lavg x Vavg x sinϕ
Reactive power for single-phase motor lavg x Vavg x sinϕ
Where:
z Iavg = Average rms current
z Vavg = Average rms voltage
Characteristics
The active and reactive power functions have the following characteristics:
Characteristic Active Power Reactive Power

Unit kW kVAR
Accuracy +/- 15 % +/- 15 %
Resolution 0.1 kW 0.1 kVAR
1639505EN-05 04/2015 43
Active Power Consumption and Reactive Power Consumption
Description
The active and reactive power consumption functions display the accumulated total of the active and
reactive electrical power delivered, and used or consumed by the load.
Characteristics
The active and reactive power consumption functions have the following characteristics:
Characteristic Active Power Consumption Reactive Power Consumption

Unit kWh kVARh
Accuracy +/- 15 % +/- 15 %
Resolution 0.1 kWh 0.1 kVARh
44 1639505EN-05 04/2015
Section 2.2
Overview
The LTM R controller and the LTM E expansion module detect faults which affect the LTM R controller
ability to work properly (internal controller check and check of communications, wiring, and configuration
errors).
The system and device monitoring fault records can be accessed via:
z an HMI device

Topic Page
Controller Internal Fault 46
Controller Internal Temperature 47
Control Command Error Diagnostic 48
Wiring Faults 50
Configuration Checksum 52
Communication Loss 53
Time to Trip 55
LTM R Configuration Fault 56
LTM E Configuration Fault and Warning 57
External Fault 58
1639505EN-05 04/2015 45
Controller Internal Fault
Description
The LTM R controller detects and records faults that are internal to the device itself. Internal faults can be
either major or minor. Major and minor faults can change the state of output relays. Cycling power to the
LTM R controller may clear an internal fault.
When an internal fault occurs, the Controller Internal Fault parameter is set.
Major Internal Faults

During a major fault, the LTM R controller is unable to reliably execute its own programming and can only
attempt to shut itself down. During a major fault, communication with the LTM R controller is not possible.
Major internal faults include:
z stack overflow fault
z stack underflow fault
z watchdog time-out
z firmware checksum failure
z CPU failure
z internal temperature fault (at 100 °C / 212 °F)
z RAM test error
Minor Internal Faults

Minor internal faults indicate that the data being provided to the LTM R controller is unreliable and
protection could be compromised. During a minor fault, the LTM R controller continues to attempt to
monitor status and communications, but does not accept any start commands. During a minor fault
condition, the LTM R controller continues to detect and report major faults, but not additional minor faults.
Minor internal faults include:
z internal network communications failure
z EEPROM error
z A/D out of range error
z Reset button stuck
z internal temperature fault (at 85 °C / 185 °F)
z invalid configuration error (conflicting configuration)
z improper logic function action (for example, attempting to write to a read-only parameter)
46 1639505EN-05 04/2015
Controller Internal Temperature
Description
The LTM R controller monitors its Controller Internal Temperature, and reports warning, minor fault, and
major fault conditions. Fault detection cannot be disabled. Warning detection can be enabled or disabled.
The controller retains a record of the highest attained internal temperature.
Characteristics
The Controller Internal Temperature measured values have the following characteristics:
Unit °C
Accuracy +/- 4 °C (+/- 7.2 °F)
Resolution 1 °C (1.8 °F)
Parameters
The Controller Internal Temperature function includes one editable parameter:

Controller internal temperature warning enable z Enable Enable
z Disable
The Controller Internal Temperature function includes the following fixed warning and fault thresholds:
Condition Fixed Threshold Value Sets Parameter

Internal temperature warning 80 °C (176 °F) Controller Internal Temperature Warning
Internal temperature minor fault 85 °C (185 °F) Controller Internal Fault
Internal temperature major fault 100 °C (212 °F)
A warning condition ceases when LTM R Controller Internal Temperature falls below 80 °C (176 °F).
Block Diagram
T Temperature
T > 80 °C (176 °F) Fixed warning threshold
T > 85 °C (185 °F) Fixed minor fault threshold
T > 100 °C (212 °F) Fixed major fault threshold
Maximum Internal Controller Temperature

The Controller Internal Temperature Max parameter contains the highest internal temperature, expressed
in °C, detected by the LTM R controller’s internal temperature sensor. The LTM R controller updates this
value whenever it detects an internal temperature greater than the current value.
The maximum internal temperature value is not cleared when factory settings are restored using the Clear
All Command, or when statistics are reset using a Clear Statistics Command.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 47
Control Command Error Diagnostic
Description
The LTM R controller performs diagnostic tests that detect and monitor the proper functionality of control
commands.
There are 4 control command diagnostic functions:
z Start Command Check
z Run Check Back
z Stop Command Check
z Stop Check Back
Parameter Settings
All 4 diagnostic functions are enabled and disabled as a group. The configurable parameter settings are:
Parameters Setting Range Factory Setting

Diagnostic Fault Enable Yes/No Yes
Diagnostic Warning Enable Yes/No Yes
Start Command Check

The Start Command Check begins after a Start command, and causes the LTM R controller to monitor the
main circuit to ensure that current is flowing.
z The Start Command Check reports a Start Command fault or warning if current is not detected after a
delay of 1 second.
z The Start Command Check conditions ends if the motor is in Run state and the LTM R controller detects
that the current is equal or more than 10% of FLCmin.
Run Check Back

The Run Check Back causes the LTM R controller to continuously monitor the main circuit to ensure
current is flowing.
z The Run Check Back reports a fault or warning if average phase current is not detected for longer than
0.5 seconds without a Stop command.
z The Run Check Back ends when a Stop command executes.
Stop Command Check

The Stop Command Check begins after a Stop command, and causes the LTM R controller to monitor the
main circuit and ensure that no current is flowing.
z The Stop Command Check reports a fault or warning if current is detected after a delay of 1 second.
z The Stop Command Check ends if the LTM R controller detects that the current is equal or less than
5% of FLCmin.
Stop Check Back

The Stop Check Back causes the LTM R controller to continuously monitor the main circuit to ensure that
no current is flowing.
z The Stop Check Back reports a Stop Check Back fault or warning if average phase current is detected
for longer than 0.5 seconds after a Stop command.
z The Stop Check Back condition ends when a Run command executes.
48 1639505EN-05 04/2015
Timing Sequence
The following diagram is an example of the timing sequence for the Start Command Check and Stop
Command Check:
1 Normal operation
2 Fault or warning condition
3 The LTM R controller monitors the main circuit to detect current
4 The LTM R controller monitors the main circuit to detect no current
5 The LTM R controller reports a Start Command Check fault and/or warning if current is not detected after 1 second
6 The LTM R controller reports a Stop Command Check fault and or warning if current is detected after 1 second
The following diagram is an example of the timing sequence for the Run Check Back and Stop Check Back:
1 Normal operation
2 Fault or warning condition
3 After the motor enters the run state, the LTM R controller continuously monitors the main circuit to detect current
until a Stop command is given or the function is disabled
4 The LTM R controller continuously monitors the main circuit to detect no current until a Start command is given or
the function is disabled
5 The LTM R controller reports a Run Check Back fault and/or warning if the current is not detected for longer than
0.5 seconds without a Stop command
6 The LTM R controller reports a Stop Check Back fault or warning if the current is detected for longer than
0.5 seconds without a Start command
7 No current flowing for less than 0.5 seconds
8 Current flowing for less than 0.5 seconds
1639505EN-05 04/2015 49
Wiring Faults
Description
The LTM R controller checks external wiring connections and reports a fault when it detects incorrect or
conflicting external wiring. The LTM R controller can detect 4 wiring errors:
z CT Reversal Error
z Phase Configuration Error
z Motor Temperature Sensor Wiring Errors (short-circuit or open-circuit)
Enabling Fault Detection

Wiring diagnostics are enabled using the following parameters:
Protection Enabling Parameters Setting Range Factory

Setting
CT Reversal Wiring Fault Enable z Yes Yes
z No
Phase Configuration Motor Phases, if set to single-phase z Single-phase three phase

z three phase
Motor Temperature Sensor Motor Temperature Sensor Type, if set to a z None None
Wiring sensor type, and not to None z PTC binary
z PT100
z PTC analog
z NTC analog
CT Reversal Error
When individual external load CTs are used, they must all be installed in the same direction. The LTM R
controller checks the CT wiring and reports an error if it detects one of the current transformers is wired
backwards when compared to the others.
This function can be enabled and disabled.
Phase Configuration Error

The LTM R controller checks all 3 motor phases for On Level current, then checks the Motor Phases
parameter setting. The LTM R controller reports an error if it detects current in phase 2 if the LTM R
controller is configured for single-phase operation.
This function is enabled when the LTM R controller is configured for single-phase operation. It has no
configurable parameters.
Motor Temperature Sensor Errors

When the LTM R controller is configured for motor temperature sensor protection, the LTM R controller
provides short-circuit and open-circuit detection for the temperature sensing element.
The LTM R controller signals an error when calculated resistance at the T1 and T2 terminals:
z falls below the fixed short-circuit detection threshold, or
z exceeds the fixed open-circuit detection threshold.
The fault must be reset according to the configured Reset Mode: manual, automatic, or remote.
Short-circuit and open-circuit detection thresholds have no fault time delay. There are no warnings
associated with the short-circuit and the open-circuit detection.
Short-circuit and open-circuit detection of the motor temperature sensing element is available for all
operating states.
This protection is enabled when a temperature sensor is employed and configured, and cannot be
disabled.
50 1639505EN-05 04/2015
The motor temperature sensor function has the following characteristics:
Unit Ω
Normal operating range 15…6500 W
Accuracy at 15 Ω: +/- 10 %
at 6500 Ω: +/- 5 %
Resolution 0.1 Ω
The fixed thresholds for the open-circuit and short-circuit detection functions are:
Detection Function Fixed Results For PTC Binary, or PT100, or Accuracy

PTC/NTC Analog
threshold 15 Ω +/– 10 %
Short-circuit detection
re-closing 20 Ω +/– 10 %
threshold 6500 Ω +/– 5 %
Open-circuit detection
re-closing 6000 Ω +/– 5 %
1639505EN-05 04/2015 51
Configuration Checksum
Description
The LTM R controller calculates a checksum of parameters based on all configuration registers. The
EEPROM error code (64) is reported.
52 1639505EN-05 04/2015
Communication Loss
Description
The LTM R controller monitors communication through:
z the network port
z the HMI port
Network Port Parameter Settings

The LTM R controller monitors network communication creates both a fault and a warning report when the
network communications are lost.
On LTM R controllers configured with EtherNet/IP or Modbus/TCP communication protocol, the
communication loss is detected if no communication exchanges occurred with the Master IP for a time
period equal to, or longer than, the network port communication loss timeout.
The network port communications have the following configurable settings:

Network port fault enable Enable/Disable Enable
Network port warning enable Enable/Disable Enable
Network port comm loss timeout 0...99.99 s 2s
In increments of 0.01 s
Network port fallback setting(1) z Hold O.1, O.2 off

z Run
z O.1, O.2 off
z O.1, O.2 on
z O.1 off
z O.2 off
Master IP address 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 0.0.0.0
(1) The operating mode affects the configurable parameters for the network port fallback settings.
HMI Port Parameter Settings

The LTM R controller monitors HMI port communications and reports both a warning and a fault if no valid
communication has been received by the HMI port for longer than 7 seconds.
The HMI port communication has the following fixed and configurable settings:

HMI port fault enable Enable/Disable Enable
HMI port warning enable Enable/Disable Enable
HMI port fallback setting (1) z Hold O.1, O.2 off

z Run
z O.1, O.2 off
z O.1, O.2 on
z O.1 off
z O.2 off
(1) The operating mode affects the configurable parameters for the HMI port fallback settings.
Fallback Condition
When the communication between the LTM R controller and either the network or the HMI is lost, the
LTM R controller is in a fallback condition. When the communication recovers, the fallback condition is no
longer applied by the LTM R controller.
The behavior of logic outputs O.1 and O.2 when the LTM R controller is in fallback condition is determined
by:
z The operating mode (see Operating Modes, page 164).
z The Network Port Fallback Setting and HMI Port Fallback Setting parameters.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 53
Fallback setting selection can include:
Port Fallback Setting Description

Hold (O.1, O.2) Directs the LTM R controller to hold the state of logic outputs O.1 and O.2 as of the
time of the communication loss.
Run Directs the LTM R controller to perform a Run command for a 2-step control
sequence on the communication loss.
O.1, O.2 Off Directs the LTM R controller to turn off both logic outputs O.1 and O.2 following a
communication loss.
O.1, O.2 On Directs the LTM R controller to turn on both logic outputs O.1 and O.2 following a
communication loss.
O.1 On Directs the LTM R controller to turn on only logic output O.1 following a
communication loss.
O.2 On Directs the LTM R controller to turn on only logic output O.2 following a
communication loss.
The following table indicates which fallback options are available for each operating mode:
Port Fallback Setting Operating Mode

Overload Independent Reverser 2-step 2-speed Custom
Hold (O.1, O.2) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Run No No No Yes No No
O.1, O.2 Off Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
O.1, O.2 On Yes Yes No No No Yes
O.1 On Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes
O.2 On Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes
NOTE: When you select a network or HMI fallback setting, your selection must identify an active control
source.
54 1639505EN-05 04/2015
Time to Trip
Description
When a thermal overload condition exists, the LTM R controller reports the time to trip before the fault
occurs in the Time To Trip parameter.
When the LTM R controller is not in a thermal overload condition, to avoid the appearance of being in a
fault state, the LTM R controller reports the time to trip as 9999.
If the motor has an auxiliary fan and the Motor Aux Fan Cooled parameter has been set, the cooling period
is 4 times shorter.
Characteristics
The time to trip function has the following characteristics:
Unit s
Accuracy +/– 10 %
Resolution 1s
1639505EN-05 04/2015 55
LTM R Configuration Fault
Description
The LTM R controller checks the Load CT parameters set in configuration mode.
An LTM R configuration fault is detected when the Load CT Primary, Load CT Secondary, and Load CT
Multiple Passes parameters are not consistent, and generates a System and Device Monitoring Fault. The
fault condition is cleared once the parameters are correct. The LTM R controller remains in configuration
mode as long as the parameters are not consistent.
56 1639505EN-05 04/2015
LTM E Configuration Fault and Warning
Description
The LTM R controller checks the presence of the LTM E expansion module. Its absence generates a
System and Device Monitoring Fault.
LTM E Configuration Fault

LTM E configuration fault:
z If LTM E based protection faults are enabled but no LTM E expansion module is present, this will cause
an LTM E configuration fault.
z It does not have any delay setting.
z The fault condition clears when no protection fault requiring an LTM E is enabled, or when the LTM R
has been power-cycled with an appropriate LTM E being present.
LTM E Configuration Warning

LTM E configuration warning:
z If LTM E based protection warnings are enabled but no LTM E expansion module is present, this will
cause an LTM E configuration warning.
z The warning clears when no protection warning requiring an LTM E is enabled, or when the LTM R has
been power-cycled with an appropriate LTM E being present.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 57
External Fault
Description
The LTM R controller has an external fault feature, which detects if an error happened on an external
system linked to it.
An external fault is triggered by setting a bit in the custom logic command register 1 (see table below). This
external fault sets the controller into a fault state based on different parameters in the system.
An external fault can be reset only by clearing the external fault bit in the register.
External Fault Parameter Settings
Parameter Description
Custom logic external fault command The value is written
External system fault Reads Custom logic external fault command parameter
Fault code Number is 16: External fault set by program customized with custom
logic editor
58 1639505EN-05 04/2015
Section 2.3
Fault and Warning Counters
Fault and Warning Counters
Overview
The LTM R controller counts and records the number of faults and warnings that occur. In addition, it
counts the number of auto-reset attempts. This information can be accessed to assist with system
performance and maintenance.
Fault and warning counters can be accessed via:
z an HMI device

Topic Page
Introducing Fault and Warning Counters 60
All Faults Counter 61
All Warnings Counter 62
Auto-Reset Counter 63
Protection Faults and Warnings Counters 64
Control Command Errors Counter 65
Wiring Faults Counter 66
Communication Loss Counters 67
Internal Fault Counters 68
Fault History 69
1639505EN-05 04/2015 59
Introducing Fault and Warning Counters
Detecting Warnings
If a warning detection function is enabled, the LTM R controller detects a warning immediately when the
monitored value rises above, or falls below, a threshold setting.
Detecting Faults
Before the LTM R controller detects a fault, certain preconditions must exist. These conditions can include
z the fault detecting function must be enabled,
z a monitored value (for example, current, voltage, or thermal resistance) must rise above, or fall below,
a threshold setting,
z the monitored value must remain above or below the threshold setting for a specified time duration.
Counters
When a fault occurs, the LTM R controller increments at least 2 counters:
z a counter for the specific fault detecting function, and
z a counter for all faults.
When a warning occurs, the LTM R controller increments a single counter for all warnings. However, when
the LTM R controller detects a thermal overload warning, it also increments the thermal overload warnings
counter.
A counter contains a value from 0 to 65,535 and increments by a value of 1 when a fault, warning, or reset
event occurs. A counter stops incrementing when it reaches a value of 65,535.
When a fault is automatically reset, the LTM R controller increments only the auto-resets counter. Counters
are saved on power loss.
Clearing Counters
All fault and warning counters are reset to 0 by executing the Clear Statistics Command or Clear All
Command.
60 1639505EN-05 04/2015
All Faults Counter
Description
The Faults Count parameter contains the number of faults that have occurred since the Clear All Statistics
Command last executed.
The Faults Count parameter increments by a value of 1 when the LTM R controller detects any fault.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 61
All Warnings Counter
Description
The Warnings Count parameter contains the number of warnings that have occurred since the Clear All
Statistics Command last executed.
The Warnings Count parameter increments by a value of 1 when the LTM R controller detects any warning.
62 1639505EN-05 04/2015
Auto-Reset Counter
Description
The Auto-Reset Count parameter contains the number of times the LTM R controller attempted, but failed,
to auto-reset a fault. This parameter is used for the 3 auto-reset fault groups.
If an auto-reset attempt is successful (defined as the same fault not recurring within 60 s), this counter is
reset to zero. If a fault is reset either manually or remotely, the counter is not incremented.
For information on fault management, see Fault Management and Clear Commands, page 186.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 63
Protection Faults and Warnings Counters
Protection Fault Counts

Protection fault counters include:
z Current Phase Imbalance Faults Count
z Current Phase Loss Faults Count
z Current Phase Reversal Faults Count
z Ground Current Faults Count
z Jam Faults Count
z Long Start Faults Count
z Motor Temp Sensor Faults Count
z Over Power Factor Faults Count
z Overcurrent Faults Count
z Overpower Faults Count
z Overvoltage Faults Count
z Thermal Overload Faults Count
z Under Power Factor Faults Count
z Undercurrent Faults Count
z Underpower Faults Count
z Undervoltage Faults Count
z Voltage Phase Imbalance Faults Count
z Voltage Phase Loss Faults Count
z Voltage Phase Reversal Faults Count
Protection Warning Counts

The Thermal Overload Warnings Count parameter contains the total number of warnings for the thermal
overload protection function.
When any warning occurs, including a thermal overload warning, the LTM R controller increments the
Warnings Count parameter.
64 1639505EN-05 04/2015
Control Command Errors Counter
Description
A Diagnostic Fault occurs when the LTM R controller detects any of the following control command errors:
z Start Command Check errors
z Stop Command Check errors
z Stop Check Back errors
z Run Check Back errors
For information on these control command functions, see Control Command Error Diagnostic, page 48.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 65
Wiring Faults Counter
Description
The Wiring Faults Count parameter contains the total number of the following wiring faults that have
occurred since the Clear Statistics Command last executed:
z Wiring Fault, which is triggered by a:
z CT Reversal Error
z Phase Configuration Error
z Motor Temperature Sensor Wiring Error
z Voltage Phase Reversal Fault

z Current Phase Reversal Fault
The LTM R controller increments the Wiring Faults Count parameter by a value of 1 each time any one of
the above 3 faults occurs. For information on connection errors and related faults, see Wiring Faults,
page 50.
66 1639505EN-05 04/2015
Communication Loss Counters
Description
Faults detected for the following communication functions:
Counter Contains
HMI Port Faults Count The number of times communications via the HMI port was lost.
Network Port Internal Faults Count The number of internal faults experienced by the network module,
reported by the network module to the LTM R controller.
Network Port Config Faults Count The number of major faults experienced by the network module, exclusive
of network module internal faults, reported by the network module to the
LTM R controller.
Network Port Faults Count The number of times communications via the network port was lost.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 67
Internal Fault Counters
Description
Faults detected for the following internal faults:
Counter Contains
Controller Internal Faults Count The number of major and minor internal faults.
For information on internal faults, see Controller Internal Fault, page 46.
Internal Port Faults Count The number of LTM R controller internal communication faults, plus the number
of failed attempts to identify the network communication module.
68 1639505EN-05 04/2015
Fault History
Fault History
The LTM R controller stores a history of LTM R controller data that was recorded at the time of the last 5
detected faults. Fault n-0 contains the most recent fault record, and fault n-4 contains the oldest retained
fault record.
Each fault record includes:
z Fault Code
z Date and Time
z Value of Settings
z Motor Full Load Current Ratio (% of FLCmax)
z Value of Measurements
z Thermal Capacity Level
z Average Current Ratio

z L1, L2, L3 Current Ratio
z Ground Current Ratio
z Full Load Current Max
z Current Phase Imbalance
z Voltage Phase Imbalance
z Power Factor
z Frequency
z Motor Temp Sensor
z Average Voltage
z L3-L1 Voltage, L1-L2 Voltage, L2-L3 Voltage
z Active Power
1639505EN-05 04/2015 69
Section 2.4
Motor History
Motor History
Overview
The LTM R controller tracks and saves motor operating statistics.
Motor statistics can be accessed using:
z an HMI device
z a PLC via the network port.

Topic Page
Motor Starts Counters 71
Motor Starts Per Hour Counter 72
Load Sheddings Counter 73
Auto Restart Counters 74
Motor Last Start Current Ratio 75
Motor Last Start Duration 76
Operating Time 77
70 1639505EN-05 04/2015
Motor Starts Counters
Description
The LTM R controller tracks motor starts and records the data as a statistic that can be retrieved for
operational analysis. The following statistics are tracked:
z Motor Starts Count
z Motor LO1 Closings Count (logic output O.1 starts)
z Motor LO2 Closings Count (logic output O.2 starts)
The Clear Statistics Command resets the Motor Starts Count parameter to 0.
NOTE: The Motor LO1 Closings Count and Motor LO2 Closings Count parameters cannot be reset to 0,
because these parameters together indicate the usage of the relay outputs over time.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 71
Motor Starts Per Hour Counter
Description
The LTM R controller tracks the number of motor starts during the past hour and records this figure in the
Motor Starts Per Hour Count parameter.
The LTM R controller sums start in 5 minute intervals with an accuracy of 1 interval (+0/– 5 minutes), which
means that the parameter will contain the total number of starts within either the previous 60 minutes or
the previous 55 minutes.
This function is used as a maintenance function to avoid thermal strain on the motor.
Characteristics
The motor starts per hour function has the following characteristics:
Accuracy 5 minutes (+ 0/– 5 minutes)
Resolution 5 minutes
72 1639505EN-05 04/2015
Load Sheddings Counter
Description
The Load Sheddings Count parameter contains the number of times the load sheddings protection function
has been activated since the last Clear Statistics Command.
For information on the Load Sheddings protection function, see Load Shedding, page 137.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 73
Auto Restart Counters
Description
There are 3 types of counting statistics:
z Auto restart immediate count
z Auto restart delayed count
z Auto restart manual count
For information on the Auto restart protection function, see Automatic Restart, page 139.
74 1639505EN-05 04/2015
Motor Last Start Current Ratio
Description
The LTM R controller measures the maximum current level reached during the last start of the motor and
reports the value in the Motor Last Start Current Ratio parameter for analysis of the system for
maintenance purposes.
This value may also be used to help configure the long start threshold setting in the long start protection
function.
The value is not stored in the non-volatile memory: it is lost at a power cycle.
Characteristics
The motor last start current ratio function has the following characteristics:
Unit % of FLC
Resolution 1 % FLC
1639505EN-05 04/2015 75
Motor Last Start Duration
Description
The LTM R controller tracks the duration of the last motor start and reports the value in the Motor Last Start
Duration parameter for analysis of the system for maintenance purposes.
This value may also be useful in setting the long start delay timeout used in the long start and definite trip
overload protection functions.
The value is not stored in the non-volatile memory: it is lost at a power cycle.
Characteristics
The motor last start duration function has the following characteristics:
Unit s
Accuracy +/– 1 %
Resolution 1s
Refresh interval 1s
76 1639505EN-05 04/2015
Operating Time
Description
The LTM R controller tracks motor operating time and records the value in the Operating Time parameter.
Use this information to help schedule motor maintenance, such as lubrication, inspection, and
replacement.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 77
Section 2.5
Overview
The LTM R controller monitors the motor operating state and the minimum time to wait to restart the motor.
The Motor states can be accessed via:
z an HMI device

Topic Page
Motor State 79
Minimum Wait Time 80
78 1639505EN-05 04/2015
Motor State
Description
The LTM R controller tracks the motor state and reports the following states by setting the corresponding
boolean parameters:
Motor state Parameter

Run Motor Running
Ready System Ready
Start Motor Starting
1639505EN-05 04/2015 79
Minimum Wait Time
Description
The LTM R controller tracks the time remaining to restart the motor according to one of the following
events:
z automatic reset (see page 191)
z thermal overload (see page 87)
z rapid cycle lockout (see page 103)
z load shedding (see page 137)
z automatic restart (see page 139)
z transition time.
If more than one timer is active, the parameter displays the maximum timer, which is the minimum wait for
the fault response or the control function to reset.
NOTE: Even with an LTM R powered off, time is tracked down for at least 30 mn.
Characteristics
The Minimum Wait Time function has the following characteristics:
Unit s
Accuracy +/– 1 %
Resolution 1s
Refresh interval 1s
80 1639505EN-05 04/2015
Motor Protection Functions
1639505EN-05 04/2015
Chapter 3
Overview
This chapter describes the motor protection functions provided by the LTM R controller.

Section Topic Page
3.1 Motor Protection Functions Introduction 82
3.2 Thermal Motor Protection Functions 86
3.3 Current Motor Protection Functions 105
3.4 Voltage Motor Protection Functions 125
3.5 Power Motor Protection Functions 143
1639505EN-05 04/2015 81
Section 3.1
Motor Protection Functions Introduction
Motor Protection Functions Introduction
Overview
This section introduces you to the motor protection functions provided by the LTM R controller, including
protection parameters and characteristics.

Topic Page
Definitions 83
Motor Protection Characteristics 84
82 1639505EN-05 04/2015
Definitions
Defined Functions and Data

The LTM R controller monitors current, ground-current and motor temperature sensor parameters. When
the LTM R controller is connected to an expansion module, it also monitors voltage and power parameters.
The LTM R controller uses these parameters in protection functions to detect fault and warning
conditions.The LTM R controller’s response to fault and warning conditions is fixed for the predefined
operating modes. Logic output O.4 activates on a fault, and logic output O.3 activates on a warning. For
more information about predefined operating modes, see Operating Modes, page 164.
You can configure these motor protection functions to detect the existence of undesirable operating
conditions that, if not resolved, can cause motor and equipment damage.
All motor protection functions include fault detection, and most protection functions also include warning
detection.
Customized Functions and Data

In addition to using the protection functions and parameters included in a predefined operating mode, you
can use the Custom Logic Editor in the TeSys T DTM to create a new, customized operating mode. To
create a custom operating mode, select any predefined operating mode, then edit its code to meet the
needs of your application.
Using the Custom Logic Editor, you can create a customized operating mode by:
z modifying the LTM R controller’s responses to protection faults or warnings
z adding new functions, based on either predefined or newly created parameters
Faults
A fault is a serious undesirable operating condition. Fault-related parameters can be configured for most
protection functions.
The response of the LTM R controller to a fault include the following:
z output O.4 contacts:
z contact 95-96 is open
z contact 97-98 is closed
z Alarm/MS LED is On
z minor fault if blinking red once per second (EtherNet/IP only)
z minor fault if steady red (Modbus/TCP only)
z major fault if steady red
z fault status bits are set in a fault parameter

z a text message is displayed in an HMI screen (if an HMI is attached)
z a fault status indicator is displayed in the TeSys T DTM, if connected
The LTM R controller counts and records the number of faults for each protection function.
After a fault has occurred, merely resolving the underlying condition does not clear the fault. To clear the
fault, the LTM R controller must be reset. See Fault Management - Introduction, page 187.
Warnings
A warning is a less-serious, though still undesirable, operating condition. A warning indicates corrective
action may be required to prevent a problem condition from occurring. If left unresolved, a warning may
lead to a fault condition. Warning-related parameters can be configured for most protection functions.
The response of the LTM R controller to a warning include the following:
z output O.3 is closed
z Alarm/MS LED flashes (Modbus/TCP only)
z warning status bits are set in a warning parameter
z a text message is displayed in an HMI screen (if attached)
z a warning status indicator is displayed in the TeSys T DTM
NOTE: For some protection functions, warning detection shares the same threshold as fault detection. For
other protection functions, warning detection has a separate warning threshold.
The LTM R controller clears the warning whenever the measured value no longer exceeds the warning
threshold—plus or minus a 5 % hysteresis band.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 83
Motor Protection Characteristics
Operation
The following diagram describes the operation of a typical motor protection function. This diagram, and the
following diagrams, are expressed in terms of current. However, the same principles apply to voltage.
I Measurement of the monitored parameter

Is1 Warning threshold setting
Is2 Fault threshold setting
T Fault timeout setting
Inst Instantaneous warning/fault detection
Settings
Some protection functions include configurable settings, including:
z Fault threshold: A limit setting for the monitored parameter that triggers a protection function fault.
z Warning threshold: A limit setting for the monitored parameter that triggers a protection function
warning.
z Fault timeout: A time delay that must expire before the protection function fault is triggered. The
behavior of a timeout depends on its trip current characteristic profile.
z Trip curve characteristic (TCC): The LTM R controller includes a definite trip characteristic for all
protection functions, except the Thermal Overload Inverse Thermal protection function, which has both
an inverse trip and definite trip curve characteristic, as described below.
Definite TCC: The duration of the fault timeout remains a constant regardless of changes in the value of
the measured quantity (current), as described in the following diagram:
84 1639505EN-05 04/2015
Inverse TCC: The duration of the time delay varies inversely with the value of the measured quantity (here,
thermal capacity). As the measured quantity increases, the potential for harm also increases, thereby
causing the duration of the time delay to decrease, as described in the following diagram:
Hysteresis
To improve stability, motor protection functions apply a hysteresis value that is added to or subtracted from
limit threshold settings before a fault or warning response is reset. The hysteresis value is calculated as a
percentage, typically 5%, of the limit threshold and is
z subtracted from the threshold value for upper limit thresholds,
z added to the threshold value for lower limit thresholds.
The following diagram describes the logic result of measurement processing (Inst) when hysteresis is
applied to an upper limit threshold:
d Hysteresis percentage
1639505EN-05 04/2015 85
Section 3.2
Thermal Motor Protection Functions
Thermal Motor Protection Functions
Overview
This section describes the thermal motor protection functions of the LTM R controller.

Topic Page
Thermal Overload 87
Thermal Overload - Inverse Thermal 88
Thermal Overload - Definite Time 92
Motor Temperature Sensor 94
Motor Temperature Sensor - PTC Binary 95
Motor Temperature Sensor - PT100 97
Motor Temperature Sensor - PTC Analog 99
Motor Temperature Sensor - NTC Analog 101
Rapid Cycle Lockout 103
86 1639505EN-05 04/2015
Thermal Overload
Overview
The LTM R controller can be configured to provide thermal protection, by selecting one of the following
settings:
z Inverse Thermal (see page 88) (factory setting)
z Definite Time (see page 92)
Each setting represents a Trip Curve Characteristic. The LTM R controller stores the selected setting in its
Thermal Overload Mode parameter. Only one setting can be activated at a time. See the topics that
immediately follow, for information on the operation and configuration of each setting.
Parameter Settings
The Thermal Overload function has the following configurable parameter settings, which apply to every trip
current characteristic:

Mode z Inverse thermal Inverse thermal
z Definite time
Fault enable Enable/Disable Enable

Warning enable Enable/Disable Enable
Motor auxiliary fan cooled Enable/Disable Disable
1639505EN-05 04/2015 87
Thermal Overload - Inverse Thermal
Description
When you set the Thermal Overload Mode parameter to Inverse Thermal and select a motor trip class,
the LTM R controller monitors the motor’s utilized thermal capacity and signals
z a warning when utilized thermal capacity exceeds a configured warning threshold,
z a fault when utilized thermal capacity is greater than 100 %.
CAUTION
RISK OF MOTOR OVERHEATING
The Motor Trip Class parameter must be set to the thermal heating characteristics of the motor. Refer to
the motor manufacturer’s instructions before setting this parameter.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.
There is no time delay for the thermal overload warning.

The LTM R controller calculates the Thermal Capacity Level in all operating states. When power to the
LTM R controller is lost, the LTM R controller retains the last measurements of the motor’s thermal state
for a period of 30 minutes, allowing it to estimate the motor’s thermal state when power is re-applied.
Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled.
z The thermal overload warning is cleared by the LTM R controller when the utilized thermal capacity falls
5 % below the warning threshold.
z The thermal overload fault can be reset by the user when the utilized thermal capacity falls below the
fault reset threshold and after the fault reset timeout is elapsed.
Reset for Emergency Restart

You can use the Clear Thermal Capacity Level Command, issued from the PLC or an HMI, to re-start an
overloaded motor in an emergency situation. This command resets the thermal capacity utilization value
to 0 and bypasses the cooling period required by the thermal model before the motor can be restarted.
This command also resets the Rapid Cycle Lockout Timeout to allow an immediate restart without lock.
The Clear All Command does not perform a Clear Thermal Capacity Level.
WARNING
LOSS OF MOTOR PROTECTION
Clearing the thermal capacity level inhibits thermal protection and can cause equipment overheating and
fire. Continued operation with inhibited thermal protection should be limited to applications where
immediate restart is vital.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
The Clear Thermal Capacity Level Command will not reset the fault response. Instead
z Only an action external to the LTM R controller (for example, a reduction in the motor load) can clear
the fault condition,
z Only a reset command, from the valid reset means configured in the Fault Reset Mode parameter, will
reset the fault response.
WARNING
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
A reset command may re-start the motor if the LTM R controller is used in a 2-wire control circuit.
Equipment operation must conform to local and national safety regulations and codes.
88 1639505EN-05 04/2015
Operation
The thermal overload inverse thermal protection function is based on a thermal model of the motor that
combines 2 thermal images:
z a copper-based image representing the thermal state of the stator and rotor windings, and
z an iron-based image representing the thermal state of the motor frame.
Using measured current and the input motor trip class setting, the LTM R controller considers only the
highest thermal state, iron or copper, when calculating thermal capacity utilized by the motor, as described
below:
θ Thermal value
θfe Iron tripping threshold
θcu Copper tripping threshold
t Time
When inverse thermal fault mode is selected, the Thermal Capacity Level parameter, indicating utilized
thermal capacity due to load current, is incremented during both start and run states. When the LTM R
controller detects that the thermal capacity level (θ) exceeds the fault threshold (θ s), it triggers a thermal
overload fault, as described below:
Functional Characteristics
The Thermal Overload inverse thermal functions include the following features:
z 1 motor trip class setting:
z Motor Trip Class
z 4 configurable thresholds:
z Motor Full Load Current Ratio (FLC1)
z Motor High Speed Full Load Current Ratio (FLC2)
z Thermal Overload Warning Threshold
z Thermal Overload Fault Reset Threshold
1639505EN-05 04/2015 89
z 1 time delay:
z Fault Reset Timeout
z 2 function outputs:
z Thermal Overload Warning
z Thermal Overload Fault
z 2 counting statistics:
z Thermal Overload Warnings Count
z 1 setting for an external auxiliary motor cooling fan:

z Motor Aux Fan Cooled
z 1 measure of utilized thermal capacity:

NOTE: For LTM R controllers configured for 2-speed predefined operating mode, 2 fault thresholds are
used: FLC1 and FLC2.
Block Diagram
Imax Maximum current

θmax Thermal capacity level
θs1 Thermal overload warning threshold
Parameter Settings
The thermal overload inverse thermal functions have the following configurable parameter settings:

FLC1, FLC2 z 0.4...8.0 A in increments of 0.08 A for LTMR08 z 0.4 A for LTMR08
z 1.35...27.0 A in increments of 0.27 A for LTMR27 z 1.35 A for LTMR27
z 5...100 A in increments of 1 A for LTMR100 z 5 A for LTMR100
Warning threshold 10...100 % of thermal capacity 85 % of thermal capacity

Motor trip class 5...30 in increments of 5 5
Fault reset timeout 50...999 in 1 s increments 120 s
Fault reset threshold 35...95 % of thermal capacity 75 % of thermal capacity
The thermal overload inverse thermal functions have the following non-configurable parameter settings:
Parameter Fixed Setting

Thermal overload fault threshold 100 % of thermal capacity
90 1639505EN-05 04/2015
Technical Characteristics
The thermal overload inverse thermal functions have the following characteristics:
Characteristics Value
Hysteresis –5 % of thermal overload warning threshold
Trip time accuracy +/– 0.1 s
1639505EN-05 04/2015 91
Thermal Overload - Definite Time
Description
When you set the Thermal Overload Mode parameter to Definite Time, the LTM R controller signals:
z a warning when measured maximum phase current exceeds a configurable threshold (OC1 or OC2).
z a fault when the maximum phase current continuously exceeds the same threshold (OC1 or OC2) for a
set time delay.
The thermal overload definite time fault includes a time delay of constant magnitude, following a start
command, before the protection is active and a fault timeout duration, as described below:
Is Fault and warning threshold (OC1 or OC2)

T1 Start command
T2 Elapsed time delay
There is no time delay for the thermal overload definite time warning.
The definite time protection function is disabled following a start by a delay defined by the Long Start Fault
Timeout setting. The LTM R controller, when configured for overload predefined operating mode, uses the
change in state from off to on level current to begin the Start state. This delay allows the motor to draw
current on startup required to overcome the inertia of the motor at rest.
NOTE: Configuration of this protection function requires configuration of the Long Start protection function,
including the Long Start Fault Timeout parameter.
The thermal overload definite time function includes the following features:
z 2 configurable threshold settings; one setting (OC1) is used for single speed motors, both settings are
required for 2-speed motors:
z OC1(Motor Full Load Current Ratio) or
z OC2 (Motor High Speed Full Load Current Ratio)
z 1 time delay:
z Overcurrent Time (O-Time, set by the Thermal Overload Fault Definite Timeout parameter)
z Thermal Overload Warning
z Thermal Overload Fault
z Thermal Overload Warnings Count
92 1639505EN-05 04/2015
Block Diagram
I1 Phase 1 current
I2 Phase 2 current
I3 Phase 3 current
Is Fault and warning threshold (OC1 or OC2)
T Fault timeout
Parameter Settings
The definite time thermal overload function has the following configurable parameter settings:

Fault threshold: 5...100 % of FLCmax, in 1 % increments. 5 % FLCmax
z Motor full load current ratio (OC1) Note: OC1 and OC2 settings can be set
- or - directly (in Amperes) in the Settings menu
z Motor high speed full load current ratio (OC2) of an HMI, or in the Parameters tab of the
TeSys T DTM.
Thermal overload fault definite timeout (O-time or 1...300 s in 1 s increments 10 s
over-current time)
Thermal overload warning threshold 20...800 % of OC in 1 % increments 80 % of OC
Long start fault timeout(1) (D-time) 1...200 s in 1 s increments 10 s
(1) The definite time thermal overload function requires the simultaneous use of the Long start motor protection
function, both of which employ the Long start fault timeout setting.
The definite time thermal overload function has the following characteristics:
Hysteresis –5 % of warning and fault thresholds
Example
The following diagram describes a definite time thermal overload fault:
OC Fault threshold (OC1 or OC2)
1639505EN-05 04/2015 93
Motor Temperature Sensor
Overview
The LTM R controller has 2 terminals—T1 and T2—that can be connected to a motor temperature sensing
element to provide protection for motor windings by detecting high temperature conditions that could lead
to damage or degradation.
These protections are activated when the Motor Temp Sensor Type parameter is set to one of the following
settings:
z PTC Binary (see page 95)
z PT100 (see page 97)
z PTC Analog (see page 99)
z NTC Analog (see page 101)
Only one of these motor protection sensing elements can be enabled at a time.
NOTE: Motor temperature sensor protection is based in ohms. PTC Binary protection thresholds are pre-
set to IEC standards and are non-configurable. PTC Analog and NTC Analog protection functions may
require that you scale the resistance value to the corresponding threshold level in degrees, based on the
properties of the selected sensing element.
When a sensor type is changed, the LTM R controller’s motor temperature sensing configuration settings
revert to their factory settings. If a sensor type is replaced with another sensor of the same type, the setting
values are retained.
Parameter Settings
The motor temperature sensor function has the following configurable parameter settings, which apply to
the selected motor temp sensor type:

Sensor type z None None
z PTC Binary
z PT100
z PTC Analog
z NTC Analog
Fault enable Enable/Disable Disable
Warning enable Enable/Disable Disable
94 1639505EN-05 04/2015
Motor Temperature Sensor - PTC Binary
Description
The PTC Binary motor temperature sensing function is enabled when the Motor Temp Sensor Type
parameter is set to PTC Binary and the LTM R controller is connected to a binary positive temperature
coefficient thermistor embedded in the motor.
The LTM R controller monitors the state of the temperature sensing element and signals:
z a motor temperature sensor warning when the measured resistance exceeds a fixed threshold.
z a motor temperature sensor fault when the measured resistance exceeds the same fixed threshold.
The fault and warning conditions continue until measured resistance falls below a separate fixed motor
temperature sensor re-closing threshold.
Motor temperature sensing fault thresholds are factory pre-set and are not configurable. Fault monitoring
can be enabled or disabled.
The function is available for all operating states.
The PTC Binary motor temperature sensor function includes the following features:
z 2 function output:
z Motor Temp Sensor Warning
z Motor Temp Sensor Fault
z 1 counting statistic:
Block Diagram
θ Temperature sensing element resistance
Parameter Settings
The PTC binary motor temperature sensor function has the following non-configurable parameter settings:
Parameter Fixed settings Accuracy

Fault/Warning threshold 2900 Ω +/– 2 %
Fault/Warning re-closing threshold 1575 Ω +/– 2 %
The PTC binary motor temperature sensor function has the following characteristics:
Detection time 0.5...0.6 s
Detection time accuracy +/– 0.1 s
1639505EN-05 04/2015 95
Example
The following diagram describes the occurrence of a PTC binary motor temp sensor fault with an automatic
reset:
2900 Ω Fault threshold

1575 Ω Fault re-closing threshold
Reset This marks the time after which a reset can be executed. A start command is required before run state can be
resumed. In this example, auto-reset has been enabled.
96 1639505EN-05 04/2015
Motor Temperature Sensor - PT100
Description
The PT100 motor temperature sensing function is enabled when the Motor Temperature Sensor Type
parameter is set to PT100 and the LTM R controller is connected to a PT100 sensor embedded in the
motor.
z a motor temperature sensor warning when the measured temperature exceeds a configurable warning
threshold.
z a motor temperature sensor fault when the measured temperature exceeds a separately set fault
threshold.
The LTM R directly measures the temperature with a PT100 sensor. The temperature measured by the
PT100 sensor, either in °C (factory setting) or in °F, is displayed on the HMI or the TeSys T DTM, according
to the Motor Temperature Sensor Display Degree CF parameter:
The fault or warning condition continues until the measured temperature falls below 95 % of the fault or
warning threshold.
There is a fixed detection time of 0.5 s to 0.6 s to the motor temperature sensor fault or warning.
NOTE:
The temperature is derived from the following equation: T = 2.6042 * R - 260.42,
where R = resistance (Ω).
NOTE: To connect a 3-wire PT100 sensor to an LTM R controller, simply do not wire the compensation
pin of the 3-wire PT100 sensor.
The PT100 motor temperature sensor function includes the following features:
z Motor Temperature Sensor Warning Threshold Degree
z Motor Temperature Sensor Fault Threshold Degree
z Motor Temperature Sensor Warning
z Motor Temperature Sensor Fault
z Motor Temperature Sensor Faults Count
z 1 display configuration:
z Motor Temperature Sensor Display Degree CF
Block Diagram
θ Temperature measured by the PT100 sensor

θs1 Motor temperature sensor warning threshold
θs2 Motor temperature sensor fault threshold
1639505EN-05 04/2015 97
Parameter Settings
The PT100 motor temperature sensor function has the following configurable parameter settings:

Fault threshold degree 0...200 °C in 1 °C increments 0 °C
Warning threshold degree 0...200 °C in 1 °C increments 0 °C
Motor temperature sensor display °C (0) °C
degree CF °F (1)
The PT100 motor temperature sensor function has the following characteristics:
Hysteresis –5 % of Warning threshold and Fault threshold
Trip time accuracy +/–0.1 s
Example
The following diagram describes a Motor temperature sensor PT100 fault with automatic reset and an
active Run command:
θs2 Fault threshold

θs3 Fault re-closing threshold (95% of fault threshold)
98 1639505EN-05 04/2015
Motor Temperature Sensor - PTC Analog
Description
The PTC Analog motor temperature sensing function is enabled when the Motor Temp Sensor Type
parameter is set to PTC Analog and the LTM R controller is connected to an analog PTC thermistor
embedded in the motor.
z a motor temperature sensor warning when the measured resistance exceeds a configurable warning
threshold.
z a motor temperature sensor fault when the measured resistance exceeds a separately set fault
threshold.
The fault or warning condition continues until the measured resistance falls below 95 % of the fault or
warning threshold.
The PTC Analog motor temperature sensor function includes the following features:
z Motor Temp Sensor Warning Threshold
z Motor Temp Sensor Fault Threshold
Block Diagram

Parameter Settings
The PTC analog motor temperature sensor function has the following configurable parameter settings:

Fault threshold 20...6500 Ω in 0.1 Ω increments 20 Ω
Warning threshold 20...6500 Ω in 0.1 Ω increments 20 Ω
The PTC analog motor temperature sensor function has the following characteristics:
Hysteresis –5 % of Warning threshold and Fault threshold
Detection time accuracy +/–0.1 s
1639505EN-05 04/2015 99
Example
The following diagram describes a Motor temperature sensor PTC analog fault with automatic reset and
an active Run command:
θs2 Fault threshold

θs3 Fault re-closing threshold (95% of fault threshold)
100 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Motor Temperature Sensor - NTC Analog
Description
The NTC Analog motor temperature sensing function is enabled when the Motor Temp Sensor Type
parameter is set to NTC Analog and the LTM R controller is connected to an analog NTC thermistor
embedded in the motor.
z a motor temperature sensor warning when the measured resistance falls below a configurable warning
threshold.
z a motor temperature sensor fault when the measured resistance falls below a separately set fault
threshold.
The fault or warning condition continues until the measured resistance exceeds 105 % of the fault or
warning threshold.
The NTC Analog motor temperature sensor function includes the following features:
z Warning Threshold
z Fault Threshold
Block Diagram

Parameter Settings
The NTC analog motor temperature sensor function has the following configurable parameter settings:

Fault threshold 20...6500 Ω in 0.1 Ω increments 20 Ω
Warning threshold 20...6500 Ω in 0.1 Ω increments 20 Ω
The NTC analog motor temperature sensor function has the following characteristics:
Hysteresis + 5 % of Warning threshold and Fault thresholds
Detection time accuracy +/– 0.1 s
1639505EN-05 04/2015 101

Example
The following diagram describes a Motor temperature sensor NTC analog fault with automatic reset:
θr2 Fault threshold

θr3 Fault re-closing threshold (105% of fault threshold)
102 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Rapid Cycle Lockout
Description
The rapid cycle lockout function prevents potential harm to the motor caused by repetitive, successive
inrush currents resulting from too little time between starts.
The rapid cycle lockout function provides a configurable timer, which begins its count when the LTM R
controller detects On Level Current–defined as 20 % of FLC. At the same time the Rapid Cycle Lockout bit
is set.
If the LTM R controller detects a Run command before the rapid cycle lockout has elapsed, the:
z Rapid Cycle Lockout bit remains set
z LTM R controller ignores the Run command. It prevents the motor from restarting
z HMI device (if attached) displays "WAIT"
z LTM R controller Alarm LED flashes red 5 times per second, indicating the LTM R controller has
disabled motor outputs thereby preventing an undesirable condition caused by starting the motor
z LTM R controller monitors the wait time–if more than 1 timer is active, the LTM R controller reports the
minimum wait time before the longest timer elapses
On power loss, the LTM R controller saves the state of the lockout timer in non-volatile memory. When the
LTM R controller next powers up, the timer restarts its count and again ignores Run commands until the
timer completes the timeout.
Setting the Rapid Cycle Lockout Timeout parameter to 0 disables this function.
The Rapid Cycle Lockout Timeout setting can be edited when the LTM R controller is in its normal
operating state. If an edit is made while the timer is counting, the edit is effective when the timer finishes
counting.
This function has no warning and no fault.
NOTE: The Rapid Cycle Lockout function is not active when the overload operating mode is selected.
The rapid cycle lockout function includes the following parameters:
z 1 time delay:
z Rapid Cycle Lockout Timeout
z 1 status bit:
z Rapid Cycle Lockout
In addition, the Rapid Cycle Lockout function:

z disables motor outputs
z causes the LTM R Alarm LED to flash 5 times per second
Parameter Settings
The rapid cycle lockout function has the following parameters:

Rapid cycle lockout timeout 0...9999 s in increments of 1 s 0s
The rapid cycle lockout function has the following characteristics:
Trip time accuracy +/– 0.1 s or +/– 5%
1639505EN-05 04/2015 103

Example
104 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Section 3.3
Current Motor Protection Functions
Current Motor Protection Functions
Overview
This section describes the current motor protection functions of the LTM R controller.

Topic Page
Current Phase Imbalance 106
Current Phase Loss 109
Current Phase Reversal 111
Long Start 112
Jam 114
Undercurrent 116
Overcurrent 118
Ground Current 120
Internal Ground Current 121
External Ground Current 123
1639505EN-05 04/2015 105

Current Phase Imbalance
Description
The current phase imbalance function signals:
z a warning when the current in any phase differs by more than a set percentage from the average current
in all 3 phases.
z a fault when the current in any phase differs by more than a separately set percentage from the average
current in all 3 phases for a set period of time.
CAUTION
RISK OF MOTOR OVERHEATING
The Current Phase Imbalance Fault Threshold must be properly set to protect the wiring and motor
equipment from harm caused by motor overheating.
z The setting you input must conform to national and local safety regulations and codes.
z Refer to the motor manufacturer’s instructions before setting this parameter.
NOTE: Use this function to detect and guard against smaller current phase imbalances. For larger
imbalances, in excess of 80 % of the average current in all 3 phases, use the current phase loss motor
protection function.
This function has 2 adjustable fault time delays:
z one applies to current imbalances occurring while the motor is in start state, and
z one applies to current imbalances occurring after startup while the motor is in run state
Both timers begin if the imbalance is detected in start state.
The function identifies the phase causing a current imbalance. If the maximum deviation from the 3 phase
current average is the same for 2 phases, the function identifies both phases.
The function applies only to 3-phase motors.
The current phase imbalance function includes the following features:
z 2 thresholds:
z Warning Threshold
z Fault Threshold
z 2 fault time delays:

z Fault Timeout Starting
z Fault Timeout Running
z Current Phase Imbalance Warning
z Current Phase Imbalance Fault
z Current Phase Imbalance Faults Count
z 3 indicators identifying the phase or phases with the highest current imbalance:
z L1 Current Highest Imbalance
106 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Block Diagram
Current phase imbalance warning and fault:
I1 Phase 1 current
I2 Phase 2 current
I3 Phase 3 current
Iimb Current imbalance ratio for 3-phase
Is1 Warning threshold
Is2 Fault threshold
T1 Fault timeout starting
T2 Fault timeout running
Parameter Settings
The current phase imbalance function has the following parameters:

Fault timeout starting 0.2...20 s in 0.1 s increments 0.7 s
Fault timeout running 0.2...20 s in 0.1 s increments 5s
Fault threshold 10...70 % of the calculated imbalance in 1% increments 10 %
Warning threshold 10...70 % of the calculated imbalance in 1% increments 10 %
NOTE: A time of 0.7 second is added to the Fault timeout starting parameter to avoid nuisance tripping
during the start phase.
The current phase imbalance function has the following characteristics:
Hysteresis –5 % of fault or warning threshold
Trip time accuracy +/–0.1 s or +/–5 %
1639505EN-05 04/2015 107

Example
The following diagram describes the detection of a current phase imbalance occurring during run state.
ΔI Percentage difference between current in any phase and the 3 phase current average
Is2 Fault threshold
108 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Current Phase Loss
Description
The current phase loss function signals:
z a warning when the current in any phase differs by more than 80 % from the average current in all 3
phases.
z a fault when the current in any phase differs by more than 80 % from the average current in all 3 phases
for a set period of time.
NOTE: Use this function to detect and guard against large current phase imbalances, in excess of 80 % of
the average current in all 3 phases. For smaller current imbalances, use the current phase imbalance
motor protection function.
This function has a single adjustable fault time delay, which is applied when the motor is in start state or
run state.
The function identifies the phase experiencing a current loss. If the maximum deviation from the 3 phase
current average is the same for 2 phases, the function identifies both phases.
The function applies only to 3-phase motors.
The current phase loss function includes the following features:
z 1 fixed fault and warning threshold equal to 80 % of the 3 phase average current.
z 1 fault time delay:
z Current Phase Loss Timeout
z Current Phase Loss Warning
z Current Phase Loss Fault
z Current Phase Loss Faults Count
z 3 indicators identifying the phase or phases experiencing the current loss:

z L1 Current loss
z L2 Current loss
z L3 Current loss
Block Diagram
I1 Phase 1 current
I2 Phase 2 current
I3 Phase 3 current
Ln Line current number or numbers with the greatest deviation from Iavg
Iavg 3 phase current average
T Fault timeout
1639505EN-05 04/2015 109

Parameter Settings
The current phase loss function has the following configurable parameters:

Timeout 0.1...30 s in 0.1 s increments 3s
NOTE: A time of 0.7 second is added to the Fault timeout parameter to avoid nuisance tripping during the
start phase.
The current phase loss function has the following characteristics:
Hysteresis 75 % of the 3 phase average current
Trip time accuracy +/–0.1 s or +/–5 %
Example
The following diagram describes the occurrence of a current phase loss fault of a motor in run state.
Δ%I Percentage difference between current in any phase and the 3 phase current average
110 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Current Phase Reversal
Description
The current phase reversal function signals a fault when it detects that the current phases of a 3-phase
motor are out of sequence with the Motor Phases Sequence parameter, ABC or ACB.
NOTE: When the LTM R controller is connected to an expansion module, phase reversal protection is
based on voltage phase sequence before the motor starts, and on current phase sequence after the motor
starts.
This function:
z is active when the motor is in start state or run state
z applies only to 3-phase motors
z has no warning and no timer.
This function can be enabled or disabled.
The current phase reversal function adds to one counting statistic, Wiring Faults Count.
Parameter Settings
The current phase reversal function has the following configurable parameters:

Phase sequence z A-B-C A-B-C
z A-C-B
The current phase reversal function has the following characteristics:
Trip time at motor startup within 0.2 s of motor startup
Trip time accuracy +/–0.1 s or +/–5%
1639505EN-05 04/2015 111

Long Start
Description
The long start function detects a locked or stalled rotor in start state and signals a fault when current
continuously exceeds a separately set threshold for the same period of time.
Each predefined operating mode has its own current profile, representing a successful start cycle for the
motor. The LTM R controller detects a long start fault condition whenever the actual current profile,
occurring after a start command, varies from the expected profile.
Fault monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled.
This function has no warning.
Start Cycle
The configurable parameters for the Long Start protection function, Long Start Fault Threshold and Long
Start Fault Timeout, are used by the LTM R controller in defining and detecting the motor’s start cycle. See
Start Cycle, page 161.
The long start function includes the following features:
z 1 threshold:
z Fault Threshold

z Fault Timeout
z Long Start Fault
z Long Start Faults Count
Block Diagram
I1 Phase 1 current
I2 Phase 2 current
I3 Phase 3 current
Is2 Fault threshold
T Fault timeout
Parameter Settings
The long start function has the following parameters:

Fault timeout 1...200 s in 1 s increments 10 s
Fault threshold 100...800 % of FLC 100 % of FLC
The long start function has the following characteristics:
Hysteresis –5 % of Fault threshold
Trip time accuracy +/– 0.1 s or +/– 5 %
112 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Example
The following diagram describes the occurrence of a single threshold cross long start fault:
Is2 Long start fault threshold
1639505EN-05 04/2015 113

Jam
Description
The jam function detects a locked rotor during run state and signals:
z a warning when current in any phase exceeds a set threshold, after the motor has reached run state.
z a fault when current in any phase continuously exceeds a separately set threshold for a specified period
of time, after the motor has reached run state.
The jam function is triggered when the motor is jammed during run state and stops, or is suddenly
overloaded and draws excessive current.
The jam function includes the following features:
z 2 thresholds:
z Warning Threshold
z Fault Threshold

z Fault Timeout
z Jam Warning
z Jam Fault
z Jam Faults Count
Block Diagram
Jam warning and fault:
I1 Phase 1 current
I2 Phase 2 current
I3 Phase 3 current
Is2 Fault threshold
T Fault timeout
Parameter Settings
The jam function has the following parameters:

Fault timeout 1...30 s in 1 s increments 5s
Fault threshold 100...800 % of FLC in 1 % increments 200 % of FLC
Warning threshold 100...800 % of FLC in 1 % increments 200 % of FLC
114 1639505EN-05 04/2015

The jam function has the following characteristics:
Hysteresis –5 % of Fault threshold or Warning threshold
Trip time accuracy +/–0.1 s or +/– 5 %
Example
The following diagram describes the occurrence of a jam fault.
Is2 Jam fault threshold
1639505EN-05 04/2015 115

Undercurrent
Description
The undercurrent function signals:
z a warning when the 3-phase Average Current falls below a set threshold, after the motor has reached
run state.
z a fault when the 3-phase Average Current falls and remains below a separately set threshold for a set
period of time, after the motor has reached run state.
The undercurrent function is triggered when the motor current falls below a defined level for the driven load,
for example, if a drive belt or shaft has broken, allowing the motor to run free rather than under load. This
function has a single fault time delay. Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and
disabled.
The undercurrent function includes the following features:
z 2 thresholds:
z Warning Threshold
z Fault Threshold

z Fault Timeout
z Undercurrent Warning
z Undercurrent Fault
z Undercurrent Faults Count
Block Diagram
Undercurrent warning and fault:
Iavg Average current

Is2 Fault threshold
T Fault timer delay
Parameter Settings
The undercurrent function has the following parameters:

Fault timeout 1...200 s in 1 s increments 1s
116 1639505EN-05 04/2015

The undercurrent function has the following characteristics:
Trip time accuracy +/– 0.1 s or +/- 5 %
Example
The following diagram describes the occurrence of an undercurrent fault.
Is2 Undercurrent fault threshold
1639505EN-05 04/2015 117

Overcurrent
Description
The overcurrent function signals:
z a warning when current in a phase exceeds a set threshold, after the motor has reached run state.
z a fault when current in a phase continuously exceeds a separately set threshold for a set period of time,
after the motor has reached run state.
The overcurrent function can be triggered when the equipment is overloaded or a process condition is
detected causing current to increase beyond the set threshold. This function has a single fault time delay.
The overcurrent function includes the following features:
z 2 thresholds:
z Warning Threshold
z Fault Threshold

z Fault Timeout
z Overcurrent Warning
z Overcurrent Fault
z Overcurrent Faults Count
Block Diagram
I1 Phase 1 current
I2 Phase 2 current
I3 Phase 3 current
Is2 Fault threshold
T Fault timeout
Parameter Settings
The overcurrent function has the following parameters:

118 1639505EN-05 04/2015

The overcurrent function has the following characteristics:
Example
The following diagram describes the occurrence of an overcurrent fault.
Is2 Overcurrent fault threshold
1639505EN-05 04/2015 119

Ground Current
Overview
The LTM R controller can be configured to detect ground current:
z internally, by summing the 3-phase current signals from the secondary of the internal current
transformers (see page 121).
z externally, by measuring the current delivered by the secondary of an external ground fault current
transformer (see page 123).
Use the Ground Current Mode parameter to select either internal or external ground fault protection. Only
one of these ground current mode settings can be activated at a time.
Parameter Settings
The ground current protection function has the following configurable parameter settings, which apply to
both internal and external ground current protection:

Ground current mode z Internal Internal
z External

Ground fault disabled while starting Enable/Disable Enable
120 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Internal Ground Current
Description
The internal ground current function is enabled when the Ground Current Mode parameter is set to Internal
and disabled when set to External.
DANGER
IMPROPER FAULT DETECTION
Internal ground current function will not protect people from harm caused by ground current.
Ground fault thresholds must be set to protect the motor and related equipment.
Ground fault settings must conform to national and local safety regulations and codes.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
The internal ground current function sums the current readings from the secondary of the internal current
transformers and signals:
z a warning when the summed current exceeds a set threshold.
z a fault when the summed current continuously exceeds a separately set threshold for a set period of
time.
The internal ground current function has a single fault time delay.
The internal ground current function can be enabled when the motor is in ready state, start state, or run
state. This function can be configured so that it is disabled during start state, and enabled only during ready
state and run state.
The internal ground current function includes the following features:
z 1 measure of ground current in amperes:
z Ground Current
z 1 measure of ground current as a % of FLCmin:

z 2 thresholds:
z Warning Threshold
z Fault Threshold

z Fault Timeout
z Internal Ground Current Warning
z Internal Ground Current Fault
1639505EN-05 04/2015 121

Block Diagram
I1 Phase 1 current
I2 Phase 2 current
I3 Phase 3 current
IΣ Summed current
IΣs1 Warning threshold
IΣs2 Fault threshold
T Fault timeout
Parameter Settings
The internal ground current function has the following parameters:

Internal ground current fault timeout 0.5...25 s in 0.1 s increments 1s
Internal ground current fault threshold 50...500 % of FLCmin in 1 % 50 % of FLCmin
increments
Internal ground current warning threshold 50...500 % of FLCmin in 1 % 50 % of FLCmin
increments
The internal ground current function has the following characteristics:
Trip time accuracy +/– 0.1 s or +/–5 %
Example
The following diagram describes the occurrence of an internal ground current fault occurring during run
state.
IΣs2 internal ground current fault threshold
122 1639505EN-05 04/2015

External Ground Current
Description
The external ground current function is enabled when:
z the Ground Current Mode parameter is set to External, and
z a current transformation ratio is set.
When Ground Current Mode is set to Internal, the external ground current function is disabled.
DANGER
IMPROPER FAULT DETECTION
External ground current function will not protect people from harm caused by ground current.
Ground fault thresholds must be set to protect the motor and related equipment.
Ground fault settings must conform to national and local safety regulations and codes.
The LTM R controller has 2 terminals—Z1 and Z2—that can be connected to an external ground current
transformer. The external ground current function measures ground current delivered by the secondary of
the external current transformer and signals:
z a warning when the delivered current exceeds a set threshold.
z a fault when the delivered current continuously exceeds a separately set threshold for a set period of
time.
The external ground current function has a single fault time delay.
The external ground current function can be enabled when the motor is in ready state, start state, or run
state. This function can be configured so that it is disabled only during start state, and enabled during ready
state and run state.
The external ground current function includes the following features:
z 1 measure of ground current in amperes:
z Ground Current
z 2 thresholds:
z Warning Threshold
z Fault Threshold

z Fault Timeout
z External Ground Current Warning
z External Ground Current Fault
Block Diagram
Igr Ground current from external ground CT

Igr s1 Warning threshold
Igr s2 Fault threshold
T Fault timeout
1639505EN-05 04/2015 123

Parameter Settings
The external ground current function has the following parameters:

External ground current fault timeout 0.1...25 s in 0.01 s increments 0.5 s
External ground current fault threshold 0.02...20 A in 0.01 A increments 1 A
External ground current warning threshold 0.02...20 A in 0.01 A increments 1 A
The external ground current function has the following characteristics:
Trip time accuracy +/– 0.1 s or +/–5 %
Example
The following diagram describes the occurrence of an external ground current fault occurring during run
state.
Igr s2 External ground current fault threshold
124 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Section 3.4
Voltage Motor Protection Functions
Voltage Motor Protection Functions
Overview
This section describes the voltage motor protection functions provided by the LTM R controller.

Topic Page
Voltage Phase Imbalance 126
Voltage Phase Loss 129
Voltage Phase Reversal 131
Undervoltage 132
Overvoltage 134
Voltage Dip Management 136
Load Shedding 137
Automatic Restart 139
1639505EN-05 04/2015 125

Voltage Phase Imbalance
Description
The voltage phase imbalance function signals:
z a warning when the voltage in any composed phase differs by more than a set percentage from the
average voltage in all 3 phases
z a fault when the voltage in any composed phase differs by more than a separately set percentage from
the average voltage in all 3 phases for a set period of time
NOTE: A composed phase is the combined measure of 2 phases: L1 + L2, L2 + L3, or L3 + L1.
This function:
z is active when the LTM R controller is connected to an expansion module
z is active when the average voltage is between 50 % and 120 % of the nominal voltage
z is available when the motor is in ready state, start state and run state
This function has 2 adjustable fault time delays:

z one applies to voltage imbalances occurring while the motor is in start state, and
z one applies to voltage imbalances occurring while the motor is in run state, or when the long start time
duration expires
Both timers begin if the imbalance is detected in start state.
NOTE: Use this function to detect and guard against smaller voltage phase imbalances. For larger
imbalances, in excess of 40 % of the average voltage in all 3 phases, use the voltage phase loss motor
protection function.
The voltage phase imbalance function includes the following features:
z 2 thresholds:
z Warning Threshold
z Fault Threshold
z 2 fault time delays:

z Fault Timeout Starting
z Fault Timeout Running
z Voltage Phase Imbalance Warning
z Voltage Phase Imbalance Fault
z Voltage Phase Imbalance Faults Count
z 3 indicators identifying the phase with the highest voltage imbalance:

z L1-L2 Highest Imbalance
126 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Block Diagram
V1 L1-L2 voltage
V2 L2-L3 voltage
V3 L3-L1 voltage
Ln Line number or numbers with greatest deviation from Vavg
Vs1 Warning threshold
Vs2 Fault threshold
Vavg 3 phase voltage average
T1 Fault timeout starting
T2 Fault timeout running
Parameter Settings
The voltage phase imbalance function has the following parameters:

Fault timeout starting 0.2...20 s in 0.1 s increments 0.7 s
Fault timeout running 0.2...20 s in 0.1 s increments 2s
Fault threshold 3...15 % of the calculated imbalance in 10 %
1 % increments
Warning threshold 3...15 % of the calculated imbalance in 10 %
1 % increments
The voltage phase imbalance function has the following characteristics:
1639505EN-05 04/2015 127

Example
The following diagram describes the occurrence of a voltage phase imbalance:
V%Δ Percentage difference between voltage in any phase and the 3 phase average voltage
Vs2 Fault threshold
128 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Voltage Phase Loss
Description
The voltage phase loss function is based on the Voltage Phase Imbalance function and signals:
z a warning when the voltage in any phase differs by more than a 38 % from the average voltage in all 3
phases.
z a fault when the voltage in any phase differs by more than 38 % from the average voltage in all 3 phases
for a set period of time.
This function:
z is active when the LTM R controller is connected to an expansion module
z is available when the motor is in ready state, start state or run state
This function has a single adjustable fault time delay.

NOTE: Use this function to detect and guard against large voltage phase imbalances, in excess of 40 %
of the average voltage in all 3 phases. For smaller voltage imbalances, use the voltage phase imbalance
motor protection function.
The function identifies the phase experiencing a voltage loss. If the maximum deviation from the 3 phase
voltage average is the same for 2 phases, the function identifies both phases.
The voltage phase loss function includes the following features:
z A fixed fault and warning threshold equal to 38 % of the 3 phase average voltage.
z A single, adjustable fault time delay:
z Voltage Phase Loss Timeout
z Voltage Phase Loss Warning
z Voltage Phase Loss Fault
z Voltage Phase Loss Faults Count
z 3 indicators identifying the phase experiencing the voltage loss:

z L1-L2 Voltage loss
Block Diagram
V1 L1-L2 voltage
V2 L2-L3 voltage
V3 L3-L1 voltage
Ln Line voltage number or numbers with the greatest deviation from Vavg
Vavg 3 phase average voltage
T Fault timeout
1639505EN-05 04/2015 129

Parameter Settings
The voltage phase loss function has the following configurable parameters:

Fault timeout 0.1...30 s in 0.1 s increments 3s
The voltage phase loss function has the following characteristics:
Hysteresis 45 % of the 3 phase average voltage
Example
The following diagram describes the occurrence of a voltage phase loss fault of a motor in run state:
ΔV% Percentage difference between voltage in any phase and the 3 phase average voltage
130 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Voltage Phase Reversal
Description
The voltage phase reversal function signals a fault when it detects that the voltage phases of a 3-phase
motor are out of sequence, usually indicating a wiring error. Use the Motor Phases Sequence parameter
to configure the direction, ABC or ACB, in which the motor will turn.
This function:
z is available when the LTM R controller is connected to an expansion module
z is available when the motor is in ready state, start state and run state
z has no warning and no timer
This function can be enabled or disabled.
The voltage phase reversal function adds one counting statistic, Wiring Faults Count.
Parameter Settings
The voltage phase reversal function has the following configurable parameters:

Motor phases sequence z A-B-C A-B-C
z A-C-B
The voltage phase reversal function has the following characteristics:
Trip time within 0.2 s
1639505EN-05 04/2015 131

Undervoltage
Description
The undervoltage function signals:
z a warning when voltage in a phase falls below a set threshold.
z a fault when voltage in a phase falls and remains below a separately set threshold for a set period of
time.
This function has a single fault time delay. Both the fault and warning thresholds are defined as a
percentage of the Motor Nominal Voltage (Vnom) parameter setting.
The undervoltage function is available only in ready state and run state, when the LTM R controller is
connected to an expansion module.
The undervoltage function includes the following features:
z 2 thresholds:
z Warning Threshold
z Fault Threshold

z Fault Timeout
z Undervoltage Warning
z Undervoltage Fault
z Undervoltage Faults Count
Block Diagram
V1 L1-L2 voltage
V2 L2-L3 voltage
V3 L3-L1 voltage
Vs2 Fault threshold
T Fault timeout
132 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Parameter Settings
The undervoltage function has the following parameters:

Fault threshold 70...99 % of Motor nominal voltage in 1 % increments 85 %
Warning threshold 70...99 % of Motor nominal voltage in 1 % increments 85 %
The undervoltage function has the following characteristics:
Hysteresis -5 % of Fault threshold or Warning threshold
Example
The following diagram describes the occurrence of a undervoltage fault.
Vs2 Undervoltage fault threshold
1639505EN-05 04/2015 133

Overvoltage
Description
The overvoltage function signals:
z a warning when voltage in a phase exceeds a set threshold.
z a fault when voltage in a phase continuously exceeds a separately set threshold for a specified period
of time.
percentage of the Motor Nominal Voltage (Vnom) parameter setting.
The overvoltage function is available in ready state and run state, when the LTM R controller is connected
to an expansion module.
The overvoltage function includes the following features:
z 2 thresholds:
z Warning Threshold
z Fault Threshold

z Fault Timeout
z Overvoltage Warning
z Overvoltage Fault
z Overvoltage Faults Count
Block Diagram
V1 L1-L2 voltage
V2 L2-L3 voltage
V3 L3-L1 voltage
Vs2 Fault threshold
T Fault timeout
134 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Parameter Settings
The overvoltage function has the following parameters:

Fault threshold 101...115 % of Motor nominal voltage in 1 % increments 110 %
Warning threshold 101...115 % of Motor nominal voltage in 1 % increments 110 %
The overvoltage function has the following characteristics:
Trip time accuracy +/–0.1 s or +/– 5%
Example
The following diagram describes the occurrence of an overvoltage fault.
Vs2 Overvoltage fault threshold
1639505EN-05 04/2015 135

Voltage Dip Management
Overview
When a voltage dip is detected, the LTM R can perform 2 different functions to shed and reconnect
automatically the load:
z Load shedding (see page 137)
z Automatic restart (see page 139)
Selection is done via the Voltage dip mode parameter:
If Voltage dip mode is... Then...

0 nothing happens
1 load shedding function is enabled
2 automatic restart function is enabled
Load Shedding and Automatic Restart functions exclude each other.
136 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Load Shedding
Description
The LTM R controller provides load shedding, which you can use to deactivate non-critical loads if voltage
level is substantially reduced. For example, use load shedding when power is transferred from a main utility
supply to a backup generator system, where the backup generator system can supply power only to a
limited number of critical loads.
The LTM R only monitors load shedding when Load Shedding is selected.
With the load shedding function enabled, the LTM R controller monitors the average phase voltage and:
z reports a load shedding condition and stops the motor when voltage falls below a configurable Voltage
dip threshold and stays below the threshold for the duration of a configurable load shedding timer,
z clears the load shedding condition when voltage rises above a configurable Voltage dip restart threshold
and remains above the threshold for the duration of a configurable Load shedding restart timer.
When the LTM R controller clears the load shedding condition:
z in 2-wire (maintained) configuration, it issues a Run command to re-start the motor,
z in 3-wire (impulse) configuration, it does not automatically re-start the motor.
In Overload motor operating mode, load shedding conditions do not affect O.1 and O.2 operating states.
In Independent motor operating mode, load shedding conditions do not affect O.2 state.
If your application includes another device that externally provides load shedding, the LTM R controller’s
load shedding function should not be enabled.
All voltage dip thresholds and timers can be adjusted when the LTM R controller is in its normal operating
state. When a load shedding timer is counting at the time it is adjusted, the new duration time does not
become effective until the timer expires.
This function is available only when your application includes an LTM E expansion module.
The load shedding function includes the following features:
z 2 thresholds:
z Voltage Dip Threshold
z Voltage Dip Restart Threshold
z 2 time delays:
z Load Shedding Timeout
z Voltage Dip Restart Timeout
z 1 status flag
z Load Shedding
z Load Sheddings Count
In addition, the load shedding function:

z disables logic outputs O.1 and O.2
z causes the alarm LED to flash 5 times per second
Parameter Settings
The load shedding function has the following parameters:

Voltage dip mode 0 = None 0 = None
1 = Load shedding
2 = Auto restart
Load shedding timeout 1...9999 s in increments of 1 s 10 s
Voltage dip threshold 50...115 % of Motor nominal voltage 70 %
Voltage dip restart timeout 1...9999 s in increments of 1 s 2s
Voltage dip restart threshold 65...115 % of Motor nominal voltage 90 %
1639505EN-05 04/2015 137

The load shedding function has the following characteristics:
Timing Sequence
The following diagram is an example of the timing sequence for the load shedding function, for a 2-wire
configuration with automatic restart:
1 Motor running
2 Load shed; motor stopped
3 Load shed cleared; motor auto-restart (2-wire operation)
138 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Automatic Restart
Description
The LTM R controller provides automatic restart.
With the automatic restart function enabled, the LTM R controller monitors the instantaneous phase
voltage and detects voltage dip conditions. The voltage dip detection shares some parameters with the
Load shedding function.
3 restart sequences are managed by the function according to the duration of the voltage dip:
z Immediate restart: the motor restarts automatically.
z Delayed restart: the motor restarts automatically after a timeout.
z Manual restart: the motor restarts manually. A Run command is necessary.
All automatic restart timers can be adjusted when the LTM R controller is in its normal operating state.
When an automatic restart timer is counting at the time it is adjusted, the new duration time does not
become effective until the timer expires.
This function is available only when your application includes an LTM E expansion module.
The automatic restart function includes the following features:
z 3 time delays:
z Auto Restart Immediate Timeout
z Auto Restart Delayed Timeout
z Voltage Dip Restart Timeout
z 5 status flags:
z Voltage Dip Detection: the LTM R is in a dip condition
z Voltage Dip Occurred: a dip has been detected in the last 4.5 seconds
z Auto Restart Immediate Condition
z Auto Restart Delayed Condition
z Auto Restart Manual Condition
z Auto Restart Immediate Count
z Auto Restart Delayed Count
z Auto Restart Manual Count
Parameter Settings
The automatic restart function has the following parameters:

Voltage dip mode 0 = None 0 = None
1 = Load shedding
2 = Auto restart
Voltage dip threshold 50...115 % of Motor nominal voltage 65 %
Voltage dip restart threshold 65...115 % of Motor nominal voltage 90 %
Auto restart immediate timeout 0...0.4 s in increments of 0. 1 s 0.2 s
Auto restart delayed timeout z 0...300 s: timeout setting in 4s
increments of 1 s
z 301 s: timeout infinite
The automatic restart function has the following characteristics:
Timing accuracy +/– 0.1 s or +/– 5%
1639505EN-05 04/2015 139

Automatic Restart Behavior

The automatic restart behavior is characterized by the voltage dip duration, that is the amount of time
passed from the voltage loss until the voltage restoration.
The 2 possible settings are:
z immediate restart timeout,
z delayed restart timeout (with delay defined by Restart Delay Time).
The following diagram shows the automatic restart phases:
If the voltage dip duration is less than the immediate restart timeout and if the voltage dip is the second
one occurring within 1 second, then the motor will require a delayed restart.
When a delayed restart is active (the delay timer is running):
z the timer is paused for the duration of the dip if a voltage dip occurs,
z the delayed restart is canceled if a start or stop command occurs.
Timing Sequence - Immediate Restart

The following diagram is an example of the timing sequence when an immediate restart occurs:
1 Motor running
2 Voltage dip detected, motor stopped
3 Voltage dip cleared, motor automatic restart
140 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Timing Sequence - Delayed Restart

The following diagram is an example of the timing sequence when a delayed restart occurs:
1 Motor running
1639505EN-05 04/2015 141

Timing Sequence - Manual Restart

The following diagram is an example of the timing sequence when a manual restart occurs:
1 Motor running
142 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Section 3.5
Power Motor Protection Functions
Power Motor Protection Functions
Overview
This section describes the power motor protection functions provided by the LTM R controller.

Topic Page
Underpower 144
Overpower 146
Under Power Factor 148
Over Power Factor 150
1639505EN-05 04/2015 143

Underpower
Description
The underpower function signals:
z a warning when the value of active power falls below a set threshold.
z a fault when the value of active power falls and remains below a separately set threshold for a set period
of time.
percentage of the Motor Nominal Power parameter setting (Pnom).
The underpower function is available only in run state, when the LTM R controller is connected to an
expansion module.
The underpower function includes the following features:
z 2 thresholds:
z Underpower Warning Threshold
z Underpower Fault Threshold

z Underpower Fault Timeout
z Underpower Warning
z Underpower Fault
z Underpower Faults Count
Block Diagram
Vavg Average rms voltage

Iavg Average rms current
P Power
Ps1 Warning threshold
Ps2 Fault threshold
T Fault timeout
Parameter Settings
The underpower function has the following parameters:

Fault threshold 20...800 % of Motor nominal power in 1 % increments 20 %
Warning threshold 20...800 % of Motor nominal power in 1 % increments 30 %
144 1639505EN-05 04/2015

The underpower function has the following characteristics:
Accuracy +/– 5%
Example
The following diagram describes the occurrence of an underpower fault.
Ps2 Underpower fault threshold
1639505EN-05 04/2015 145

Overpower
Description
The overpower function signals:
z a warning when the value of active power exceeds a set threshold.
z a fault when the value of active power exceeds a separately set threshold and remains above that
threshold for a set period of time.
percentage of the Motor Nominal Power parameter setting (Pnom).
The overpower function is available only in run state, when the LTM R controller is connected to an
expansion module.
The overpower function includes the following features:
z 2 thresholds:
z Overpower Warning Threshold
z Overpower Fault Threshold

z Overpower Fault Timeout
z Overpower Warning
z Overpower Fault
z Overpower Faults Count
Block Diagram
Vavg Average rms voltage

Iavg Average rms current
P Power
Ps1 Warning threshold
Ps2 Fault threshold
T Fault timeout
Parameter Settings
The overpower function has the following parameters:

Fault threshold 20...800 % of Motor nominal power in 1 % increments 150 %
Warning threshold 20...800 % of Motor nominal power in 1 % increments 150 %
146 1639505EN-05 04/2015

The overpower function has the following characteristics:
Accuracy +/– 5 %
Example
The following diagram describes the occurrence of an overpower fault.
Ps2 Overpower fault threshold
1639505EN-05 04/2015 147

Under Power Factor
Description
The under power factor protection function monitors the value of the power factor and signals:
z a warning when the value of the power factor falls below a set threshold.
z a fault when the value of the power factor falls below a separately set threshold and remains below that
This function has a single fault time delay.
The under power factor protection function is available only in run state, when the LTM R controller is
The under power factor function includes the following features:
z 2 thresholds:
z Under Power Factor Warning Threshold
z Under Power Factor Fault Threshold

z Under Power Factor Fault Timeout
z Under Power Factor Warning
z Under Power Factor Fault
z Under Power Factor Faults Count
Block Diagram
cosϕs1 Under power factor warning threshold

cosϕs2 Under power factor fault threshold
T Under power factor fault timeout
Parameter Settings
The under power factor function has the following parameters:

Fault timeout 1...25 s in 0.1 s increments 10 s
Fault threshold 0...1 x Power factor in 0.01 increments 0.60
Warning threshold 0...1 x Power factor in 0.01 increments 0.60
148 1639505EN-05 04/2015

The under power factor function has the following characteristics:
Accuracy +/–3° or +/– 10 % (for cos ϕ ≥ 0.6)
Example
The following diagram describes the occurrence of an under power factor fault.
cosϕs2 Under power factor fault threshold
1639505EN-05 04/2015 149

Over Power Factor
Description
The over power factor protection function monitors the value of the power factor and signals:
z a warning when the value of the power factor exceeds a set threshold.
z a fault when the value of the power factor exceeds a separately set threshold and remains above that
This function has a single fault time delay.
The over power factor protection function is available only in run state, when the LTM R controller is
The over power factor function includes the following features:
z 2 thresholds:
z Over Power Factor Warning Threshold
z Over Power Factor Fault Threshold

z Over Power Factor Fault Timeout
z Over Power Factor Warning
z Over Power Factor Fault
z Over Power Factor Faults Count
Block Diagram
cosϕs1 Over power factor warning threshold

cosϕs2 Over power factor fault threshold
T Over power factor fault timeout
Parameter Settings
The over power factor function has the following parameters:

Fault timeout 1...25 s in 0.1 s increments 10 s
Fault threshold 0...1 x Power factor in 0.01 increments 0.90
Warning threshold 0...1 x Power factor in 0.01 increments 0.90
150 1639505EN-05 04/2015

The over power factor function has the following characteristics:
Accuracy +/– 3° or +/– 10 % (for cos ϕ ≥ 0.6)
Trip time accuracy +/–0.1 s or +/– 5 %
Example
The following diagram describes the occurrence of an over power factor fault.
cosϕs2 Over power factor fault threshold
1639505EN-05 04/2015 151

152 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Motor Control Functions
1639505EN-05 04/2015
Chapter 4
Overview
The topics in this chapter describe the LTM R controller’s operating states which determine the operating
modes, and the fault reset mode (manual, remote, automatic).
This chapter also introduces custom operating mode, which you can use to customize a predefined control
program.

Section Topic Page
4.1 Control Channels and Operating States 154
4.2 Operating Modes 164
4.3 Fault Management and Clear Commands 186
1639505EN-05 04/2015 153

Section 4.1
Control Channels and Operating States
Control Channels and Operating States
Overview
This section describes:
z how to configure control of the LTM R controller outputs, and
z the LTM R controller’s operating states, including:
z how the LTM R controller transitions between operating states during startup, and
z the motor protection functions provided by the LTM R controller in each operating state
WARNING
The application of this product requires expertise in the design and programming of control systems. Only
persons with such expertise should be allowed to program, install, alter and apply this product. Follow all
local and national safety codes and standards.

Topic Page
Control Channels 155
Operating States 158
Start Cycle 161
154 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Control Channels
Overview
The LTM R can be configured for 1 control channel out of 3:
z Terminal strip: Input devices wired to the input terminals on the front face of the LTM R controller.
z HMI: An HMI device connected to the LTM R controller’s HMI port.
z Network: A network PLC connected to the controller network port.
Control Channel Selection

You can easily select between 2 control channels, assigning one channel to be the local control source
and the second channel to be the remote control source.
The possible channel assignments are:
Control Channel Local Remote

Terminal strip (factory Yes Only with an LTM CU present
setting)
HMI Yes Only with an LTM CU present
Network No Yes
In local control, the control channel selection (Terminal strip or HMI) is determined by setting the Control
local channel setting in the Control setting register.
In remote control, the control channel selection is always Network, unless an LTM CU is present. In this
case, the control channel selection is determined by setting the Control remote channel setting in the
Control setting register.
If an LTM CU is present, the logic input I.6 and the local/remote button on the LTM CU are used together
to select between local and remote control source:
Logic Input I.6 LTM CU Local/Remote Status Active Control Source

Inactive - Local
Active Local Local
Remote (or not present) Remote
NOTE:
z The Network control channel is always considered as 2-wire control, regardless of the operating mode
selected.
z In 3-wire mode, Stop commands can be disabled in the Control setting register.
z In 2-wire mode, Stop commands given by the non-controlling channel shall always be ignored.
z Run commands from a channel other than the selected control channel shall be ignored.
For a predefined operating mode, only one control source may be enabled to direct the outputs. You can
use the custom logic editor to add one or more additional control sources.
Terminal Strip
In Terminal Strip control, the LTM R controller commands its outputs according to the state of its inputs.
This is the control channel factory setting when logic input I.6 is inactive.
The following conditions apply to Terminal Strip control channel:
z Any terminal inputs assigned to start and stop commands control the outputs according to the motor
operating mode.
z HMI and network start commands are ignored.
When using LTM CU, the parameter Stop Terminal Strip Disable is set in the Control Setting register.
HMI
In HMI control, the LTM R controller commands its outputs in response to start and stop commands
received from an HMI device connected to the HMI port.
The following conditions apply to HMI control channel:
z Any HMI start and stop commands control the outputs according to the motor operating mode.
z Network start commands and terminal strip start commands are ignored.
When using LTM CU, the parameter Stop HMI Disable is set in the Control Setting register.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 155

Network
In Network control, a remote PLC sends commands to the LTM R controller through the network
communication port.
The following conditions apply to Network control channel:
z Any network start and stop commands control the outputs according to the motor operating mode.
z The HMI unit can read (but not write) the LTM R controller parameters.
Control Transfer Mode

Select the Control Transfer Mode parameter to enable bumpless transfer when changing the control
channel; clear this parameter to enable bump transfer. The configuration setting for this parameter
determines the behavior of logic outputs O.1 and O.2, as follows:
Control Transfer Mode Setting LTM R Controller Behavior When Changing Control Channel
Bump Logic outputs O.1 and O.2 open (if closed) or remain open (if already open) until
the next valid signal occurs. The motor stops.
Note: In overload predefined operating mode, logic outputs O.1 and O.2 are user-
defined and therefore may not be affected by a Bump transfer.
Bumpless Logic outputs O.1 and O.2 are not affected and remain in their original position
until the next valid signal occurs. The motor does not stop.
When you start the motor in Remote control mode with the PLC, the LTM R controller changes to Local
control mode (I.6=1 to I.6=0) and the status of the motor changes depending on the control transfer mode,
as follows:
If the LTM R controller configuration is... Then the control mode changes from Remote to
Local and the motor…
3-Wire Bumpless keeps running
2-Wire Bumpless keeps running if the logic inputs I.1 or I.2 are activated
3-Wire Bump stops
2-Wire Bump
When the LTM R controller changes from Local to Remote control mode (I.6=0 to I.6=1), the status of the
motor in Local control mode, whether running or stopped, remains unchanged. The control transfer mode
selected does not affect the status of the motor as the LTM R controller only takes account of the last
control command (logic outputs O.1 or O.2) sent by the PLC.
CAUTION
FAILURE TO STOP AND RISK OF UNINTENDED OPERATION
LTM R controller operation cannot be stopped from the terminals when control channel is changed to
Terminal Strip control channel if the LTM R controller is:
z operating in Overload operating mode
- and -
z configured in Bumpless
- and -
z operated over a network using Network control channel
- and -
z operating in Run state
- and -
z configured for 3-wire (impulse) control.
See instructions below.
Whenever control channel is changed to Terminal Strip control channel, operation of the LTM R controller
cannot be stopped from the terminals because no terminal input is assigned to a STOP command.
156 1639505EN-05 04/2015

If this behavior is not intended, the control channel must be changed to either Network control channel or
HMI control channel to command a STOP. To implement this change, take one of the following
precautionary steps:
z the commissioner should configure the LTM R controller for either bump transfer of control channel or
2-wire control.
z the installer should provide the LTM R controller with a means of interrupting current to the contactor
coil - for example, a push button station wired in series with the LTM R controller outputs.
z the controls engineer should assign a terminal input to disable the Run command using Custom
Configuration Mode assignments.
Fallback Transitions
The LTM R controller enters a fallback state when communication with the control source is lost, and exits
the fallback state when communication is restored. The transition into and out of the fallback state is as
follows:
Transition Control Source Transfer

Entering the fallback state Bumpless, when the Control Direct Transition bit is on
Exiting the fallback state Determined by the settings for Control Transfer Mode (bump or bumpless) and Control
Direct Transition (on or off)
For information on how to configure communications fallback parameters, refer to the topic Communication
Loss (see page 53).
When using LTM CU, the parameters Control Transfer Mode and Control Direct Transition parameters are
set in the Control Setting register.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 157

Operating States
Introduction
The LTM R controller responds to the state of the motor and provides control, monitoring and protection
functions appropriate to each of the motor’s operating states. A motor can have many operating states.
Some operating states are persistent while others are transitional.
A motor’s primary operating states are:
Operating State Description

Ready z The motor is stopped.
z The LTM R controller:
z detects no fault
z is not performing load shedding
z is not counting down the rapid cycle timer
z is ready to start
Not Ready z The motor is stopped.

z detects a fault
z is performing load shedding
z is counting down the rapid cycle timer
Start z The motor starts.

z detects that current has reached the On Level Current threshold
z detects that current has not both crossed and re-crossed the long start fault threshold
z continues to count down the long start fault timer.
Run z The motor is running.

z The LTM R controller detects that current has both crossed and re-crossed the long start
fault threshold before the LTM R controller fully counted down the long start fault timer.
158 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Operating State Chart

The operating states of the LTM R controller firmware, as the motor progresses from Off to Run state, are
described below. The LTM R controller verifies current in each operating state. The LTM R controller can
transition to an internal fault condition from any operating state.
Protection Monitoring by Operating States

The motor operating states, and the fault and warning protections provided by the LTM R controller while
the motor is in each operating state (denoted with an X), are described below. It can transition to an internal
fault condition from any operating state.
Protection Category Monitored Fault/Warning Operating States

Sys Config Ready Not Ready Start Run
Diagnostic Run Command Check – X – – –
Stop Command Check – – X X X
Run Check Back – – – X X
Stop Check Back – – – X X
Wiring / configuration errors PTC connection – X X X X
CT Reversal – – – X –
Voltage Phase Loss – X X – –
Phase Configuration – – – X –
X Monitored
– Not monitored
1639505EN-05 04/2015 159

Protection Category Monitored Fault/Warning Operating States

Sys Config Ready Not Ready Start Run
Internal faults Minor X X X X X
Major X X X X X
Motor temp sensor PTC Binary – X X X X
PT100 – X X X X
PTC Analog – X X X X
NTC Analog – X X X X
Thermal overload Definite – – – – X
Inverse Thermal – X X X X
Current Long Start – – – X –
Jam – – – – X
Current Phase Imbalance – – – X X
Current Phase Loss – – – X X
Overcurrent – – – – X
Undercurrent – – – – X
Ground Fault (Internal) – – – X X
Ground Fault (External) – – – X X
Voltage Overvoltage Level – X X – X
Undervoltage Level – X X – X
Voltage Phase Imbalance – – – X X
Power / Power Factor Over Power Factor Level – – – – X
Under Power Factor Level – – – – X
Overpower Level – – – – X
Underpower Level – – – – X
X Monitored
– Not monitored
160 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Start Cycle
Description
The start cycle is the time period allowed for the motor to reach its normal FLC level. The LTM R controller
measures the start cycle in seconds, beginning when it detects On Level Current, defined as maximum
phase current equal to 20 % of FLC.
During the start cycle, the LTM R controller compares:
z detected current against the configurable Long Start Fault Threshold parameter, and
z elapsed start cycle time against the configurable Long Start Fault Timeout parameter.
There are 3 start cycle scenarios, each based on the number of times (0,1 or 2) maximum phase current
crosses the Long Start Fault Threshold. A description of each scenario is described below.
For information on the statistics the LTM R controller retains describing motor starts, see Motor Starts
Counters, page 71. For information about the long start protection function, see Long Start, page 112.
Start Cycle Operating States

During the start cycle, the LTM R controller transitions through the motor’s operating states as follows:
Step Event Operating State

1 LTM R controller receives a start command input signal. Ready
2 The LTM R controller confirms that all startup preconditions exist (e.g. no Ready
faults, load shedding, or rapid cycle timer).
3 The LTM R controller closes the appropriate output contacts designated as Ready
terminals 13-14 or 23-24, thereby closing the control circuit of the motor
starting contactors.
4 The LTM R controller detects that maximum phase current exceeds the On Start
Level Current threshold.
5 The LTM R controller detects that current rises above and then falls below Run
the Long Start Fault Threshold before the Long Start Fault Timeout timer
expires.
2 Threshold Crosses
In this start cycle scenario, the start cycle executes successfully:
z Current rises above, then drops below, the fault threshold.
z The LTM R controller reports the actual start cycle time, i.e. the time elapsed from detection of On Level
Current until the maximum phase current drops below the fault threshold.
Start cycle with 2 threshold crosses, single step:
Is Long start fault threshold
1639505EN-05 04/2015 161

Start cycle with 2 threshold crosses, 2 step:
1 Threshold Cross
In this start cycle scenario, the start cycle fails:
z Current rises above, but fails to drop below, the Long Start Fault Threshold.
z If Long Start protection is enabled, the LTM R controller signals a fault when the Long Start Fault
Timeout is reached
z If Long Start protection is disabled, the LTM R controller does not signal a fault and the run cycle begins
after the Long Start Fault Timeout has expired.
z Other motor protection functions begin their respective duration times after the Long Start Fault
Timeout.
z The LTM R controller reports start cycle time as 9999, indicating that current exceeded and remained
above the fault threshold.
z The LTM R controller reports the maximum current detected during the start cycle.
Start cycle with 1 threshold cross:
0 Threshold Cross
In this start cycle scenario, the start cycle fails:
z Current never rises above the fault threshold.
z If Long Start protection is enabled, the LTM R controller signals a fault when the Long Start Fault
Timeout is reached
z If Long Start protection is disabled, the LTM R controller does not signal a fault and the run cycle begins
after the Long Start Fault Timeout has expired.
162 1639505EN-05 04/2015

z Other motor protection functions begin their respective duration times after the Long Start Fault
Timeout.
z The LTM R controller reports both the start cycle time and the maximum current detected during start
cycle as 0000, indicating current never reached the fault threshold.
Start cycle with 0 threshold cross:
Is Long start fault threshold
1639505EN-05 04/2015 163

Section 4.2
Operating Modes
Operating Modes
Overview
The LTM R controller can be configured to 1 of 10 predefined operating modes. Selecting custom
operating mode allows you to select one of the 10 predefined operating modes and customize it to your
specific application.
The selection of a predefined operating mode determines the behavior of all LTM R controller inputs and
outputs.
Each predefined operating mode selection includes a control wiring selection:
z 2-wire (maintained), or
z 3-wire (impulse)

Topic Page
Control Principles 165
Predefined Operating Modes 166
Control Wiring and Fault Management 168
Overload Operating Mode 169
Independent Operating Mode 171
Reverser Operating Mode 173
Two-Step Operating Mode 176
Two-Speed Operating Mode 181
Custom Operating Mode 185
164 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Control Principles
Overview
The LTM R controller performs control and monitoring functions for single-phase and 3-phase electric
motors.
z These functions are predefined and fit the applications most frequently used. They are ready to use and
are implemented by simple parameter setting after the LTM R controller has been commissioned.
z The predefined control and monitoring functions can be adapted for particular needs using the custom
logic editor in the TeSys T DTM to:
z customize the use of results of protection functions
z change the operation of control and monitoring functions
z alter the predefined LTM R controller I/O logic
Operating Principle
The processing of control and monitoring functions has 3 parts:
z acquisition of input data:
z the output of protection function processing
z external logic data from logic inputs
z telecommunication commands (TCC) received from the control source
z logic processing by the control or monitoring function

z utilization of the processing results:
z activation of logic outputs
z display of predefined messages
z activation of LEDs
z telecommunication signals (TCS) sent via a communications link.
The control and monitoring function process is displayed below:
Logic Inputs and Outputs

The LTM R controller provides 6 logic inputs and 4 logic outputs. By adding an LTM E expansion module,
you can add 4 more logic inputs.
Selecting a predefined operating mode automatically assigns the logic inputs to functions and defines the
relationship between logic inputs and outputs. Using the custom logic editor, you can change these
assignments.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 165

Predefined Operating Modes
Overview
The LTM R controller can be configured in 1 out of 10 predefined operating modes. Each operating mode
is designed to meet the requirements of a common application configuration.
When you select an operating mode, you specify both the:
z operating mode type, which determines the relationship between logic inputs and logic outputs, and
z control circuit type, which determines logic input behavior, based on the control wiring design
Operating Mode Types

There are 10 types of operating modes:
Operating Mode Type Best used for:

Overload (see page 169) All motor starter applications in which the user defines assignment of:
z logic inputs I.1, I.2, I.3 and I.4
z logic outputs O.1 and O.2
z Aux1, Aux2 and Stop commands from the HMI keypad.
The I/O can be defined using a control program managed by the master network
controller in remote control, by an HMI tool, or by using custom logic.
Independent Direct-on-line (across-the-line) full-voltage non-reversing motor starting applications
(see page 171)
Reverser (see page 173) Direct-on-line (across-the-line) full-voltage reversing motor starting applications
Two-Step (see page 176) Reduced voltage starting motor applications, including:
z Wye-Delta
z Open Transition Primary Resistor
z Open Transition Autotransformer
Two-Speed (see page 181) Two-speed motor applications for motor types, including:
z Dahlander (consequent pole)
z Pole Changer
Logic Input Behavior

When you select an operating mode, you also specify that logic inputs are wired for either 2-wire
(maintained) or 3-wire (impulse) control. Your selection determines the valid start and stop commands from
the various control sources, and sets the behavior of the input command following the return of power after
an outage:
Control Circuit Type Behavior of Logic Inputs I.1 and I.2

2-wire (maintained) The LTM R controller, after detecting the rising edge on the input assigned to start the
motor, issues a run command. The run command remains active only while the input is
active. The signal is not latched.
3-wire (impulse) The LTM R controller:
z After detecting the rising edge on the input assigned to start the motor, latch the run
command, and
z After a stop command, disables the run command to disable the output relay wired
in series with the coil of the contactor that turns the motor on or off
z Following a stop, must detect a rising edge on the input to latch the run command.
Control logic assignments for logic inputs I.1, I.2, I.3 and I.4 are described in each of the predefined motor
operating modes.
NOTE: In Network control channel, network commands behave as 2-wire control commands, regardless
of the control circuit type of the selected operating mode. For information on Control Channels, see Control
Channels, page 155.
166 1639505EN-05 04/2015

In each predefined operating mode, logic inputs I.3, I.4, I.5 and I.6 behave as follows:
Logic Input Behavior

I.3 z When it is configured to be used as the external system ready input (Logic Input 3 External
Ready Enable = 1), this input provides a feedback on the system state (Ready or not):
z If I.3 = 0, the external system is not ready. System Ready bit (455.0) is set to 0.
z If I.3 = 1, the external system is ready. System Ready bit (455.0) can be set to 1
depending on other conditions on the system.
z When it is not configured to be used as the external system ready input (Logic Input 3
External Ready Enable = 0), this input is user defined and only sets a bit in a register.
I.4 z In 3-wire (impulse) control: a Stop command. Note that this stop command can be disabled
in terminal strip control by setting the parameter Stop terminal strip disable in the Control
setting register.
z In 2-wire (maintained) control: a user-defined input that can be configured to send
information to a PLC address over the network.
Note: In Overload operating mode, logic input I.4 is not used and can be user-defined.
I.5 A Fault Reset command is recognized when this input receives the rising edge of a signal.
Note: this input must first become inactive, and then receive the rising edge of a subsequent
signal, for another reset to occur.
I.6 Local/Remote control of the LTM R controller’s outputs:
z Active: Remote control (can be associated to any Control channel).
z Inactive: Local control through either the terminal strip or the HMI port, as determined by
the Control Local Channel Setting parameter.
WARNING
LOSS OF MOTOR PROTECTION IN HMI CONTROL
If the terminal strip Stop is disabled, the fault output (terminal NC 95-96) must be wired in series with the
contactor coil.
Logic Output Behavior

The behavior of logic outputs O.1 and O.2 is determined by the selected operating mode. See the topics
that follow for a description of the 10 predefined operating mode types and the behavior of logic outputs
O.1 and O.2.
When the LTM R controller has lost communication with either the network or the HMI, the LTM R
controller enters a fallback condition. When it receives a stop command in a fallback condition, logic
outputs O.1 and O.2 behave as follows:
Control Circuit Type Response of Logic Outputs O.1 and O.2 to a Stop Command
2-wire (maintained) A stop command overrides the fallback condition and turns off logic outputs O.1 and O.2
while the stop command is active. After the stop command is no longer active, logic
outputs O.1 and O.2 return to their programmed fallback state.
3-wire (impulse) A stop command overrides the fallback condition and turns off logic outputs O.1 and
O.2. The outputs remain off after the stop command is removed and do not return to
their programmed fallback state.
For more information about configuring fallback parameters, refer to the Fallback Condition (see page 53)
portion of the topic describing Communication Loss.
In all operating mode types, the following logic outputs behave as described below:
Logic Output Behavior

O.3 Activated by any enabled protection warning:
z Terminals NO 33-34
O.4 Activated by any enabled protection fault:

z Terminals NC 95-96
z Terminals NO 97-98
Note: When control voltage is too low or off:

z NC 95-96 open
z NO 97-98 close
1639505EN-05 04/2015 167

Control Wiring and Fault Management
Overview
When Overload predefined operating mode is selected, the LTM R controller does not manage logic output
O.1, O.2, and O.3.
For all other predefined operating modes (Independent, Reverser, 2-Step, and 2-Speed) the predefined
control logic in the LTM R controller is designed to meet the objectives of many common motor starting
applications. This includes managing motor behavior in response to:
z start and stop actions, and
z fault and reset actions
Because the LTM R controller can be used in special applications, such as fire pumps that require the
motor to run despite a known external fault condition, the predefined control logic is designed so that the
control circuit, and not the predefined control logic, determines how the LTM R controller interrupts current
flow to the contactor coil.
Control Logic Action on Starts and Stops

Predefined control logic acts upon start and stop commands as follows:
z For all 3-wire (impulse) control wiring diagrams, when input 4 is configured as a stop command, the
LTM R controller must detect input current at logic input I.4 in order to act on a start command.
z If logic input I.4 is active and a user start action initiates current at logic inputs I.1 or I.2, the LTM R
controller detects the rising edge of the current and sets an internal (firmware) latch command that
directs the appropriate relay output to close and remain closed until the latch command is disabled.
z A stop action that interrupts current at logic input I.4, causes the LTM R controller to disable the latch
command. Disabling the firmware latch causes the output to open–and remain open–until the next valid
start condition.
z For all 2-wire (maintained) control wiring diagrams, the LTM R controller detects the presence of current
at logic inputs I.1 or I.2 as start commands, and the absence of current disables the start command.
Control Logic Action on Faults and Resets

Predefined control logic manages faults and reset commands as follows:
z Logic output O.4 opens in response to a fault condition.
z Logic output O.4 closes in response to a reset command.
Control Logic and Control Wiring Together Managing Faults

The control circuits, shown in the wiring diagrams in this chapter and in the Appendix, indicate how the
LTM R controller’s control logic and the control circuit combine to stop a motor in response to a fault:
z For 3-wire (impulse) control circuits, the control strategy links the state of logic output O.4 to the state
of the current at logic input I.4:
z Control logic opens logic output O.4 in response to a fault.
z Logic output O.4 opening interrupts current at logic input I.4, disabling the control logic latch
command on logic output O.1.
z Logic output O.1 opens, due to control logic described above, and stops the flow of current to the
contactor coil.
In order to restart the motor, the fault must be reset and a new start command must be issued.
z For 2-wire (maintained) control circuits, the control strategy links the state of logic output O.4 directly
with the logic inputs I.1 or I.2.
z Control logic opens logic output O.4 in response to a fault.
z Logic output O.4 opening interrupts current to the logic inputs I.1 or I.2
z Control logic disables the start commands opening logic outputs O.1 or O.2.
In order to restart the motor, the fault must be reset and the state of Start/Stop operators determines the
state of logic inputs I.1 or I.2.
The control circuits needed to run a motor, during a motor protection fault, are not shown in the wiring
diagrams that follow. However, the control strategy is to not link the state of logic output O.4 to the state of
the input commands. In this way, fault conditions may be annunciated, while control logic continues to
manage Start and Stop commands.
168 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Overload Operating Mode
Description
Use Overload operating mode when motor load monitoring is required and motor load control (start/stop)
is performed by a mechanism other than the LTM R controller.
The Overload operating mode includes the following features:
z The LTM R controller overload operating mode does not manage logic outputs O.1, O.2, and O.3. The
logic output O.1 and O.2 commands are accessible in Network control channel.
z Logic output O.4 opens in response to a diagnostic error.
NOTE: In Overload operating mode, diagnostic error is disabled by default. If needed, it can be enabled
by the user.
z The LTM R controller sets a bit in a status word when it detects an active signal:
z on logic inputs I.1, I.2, I.3, or I.4, or
z from the Aux 1, Aux 2, or Stop buttons on the HMI keypad.
NOTE: When a bit is set in the input status word, it can be read by a PLC which can write a bit to the LTM R
controller’s command word. When the LTM R controller detects a bit in its command word, it can turn on
the respective output (or outputs).
Overload Application Diagram

The following wiring diagram represents a simplified example of the LTM R controller in a 3-wire (impulse)
terminal strip control overload application.
For additional examples of overload operating mode IEC diagrams, refer to relevant diagrams Overload
Mode Wiring Diagrams, page 495.
For examples of overload operating mode NEMA diagrams, refer to relevant diagrams Overload Mode
Wiring Diagrams, page 514.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 169

I/O Assignment
Overload operating mode provides the following logic inputs:
Logic Inputs Assignment

I.1 Free
I.2 Free
I.3 Free
I.4 Free
I.5 Reset
I.6 Local (0) or Remote (1)
Overload operating mode provides the following logic outputs:
Logic Outputs Assignment

O.1 (13 and 14) Responds to network control commands
O.2 (23 and 24) Responds to network control commands
O.3 (33 and 34) Warning signal
O.4 (95, 96, 97, and 98) Fault signal
Overload operating mode uses the following HMI keys:
HMI Keys Assignment

Aux 1 Free
Aux 2 Free
Stop Free
Parameters
Overload operating mode requires no associated parameter settings.
170 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Independent Operating Mode
Description
Use Independent operating mode in single direct-on-line (across-the-line) full-voltage, non-reversing motor
starting applications.
This function includes the following features:
z Accessible in 3 control channels: Terminal Strip, HMI, and Network.
z The LTM R controller does not manage the relationship between logic outputs O.1 and O.2.
z In terminal strip control channel, logic input I.1 controls logic output O.1, and logic input I.2 controls logic
output O.2.
z In network or HMI control channels, the Motor Run Forward Command parameter controls logic output
O.1 and the Logic Output 23 Command parameter controls logic output O.2.
z Logic input I.3 is not used in the control circuit, but can be configured to set a bit in memory.
z Logic outputs O.1 and O.2 deactivate (and the motor stops) when control voltage becomes too low.
z Logic outputs O.1 and O.4 deactivate (and the motor stops) in response to a diagnostic error.
NOTE: See Control Wiring and Fault Management, page 168 for information about the interaction between
z the LTM R controller’s predefined control logic, and
z the control wiring, an example of which appears in the following diagram.
Independent Application Diagram

terminal strip control independent application.
For additional examples of independent operating mode IEC diagrams, refer to relevant diagrams
Independent Mode Wiring Diagrams, page 499.
For examples of independent operating mode NEMA diagrams, refer to relevant diagrams Independent
1639505EN-05 04/2015 171

I/O Assignment
Independent operating mode provides the following logic inputs:
Logic Inputs 2-Wire (Maintained) Assignment 3-Wire (Impulse) Assignment

I.1 Start/Stop motor Start motor
I.2 Open/Close O.2 Close O.2
I.3 Free Free
I.4 Free Stop motor and open O.1 and O.2
I.5 Reset Reset
I.6 Local (0) or Remote (1) Local (0) or Remote (1)
Independent operating mode provides the following logic outputs:

O.1 (13 and 14) KM1 contactor control
O.2 (23 and 24) Controlled by I.2
Independent operating mode uses the following HMI keys:
HMI Keys 2-Wire (Maintained) Assignment 3-Wire (Impulse) Assignment

Aux 1 Control motor Start motor
Aux 2 Control O.2 Close O.2
Stop Stop motor and open O.2 while pressed Stop motor and open O.2
Timing Sequence
The following diagram is an example of the timing sequence for the Independent operating mode that
shows the inputs and outputs for a 3-wire (impulse) configuration:
1 Normal operation
2 Start command ignored: stop command active
Parameters
Independent operating mode requires no associated parameters.
172 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Reverser Operating Mode
Description
Use Reverser operating mode in direct-on-line (across-the-line) full-voltage, reversing motor starting
applications.
z Firmware interlocking prevents simultaneous activation of the O.1 (forward) and O.2 (reverse) logic
outputs: in case of simultaneous forward and reverse commands, only the logic output O.1 (forward) is
activated.
z The LTM R controller can change direction from forward to reverse and reverse to forward in 1 of 2
modes:
z Standard Transition mode: The Control Direct Transition bit is Off. This mode requires a Stop
command followed by count-down of the adjustable Motor Transition Timeout (anti-backspin) timer.
z Direct Transition mode: The Control Direct Transition bit is On. This mode automatically transitions
after the count-down of the adjustable Motor Transition Timeout (anti-backspin) timer.
output O.2.
z In Network or HMI control channels, the Motor Run Forward Command parameter controls logic output
O.1 and the Motor Run Reverse Command controls logic output O.2.
z Logic outputs O.1, O.2 and O.4 deactivate (and the motor stops) in response to a diagnostic error.
NOTE: See Control Wiring and Fault Management, page 168 for information about the interaction between
z the control wiring, an example of which appears in the following diagram.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 173

Reverser Application Diagram

terminal strip control reverser application.
Start FW Start forward

Start RV Start reverse
1 The N.C. interlock contacts KM1 and KM2 are not mandatory because the LTM R controller firmware interlocks O.1
and O.2.
For additional examples of reverser operating mode IEC diagrams, refer to relevant diagrams Reverser
For examples of reverser operating mode NEMA diagrams, refer to relevant diagrams Reverser Mode
Wiring Diagrams, page 520.
I/O Assignment
Reverser operating mode provides the following logic inputs:

I.1 Forward run Start motor forward
I.2 Reverse run Start motor reverse
I.3 Free Free
I.4 Free Stop motor
I.5 Reset Reset
Reverser operating mode provides the following logic outputs:

O.1 (13 and 14) KM1 contactor control Forward
O.2 (23 and 24) KM2 contactor control Reverse
174 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Reverser operating mode uses the following HMI keys:

Aux 1 Forward run Start motor forward
Aux 2 Reverse run Start motor reverse
Stop Stop while pressed Stop
Timing Sequence
The following diagram is an example of the timing sequence for the Reverser operating mode that shows
the inputs and outputs for a 3-wire (impulse) configuration when the control direct transition bit is On:
1 Normal operation with stop command

2 Normal operation without stop command
3 Forward run command ignored: transition timer active
4 Forward run command ignored: stop command active
Parameters
Reverser operating mode has the following parameters:

Motor transition timeout 0…999.9 s 0.1 s
Control direct transition On/Off Off
1639505EN-05 04/2015 175

Two-Step Operating Mode
Description
Use Two-Step operating mode in reduced voltage starting motor applications such as:
z Wye-Delta
z Two-Step operation settings include:
z A Motor Step 1 To 2 Timeout that starts when current reaches 10% of FLC min.
z A Motor Step 1 To 2 Threshold setting.
z A Motor Transition Timeout setting that starts upon the earlier of the following events: expiration of
the Motor Step 1 To 2 Timeout, or current falling below the Motor Step 1 To 2 Threshold.
z Firmware interlocking prevents simultaneous activation of O.1 (step 1) and O.2 (step 2) logic outputs.
z In terminal strip control channel, logic input I.1 controls logic outputs O.1 and O.2.
z In Network or HMI control channels, the Motor Run Forward Command parameter controls logic outputs
O.1 and O.2. The Motor Run Reverse Command parameter is ignored.
z Logic outputs O.1 and O.2 deactivate, and the motor stops, when control voltage becomes too low.
z Logic outputs O.1, O.2 and O.4 deactivate, and the motor stops, in response to a diagnostic error.
NOTE: See Control Wiring and Fault Management, page 168 for information about the interaction
between:
z the control wiring, an example of which appears in the following diagrams.
176 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Two-Step Wye-Delta Application Diagram

The following wiring diagram represents a simplified example of the LTM R controller in a two-step 3-wire
(impulse) terminal strip control wye-delta application.
1 The N.C. interlock contacts KM1 and KM3 are not mandatory because the LTM R controller electronically interlocks
O.1 and O.2.
For additional examples of two-step Wye-Delta IEC diagrams, refer to relevant diagrams Two-Step Wye-
Delta Mode Wiring Diagrams, page 503.
For examples of two-step Wye-Delta NEMA diagrams, refer to relevant diagrams Two-Step Wye-Delta
1639505EN-05 04/2015 177

Two-Step Primary Resistor Application Diagram

(impulse) terminal strip control primary resistance application.
For additional examples of two-step primary resistor IEC diagrams, refer to relevant diagrams Two-Step
Primary Resistor Mode Wiring Diagrams, page 505.
For examples of two-step primary resistor NEMA diagrams, refer to relevant diagrams Two-Step Primary
Resistor Mode Wiring Diagrams, page 524.
178 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Two-Step Autotransformer Application Diagram

(impulse) terminal strip control autotransformer application.
1 The N.C. interlock contacts KM1 and KM3 are not mandatory because the LTM R controller electronically interlocks
O.1 and O.2.
For additional examples of two-step autotransformer IEC diagrams, refer to relevant diagrams Two-Step
Autotransformer Mode Wiring Diagrams, page 507.
For examples of two-step autotransformer NEMA diagrams, refer to relevant diagrams Two-Step
Autotransformer Mode Wiring Diagrams, page 526.
I/O assignment
Two-step operating mode provides the following logic inputs:

I.1 Control motor Start motor
I.2 Free Free
I.3 Free Free
I.4 Free Stop motor
I.5 Reset Reset
1639505EN-05 04/2015 179

Two-step operating mode provides the following logic outputs:

O.1 (13 and 14) Step 1 contactor control
O.2 (23 and 24) Step 2 contactor control
Two-step operating mode uses the following HMI keys:

Aux 1 Control motor Start motor
Aux 2 Free Free
Stop Stop motor while pressed Stop motor
Timing Sequence
The following diagram is an example of the timing sequence for the Two-Step operating mode that shows
the inputs and outputs for a 3-wire (impulse) configuration:
1 Normal operation
2 Step 1 start
3 Step 2 start
4 Start command ignored: Stop command active
5 Current falling below the Motor Step 1 To 2 Threshold ignored: preceded by expiration of the Motor Step 1 To 2
Timeout.
Parameters
Two-step operating mode has the following parameters:

Motor step 1 to 2 timeout 0.1…999.9 s 5s
Motor transition timeout 0…999.9 s 100 ms
Motor step 1 to 2 threshold 20-800 % FLC in 1 % increments 150 % FLC
180 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Two-Speed Operating Mode
Description
Use Two-Speed operating mode in two-speed motor applications for motor types such as:
z Pole Changer
z Firmware interlocking prevents simultaneous activation of O.1 (low speed) and O.2 (high speed) logic
outputs.
z 2 measures of FLC:
z FLC1 (Motor Full Load Current Ratio) at low speed
z FLC2 (Motor High Speed Full Load Current Ratio) at high speed
z The LTM R controller can change speed in 2 scenarios:

z The Control Direct Transition bit is Off: requires a Stop command followed by expiration of the Motor
Transition Timeout.
z The Control Direct Transition bit is On: automatically transitions from high speed to low speed after
a time-out of the adjustable Motor Transition Timeout.
output O.2.
z In Network or HMI control channels, when the Motor Run Forward Command parameter is set to 1 and:
z Motor Low Speed Command is set to 1, logic output O.1 is enabled.
z Motor Low Speed Command is set to 0, logic output O.2 is enabled.
z Logic outputs O.1, O.2 and O.4 deactivate (and the motor stops) in response to a diagnostic error.
NOTE: See Control Wiring and Fault Management, page 168 for information about the interaction
between:
z the control wiring, an example of which appears in the following diagrams
1639505EN-05 04/2015 181

Two-Speed Dahlander Application Diagram

The following wiring diagram represents a simplified example of the LTM R controller in a two-speed 3-wire
(impulse) terminal strip control Dahlander consequent pole application.
LS Low speed
HS High speed
1 A Dahlander application requires 2 sets of wires passing through the CT windows. The LTM R controller can also
be placed upstream of the contactors. If this is the case, and if the Dahlander motor is used in variable torque mode,
all the wires downstream of the contactors must be the same size.
and O.2.
For additional examples of two-speed Dahlander IEC diagrams, refer to relevant diagrams Two-Speed
Dahlander Mode Wiring Diagrams, page 509.
For examples of two-speed Dahlander NEMA diagrams, refer to relevant diagrams Two-Speed Mode
Wiring Diagrams: Single Winding (Consequent Pole), page 528.
182 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Two-Speed Pole-Changing Application Diagram

The following wiring diagram represents a simplified example of the LTM R controller in a two-speed 3-wire
(impulse) terminal strip control pole-changing application.
LS Low speed
HS High speed
1 A pole-changing application requires 2 sets of wires passing through the CT windows. The LTM R controller can
also be placed upstream of the contactors. If this is the case, all the wires downstream of the contactors must be
the same size.
and O.2.
For additional examples of pole-changing IEC diagrams, refer to relevant diagrams Two-Speed Pole
Changing Mode Wiring Diagrams, page 511.
For examples of pole-changing NEMA diagrams, refer to relevant diagrams Two-Speed Mode Wiring
Diagrams: Separate Winding, page 530.
I/O Assignment
Two-Speed operating mode provides the following logic inputs:

I.1 Low speed command Low speed start
I.2 High speed command High speed start
I.3 Free Free
I.4 Free Stop
I.5 Reset Reset
1639505EN-05 04/2015 183

Two-Speed operating mode provides the following logic outputs:
Logic outputs Assignment

O.1 (13 and 14) Low speed control
O.2 (23 and 24) High speed control
Two-speed operating mode uses the following HMI keys:

Aux 1 Low speed control Low speed start
Aux 2 High speed control High speed start
Stop Stop the motor Stop the motor
Timing Sequence
The following diagram is an example of the timing sequence for the two-speed operating mode that shows
the inputs and outputs for a 3-wire (impulse) configuration when the Control Direct Transition bit is On:
1 Normal operation with stop command

2 Normal operation without stop command
3 Low-speed start command ignored: motor transition timeout active
4 Low-speed start command ignored: stop command active
Parameters
The following table lists the parameters associated with the Two-Speed operating mode.

Motor transition timeout (high speed to low speed) 0…999.9 s 100 ms
Control direct transition On/Off Off
NOTE: The low speed to high speed timer is fixed at 100 ms.
184 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Custom Operating Mode
Overview
The predefined control and monitoring functions can be adapted for particular needs using the custom logic
editor in the TeSys T DTM to:
z customize the use of results of protection functions
z change the operation of control and monitoring functions
z alter the predefined LTM R controller I/O logic.
Possible Functions with Custom Logic

With custom logic, it is possible to customize the motor operating mode to:
z control the motor through two channels at the same time
z enable/disable protection functions or change the protection level
z customize external detected faults: circuit breaker detected fault, wrong drawer position
z create a commissioning or testing mode and activate all outputs without motor current
z switch to local or remote based on a bit activated by network
z limit the number of starts per hour
z use TeSys T for motors over 1000 A, and return correct calculation of power
Configuration Files
The configuration of the LTM R controller consists of 2 files:
z a configuration file that contains parameter configuration settings
z a logic file that contains a series of logic commands that manage LTM R controller behavior, including:
z motor start and stop commands
z motor transitions between steps, speeds and directions
z the valid control source and transitions between control sources
z fault and warning logic for relay outputs 1 and 2, and the HMI
z terminal strip reset functions
z PLC and HMI communication loss and fallback
z load shed
z rapid cycle
z starting and stopping LTM R controller diagnostics.
When a predefined operating mode is selected, the LTM R controller applies a predefined logic file that
permanently resides in the LTM R controller.
When custom operating mode is selected, the LTM R controller uses a customized logic file created in the
custom logic editor and downloaded to the LTM R controller from the TeSys T DTM.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 185

Section 4.3
Fault Management and Clear Commands
Fault Management and Clear Commands
Overview
This section describes how the LTM R controller manages the fault handling process, and explains:
z how to select a fault reset mode, and
z controller behavior for each fault reset mode selection.

Topic Page
Fault Management - Introduction 187
Manual Reset 189
Automatic Reset 191
Remote Reset 194
Fault and Warning Codes 196
LTM R Controller Clear Commands 198
186 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Fault Management - Introduction
Overview
When the LTM R controller detects a fault condition and activates the appropriate response, the fault
becomes latched. Once a fault becomes latched, it remains latched, even if the underlying fault condition
is eliminated, until cleared by a reset command.
The setting of the Fault Reset Mode parameter determines how the LTM R controller manages faults. The
fault reset mode selections, listed below, are described in the topics that follow:
z Manual (see page 189) (Factory setting)
z Automatic (see page 191)
z Remote (see page 194)
The fault reset mode cannot be changed while a fault remains active. All faults must be reset before the
fault reset mode can be changed.
Fault Reset Methods

A Reset command can be issued using any of the following means:
z cycling power
z reset button on the LTM R controller
z reset button on the HMI keypad
z reset command from the HMI engineering tool
z logic input I.5
z a network command
z automatic reset
WARNING
RISK OF UNINTENDED OPERATION
When the LTM R controller is operating in 2-wire control with an active Run command, a Reset command
will immediately restart the motor.
Fault Specific Reset Behaviors

The LTM R controller’s response to faults depends on the nature of the fault that has occurred and how
the related protection function is configured. For example:
z Thermal faults can be reset after the Fault Reset Timeout counts down and the utilized thermal capacity
falls below the Fault Reset Threshold level.
z If the fault includes a reset timeout setting, the timeout must fully count down before a reset command
executes.
z Internal device faults can be reset only by cycling power.
z LTM R controller memory does not retain diagnostic and wiring faults after a power loss, but does retain
all other faults after a power loss.
z Internal, diagnostic, and wiring faults cannot be automatically reset.
z All wiring and diagnostic faults can be manually reset by local reset methods.
z For diagnostic faults, network reset commands are valid only in remote (network) control channel.
z For wiring faults, network reset commands are not valid in any control channel.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 187

Fault Characteristics
The LTM R controller fault monitoring functions save the status of communications monitoring and motor
protection faults on a power loss so that these faults must be acknowledged and reset as part of an overall
motor maintenance strategy.
Protection Category Monitored Fault LTM R Controller LTM R with LTM E Saved On Power
Loss
Diagnostic Run Command Check X X –
Stop Command Check X X –
Run Check Back X X –
Stop Check Back X X –
Wiring / configuration PTC connection X X –
errors
CT Reversal X X –
Voltage Phase Reversal – X –
Current Phase Reversal X X –
Voltage Phase Loss – X –
Phase Configuration X X –
Internal Stack Overflow X X –
Watchdog X X –
ROM Checksum X X –
EEROM X X –
CPU X X –
Internal Temperature X X –
Motor temp sensor PTC Binary X X X
PT100 X X X
PTC Analog X X X
NTC Analog X X X
Thermal overload Definite X X X
Inverse Thermal X X X
Current Long Start X X X
Jam X X X
Current Phase X X X
Imbalance
Current Phase Loss X X X
Overcurrent X X X
Undercurrent X X X
Internal Ground Current X X X
External Ground Current X X X
Voltage Overvoltage – X X
Undervoltage – X X
Voltage Phase – X X
Imbalance
Power Underpower – X X
Overpower – X X
Under Power Factor – X X
Over Power Factor – X X
Communication loss PLC to LTM R X X X
HMI to LTM R X X X
X Monitored
– Not monitored
188 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Manual Reset
Introduction
When the Fault Reset Mode parameter is set to Manual, the LTM R controller allows resets–usually
performed by a person–via a power cycle of the control power or by using a local reset means, including:
z Terminal Strip (logic input I.5)
z Reset button on the LTM R controller
z Reset commands from the HMI
A manual reset provides on-site personnel the opportunity to inspect the equipment and wiring before
performing the reset.
NOTE: A manual reset blocks all reset commands from the LTM R controller’s network port—even when
the Control Channel is set to Network.
Manual Reset Methods

The LTM R controller provides the following manual reset methods:
Protection Category Monitored Fault Control Channel

Terminal Strip HMI Network(1)
Diagnostic Run Command Check RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5
Stop Command Check RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5
Run Check Back RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5
Stop Check Back RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5
Wiring / configuration errors PTC connection RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5
CT Reversal RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5
Voltage Phase Reversal RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5
Current Phase Reversal RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5
Voltage Phase Loss RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5
Phase Configuration RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5
Internal Stack Overflow PC PC PC
Watchdog PC PC PC
ROM Checksum PC PC PC
EEROM PC PC PC
CPU PC PC PC
Internal Temperature PC PC PC
Motor temp sensor PTC Binary RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5
PT100 RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5
PTC Analog RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5
NTC Analog RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5
Thermal overload Definite RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5
Inverse Thermal RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5
Current Long Start RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5
Jam RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5
Current Phase Imbalance RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5
Current Phase Loss RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5
Undercurrent RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5
Overcurrent RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5
External Ground Current RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5
Internal Ground Current RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5
RB Test/Reset button on the LTM R controller front face or an HMI
PC Power cycle on the LTM R controller
I.5 Set I.5 logic input on the LTM R controller
(1) Remote network reset commands are not allowed even when the LTM R controller is configured for network control
channel.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 189


Terminal Strip HMI Network(1)
Voltage Undervoltage RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5
Overvoltage RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5
Voltage Phase Imbalance RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5
Power Underpower RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5
Overpower RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5
Under Power Factor RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5
Over Power Factor RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5
Communication loss PLC to LTM R RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5
LTM E to LTM R RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5
RB Test/Reset button on the LTM R controller front face or an HMI
(1) Remote network reset commands are not allowed even when the LTM R controller is configured for network control
channel.
190 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Automatic Reset
Introduction
Setting the Fault Reset Mode parameter to Automatic lets you:
z configure the LTM R controller to attempt to reset motor protection and communications faults without
the intervention of either a human operator or the remote PLC, for example:
z for a non-networked LTM R controller installed at a location that is physically remote, or locally hard
to access
z configure fault handling for each protection fault group in a manner that is appropriate to the faults in
that group:
z set a different timeout delay
z permit a different number of reset attempts
z disable automatic fault resetting
The Fault Reset Mode parameter selection determines the available reset methods.
Each protection fault is included in 1 of 3 auto-reset fault groups, based on the characteristics of that fault,
as described below. Each fault group has 2 configurable parameters:
z a timeout: the Auto-Reset Group (number 1, 2, or 3) Timeout parameter, and
z a maximum number of permissible fault resets: the Auto-Reset Attempts Group (number 1, 2, or 3)
Setting parameter
WARNING
An auto-reset command may restart the motor if the LTM R controller is used in a 2-wire control circuit.
Equipment operation must conform to local and national safety regulations and codes.
Reset Behavior
After power is cycled, the LTM R controller clears and sets to 0 the values of the following parameters:
z Auto-Reset Group (number 1, 2, or 3) Timeout and
z Auto Reset Group (number 1, 2, or 3) Setting.
On a successful reset, the Number of Resets count is cleared and set to 0. A reset is successful if, after
reset, the motor runs for 1 minute without a fault of a type in the designated group.
If the maximum number of automatic resets has been reached and if the last reset has failed, the reset
mode turns to Manual. When the motor restarts, the automatic mode parameters are set to 0.
Emergency Restart
Use the Clear Thermal Capacity Level Command, in applications where it is necessary, to clear the
Thermal Capacity Level parameter following a Thermal Overload inverse thermal fault. This command
permits an emergency restart before the motor has actually cooled.
WARNING
LOSS OF MOTOR PROTECTION
Clearing the thermal capacity level inhibits thermal protection and can cause equipment overheating and
fire. Continued operation with inhibited thermal protection must be limited to applications where
immediate restart is vital.
Number of Resets
Each protection group can be set to manual, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5.
Select "0" to disable automatic reset of protection fault groups—and require a manual reset—even though
the Fault Reset Mode parameter is configured for automatic reset.
Select "5" to enable unlimited auto-reset attempts. After the time delay has expired the LTM R controller
continually attempts to reset every fault in that reset group.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 191

Auto-Reset Group 1 (AU-G1)

Group 1 faults require a predefined cooling time after the monitored parameter returns to and falls below
a predefined threshold. Group 1 faults include Thermal Overload and Motor Temp Sensor faults. The
cooling time delay is non-configurable. However, you can:
z add to the cooling time delay by setting the Auto-Reset Group 1 Timeout parameter to a value greater
than 0, or
z disable auto-reset by setting the Auto-Reset Group 1 Timeout parameter to 0
Auto-reset group 1 has the following configurable parameters:

Auto-Reset Attempts Group 1 Setting 0 = manual, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 = unlimited number of 5
reset attempts
Auto-Reset Group 1 Timeout 0...65,535 s 480 s

Group 2 faults generally do not include a predefined cooling time delay before a reset can be executed,
but can be reset as soon as the fault condition clears. Many group 2 faults can result in some motor
overheating, depending upon the severity and duration of the fault condition, which in turn depends upon
the protection function configuration.
You can add a cooling time delay, if appropriate, by setting the Auto-Reset Group 2 Timeout parameter to
a value greater than 0. You may also want to limit the number of reset attempts to prevent premature wear
or failure of the equipment.

reset attempts
Auto-Reset Group 2 Timeout 0...65,535 s 1,200 s

Group 3 faults often apply to equipment monitoring and generally do not require a motor cooling period.
These faults can be used to detect equipment conditions–for example, an undercurrent fault that detects
the loss of a belt, or an overpower fault that detects an increased loading condition in a mixer. You may
want to configure group 3 faults in a way that differs significantly from groups 1 or 2, for example by setting
the number of resets to 0, thereby requiring a manual reset after the equipment failure has been discovered
and corrected.

reset attempts
Auto-Reset Group 3 Timeout 0...65,535 s 60 s
Auto-Reset Methods
The LTM R controller allows the following auto-reset methods:
z RB - Test / Reset button on the LTM R or the HMI
z PC - Power cycle on the LTM R controller
z I.5 - Set I.5 logic input on the LTM R
z NC - Network command
z Automatic with conditions configured for the protection function group (where AU-GX = AU-G1, AU-G2,
or AU-G3)
192 1639505EN-05 04/2015

The table below lists the possible auto-reset methods for each monitored fault:

Terminal Strip HMI Network
Diagnostic Run Command Check RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5, NC
Stop Command Check RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5, NC
Run Check Back RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5, NC
Stop Check Back RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5, NC
Wiring / configuration PTC connection RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5
errors
CT Reversal RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5
Voltage Phase Reversal RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5
Current Phase Reversal RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5
Voltage Phase Loss RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5
Phase Configuration RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5 RB, PC, I.5, NC
Watchdog PC PC PC
EEROM PC PC PC
CPU PC PC PC
Motor temp sensor PTC Binary AU-G1 AU-G1 AU-G1
PT100 AU-G1 AU-G1 AU-G1
PTC Analog AU-G1 AU-G1 AU-G1
NTC Analog AU-G1 AU-G1 AU-G1
Thermal overload Definite AU-G1 AU-G1 AU-G1
Inverse Thermal AU-G1 AU-G1 AU-G1
Current Long Start RB, I.5, AU-G2 RB, I.5, AU-G2 RB, I.5, NC, AU-G2
Jam RB, I.5, AU-G2 RB, I.5, AU-G2 RB, I.5, NC, AU-G2
Current Phase RB, I.5, AU-G2 RB, I.5, AU-G2 RB, I.5, NC, AU-G2
Imbalance
Current Phase Loss RB, I.5 RB, I.5 RB, I.5, NC
Undercurrent RB, I.5, AU-G3 RB, I.5, AU-G3 RB, I.5, NC, AU-G3
Overcurrent RB, I.5, AU-G3 RB, I.5, AU-G3 RB, I.5, NC, AU-G3
External Ground Current RB, I.5, AU-G2 RB, I.5, AU-G2 RB, I.5, NC, AU-G2
Internal Ground Current RB, I.5, AU-G2 RB, I.5, AU-G2 RB, I.5, NC, AU-G2
Voltage Undervoltage RB, I.5, AU-G2 RB, I.5, AU-G2 RB, I.5, NC, AU-G2
Overvoltage RB, I.5, AU-G2 RB, I.5, AU-G2 RB, I.5, NC, AU-G2
Voltage Phase RB, I.5, AU-G2 RB, I.5, AU-G2 RB, I.5, NC, AU-G2
Imbalance
Power Underpower RB, I.5, AU-G3 RB, I.5, AU-G3 RB, I.5, NC, AU-G3
Overpower RB, I.5, AU-G3 RB, I.5, AU-G3 RB, I.5, NC, AU-G3
Under Power Factor RB, I.5, AU-G2 RB, I.5, AU-G2 RB, I.5, NC, AU-G2
Over Power Factor RB, I.5, AU-G2 RB, I.5, AU-G2 RB, I.5, NC, AU-G2
Communication Loss PLC to LTM R RB, I.5, AU-G3 RB, I.5, AU-G3 RB, I.5, NC, AU-G3
LTM E to LTM R RB, I.5, AU-G3 RB, I.5, AU-G3 RB, I.5, NC, AU-G3
1639505EN-05 04/2015 193

Remote Reset
Introduction
Setting the Fault Reset Mode parameter to Remote adds resetting faults from the PLC over the LTM R
network port. This provides centralized monitoring and control of equipment installations. The Control
channel parameter selection determines the available reset methods.
Both manual reset methods and remote reset methods reset a fault.
Remote Reset Methods

The LTM R controller provides the following remote reset methods:
Protection Monitored Fault Control Channel

Category Terminal Strip HMI Network
Diagnostic Run Command Check RB, PC, I.5, NC RB, PC, I.5, NC RB, PC, I.5, NC
Stop Command Check RB, PC, I.5, NC RB, PC, I.5, NC RB, PC, I.5, NC
Run Check Back RB, PC, I.5, NC RB, PC, I.5, NC RB, PC, I.5, NC
Stop Check Back RB, PC, I.5, NC RB, PC, I.5, NC RB, PC, I.5, NC
Wiring / PTC connection RB, PC, I.5, NC RB, PC, I.5, NC RB, PC, I.5, NC
configuration CT Reversal RB, PC, I.5, NC RB, PC, I.5, NC RB, PC, I.5, NC
errors
Voltage Phase Reversal RB, PC, I.5, NC RB, PC, I.5, NC RB, PC, I.5, NC
Current Phase Reversal RB, PC, I.5, NC RB, PC, I.5, NC RB, PC, I.5, NC
Voltage Phase Loss RB, PC, I.5, NC RB, PC, I.5, NC RB, PC, I.5, NC
Phase Configuration RB, PC, I.5, NC RB, PC, I.5, NC RB, PC, I.5, NC
Watchdog PC PC PC
EEROM PC PC PC
CPU PC PC PC
Motor temp PTC Binary RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC
sensor PT100 RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC
PTC Analog RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC
NTC Analog RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC
Thermal Definite RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC
overload
Inverse Thermal RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC
Current Long Start RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC
Jam RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC
Current Phase Imbalance RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC
Current Phase Loss RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC
Undercurrent RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC
Overcurrent RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC
External Ground Current RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC
Internal Ground Current RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC
Voltage Undervoltage RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC
Overvoltage RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC
Voltage Phase Imbalance RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC
RB Test/Reset button on the LTM R controller front face or the HMI
NC Network command
194 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Protection Monitored Fault Control Channel

Category Terminal Strip HMI Network
Power Underpower RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC
Overpower RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC
Under Power Factor RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC
Over Power Factor RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC
Communication PLC to LTM R RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC
Loss
LTM E to LTM R RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC RB, I.5, NC
RB Test/Reset button on the LTM R controller front face or the HMI
NC Network command
1639505EN-05 04/2015 195

Fault and Warning Codes
Fault Codes
Each detected fault is identified by a numerical fault code.
Fault code Description

0 No error
3 Ground current
4 Thermal overload
5 Long start
6 Jam
7 Current phase imbalance
8 Undercurrent
10 Test
11 HMI port error
12 HMI port communication loss
13 Network port internal error
16 External fault
18 On-Off diagnostic
19 Wiring diagnostic
20 Overcurrent
21 Current phase loss
22 Current phase reversal
23 Motor temp sensor
24 Voltage phase imbalance
25 Voltage phase loss
26 Voltage phase reversal
27 Undervoltage
28 Overvoltage
29 Underpower
30 Overpower
31 Under power factor
32 Over power factor
33 LTME configuration
34 Temperature sensor short-circuit
35 Temperature sensor open-circuit
36 CT reversal
37 Out of boundary CT ratio
46 Start check
47 Run checkback
48 Stop check
49 Stop checkback
51 Controller internal temperature error
55 Controller internal error (Stack overflow)
56 Controller internal error (RAM error)
57 Controller internal error (RAM checksum error)
58 Controller internal error (Hardware watchdog fault)
60 L2 current detected in single-phase mode
64 Non volatile memory error
65 Expansion module communication error
66 Stuck reset button
67 Logic function error
196 1639505EN-05 04/2015


100-104 Network port internal error
109 Network port comm error
111 Faulty device replacement fault
555 Network port configuration error
Warning Codes
Each detected warning is identified by a numerical warning code.
Warning code Description

0 No warning
3 Ground current
4 Thermal overload
5 Long start
6 Jam
8 Undercurrent
10 HMI port
11 LTM R internal temperature
18 Diagnostic
19 Wiring
20 Overcurrent
27 Undervoltage
28 Overvoltage
29 Underpower
30 Overpower
33 LTM E configuration
46 Start check
47 Run checkback
48 Stop check
49 Stop checkback
109 Network port comm loss
555 Network port configuration
1639505EN-05 04/2015 197

LTM R Controller Clear Commands
Overview
Clear commands allow the user to clear specific categories of LTM R controller parameters:
z Clear all parameters
z Clear the statistics
z Clear the thermal capacity level
z Clear the controller settings
z Clear the network port settings
The Clear commands can be executed from:

z an HMI device
Clear All Command

If you want to change the configuration of the LTM R controller, you may want to clear all existing
parameters in order to set new parameters for the controller.
The Clear All Command forces the controller to enter configuration mode. A power-cycle is performed to
restart correctly in this mode. This enables the controller to pick up the new values for the cleared
parameters.
When you clear all parameters, static characteristics are also lost. Only the following parameters are not
cleared after a Clear All Command:
z Motor LO1 Closings Count
z Controller Internal Temperature Max
Clear Statistics Command

Statistics parameters are cleared without the LTM R controller being forced into configuration mode. Static
characteristics are preserved.
The following parameters are not cleared after a Clear Statistics Command:
Clear Thermal Capacity Level Command

The Clear Thermal Capacity Level Command clears the following parameters:
Thermal memory parameters are cleared without the controller being forced into configuration mode. Static
NOTE: This bit is writable at any time, even when the motor is running.
For more information about the Clear Thermal Capacity Level Command, see Reset for Emergency
Restart (see page 88).
Clear Controller Settings Command

The Clear Controller Settings Command restores the LTM R controller protection factory settings (timeouts
and thresholds).
The following settings are not cleared by this command:
z Controller characteristics
z Connections (CT, temperature sensor, and I/O settings)
z Operating mode
Controller setting parameters are cleared without the controller being forced into configuration mode. Static
198 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Clear Network Port Settings Command

The Clear Network Port Settings Command restores the LTM R controller network port factory settings
(address, and so on).
Network port settings are cleared without the controller being forced into configuration mode. Static
characteristics are preserved. Only the network communication becomes ineffective.
After the IP addressing parameters are cleared, power must be cycled to the LTM R controller for it to
obtain new IP addressing parameters (see page 312).
1639505EN-05 04/2015 199

200 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Installation
1639505EN-05 04/2015
Chapter 5
Installation
Installation
Overview
This chapter describes the physical installation and assembly of the LTM R controller and the LTM E
expansion module. It also explains how to connect and wire the controller terminal block, including
communication port wiring in both an enclosure or a switchboard.
DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH
z Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on it.
z Apply appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE) and follow safe electrical work practices.
WARNING
z The application of this product requires expertise in the design and programming of control systems.
Only persons with such expertise should be allowed to program and apply this product.
z Follow all local and national safety codes and standards.
z Follow all electromagnetic compatibility rules described in this manual.
z Follow all installation and wiring rules described in this manual.

Section Topic Page
5.1 Installation 202
5.2 Wiring of the Ethernet Network 235
1639505EN-05 04/2015 201

Installation
Section 5.1
Installation
Installation
Overview
This section describes the installation procedures and wiring principles of the LTM R controller and the
LTM E expansion module.

Topic Page
General Principles 203
Dimensions 204
Assembly 206
Mounting 208
Wiring - Generalities 212
Wiring - Current Transformers (CTs) 216
Wiring - Ground Fault Current Transformers 220
Wiring - Temperature Sensors 222
Wiring - Power Supply 223
Wiring - Logic Inputs 225
Wiring - Logic Outputs 228
Connecting to an HMI Device 230
202 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Installation
General Principles
Functional Safety Introduction

The TeSys T motor management system is a part of a global architecture. To provide the functional safety,
some risks must be analyzed such as:
z global functional risks,
z risk of hardware and software breakdown,
z electromagnetic environmental risks.
To reduce the electromagnetic environment risks, installation rules and wiring must be respected.
For more information on EMC, refer to the Electrical Installation Guide chapter ElectroMagnetic
Compatibility (Wiki version available in English only on www.electrical-installation.org).
Installation Rules
Installation rules that must be respected to enable the LTM R to operate correctly include:
z installation rules for the components:
z association of the LTM R controller with the LTM E expansion module
z installation in a switchboard such as Okken, Blokset, or another type
z LTM R controller wiring rules (see page 212):

z wiring of the power supply
z wiring of the I/Os: logic input wiring and logic output wiring
z communication network wiring rules (see page 235)
Installation Rules in a Switchboard

The installation of the LTM R controller in the withdrawable drawer of a switchboard presents constraints
specific to the type of switchboard:
z For installation of the LTM R controller in an Okken switchboard, see the Okken Communications
Cabling & Wiring Guide (available on request).
z For installation of the LTM R controller in a Blokset switchboard, see the Blokset Communications
Cabling & Wiring Guide (available on request).
z For installation of the LTM R controller in other types of switchboard, follow the specific EMC
instructions described in this manual and refer to the relative instructions specific to your type of
switchboard.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 203

Installation
Dimensions
Overview
This section presents the dimensions of the LTM R controller and the LTM E expansion module, as well
as the dimensions of the clearance zone around the controller and the expansion module. Dimensions are
given in both millimeters and inches and apply to all LTM R and LTM E models.
LTM R Controller Dimensions
NOTE: The height of the controller may increase when using alternate wiring terminals.
LTM E Expansion Module Dimensions
204 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Installation
Clearance Zone Dimensions

For EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility), it is recommended to mount a contactor at a distance of more
than 5 cm (1.97 in) from the LTM R controller and LTM E expansion module.
The maximum rated ambient temperature of the controller depends on the clearance zone dimensions.
They are shown in the table below.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 205

Installation
Assembly
Overview
This section describes how to assemble the LTM R controller and the LTM E expansion module in a
switchboard.
Connecting the LTM R Controller and the LTM E Expansion Module

It is recommended to mount the LTM R controller and its LTM E expansion module side by side with the
LTM E expansion module on the left side of the LTM R controller and connected by the LTMCC004
connecting jumper (1).
If it is not possible to mount the LTM R controller and its LTM E expansion module side by side:
z Use only the shielded cables LTM9CEXP03 (2) or LTM9CEXP10 (3) cables to connect them.
z Ground the shielded cable.
z Separate the LTM9CEXP•• connection cables from all other power or control cables to avoid EMC
disturbance.
206 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Installation
Example of Mounting in a Withdrawable Drawer of a Switchboard
A1, A2 LTM R controller power supply

B1, B2 Power supply dedicated to logic outputs
1639505EN-05 04/2015 207

Installation
Mounting
Overview
This section describes how to mount the LTM R controller and the LTM E expansion module on a DIN rail,
a solid mounting plate, or a pre-slotted mounting plate (known as a TE plate), such as a Telequick® plate.
It also describes the accessories needed for mounting, as well as how to remove each component.
Reminder: The LTM R controller and its LTM E expansion module must be mounted side by side, with the
LTM E expansion module on the left side of the LTM R controller, connected by the LTMCC004 connecting
jumper (see page 206).
Mounting on DIN Rails

You can mount the controller and the expansion module on a 35 mm (1.38 in.) DIN rail with a thickness of
1.35 mm (0.05 in.) and 0.75 mm (0.02 in.). When mounted, the controller mounting feet may not extend
beyond the controller dimensions (see page 204). To mount the controller:
Step Action
1 On the back of the controller are two DIN rail clips. Fit the top clip onto the DIN rail.
2 Push the controller in toward the DIN rail until the bottom clip catches. The controller clicks into place.
2
Click!
Removing from DIN Rails

To remove the controller from the DIN rail:
Step Action
1 Using a screwdriver, pull down the white locking mechanism to release the controller.
2 Lift the controller away from the DIN rail.
208 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Installation
Mounting on a Solid Mounting Plate

You can mount the controller and the expansion module on a metal mounting plate using ST2.9 steel
tapping screws: 4 for the controller and 2 for the expansion module. The thickness of the mounting plate
must not exceed 7 mm (0.275 in.). When mounted, the controller mounting feet may extend beyond the
controller dimensions (see page 204) by 8 mm (0.3 in.) in both directions. To mount the controller and the
expansion module on a mounting plate:
Step Action
1 Locate the 4 mounting holes at each corner of the controller and the 2 mounting holes on the expansion
module.
2 Position the controller and expansion module on the mounting plate, making sure to leave enough space
for the clearance zone. See Dimensions, page 204.
3 Insert each of the 6 tapping screws.
4 Use a screwdriver to tighten each screw and secure the controller and the expansion module in place.
Torque to 1 N•m (8.8 lb-in).
1639505EN-05 04/2015 209

Installation
Mounting on a TE Plate
You can mount the controller and the expansion module on a TE plate, such as Telequick®, using
6 mounting clips (AF1 EA4). When mounted, the controller mounting feet may extend beyond the controller
dimensions (see page 204) by 8 mm (0.3 in.) in both directions. To mount the controller on Telequick®:
Step Action
1 Attach the 6 mounting clips to Telequick®, as shown in the diagram below. The rounded edge should face
upwards for the top clips, and downwards for the bottom clips.
2 Position the controller and expansion module on the clips so that the holes in the clips and the holes in
the controller and expansion module align. Insert the screws in the holes and turn them slightly.
3 When the controller and expansion module are properly positioned, tighten first the bottom screws, then
the top screws using a screwdriver. Torque to 1 N•m (8.8 lb-in).
Operating Position
You can mount the controller and the expansion module at an angle of up to 90 degrees perpendicular to
the normal vertical mounting plane.
210 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Installation
Replacing the Terminal Strips

The standard terminal strips of the controller and expansion module can be replaced with alternative
terminal strips, if required. With alternative terminal strips, wires are connected perpendicularly to the
controller or expansion module face.
To replace the standard strips with alternative strips:
Step Action
1 Remove the 6 standard terminal strips using the connector extraction tool LTM9TCT to leverage the
strips away from the unit.
2 Push the alternative strips into place, making sure you position them correctly.
NOTE: There are two 4-pin terminal strips. These strips are not interchangeable. It is important, therefore,
that you read the markings on the terminal strips and follow the diagram below when positioning them.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 211

Installation
Wiring - Generalities
Overview
The wiring of each part of the LTM R controller and the LTM E expansion module is detailed further with
its specificities:
z Wiring the current transformers (see page 216).
z Wiring the ground fault current transformers (see page 220).
z Wiring the temperature sensors (see page 222).
z Wiring the power supply (see page 223).
z Wiring the logic inputs (see page 225).
z Wiring the logic outputs (see page 228).
z Wiring the voltage transformers on the LTM E expansion module.
The wiring of the communication port depends on the communication protocol and is described separately
(see page 235).
Wiring Rules
The following wiring rules must be respected in order to reduce disturbance due to EMC on the behavior
of the LTM R controller:
z Keep a distance as large as possible between the communication cable and the power and/or control
cables (minimum 30 cm or 11.8 in.).
z Cross over different types of cables at right angles, if necessary.
z Do not bend or damage the cables. The minimum bending radius is 10 times the cable diameter.
z Avoid sharp angles of paths or passage of the cable.
z Use shielded cables to connect ground fault current transformers:
z The cable shield must be connected to a protective ground at both ends.
z The connection of the cable shield to the protective ground must be as short as possible.
z Connect together all the shields, if necessary.
z Perform the grounding of the shield with a collar.
z Add filters on contactor coils for all contactors and relays.

z Place the cable along the grounded plate around the withdrawable drawer.
For more information, refer to the Electrical Installation Guide (available in English only), chapter
ElectroMagnetic Compatibility (EMC).
212 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Installation
Wiring Diagram Example: LTM R Controls a 3-phase Motor

The following diagram shows the wiring of the LTM R controller and its LTM E expansion module used to
control a 3-phase motor in 3-wire (impulse) independent mode:

1639505EN-05 04/2015 213

Installation
Wiring Diagram Example: LTM R Controls a Single-phase Motor

The following diagram shows the wiring of the LTM R controller and its LTM E expansion module used to
control a single-phase motor in 3-wire (impulse) independent mode:

LTM R Controller Plug-in Terminals and Pin Assignments

The LTM R controller has the following plug-in terminals and pin assignments:
Terminal Block Pin Description

Control voltage, logic input, and A1 Supply voltage input (+ / ∼)
common source terminals
A2 The negative of a power supply for DC models, or the grounded
secondary of a control power transformer for AC models (– / ∼)
I.1 Logic input 1
I.2 Logic input 2
I.3 Logic input 3
I.4 Logic input 4
I.5 Logic input 5
I.6 Logic input 6
C Input common
O.4 Logic output terminals 97–98 NO contact
95–96 NC contact
Note: The 97–98 contacts and the 95–96 contacts are on the same relay, so the
open/closed status of one pair of contacts is always the opposite of the status of
the other pair.
O.1 to O.3 Logic output terminals 13–14 NO contact – logic output 1
23–24 NO contact – logic output 2
33–34 NO contact – logic output 3
Ground fault input and Z1–Z2 Connection for external ground fault current transformer
temperature sensor input
T1–T2 Connection for motor temperature sensors
214 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Installation
LTM E Expansion Module Plug-in Terminals and Pin Assignments

The LTM E expansion module has the following plug-in terminals and pin assignments:
Terminal block Pin Description

Voltage inputs LV1 Phase 1 input voltage
LV2 Phase 2 input voltage
LV3 Phase 3 input voltage
Logic inputs and common terminals I.7 Logic input 7
C7 Common for I.7
I.8 Logic input I.8
C8 Common for I.8
I.9 Logic input I.9
C9 Common for I.9
I.10 Logic input I.10
C10 Common for I.10
Terminal Wiring Characteristics

Both the LTM R controller and LTM E expansion module terminals have the same characteristics.
Terminals have an insulation rating of 320 VAC.
The table below describes the characteristics of cables that may be used to wire the terminals:
Cable Type No. of Conductors Conductor Section

mm² AWG
Flexible (stranded) cable Single conductor 0.2...2.5 24...14
2 conductors 0.2...1.5 24...16
Solid cable Single conductor 0.2...2.5 24...14
2 conductors 0.2...1.0 24...18
Flexible (stranded) cable with insulated cable ends Single conductor 0.25...2.5 24...14
2 conductors 0.5...1.5 20...16
Flexible (stranded) cable with non-insulated cable ends Single conductor 0.25...2.5 24...14
2 conductors 0.2...1.0 24...18
The table below describes the characteristics of the terminals:
Pitch 5.08 mm 0.2 in.

Tightening torque 0.5 to 0.6 N•m 5 lb-in
Flat screwdriver 3 mm 0.10 in.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 215

Installation
Wiring - Current Transformers (CTs)
Overview
The LTM R controller has 3 CT windows through which you can route motor leads to contactor load
connections.
The CT windows enable you to wire the controller in 4 different ways, depending on the voltage and
controller model used:
z internal CT wiring through the windows
z internal CT wiring using multiple passes
z internal CT wiring using the lug kit (ref. Class 9999 MLPL)
z external Load CT wiring
This section describes each of these options.
Internal CT Wiring Through the Windows

The following diagrams show typical wiring using the CT windows for either 3-phase or single-phase
motors:
216 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Installation
Internal CT Wiring Using Multiple Passes

The controller can physically support up to a maximum of 5 passes of 2.5 mm² (14 AWG) wire through the
CT windows. There are 3 looping windows located under the CT windows that physically support up to a
maximum of 4 wire loops.
Set the parameter Load CT Multiple Passes to account for the number of times the motor wires pass
through the CT window in order to display the correct current readings. For more information, refer to Load
Current Transformer settings (see page 480).
The following diagram shows typical wiring using 2 passes (1 wire loop):
Multiply the current by the number of times that the motor wires pass through the CT windows to determine
the amount of current passing through the internal current sensors.
Adding multiple passes allows to:
z increase the current sensed by the internal current sensors to a level that the controller can properly
detect, or
z provide a more accurate reading by the internal current sensors.
We recommend that you select a controller with an FLC value range that includes the motor FLC. However,
if the motor FLC is less than the FLC range of the controller, multiple passes can increase the current level
sensed by the internal current sensors to one that the controller can detect.
For example, if using a controller with an FLC range of 5 to 100 A, and the motor FLC is 3 A, the controller
cannot properly sense the current. In this case, if you pass the power wiring through the internal current
sensors of the controller 2 times, the internal current sensors of the controller sense 6 A (2 passes x 3 A),
a current level that falls within the FLC range of the controller.
For more information about controller types, see LTM R Controller, page 15.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 217

Installation
Internal CT Wiring Using a Lug-Lug Kit

The controller accepts the Class 9999 Type MLPL lug-lug kit.
The following diagram shows typical wiring using the lug-lug kit:
NOTE: The lug-lug kit is IP0.

For more information on the lug-lug kit, refer to instruction bulletin 30072-013-101
z supplied with the kit, or
z available from http://products.schneider-electric.us/support/technical-library (under Technical Library).
External Load CT Wiring

The controller can accept 5 A and 1 A secondary signals from external current transformers. The
recommended controller model for these currents is the 0.4-8 A model. Use multiple passes through the
controller CT windows, if required.
External CTs are specified with a transformation ratio. The ratio of the external CT is the ratio of the motor
input current to the CT output current.
To enable the controller to adjust the FLC range and display the actual line current, set the following
parameters:
z Load CT Primary (the first number of the CT ratio)
z Load CT Secondary (the second number of the CT ratio)
z Load CT Multiple Passes (the number of times the CT output wires pass through the controller’s internal
CT windows)
For more information, refer to Load Current Transformer settings (see page 480).
218 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Installation
The following diagram shows wiring using external CTs:
For a description of external CT characteristics, see Load Current Transformers, page 17.
CT Wiring in Presence of Variable Speed Drive

When the motor is controlled by a variable speed drive (VSD):
z The current transformers (external or internal) must be mounted upstream of the variable speed drive,
and not between the variable speed drive and the motor. The CTs cannot be used between the drive
outputs and the motor because the drive can output fundamental frequencies outside the 47-63 Hz
range.
z Chokes must be mounted on the 3 phases, between the current transformers (external or internal) and
the variable speed drive, to minimize the soft start harmonics current and the voltage disturbances
generated by the variable speed drive.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 219

Installation
Wiring - Ground Fault Current Transformers
Ground Fault Current Transformer Installation

The following diagram shows a typical LTM R controller installation using a ground fault current
transformer (GFCT):
GFCTs are specified with a transformation ratio. The ratio of the GFCT is the ratio of the ground fault
current sensed to the current which it outputs.
To enable the controller to correctly measure the actual ground fault current flowing in the circuit, set the
following parameters:
z Ground CT Primary (the first number of the GFCT ratio)
z Ground CT Secondary (the second number of the GFCT ratio)
For a description of GFCT characteristics, see Ground Fault Current Transformers, page 18.
220 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Installation
Ground Fault Current Transformer Wiring

The external ground fault current transformer (GFCT) must be connected to the LTM R controller terminals
Z1 and Z2 using a shielded twisted pair cable. The shield must be connected to the earth at both ends by
the shortest possible connections.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 221

Installation
Wiring - Temperature Sensors
Temperature Sensors
The LTM R controller has 2 terminals dedicated to motor temperature sensing protection: T1 and T2.
These terminals return the temperature value measured by resistance temperature detectors (RTDs).
One of the following types of motor temperature sensor can be used:
z PTC Binary
z PT100
z PTC Analog
z NTC Analog
See Metering and Monitoring Functions, page 29 and Motor Protection Functions, page 81 for more
information on temperature sensors.
Temperature Sensor Wiring

The following table shows the maximum wire lengths for temperature sensor elements:
mm² (AWG) 0.5 (20) 0.75 (18) 1.5 (16) 2.5 (14)
m (ft) 220 (656) 300 (985) 400 (1312) 600 (1970)
Use unshielded twisted pair cable to connect the controller to the temperature sensor.
For the controller to accurately measure the resistance of the temperature-sensing element, you must
measure the resistance of the twisted-pair and add it to the desired resistance for protection. This
compensates for the lead resistance.
The following diagram shows the wiring of the LTM R controller and the temperature sensor of a single-
phase motor:
For more information about wiring, see Wiring - Generalities, page 212.
222 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Installation
Wiring - Power Supply
Overview
The LTM R controller supply voltage can be:
z 24 VDC, or
z 100…240 VAC
The following table presents LTM R controller and LTM E expansion module association rules:
LTMR•••BD (VDC) LTMR•••FM (VAC)

LTME••BD (VDC) X X
LTME••FM (VAC) – X
X Association allowed
– Association not allowed
DC Power Supply
A dedicated 24 VDC power supply is necessary to supply:
z one or several LTM R controllers including the logic inputs of the LTM R controller(s)
z the logic inputs of the LTM E expansion module(s)
An additional specific 24 VDC power supply is necessary to supply:

z the LTM R controller logic outputs
z other devices
The LTM R controller DC power supply must have the following characteristics:
z AC/DC converter
z galvanic isolation input AC / output DC: 4 kVAC minimum at 50 Hz
z input voltage: 240 VAC (+15% / -20%)
z output voltage: 24 VDC (+/-10%)
The following Schneider Electric ABL8RPS24••• power supplies are recommended:
Reference Number Input Voltage Output Voltage/Current Maximum Number of LTM R

Controllers Supplied
ABL8RPS24100 200…500 VAC 24 VDC / 10 A 24
ABL8RPS24050 200…500 VAC 24 VDC / 5 A 12
ABL8RPS24030 200…500 VAC 24 VDC / 3 A 8
AC Power Supply
A dedicated AC/AC power supply or UPS is necessary to supply:
z one or several LTM R controllers including the logic inputs of the LTM R controller(s)
z the logic inputs of the LTM E expansion module(s)
An additional specific AC or DC power supply is necessary to supply:

z the LTM R controller logic outputs
z other devices
1639505EN-05 04/2015 223

Installation
The LTM R controller AC power supply or UPS must have the following characteristics:
z isolation transformer
z output voltage: 115 or 230 VAC (+15% / -20%)
z 115 VAC output voltage is recommended
z with 230 VAC output voltage, an additional LTM9F external filter may be necessary
z power according to the number of LTM R controllers (several AC supplies are recommended)
Power Supply Daisy Chaining

When the same power supply (AC or DC) is used to supply several LTM R controllers, it is recommended
to close the loop:
z to avoid power off,
z to reduce voltage drop due to long cables.
224 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Installation
Wiring - Logic Inputs
Overview
10 logic inputs maximum are provided:
z 6 logic inputs on the LTM R controller, internally powered by the LTM R
z 4 logic inputs on the LTM E expansion module, independently powered
Logic Inputs of the LTM R Controller

The controller LTM R has 6 logic inputs:
z available via field wiring terminals I.1- I.6
z internally powered by the control voltage of the LTM R controller (the input voltage is the same voltage
as the controller supply voltage)
z isolated from the inputs of the LTM E expansion module
The 3 Common (C) terminals of the LTM R controller are connected to the A1 control voltage via an internal
filter, as shown in the wiring diagram examples (see page 212).
NOTICE
LOGIC INPUTS DESTRUCTION HAZARD
z Connect the LTM R controller’s inputs using the 3 Common (C) terminals connected to the A1 control
voltage via an internal filter.
z Do not connect the Common (C) terminal to the A1 or A2 control voltage inputs.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
For more information, see the power supply wiring (see page 223) and the technical specifications of the
LTM R controller (see page 470).
Logic Inputs of the LTM E Expansion Module

The 4 logic inputs on the LTM E expansion module (I.7 - I.10) are not powered by the control voltage of the
LTM R controller.
For more information, refer to the technical specifications of the LTM E controller (see page 473) and to
the power supply description (see page 223).
Controller AC Inputs Setting

The LTM R controller uses internal filters to obtain a correct AC signal on the inputs.
For more accurate results, this filter can be configured by the controller AC inputs setting register
(see page 409) to set the voltage supply and activate the adaptive filtering internal feature.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 225

Installation
Connection of the Logic Inputs

Two types of connection are possible:
z Direct connection for all information on logic inputs coming from the switchboard.
z Connection via interposing relays for all information on logic inputs coming from outside of the
switchboard and mainly connected with long lines.
Using interposing relays reduces EMC disturbance effects on the LTM R controller and improves the
reliability of the information.
Recommended Interposing Relay

Interposing relays must have the following characteristics:
z electromechanical relay with 2.5 kVAC isolation minimum
z self-cleaning or low level contact (I < 5 mA)
z installed in the switchboard as close as possible to the LTM R controller
z AC or DC control circuit voltage, supplied by separate power supply (not supplied by the same power
supply as the LTM R controller, to respect the galvanic isolation)
In case of long distances between the process and the LTM R controller, interposing relays with DC control
circuit voltage are recommended.
The protection module is mandatory on the interposing relays in order to suppress the surge.
The following Schneider Electric RSB1 interposing relays are recommended:
Reference Number Control Circuit Voltage Protection Module

RSB1A120•D 6, 12, 24, 48, 60, 110 VDC Diode RZM040W
RSB1A120•7 24, 48 VAC RC circuit RZM041BN7
RSB1A120•7 120, 220, 230, 240 VAC RC circuit RZM041FU7
Use of DC Interposing Relays

The DC interposing relays are recommended because long wires distances can be used to command the
relay.
DC RSB1 relay voltage 24 VDC 48 VDC 110 VDC

Maximum distance for wires in parallel 3,000 m (10,000 ft) 3,000 m (10,000 ft) 3,000 m (10,000 ft)
without metallic screening
Maximum distance for wires in parallel with 3,000 m (10,000 ft) 3,000 m (10,000 ft) 3,000 m (10,000 ft)
metallic screening
The following diagram shows an example when using DC interposing relays:
226 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Installation
Use of AC Interposing Relays

The use of an AC interposing relay is allowed only on short distances if an AC voltage is mandatory.
AC RSB1 relay voltage 24 VAC 48 VAC 120 VAC 230/240 VAC

Maximum distance for wires in parallel 3,000 m 1,650 m 170 m (550 ft) 50 m (165 ft)
without metallic screening (10,000 ft) (5,500 ft)
Maximum distance for wires in parallel with 2,620 m 930 m (3,000 ft) 96 m (315 ft) 30 m (100 ft)
metallic screening (8,600 ft)
The following diagram shows an example when using AC interposing relays:
Use of AC Interposing Relays with a Rectifier

The use of AC interposing relay with a rectifier is recommended on long distances if an AC voltage is
mandatory.
Add a rectifier composed of 1 A / 1000 V diodes to command an AC interposing relay. In this way, rectified
AC current flows in the control cable when the switch in the continuous part is closed.
AC RSB1 relay voltage 24 VAC 48 VAC 120 VAC 230/240 VAC

Maximum distance for wires in parallel 3,000 m 3,000 m 3,000 m 3,000 m
without metallic screening (10,000 ft) (10,000 ft) (10,000 ft) (10,000 ft)
Maximum distance for wires in parallel with 3,000 m 3,000 m 3,000 m 3,000 m
metallic screening (10,000 ft) (10,000 ft) (10,000 ft) (10,000 ft)
The following diagram shows an example when using AC interposing relays with a rectifier:
1639505EN-05 04/2015 227

Installation
Wiring - Logic Outputs
Overview
The 4 logic outputs of the LTM R controller are relay outputs. The relay outputs command the motor
managed by the LTM R controller.
The 4 relay outputs on the LTM R controller are:
z 3 single pole / single throw (SPST, NO) relay outputs
z 1 double pole / single throw (DPST, NC+NO) relay output
Output Interposing Relays

When an output commands a contactor, an interposing relay may be required depending of the coil voltage
and the power required by the contactor used.
The following diagrams illustrate system wiring without and with the use of an interposing relay KA1:
The LTM R controller logic output characteristics are:

z rated insulation voltage: 300 V
z AC rated thermal load: 250 VAC / 5 A
z DC rated thermal load: 30 VDC / 5 A
z AC 15 rating: 480 VA, 500,000 operations, Ie max = 2 A
z DC 13 rating: 30 W, 500,000 operations, Ie max = 1.25 A
If the LTM R controller logic output is not able to control directly the contactor, an interposing relay is
required.
The protection module is mandatory on the interposing relays in order to suppress the surge.
228 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Installation
Recommended Contactors
The tables in the appendix, listing the references and characteristics of Schneider Electric contactors,
specify whether an interposing relay is required or not (see page 476).
1639505EN-05 04/2015 229

Installation
Connecting to an HMI Device
Overview
This section describes how to connect the LTM R controller to an HMI device, such as a Magelis® XBT or
a TeSys® T LTM CU, or to a PC running SoMove with the TeSys T DTM. The HMI device must be
connected to the RJ45 port on the LTM R controller, or to the HMI interface port (RJ45) on the LTM E
expansion module.
The Magelis® XBT HMI device must be powered separately. Connect it to a controller in 1-to-many mode.
Wiring Rules
The wiring rules must be respected in order to reduce disturbance on the behavior of the LTM R controller
due to EMC.
The exhaustive list of wiring rules is described in the general recommendations (see page 212).
NOTICE
Use Schneider Electric standard cables.
Connecting to a Magelis® XBT HMI Device in 1-to-Many Mode

The diagram below shows a 1-to-many connection from the Magelis® XBTN410 HMI to up to 8 controllers,
with and without the LTM E expansion module:
1 Magelis® XBTN410 HMI device

2 Magelis® connecting cable XBTZ938
3 T-junction boxes VW3 A8 306 TF••
4 Shielded cable with 2 RJ45 connectors VW3 A8 306 R••
5 Line terminator VW3 A8 306 R
6 LTM R controller
7 LTM E expansion module
230 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Installation
Connecting to a TeSys® T LTM CU HMI Device

The diagrams below show the TeSys® T LTM CU HMI device connected to the LTM R controller, without
and with the LTM E expansion module:
1 LTM CU Control Operator Unit

2 Grounding collar
3 LTM9CU•• HMI device connection cable
4 LTM R controller
Connecting to a Generic HMI Device

Connect the LTM R controller and the expansion module to an HMI device of your choice, using a shielded
cable for Modbus bus, reference TSX CSA •••.
The RJ45 port pinouts to connect to the HMI port of the LTM R controller or the LTM E expansion module
is:
The RJ45 wiring layout is:
Pin no. Signal Description

1 Reserved Do not connect
3 – Not connected
4 D1 or D(B) Communication between HMI and LTM R controller
5 D0 or D(A) Communication between HMI and LTM R controller
7 VP +7 VDC (100 mA) power supply provided by the LTM R controller
8 Common Signal and power supply common
1639505EN-05 04/2015 231

Installation
Connecting to a PC Running SoMove with the TeSys T DTM in 1-to-1 Mode Using the HMI Port
The diagrams below show a 1-to-1 connection from a PC running SoMove with the TeSys T DTM to the
HMI port of the LTM R controller, with and without the LTM E expansion module and the LTM CU:
1 PC running SoMove with the TeSys T DTM

2 TCSMCNAM3M0 Modbus USB/RJ45 cable
3 LTM R controller

2 Cable kit TCSMCNAM3M002P
3 LTM R controller
6 Grounding collar
Connecting to a PC Running SoMove with the TeSys T DTM in 1-to-1 Mode Using One Network Port
The diagrams below show a 1-to-1 connection from a PC running SoMove with the TeSys T DTM to one
of the two network ports of the LTM R controller, with and without the LTM E expansion module and the
LTM CU:

2 Cat 5 shielded or unshielded twisted pair Ethernet cable
3 LTM R controller
232 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Installation

2 Cat 5 shielded or unshielded twisted pair Ethernet cable
3 LTM R controller
6 Grounding collar
When the LTM CU is connected to a PC, the LTM CU becomes passive and cannot be used to visualize
information.
Connecting to a PC Running SoMove with the TeSys T DTM in 1-to-Many Mode

The diagram below shows a 1-to-many connection from a PC running SoMove with the TeSys T DTM to
up to 8 controllers (with or without the LTM E expansion module):

2 Cable kit TCSMCNAM3M002P
3 T-junction boxes VW3 A8 306 TF••, including a shielded cable with 2 RJ45 connectors
4 Shielded cable with 2 RJ45 connectors VW3 A8 306 R••
5 Line terminator VW3 A8 306 R
6 LTM R controller
Connection Accessories
The following table lists connection accessories for the Magelis® XBT and other HMI devices:
Designation Description Reference

T-junction boxes Box with 2 RJ45 female connector for trunk cable VW3 A8 306 TF03
and an integrated 0.3 m (1 ft) cable with 1 RJ45
male connector for tap-off
Box with 2 RJ45 female connector for trunk cable VW3 A8 306 TF10
and an integrated 1 m (3.2 ft) cable with 1 RJ45
male connector for tap-off
Line terminator for RJ45 connector R = 120 Ω VW3 A8 306 R
1639505EN-05 04/2015 233

Installation
Designation Description Reference
Magelis® connecting cable Length = 2.5 m (8.2 ft) XBTZ938

(Magelis® XBTN410 only) 25 pts SUB-D connector to connect to Magelis®
XBT
Cable kit Length = 2.5 m (8.2 ft) TCSMCNAM3M002P
USB to RS 485 converter
Communication cables Length = 0.3 m (1 ft) VW3 A8 306 R03
Length = 1 m (3.2 ft) VW3 A8 306 R10
Length = 3 m (3.2 ft) VW3 A8 306 R30
HMI device connection cable Length = 1 m (3.2 ft) LTM9CU10
Length = 3 m (9.6 ft) LTM9CU30
234 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Installation
Section 5.2
Wiring of the Ethernet Network
Overview
This section describes how to connect an LTM R controller to an Ethernet network using an RJ45
connector.
WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
z The designer of any control scheme must consider the potential failure modes of control paths and,
for certain critical functions, provide a means to achieve a safe state during and after a path failure.
Examples of critical control functions are emergency stop and overtravel stop.
z Separate or redundant control paths must be provided for critical control functions.
z System control paths may include communication links. Consideration must be given to the
implications of anticipated transmission delays or failures of the link.(1)
z Each implementation of an LTM R controller must be individually and thoroughly tested for proper
operation before being placed into service.
(1) For additional information, refer to NEMA ICS 1.1 (latest edition), Safety Guidelines for the Application,
Installation, and Maintenance of Solid State Control.

Topic Page
Ethernet Network Characteristics 236
Ethernet Network Port Wiring Terminal Characteristics 237
Ethernet Architecture Selection 239
Wiring of the Ethernet Network 246
1639505EN-05 04/2015 235

Installation
Ethernet Network Characteristics
Overview
The LTM R Ethernet TCP/IP controller complies with the specifications of the EtherNet/IP and the
Modbus®/TCP protocols.
The Highly Dependable Ethernet Architectures in Intelligent Power and Motor Control Centers (IPMCC)
Guide provide basic information on Ethernet networks as used by Schneider Electric.
Characteristics for Connection to the Ethernet Network
Maximum number of LTM R controllers per A network with a DHCP server is limited to 160 LTM R controllers.
subnet
Maximum number of LTM R controllers per Install a maximum of 16 LTM R controllers on a daisy chain network, to
segment avoid material damage and a decrease in performance.
Type of cable Straight or crossed category 5 shielded twisted pair
Maximum cable length (daisy chain) 100 m (328 ft)
Transmission speed 10MB/100MB
236 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Installation
Ethernet Network Port Wiring Terminal Characteristics
General
The main physical characteristics of Ethernet ports are:
Physical interface Ethernet 10/100BASE-T

Connector RJ45
Physical Interface and Connectors

The LTM R controller is equipped with 3 female shielded RJ45 connectors on its front face. Two of these
connectors (circled below) provide access to the controller’s Ethernet network port:
1 Ethernet port number 1

2 Ethernet port number 2
RJ45 Ethernet Network Connector Pinout

The LTM R controller is connected to the Ethernet network using either or both of its RJ45 Ethernet network
port connectors in compliance with the following wiring:
The RJ45 wiring layout is:
Pin no. Signal Pair Description

1 TD+ A Transmit +
2 TD- A Transmit –
3 RD+ B Receive +
4 Do not connect – –
6 RD- B Receive –
1639505EN-05 04/2015 237

Installation
Auto-MDIX
Each RJ45 connector on the LTM R controller Ethernet network port is an MDIX (media-dependent
interface crossover) interface. Each connector automatically senses the:
z cable type—straight or crossed—plugged into the connector, and
z pin requirements of the device to which the controller is connected
Using this information, each connector assigns transmit and receive functions to pin combinations 1 & 2
and 3 & 6 as necessary to communicate with the device on the other end of the cable.
NOTE: Auto-MDIX allows using either straight or crossed category 5 twisted pair Ethernet cable to connect
an LTM R controller to another device.
238 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Installation
Ethernet Architecture Selection
Overview
This section is meant to help determine which architecture to choose according to the needs of your
installation.
A global view of the advantages of each architecture is provided and each of the following architectures is
described:
z Star (see page 240)
z Daisy Chain (see page 241)
z Daisy Chain With 1 By- Pass Switch Per Node (see page 242)
z Daisy Chain Loop With 1 Ring Switch (see page 243)
z Daisy Chain Loop With 2 Ring Switches (see page 244)
z Daisy Chain Loop With 2 Ring Switches and 1 By- Pass Switch Per Node (see page 245)
Dependability Comparison Rating

Dependability evaluates how the system reacts with an unexpected situation (for example: a device
failure).
Network architecture Tolerant to Tolerant to Tolerant to Tolerant to One or Additional Score

first switch first node second several more failure
failure failure node nodes common modes
failure failures modes
Star
Daisy Chain
Daisy Chain With 1 By-

Pass Switch Per Node
Daisy Chain Loop With

1 Ring Switch
Daisy Chain Loop With

2 Ring Switches
Daisy chain Loop With

2 Ring Switches and 1
By-Pass Switch Per
Node
Operability Comparison Rating

Operability evaluates how the system reacts with normal operation and functions (for example: withdraw
a drawer in operation).
Network architecture Withdrawability Withdrawability Withdrawability Score

one functional two FUs several FUs
unit (FU)
Star
Daisy Chain
Daisy Chain With 1 By-Pass Switch Per

Node
Daisy Chain Loop With 1 Ring Switch
Daisy Chain Loop With 2 Ring Switches

and 1 By-Pass Switch Per Node
1639505EN-05 04/2015 239

Installation
Star
Removal of any number of nodes does not affect the other nodes.
Dependability rating
Tolerant to first Tolerant to Tolerant to Tolerant to One or more Additional Score

switch failure first node second node several nodes common failure modes
failure failure failures modes
Operability rating
Withdrawability one Withdrawability two FUs Withdrawability several FUs Score

functional unit (FU)
240 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Installation
Daisy Chain
Removal of one node breaks the communication with all the nodes following the removed node.

Operability rating

1639505EN-05 04/2015 241

Installation
Daisy Chain With 1 By-Pass Switch Per Node

Removal of any nodes does not affect the remaining nodes since the LTM9BPS by-pass switch re-
establishes the ring automatically.

Operability rating

242 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Installation
Daisy Chain Loop With 1 Ring Switch

Removal of one node does not break the communication with all the nodes following the removed node. If
the switch fails, it breaks the communication.

Operability rating

1639505EN-05 04/2015 243

Installation

Removal of one node does not break the communication with all the nodes following the removed node. If
one switch fails, it does not break the communication.

Operability rating

244 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Installation
Daisy Chain Loop With 2 Ring Switches and 1 By-Pass Switch Per Node
Removal of any nodes does not affect the remaining nodes since the LTM9BPS by-pass switch repairs the
ring automatically.

Operability rating

1639505EN-05 04/2015 245

Installation
Overview
This section describes how to connect an LTM R controller to an Ethernet network via the female shielded
RJ45 connector.
Ethernet Wiring Rules

The following wiring rules must be respected in order to reduce disturbance due to EMC on the behavior
of the LTM R controller:
z Keep a distance as large as possible between the communication cable and the power or control cables
(minimum 30 cm or 11.8 in.).
z Cross over the Ethernet cable and the power cables at right angles, if necessary.
z Install the communication cables as close as possible to the grounded plate.
z Do not bend or damage the cables. The minimum bending radius is 10 times the cable diameter.
z Avoid sharp angles of paths or passage of the cable.
z Use the recommended cables only.
z All RJ45 connectors must be metallic.
z An Ethernet cable must be shielded:
z The cable shield must be connected to a protective ground.
z The connection of the cable shield to the protective ground must be as short as possible.
z Connect together the shields, if necessary.
z Perform the grounding of the shield with a collar.
z When the LTM R controller is installed in a withdrawable drawer:

z Connect together all the shield contacts of the withdrawable drawer part of the auxiliary connector to
the ground of the withdrawable drawer to create an electromagnetic barrier. See the Okken
Communications Cabling & Wiring Guide (available on request).
z Do not connect the cable shield at the fixed part of the auxiliary connector.
z Wire the bus between each connector directly, without intermediate terminal blocks.
z The common polarity (0V) must be connected directly to protective ground, preferably at one point only
for the entire bus. In general, this point is chosen either on the master device or on the polarization
device.
For more information, refer to the Electrical Installation Guide (available in English only), chapter
ElectroMagnetic Compatibility (EMC).
NOTICE
COMMUNICATION MALFUNCTION
Respect all the wiring and grounding rules in order to avoid communication malfunctions due to EMC
disturbance.
Connection to the Network

Every LTM R controller includes an embedded 2-port Ethernet switch, with 2 ports and one IP address.
NOTE: The 2 Ethernet ports have the same IP address.
The IEEE 802.3 standard defines Ethernet as implemented in the LTM R controller.
LTM R Controllers Installed in a Blokset or Okken Motor Control Switchboard

The installation of LTM R controllers in withdrawable drawers of a switchboard presents constraints
specific to the type of switchboard:
z For installation of LTM R controllers in an Okken switchboard, see the Okken Communications Cabling
& Wiring Guide (available on request).
z For installation of LTM R controllers in a Blokset switchboard, see the Blokset Communications Cabling
& Wiring Guide (available on request).
z For installation of LTM R controllers in other types of switchboard, follow the specific EMC instructions
described in this manual and refer to the relative instructions specific to your type of switchboard.
246 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Installation
Wiring Diagram Example

The wiring diagram below indicates how to connect LTM R controllers installed in withdrawable drawers to
the Ethernet network via the RJ45 connector and hardwired cables.
1 Master (PLC, PC, or communication module) with line terminator

2 By-pass switch LTM9BPS
3 Ethernet shielded cable 590 NTW 000
4 Grounding of the Ethernet cable shield
5 Withdrawable drawer
6 Withdrawable drawer part of the auxiliary connector
7 Fixed part of the auxiliary connector
1639505EN-05 04/2015 247

Installation
248 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Commissioning
1639505EN-05 04/2015
Chapter 6
Commissioning
Commissioning
Overview
This chapter provides an overview for commissioning the LTM R controller and the LTM E expansion
module.

Topic Page
Introduction 250
Commissioning Overview / Handling Unrecoverable FDR Faults 252
First Power-up 253
Required and Optional Parameters 255
FLC (Full Load Current) Settings 256
Ethernet Protocol Communication Checking 258
Verifying System Wiring 259
Verify Configuration 261
1639505EN-05 04/2015 249

Commissioning
Introduction
Introduction
Commissioning must be performed after the physical installation of the LTM R controller, LTM E expansion
module and other hardware devices.
The commissioning process includes:
z initialization of the installed devices, and
z configuration of the LTM R controller parameters that are required for operation of the LTM R controller,
LTM E expansion module, and other system hardware
The person performing commissioning must be familiar with the system hardware, and how it will be
installed and used in the application.
Hardware devices can include:
z motor
z voltage transformers
z external load current transformers
z ground current transformers
z communication network
The product specifications for these devices provide the required parameter information. You need to
understand how the LTM R controller will be used to be able to configure the protection, monitoring, and
control functions for the application.
For information about configuring control parameters, see Motor Control Functions, page 153.
For information about configuring protection parameters, see Motor Protection Functions, page 81.
Initialization
The LTM R controller is ready to be initialized after the hardware installation is complete. To initialize the
LTM R controller:
z be sure the command to control the motor is off, then
z turn on the LTM R controller
CAUTION
IMPROPER INITIALIZATION
Disconnect power to the motor before initializing the LTM R controller.
Neither the LTM R controller nor the LTM E expansion module require additional hardware configuration
(for example, turning dials, or setting dip-switches) to be initialized. When powered up for the first time, the
LTM R controller enters an initial state and is ready for commissioning.
Configuration Tools
Identify the configuration control source–and the configuration tool–before configuring parameters. The
LTM R controller and LTM E expansion module can be configured locally using an HMI device or remotely
via the network connection.
The LTM R controller can be commissioned using:
z an LTM CU control operator unit,
z a PC running SoMove with the TeSys T DTM,
z a PLC connected to the LTM R controller’s network port.
250 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Commissioning
The following parameters identify the configuration control source:
Parameter Enables Use of This Tool Factory Setting

Config Via HMI Keypad Enable TeSys T LTM CU control operator unit Enabled
Config Via HMI Engineering Tool Enable PC running SoMove with the TeSys T Enabled
DTM
Config Via Network Port Enable the network port (PLC or PC running Enabled
SoMove with TeSys T DTM)
This chapter describes commissioning performed using the LTM CU control operator unit, or SoMove with
the TeSys T DTM.
Commissioning Process
The commissioning process remains the same, regardless which configuration tool you select. This
process includes the following stages:
Stage Description
First power-up The LTM R controller initializes, and is ready for parameter configuration.
Configuring required settings Configure these parameters to move the LTM R controller out of its initialization state.
The LTM R controller is ready for operations.
Configuring optional settings Configure these parameters to support the LTM R controller functions required by the
application.
Verifying hardware Check hardware wiring.
Verifying the configuration Confirm accurate parameter settings.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 251

Commissioning
Commissioning Overview / Handling Unrecoverable FDR Faults
Overview
Commissioning the Ethernet version of the LTM R controller can require the configuration of a remote
server used to periodically provide both FDR and IP addressing services.
This topic provides an overview of a common process you will follow to:
z commission a new controller, and
z recover from an otherwise unrecoverable FDR fault
NOTE:
An unrecoverable FDR fault can arise when you attempt to:
z replace an existing version of an LTM R controller (for example an LTMR08EBD) with a different version
of the controller (for example, an LTMR100EBD).
z upgrade the firmware version of the LTM R controller (for example when the firmware of the LTM R
controller is upgraded from v2.4 to v2.5)
This sets the FDR Status parameter (490.8-11) = 13 ("Device parameter file version mismatch").
Commissioning Process
To commission any Ethernet version of the LTM R controller or—more specifically—to recover from an
otherwise unrecoverable FDR fault, follow this process:
Stage Description
1 Use SoMove software with TeSys T DTM to open either your previously saved configuration or, if
unavailable, the default configuration.
2 In TeSys T DTM, make all desired edits to both required and other parameters.
3 When the configuration file is edited, connect your PC with SoMove software with TeSys T DTM to the
LTM R controller via:
z one of the controller’s two Network Port Ethernet connectors (recommended), or
z the HMI port
4 Download the new configuration to the LTM R controller.

5 If the FDR service is enabled for the LTM R controller, or if the controller rotary switches are set to receive
IP addressing settings via DHCP, then manually transfer a copy of the configuration file to the FDR
server.
6 Power cycle the LTM R controller.
252 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Commissioning
First Power-up
Overview
First power-up describes the first time power is cycled to:
z a new LTM R controller, or
z an LTM R controller that has been previously commissioned, but whose parameter settings have been
restored to the factory settings, either as a result of:
z execution of the Clear All Command, or
z a firmware upgrade
On first power-up, the LTM R controller enters a locked, non-configured state, called the initialized state,
and the Controller System Config Required parameter is turned On. The LTM R controller exits this state
only after certain parameters, called required parameters, have been configured.
When commissioning is done, the LTM R controller is no longer locked, and is ready for operations. For
information on operating states, see Operating States, page 158.
First Power-up in the LTM CU

Using the LTM CU control operator unit, configuring the Menu → First Setup menu parameters clears the
Controller System Config Required parameter and brings the LTM R controller out of initialization.
The first time the LTM R controller powers up after leaving the factory, the LTM CU control operator unit
LCD automatically displays the First Setup menu, with a list of parameters that need to be configured
immediately:
First setup
Phases
Load CT ratio
OK
Click OK.
When all parameters are set, the last menu item to show up is End Config:
First setup
Local channel
End Config
OK
Click OK.
End Config
No
Local channel
Yes
OK
Click Yes to save the configuration.
When the configuration is saved, the First Setup menu is no longer displayed.
Send a Clear All command to the product to access the first setup menu again.
For more information, see the TeSys® T LTM CU Control Operator Unit User’s Manual.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 253

Commissioning
First Power-up in SoMove with theTeSys T DTM

Using SoMove with the TeSys T DTM to set all parameters, at the first power up of the LTM R controller,
the Controller System Config Required parameter can be cleared by 2 ways:
z In disconnected mode, by clicking Communication → Store to Device to download the configuration
files
z In connected mode, by clicking Device → command → exit configuration after setting all parameters
Both commands bring the LTM R controller out of initialization.
254 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Commissioning
Required and Optional Parameters
Introduction
In addition to the required parameters, configure optional parameters if required at first power-up or later.
In the LTM CU HMI

In the LTM CU HMI, required and optional parameters are located in the 5 sub-menus in the Menu.
In SoMove with the TeSys T DTM

In SoMove with the TeSys T DTM, required and optional parameters are located in tree view items in the
parameter list tab.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 255

Commissioning
FLC (Full Load Current) Settings
FLC Definition
The Full Load Current (FLC) represents the actual full-load current of the motor being protected by the
LTM R controller. The FLC is a motor characteristic and can be found on the motor plate.
Many protection parameters are set as a multiple of FLC.
The FLC can be set from FLCmin to FLCmax.
Examples of FLC settings are detailed below.
Other Definitions
Load CT ratio = Load CT primary / (Load CT secondary * Passes)
Current sensor max = Current range max * Load CT ratio
Current range max is determined by the LTM R controller commercial reference. It is stored in units of
0.1 A and has one of the following values: 8.0, 27.0, or 100.0 A.
Contactor rating is stored in units of 0.1 A and is set by the user between 1.0 and 1000.0 A.
FLCmax is defined as the lower of the Current sensor max and the Contactor rating values.
FLCmin = Current sensor max / 20 (rounded to the nearest 0.01 A.). FLCmin is stored internally in units
of 0.01 A.
NOTE:
z The modification of the Contactor rating and/or Load CT ratio modifies the value of the FLC.
z Do not set the FLC below the FLCmin.
Conversion of Amperes to FLC Settings

FLC values are stored as a percentage of FLCmax
FLC (in %) = FLC (in A) / FLCmax
NOTE: FLC values must be expressed as a percentage of FLCmax (resolution of 1 %). If you enter an
unauthorized value, the LTM R will round it up to the nearest authorized value. For example, on a 0.4-8 A
unit, the step between FLCs is 0.08 A. If you try to set an FLC of 0.43 A, the LTM R will round it up to 0.4 A.
Example 1 (No External CTs)

Data:
z FLC (in A) = 0.43 A
z Current range max = 8.0 A
z Load CT primary = 1
z Load CT secondary = 1
z Passes = 1
z Contactor rating = 810.0 A
Calculated parameters with 1 pass:

z Load CT ratio = Load CT primary / (Load CT secondary * passes) = 1 / (1 * 1) = 1.0
z Current sensor max = Current range max * Load CT ratio = 8.0 * 1.0 = 8.0 A
z FLCmax = min (Current sensor max, Contactor rating) = min (8.0, 810.0) = 8.0 A
z FLCmin = Current sensor max / 20 = 8.0 / 20 = 0.40 A
z FLC (in %) = FLC (in A) / FLCmax = 0.43 / 8.0 = 5 %
Example 2 (No External CTs, Multiple Passes)

Data:
z FLC (in A) = 0.43 A
z Passes = 5
256 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Commissioning
Calculated parameters with 5 passes:

z FLC (in %) = FLC (in A) / FLCmax = 0.43 / 1.6 = 27 %
Example 3 (External CTs, Reduced Contactor Rating)

Data:
z FLC (in A) = 135 A
z Passes = 1
Calculated parameters with 1 pass:

z FLC (in %) = FLC (in A) / FLCmax = 135 / 150.0 = 90 %
1639505EN-05 04/2015 257

Commissioning
Ethernet Protocol Communication Checking
Introduction
Configure the networking function last. Even when the connectors are plugged in, communication between
the controller(s) and the PLC cannot start until you enter the correct communication parameters via
SoMove with the TeSys T DTM or the HMI. To select the communication parameters, see Configuration of
the LTM R Ethernet Network Port, page 308.
Verify if the system communicates properly.
The Modbus communication checking sequence is:
Step 1
On the LTM R front face, check the following 3 LEDs (see page 267):
1. Fallback
2. STS/NS
3. LK/ACT
Step 2
If the product should be communicating but the LEDs do not indicate a connection is established, check
the cables and connectors and correct any connection problems.
Step 3
If the device is still not communicating, check the configuration via:
z SoMove with the TeSys T DTM, or
z the HMI.
258 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Commissioning
Verifying System Wiring
Overview
After all required and optional parameters have been configured, be sure to check your system’s wiring,
which can include:
z motor power wiring
z LTM R controller wiring
z external current transformer wiring
z diagnostic wiring
z I/O wiring
Motor Power Wiring

To verify the motor power wiring, check the following:
Look at... Action

The motor nameplate Confirm that the motor generates current and voltage within the
ranges of the LTM R controller.
The power wiring diagram Visually confirm that the actual power wiring matches the
intended power wiring, as described in the power wiring
diagram.
The list of faults and warnings in SoMove with the Look for any of the following faults or warnings:
TeSys T DTM or the LCD display of the HMI device z overpower
z underpower
z over power factor
z under power factor
The list of all or read only parameters in SoMove Look for unexpected values in the following parameters:
with the TeSys T DTM or the scrolling HMI display z active power
of the HMI device z reactive power
z power factor
Control Circuit Wiring

To verify control circuit wiring, check the following:
Look at... Action

The control wiring diagram Visually confirm that the actual control wiring matches the
intended control wiring, as described in the control wiring
diagram.
The LTM R controller Power LED If the LED is off, the LTM R controller may not be receiving
power.
The LTM R controller HMI LED If the LED is off, the LTM R controller may not be communicating
with the LTM CU or the PC running SoMove.
The LTM E expansion module Power LED If the LED is off, the LTM E expansion module may not be
receiving power.
Current Transformer Wiring

Verify the load current transformer wiring and, if the application includes external load current transformers,
also verify that wiring by checking the following:
Look at... Action

The external CT wiring diagram Visually confirm that the actual wiring matches the intended
wiring, as described in the wiring diagram.
The following load CT parameter settings, using Confirm that the Load CT Ratio parameter, or the combination
SoMove with the TeSys T DTM: of Load CT Primary and Load CT Secondary parameters
z Load CT Ratio accurately reflect the intended load CT ratio.
z Load CT Primary Visually confirm that the Load CT Multiple Passes parameter
z Load CT Secondary accurately reflects the number of passes the wiring makes
z Load CT Multiple Passes through the LTM R controller’s embedded CT windows.
The following load motor parameter setting, using Visually confirm that the motor and LTM R controller are wired
SoMove with the TeSys T DTM: for the number of phases set in the Motor Phases parameter.
z Motor Phases
1639505EN-05 04/2015 259

Commissioning
Look at... Action

The following load motor parameter setting, using If the motor is a 3-phase motor, visually check that the phase
either SoMove with the TeSys T DTM or the LCD wiring sequence matches the Motor Phases Sequence
display of the HMI device: parameter setting.
z Motor Phases Sequence
Diagnostic Wiring
Verify the wiring for any motor temperature sensing device or external ground current transformer, if the
application includes these devices, by checking the following:
Look at... Action

The wiring diagram Visually confirm that the actual wiring matches the intended
The external ground CT specifications Confirm that the combination of Ground CT Primary and Ground
- and - CT Secondary parameters accurately reflect the intended
The following ground CT parameter settings, using ground CT ratio.
SoMove with the TeSys T DTM:
z Ground CT Primary
z Ground CT Secondary
The motor temp sensor specifications Confirm that the motor temp sensor actually employed is the
-and - same sensor type as set in the Motor Temp Sensor parameter.
The following parameter setting, using either
SoMove with the TeSys T DTM or the LCD display
of the HMI device:
z Motor Temp Sensor
I/O Wiring
Verify the wiring for any I/O connections by checking the following:
Look at... Action

The wiring diagram Visually confirm that the actual wiring matches the intended
The AUX1 (Run 1), AUX2 (Run 2), and Stop Confirm that each command performs the intended start or stop
buttons on the HMI device function, when control is via the terminal strip or the HMI port.
- and -
of the HMI device:
z Control Local Channel Setting
The Reset button on the HMI device Confirm that the HMI can command a manual fault reset, when
- and - control is set to manual.
of the HMI device:
z Thermal Overload Fault Reset
The PLC, if the LTM R controller is connected to a Confirm that the PLC can command the intended start, stop and
network remote reset functions.
- and -
of the HMI device:
z Thermal Overload Fault Reset
260 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Commissioning
Verify Configuration
Overview
The final step in the commissioning process is to verify that all configurable parameters used in the
application are properly configured.
When performing this task, a master list of all the parameters to be configured and the desired settings is
required. It is imperative to compare this list against the actual settings of the configured parameters.
Process
Verifying parameter settings is a 3-part process:
z Transfer the configuration file from the LTM R controller to the PC running SoMove with the TeSys T
DTM. This allows to view the LTM R controller’s present parameter settings.
For information on transferring files from the LTM R controller to the PC, refer to the TeSys T DTM for
SoMove FDT Container Online help.
z Compare the master list of intended parameters and settings against the same settings located in the
parameter list tab in SoMove with the TeSys T DTM.
z Change the configuration settings as desired. Do this using:
z either SoMove with the TeSys T DTM, then download the edited file from the PC to the LTM R
controller.
For information on transferring files from the PC to the LTM R controller, refer to the TeSys T DTM
for SoMove FDT Container Online help.
z or LTM CU HMI: to edit parameters located in the Menu, navigate to the sub-menu settings and make
the appropriate edits.
For information about required settings, see Required and Optional Parameters, page 255.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 261

Commissioning
262 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use
1639505EN-05 04/2015
Chapter 7
Use
Use
Overview
This chapter describes:
z the user interface devices and the hardware configurations you can use to operate the LTM R controller
z how to set parameters with each user interface
z how to perform monitoring, fault handling, and control functions with each user interface.

Section Topic Page
7.1 Using the LTM R Controller Stand-Alone 264
7.2 Using the LTM CU Control Operator Unit 270
7.3 ®
Configuring the Magelis XBTN410 271
7.4 Using the Magelis® XBTN410 HMI (1-to-many) 276
7.5 Using SoMove with the TeSys T DTM 304

7.6 Using Ethernet Services 307
7.7 Using the Modbus®/TCP Communication Protocol 330
7.8 Using the EtherNet/IP Communication Protocol 337

7.9 Communication Variables 378
7.10 Using the Standard Web Server User Interface 425
1639505EN-05 04/2015 263

Use
Section 7.1
Using the LTM R Controller Stand-Alone
Using the LTM R Controller Stand-Alone
Overview
This section describes how to use the LTM R controller, either by itself or connected to an LTM E
expansion module, in a stand-alone configuration without a user interface device.

Topic Page
Hardware Configurations 265
Stand-Alone Configuration 266
264 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use
Hardware Configurations
Overview
The LTM R controller, either alone or connected to an LTM E expansion module, can be operated with or
without a user interface device.
In any configuration, the LTM R controller can be configured to perform monitoring, fault management,
motor protection and control functions.
Communications
User interface devices and their communications interfaces include:
User interface device Communicates via the

PC running SoMove with the TeSys T DTM HMI port via the local RJ45 connector on the LTM R controller or
LTM E expansion module
Network PLC Network port on the LTM R controller via the network RJ45
connector or terminal wiring
NOTE: For any instructions about the LTM CU, see the TeSys® T LTM CU Control Operator Unit User’s
Manual.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 265

Use
Stand-Alone Configuration
Overview
Before the LTM R controller can operate in a stand-alone configuration, parameters must be set by
choosing the HMI device.
NOTE: Only SoMove with the TeSys T DTM can configure all of the controller’s Ethernet network
communication parameters.
When parameters are set, the device can be detached and you can use the following controls to operate
the LTM R controller:
Use this control To

z LEDs: Monitor the state of the LTM R controller and LTM E expansion
z 7 LTM R controller LEDs module
z 5 LTM E expansion module LEDs
z LTM R controller Test / Reset button Self test, manage faults, reset to factory settings
z Programmed operating parameters Control the:
z Logic inputs: z LTM R controller
z 6 LTM R controller inputs z LTM E expansion module
z 4 LTM E expansion module inputs z Motor
z Power and control wiring
z Any connected sensors, including
z motor temp sensors
z external ground fault CTs
z Programmed protection parameters Protect the:

z LTM R controller
z LTM E expansion module
z Motor
z Equipment
Configurations
The stand-alone physical configurations of the LTM R controller (with and without a connected LTM E
expansion module) are depicted below:
The LTM R controller alone
266 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use
The LTM R controller and LTM E expansion module
EtherNet/IP LTM R Controller LEDs

Use the 7 LEDs on the face of the EtherNet/IP LTM R controller to monitor its state, as follows:
LED Color Describes Indicates

HMI Comm Yellow Communication activity between LTM R z Flashing yellow = communication
controller and HMI device, PC, or LTM E z Off = no communication
expansion module
Power Yellow or LTM R controller power or internal fault z Solid yellow = power-on, no internal
green condition faults, and motor off
z Flashing yellow = power-on, no internal
faults, and motor on
z Blinking yellow and green = power-up,
self test
z Off = power-off, or internal faults exist
Alarm/MS Green or Protection fault or warning, or internal fault z Solid green = no fault (when power is on)
red condition z Flashing green (1 x per s) = device in
standby state
z Solid red = device goes into major fault
(not recoverable)
z Flashing red (1 x per s) = minor fault
(recoverable)
z Flashing red (2 x per s) = warning
z Flashing red (5 x per s) = load shed or
rapid cycle condition
z Blinking green and red = power-up
testing, self test mode
z Off = no faults, warnings, load shed, or
rapid cycle (when power is On)
Fallback Red Indicates communication loss between the z Solid red = in fallback
LTM R controller and network or HMI z Off = not in fallback (no power)
control source
STS/NS Green or Indicates the network status z Blinking green = fault present during
red network start-up
z Solid green = CIP connection established
and not timeout
z Flashing green (1 x per s) = no CIP
connection established
z Solid red = duplicate IP address
z Flashing red (1 x per s) = connection
timeout
z Blinking green and red = power-up
testing, self test, web page discover test
z Off = no IP address (when power is On)
Flashing when the LED is lit up to 250 ms whatever the time cycle is.
Blinking when the LED is lit 50% of the time in the time cycle.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 267

Use

LK/ACT Green or Ethernet link status z Blinking green = speed is 100 Mbits/s
yellow Ethernet communication activity status z Blinking yellow = speed is 10 Mbits/s
z Off = no connection established
NOTE: LK/ACT LEDs color may be different under the condition of EtherNet/IP hardware cooperated with
network firmware equal or lower than 2.2.000.
NOTE: For a description of STS/NS LED behavior during startup, refer to the description of IP assignment
and the STS/NS LED (see page 316).
Modbus/TCP LTM R Controller LEDs

Use the 7 LEDs on the face of the Modbus/TCP LTM R controller to monitor its state, as follows:

HMI Comm Yellow Communication activity between LTM R z On = communication
controller and LTM E expansion module z Off = no communication
Power Green or LTM R controller power or internal fault z Solid green = power-on, no internal faults,
yellow condition and motor off
z Flashing green = power-on, no internal
faults, and motor on
z Blinking yellow and green = power-up,
self test
z Off = power-off, or internal faults exist
Alarm/MS Red or Protection fault or warning, or internal fault z Solid red = internal or protection fault
green condition z Flashing red (2 x per s) = warning
z Flashing red (5 x per s) = load shed or
rapid cycle condition
z Blinking red and green = power-up, self
test
z Off = no faults, warnings, load shed, or
rapid cycle (when power is On)
Fallback Red Communication connection between z Solid red = in fallback
LTM R controller and network module z Off = not in fallback (no power)
STS/NS Green or Ethernet link status z On = communication established

red Ethernet communication activity status z Off = communication is not established
z 2 blinks green = no MAC address
z 3 blinks green = no link
z 4 blinks green = duplicate IP condition
z 5 blinks green = waiting for served IP
configuration
z 6 blinks green = using the default IP
configuration
z 7 blinks green = firmware upgrade in
progress
z 8 blinks green = critical error
z 10 blinks green = no FDR server available
z Blinking green or red = power-up, self
test, web page discover test
LK/ACT Green or Indicates the connection speed z blinking green = speed is 100Mbits/s
yellow z blinking yelllow = speed is 10Mbits/s
z Off = no connection established
NOTE: LK/ACT LEDs color may be different under the condition of EtherNet/IP hardware cooperated with
network firmware equal or lower than 2.2.000.
NOTE: For a description of STS/NS LED behavior during startup, refer to the description of IP assignment
and the STS/NS LED (see page 316).
268 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use
LTM E Expansion Module LEDs

Use the 5 LEDs on the face of the LTM E expansion module to monitor its operating and communications
state, as follows:

Power Green or red Module power or internal z Solid green = power-on with no internal faults
fault condition z Solid red = power-on with internal faults
z Off = power-off
Logic inputs I.7, I.8, Yellow State of input z On = input activated

I.9 and I.10 z Off = input not activated
Test / Reset
Use the Test / Reset button to perform the following LTM R controller’s functions:
Function Description Procedure

Fault reset Resets all faults that can be reset. See Overview, Press the button and release within
page 187 for more information about resetting faults. 3 s.
Self test (See Performs a self test if: Press and hold the button for more
Self Test with z No faults exist than 3 s up to and including 15 s.
Motor On, z Self-test function is enabled.
page 462)
Local return to Returns the LTM R controller to factory settings, if the Press and hold the button down for
factory setting product is in one of the following states: Ready, Not ready more than 15 s not exceeding 20 s.
or System configuration. If the product is in Start or Run
state, the return to factory setting is ignored.
When the reset button is pressed during more than 15 s,
the Alarm LED blinks at 2 Hz. If the reset button is
released, the product executes a reset to factory setting.
Induce a fault Put the LTM R controller into internal fault condition. Press and hold the button down for
more than 20 s.
LED Behavior on Power-Up or Self-Test

This table describes the LED sequence behavior on a LTM R controller with EtherNet/IP protocol on
power-up or during a self test.
LED Order of Sequence Description of Sequence

All LEDs are OFF.
Alarm/MS MS indicator lights green for 0.25 seconds.
Alarm/MS MS indicator changes color to red and lights for 0.25 seconds.
Alarm/MS MS indicator remains lights green.
STS/NS NS indicator lights up green for 0.25 seconds.
STS/NS NS indicator changes color to red for 0.25 seconds.
STS/NS NS indicator lights off.
HMI Comm HMI indicator lights up yellow for 0.5 seconds.
HMI Comm HMI indicator lights off.
Power Power indicator lights green for 0.25 seconds.
Power Power indicator changes color to yellow and lights up for 0.25 seconds.
Power Power indicator lights off.
Fallback Fallback indicator lights red for 0.25 seconds.
Fallback Fallback indicator lights off.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 269

Use
Section 7.2
Using the LTM CU Control Operator Unit
Using the LTM CU Control Operator Unit
Presentation of the LTM CU Control Operator Unit
Aim of the Product

The LTM CU Control Operator Unit is a remote operator terminal that enables the configuration, monitoring
and control of the LTM R controller, as part of the TeSys T motor management system. The LTM CU has
been specially developed to act as the Human Machine Interface (HMI) of the LTM R controller, and is
internally powered by the LTM R.
The diagram below shows the LTM CU front face:
LTM CU Functions
The LTM CU can be used to:
z configure parameters for the LTM R controller,
z display information about the LTM R controller configuration and operation,
z monitor detected faults and warnings detected by the controller,
z control the motor locally using the local control interface.
For more Information

See the TeSys® T LTM CU Control Operator Unit User’s Manual.
270 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use
Section 7.3
Configuring the Magelis® XBTN410
Configuring the Magelis® XBTN410
Overview
The Magelis® XBTN410 HMI can be used to operate up to 8 LTM R controllers, in a 1 HMI to many LTM R
controllers (1-to-many) physical configuration.
The HMI presents a unique user interface, including both LCD display and keypad and requires the use of:
z a software application file, and
z a keypad label
This section shows you how to obtain and install a software application in the Magelis XBTN410 for a 1-
to-many configuration.
Refer to the XBT-N Instruction Sheet that ships with the Magelis XBTN410 HMI for instructions on selecting
and installing the keypad label that is appropriate for your configuration.
After connecting the HMI port, refer to instructions about configuring the HMI port (see page 272).

Topic Page
Configuration of the HMI Port 272
Installing Magelis® XBT L1000 Programming Software 273
Download 1-to-many Software Application Files 274
Transferring Application Software Files to Magelis XBTN410 HMI ® 275
1639505EN-05 04/2015 271

Use
Configuration of the HMI Port
HMI Port
The HMI port is the RJ45 port on the LTM R controller, or on the LTM E expansion module used to connect
the LTM R controller to an HMI device, such as a Magelis® XBT or a TeSys® T LTM CU, or to a PC running
SoMove with the TeSys T DTM.
Communication Parameters
Use the TeSys T DTM or the HMI to modify the HMI port communication parameters:
z HMI port address setting
z HMI port baud rate setting
z HMI port parity setting
z HMI port endian setting
HMI Port Address Setting

The HMI port address can be set between 1 and 247.
Factory setting is 1.
HMI Port Baud Rate Setting

Possible transmission rates are:
z 4800 Baud
z 9600 Baud
z 19,200 Baud (Factory setting)
HMI Port Parity Setting

The parity can be selected from:
z Even (Factory setting)
z None
Parity and stop bit behavior is linked:
If the parity is... Then the number of stop bits is...

Even 1
None 2
HMI Port Endian Setting

The HMI port endian setting allows to swap the 2 words in a double word.
z 0 = least significant word first (little endian)
z 1 = most significant word first (big endian, factory setting)
HMI Port Fallback Setting

HMI port fallback setting (see page 53) is used to adjust the fallback mode in case of a loss of
communication with the PLC.
272 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use
Installing Magelis® XBT L1000 Programming Software
Overview
The LTM R controller comes with a copy of Magelis® XBT L1000 programming software. You need to:
z install the Magelis XBT L1000 programming software on your PC, and
z use it to transfer a 1-to-many software application to the Magelis XBTN410 HMI.
NOTE: Magelis XBT L1000 programming software is a powerful programming tool. This document
describes only its utility in opening and transferring pre-programmed software applications to the Magelis
XBTN410 HMI. For more information about the Magelis XBT L1000 programming software, consult its help
file and printed documentation.
For instructions on how to download 1-to-many software applications, see Download 1-to-many Software
Application Files, page 274.
For instructions on how to transfer 1-to-many software applications from your PC to the Magelis XBTN410
HM, see Transferring Application Software Files to Magelis® XBTN410 HMI, page 275.
Installation Steps
To install the Magelis XBT L1000 programming software on your PC:
Step Action
1 Place the installation disk into your PC’s disk drive. The installation program should begin.
2 If the installation program does not begin, use Microsoft® Windows® Explorer to navigate to and click on
the file Setup.exe.
3 If any screens appear that do not require action, click Next.
4 In the language screen, select a language and click OK.
5 In the name and company screen, type in your name and your company name (or accept the factory
settings) and click Next.
6 If a screen appears warning you that protocols will be uninstalled, click Yes to continue.
7 In the Protocols Choices screen, be sure that Modbus is selected, then click Next.
8 In the Select Components screen, make no selections then click Next.
9 In the Choose Destination Location screen, either accept proposed path or use the Browse button to
navigate to a new one, then click Next.
10 In the Start Copying Files screen, review your selections then click:
z Back to return to earlier screens and make changes
z Next to proceed to the final screen.
11 In the Finish screen, click Finish. The Magelis XBT L1000 programming software is installed.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 273

Use
Download 1-to-many Software Application Files
Overview
You must download the software application file required by your installation of the Magelis® XBTN410
HMI from the www.schneider-electric.com website.
From the schneider-electric website, you can freely obtain the software application file
LTM_1T8_(language)_(version).dop.
For instructions on installing the Magelis XBT L1000 programming software, see Installing Magelis®
XBT L1000 Programming Software, page 273.
For instructions on transferring application files from the Magelis XBT L1000 programming software on
your PC to the Magelis XBTN410 HMI, see Transferring Application Software Files to Magelis® XBTN410
HMI, page 275.
274 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use
Transferring Application Software Files to Magelis® XBTN410 HMI
Overview
After you have installed the Magelis® XBT L1000 programming software on your PC and downloaded the
required 1-to-many application software file, you are ready to transfer the application software file to the
Magelis XBTN410 HMI.
For instructions on downloading software application files, see Download 1-to-many Software Application
Files, page 274.
Transfer Steps
To transfer a software application file from Magelis XBT L1000 programming software on your PC to the
Magelis XBTN410 HMI:
Step Action
1 Supply power to the Magelis XBTN410 HMI.
2 Connect the PC 9-PIN Com1 port to the 25-pin data port on the HMI using an XBT Z915 programming
cable. The HMI LCD reads:
"FIRMWARE VX.X WAITING FOR TRANSFER"
3 Start up the Magelis XBT_L1000 programming software.
4 Close all child windows in the programming software.
5 In the File menu, select Open. The Open dialog is displayed.
6 In the Open dialog, navigate to the 1-to-many software application file (with a .dop extension) and click
Open. The programming software displays the selected file.
7 In the Transfers menu, select Export.
8 When notified that the Export command will destroy the existing application, click OK to continue the
export. The HMI LCD indicates:
"DOWNLOAD IN PROGRESS" and then "DOWNLOAD COMPLETED"
9 Click OK when the programming software reports "Transfer accomplished successfully".
1639505EN-05 04/2015 275

Use
Section 7.4
Using the Magelis® XBTN410 HMI (1-to-many)
Using the Magelis® XBTN410 HMI (1-to-many)
Overview
This section describes how to use the Magelis® XBTN410 HMI to operate up to 8 LTM R controllers, in a
1 HMI to many LTM R controllers (1-to-many) physical configuration.
The 1-to-many physical configuration presents a unique:
z user interface (LCD display and keypad)
z menu structure
NOTE: The Magelis XBTN410 HMI can operate up to 8 LTM R controllers that have previously been
commissioned. To commission an individual LTM R controller, use either:
z an LTM CU control operator unit, or
z SoMove with the TeSys T DTM.

Topic Page
Physical Description (1-to-many) 277
Command Lines (1-to-many) 280
Navigating the Menu Structure (1-to-many) 281
Editing Values (1-to-many) 282
Executing a Value Write Command (1-to-many) 285
Menu Structure (1-to-many) 286
Menu Structure - Home Page (1-to-many) 287
Menu Structure - All LTM R Controllers and the HMI (1-to-many) 288
Controller Page (1-to-many) 290
Settings (1-to-many) 291
Statistics (1-to-many) 298
Product ID (1-to-many) 300
Monitoring (1-to-many) 301
Fault Management (1-to-many) 302
Service Commands (1-to-many) 303
276 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use
Physical Description (1-to-many)
1-to-many Interface
When a Magelis® XBTN410 is used in a 1-to-many physical configuration, the face of the HMI looks like
this:
1 LCD display
2 8 button keypad
1-to-many Keypad
The 1-to-many configuration requires a customized keypad label. Using a blank keypad label, add the
names of the 6 bottom buttons to the label. For instructions on creating and installing a customized keypad
label, refer to the XBT-N Instruction Sheet that ships with the Magelis XBTN410 HMI.
In a 1-to-many configuration, the keypad buttons perform the following functions:
Keys Use this key to

z enter the menu structure for a selected LTM R controller at address 1–4
z move to the adjacent left character within a numerical setting value
z execute remote reset commands for a selected LTM R controller at address 1–4
z reset statistics to factory settings for a selected LTM R controller
z display the description of another fault, when the LCD displays fault messages
z enter the menu structure for a selected LTM R controller at address 5–8
z move to a lower level in an LTM R controller menu structure
z move to the adjacent right character within a numerical setting value
z toggle between alternate values for Boolean settings
z execute remote reset commands for a selected LTM R controller at address 5–8
z reset settings to factory settings for a selected LTM R controller
z display the description of another fault, when the LCD displays fault messages
z scroll down through a page
z decrement by 1 the value of the selected digit or setting
z scroll up through a page

z increment by 1 the value of the selected digit or setting
z select a numeric setting for editing

MOD Note: after a setting is selected, you can increment or decrement either:
z the entire value
- or -
z a selected digit within the setting.
z exit the present level in the HMI menu structure and move up to the next level
ESC z exit the selected setting without saving changes.
z save changes and exit the selected setting

ENTER
1639505EN-05 04/2015 277

Use
Keys Use this key to

z delete the value of the selected setting
DEL Note: after deleting a setting value, you can either:
z use the arrow keys to input a new value, then click ENTER to save it
- or -
z click ESC to restore the deleted value.
1-to-Many LCD
In a 1-to-many configuration, the Magelis® XBTN410 HMI presents a flexible LCD that can display up to 4
rows of 20 characters, as follows:
In some cases, the LCD displays only 3 text lines, because one line—containing a fault message or page
header—is twice the height of normal text.
Pages
The LCD displays pages of text. There are 2 types of pages:
Page type Contains Displayed

Menu structure page z page header that is twice the height of by navigating through the HMI menu structure
ordinary LCD text to the specific page
z links to other pages
z read-only parameter values
z editable parameter settings
z function commands
Fault message page z a flashing fault message z automatically when a fault occurs
z the number of active faults z by selecting Faults in the Home page
Pages often contain more than 4 lines of text. See Navigating the Menu Structure (1-to-many), page 281
for instructions on how to navigate within and between pages.
Page examples
The Home page:
The top 4 lines of the Home page
Use the button to scroll down and reveal more of this

page.
Note: click on a flashing to navigate to that page.
278 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use
Fault message pages:
The opening fault message page.

Note: the fault name "THERMAL OVERLOAD" and the
LTM R controller address "Controller 1" both flash when
displayed.
Click the button to display additional fault message

pages.
Click the button to scroll down and reveal more of the

Ground Current fault message.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 279

Use
Command Lines (1-to-many)
Overview
Use the HMI keypad and keys to execute text line commands. A command line is identified by a:
z at the right end of the text line, or
z at the left end of the text line
A command can be executed only when its text line has focus. A text line has focus when the or
at either end of the text line—plus any additional command character—is blinking.
Command Lines
The 1-to-many menu structure presents 4 different kinds of command lines, depending upon the command
character—if any—next to the command line arrow, as follows:
Command line characters Description

Left Right
Links to a page.
With no character next to the blinking arrow, click the:
z keypad button to move to the page indicated by the left arrow
z keypad button to move to the page indicated by the right arrow.
N/A Toggle bit commands.

0
- or - With a 0 or a 1 next to the blinking arrow, click the keypad button to toggle
the boolean setting value.
1
Value write commands.

v v With a v next to the blinking arrow, click the:
z keypad button to execute the command indicated by the left arrow
z keypad button to execute the command indicated by the right arrow.
For example:
z Reset to Defaults: Statistics
z Reset to Defaults: Settings
z Self-Test
Command cannot execute. There is no connection between the HMI and the
? ? indicated LTM R controller.
280 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use
Navigating the Menu Structure (1-to-many)
Overview
Use the HMI keypad , , , and ESC buttons to:
z scroll within a page

z link to a page in the next, lower level in the menu structure
z return to a page in the next, higher level in the menu structure
z jump to the Home page
Example
The following navigation example begins and ends at the Home page:
1639505EN-05 04/2015 281

Use
Editing Values (1-to-many)
Overview
Use the HMI keypad , , , , MOD and ENTER buttons to edit setting values. There are 3 kinds
of editable settings:
z boolean
z numeric
z value list
Only settings that are displayed in the LCD can be edited. To display a setting, navigate to the page that
contains the setting. With the correct page opened, you may need to scroll down to display the setting.
Boolean settings
A boolean value setting includes a 0 or a 1 next to the at the right end of the text line. The following
example shows you how to select then edit a boolean value:
1 The Settings page opens with focus at the top line.

2 Click the DOWN button to scroll down to the Local Control setting (HMI). The boolean value (0) and command line
arrow blink, indicating focus.
3 Click the RIGHT arrow to toggle the Local Control setting to Term Strip and the boolean value to 1.
NOTE: An edited boolean value is saved when its value changes.
Numeric settings
Numeric value settings are incremented or decremented, and can be edited in 2 ways:
z by selecting the entire setting and then incrementing or decrementing its value
z by selecting individual characters within the setting and then incrementing or decrementing the value of
each digit.
282 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use
Use the MOD button to select the value to be edited, as follows:
1 The Long Start page opens with no setting selected for editing.
2 Click the MOD button once to select the first displayed numerical field for editing.
3 Click the MOD button a second time to select the next displayed numerical field for editing.
After a setting is selected for editing, you can use the and buttons to increment or decrement
the entire value, then use the ENTER button to save the edit:
1639505EN-05 04/2015 283

Use
Alternatively, after a setting is highlighted you can use the and buttons to select only a single
character within a field and edit that character, as follows:
Value List settings

In a few cases, a setting presents a list of value selections. Selecting a value from the list is very much like
incrementing or decrementing the entire value of a numerical setting, as shown below:
284 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use
Executing a Value Write Command (1-to-many)
Overview
The Magelis® XBTN410 HMI, in 1-to-many configuration provides executable value write commands. A
value write command immediately executes a task. The value write command line is identified by either a:
z v (at the left end of a command line, or)
z v (at the right end of a command line
If a value write command is unsuccessful, the HMI displays an error message.
Value write commands include:
Value write command Task Location

Clear Settings Clears settings and restores factory settings. Reset to Defaults page
Clear Statistics Clears statistics and restores factory settings.
Self Test Performs a self-test. Controller page
Reset - Manual Enables manual resetting of faults Reset page
Reset - Remote Enables remote resetting of faults
Reset - Automatic Enables automatic resetting of faults
Example
Use the or the arrow key to execute a value write command. When a value write command
executes, the lower case "v" next to the arrow becomes an upper case "V", as shown below, then quickly
returns to a lower case "v" after the command executes:
1639505EN-05 04/2015 285

Use
Menu Structure (1-to-many)
Overview
The Magelis® XBTN410 HMI 1-to-many menu structure is hierarchical in its design and consists of 6 levels
of individual pages. The upper menu structure levels provide information and commands for the HMI itself
and for all LTM R controllers connected to the HMI. The lower menu structure levels provide settings,
statistics and commands for a selected LTM R controller.
Menu Structure Outline

The Magelis XBTN410 HMI 1-to-many menu structure presents the following outline of levels and pages:
Level Pages Description

1 Home page The starting page – navigation to all other pages begins here. Opens on
start-up when no faults exist.
2 Controller currents page z Displays average current as a percent of FLC for every LTM R
controller.
z Provides a link to each LTM R controller’s menu structure.
Controller status page z Displays operating status (On, Off, Fault) for every LTM R controller.
z Provides a link to each LTM R controller’s menu structure.
Fault pages Displays a series of pages, each page describing an active fault. Opens
automatically when a fault exists.
Remote reset page Executable commands for the remote reset of each LTM R controller.
Reset to defaults page Executable commands to reset statistics or settings for each LTM R
controller.
XBTN reference page Describes communication settings, application program file,
programming software version, and HMI firmware version.
3 Controller page For a selected LTM R controller:
z Displays dynamically changing parameter values
z Self Test command
z Links to its settings, statistics and Product ID information.
4, 5, 6 Settings page and sub-pages Contains configurable settings for a selected LTM R controller
Statistics page and sub-pages Presents statistics for a selected LTM R controller, including fault n-0
and fault n-1 history.
Product ID page LTM R controller and LTM E expansion module part and firmware
identification.
286 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use
Menu Structure - Home Page (1-to-many)
Overview
The Home Page opens on HMI start-up, when the Magelis® XBTN410 is connected to 1 or more LTM R
controllers—all of which are running without faults or warnings.
The Home page is the only page located in level 1 of the Magelis XBTN410 1-to-many menu structure. It
is the starting place for navigation to all other levels and pages in the menu structure.
Home Page
The Home page contains the following menu items:
Menu item Description

Page header with LTM R controller firmware version.
VX.X
IMPORTANT Links to a page with the following CAUTION message: ‘Please set HMI
Port Endianess to LEndian to ensure that all values are correctly
displayed’.
Controller currents Links to a page that displays average current and provides links to data and
commands for each LTM R controller.
Controller status Links to a page that displays status (On, Off, Fault) and provides links to
data and commands for each LTM R controller.
Faults Displays a series of fault messages.
Remote Reset Links to a page that displays the status of each LTM R controller; and
provides a reset command for each LTM R controller.
Reset to defaults Links to a page with commands that reset to factory settings each LTM R
controller’s statistics or settings.
XBTN Reference Links to a page that describes communication speed and parity,
programming software and LTM R controller firmware.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 287

Use
Menu Structure - All LTM R Controllers and the HMI (1-to-many)
Overview
Pages located in level 2 of the menu structure contain:
z information and commands for up to 8 connected LTM R controllers, or
z fault information for all LTM R controller, or
z information about the Magelis® XBTN410 HMI
All level 2 menu structure pages are accessible from the Home page.
Controller Currents Page

Use the Controller Currents page to monitor the Average Current Ratio for all connected LTM R controllers,
and to navigate to other pages as described below:
Level 2 Description
Controller Currents –
Opens the Controller page for the selected LTM R controller (1-8).
I1=XXXX% I5=XXXX%
I2=XXXX% I6=XXXX%
I3=XXXX% I7=XXXX%
I4=XXXX% I8=XXXX%
Controller status Opens the Controller Status page.
Remote reset Opens the Remote Reset page.
Home Returns to the Home page.
Controller Status Page

Use the Controller Status page to monitor the System On and System Fault status of all connected LTM R
controllers, and to navigate to other pages as described below:
Level 2 Description
Controller Status –
1:Off 5:OffFLT Opens the Controller page for the selected controller (1-8).
2:Off 6:On
3:On FLT 7:Off
4:Off 8:Off
Controller currents Opens the Controller Currents page.
Remote reset Opens the Remote Reset page.
Faults Display
The Magelis® XBTN410 HMI displays active faults in a series of pages–1 fault to a page–when:
z a fault occurs, and the display of active faults automatically opens
z you select Faults in the Home page and manually open the display of active faults.
For information about fault management, including the faults display pages, see Fault Management (1-to-
many), page 302.
Remote Reset Page

Use the Remote Reset page to remotely execute a Fault Reset Command for a faulted LTM R controller–
for controllers with Fault Reset Mode set to Remote, and to navigate to other pages:
Level 2 Description
Remote Reset –
288 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use
Level 2 Description
Executes a Fault Reset Command for the selected LTM R
01FLT023 067FLT50
controller (1-8) if remote fault reset is enabled for that controller.
02FLT034 078FLT60
03FLT045 089FLT70
04FLT056 090FLT80
Controller currents Opens the Controller Currents page.
Controller status Opens the Controller Status page.
Each of the first 4 lines of this page provides the following fault reset information at the indicated locations:
1 fault reset bit (not significant)

2 LTM R controller number (1–8)
3 fault status (ON, OFF, FLT)
4 time to reset (seconds)
Reset to Defaults Page

The Reset to Defaults page provides the Clear Statistics Command and the Clear Controller Settings
Command for each LTM R controller, as displayed below:
Level 2 Description
Reset to defaults –
Clears statistics (left arrows) or settings (right arrows) for the
Stats 1 Settings
selected LTM R controller (1-8), and restores factory settings.
Stats 2 Settings
Stats 3 Settings
Stats 4 Settings
Stats 5 Settings
Stats 6 Settings
Stats 7 Settings
Stats 8 Settings
XBTN Reference Page

The XBTN Reference page provides information about the HMI. The following is an example of information
displayed in this page:
Level 2 Parameter name / description

XBTN Reference –
MB Speed= 19200 HMI Port Baud Rate Setting
MB Parity= Even HMI Port Parity Setting
LTM_1T8_E_Vx.xx.DOP file name for the HMI application program
XX/XX/200X xx:xx:xx date of the HMI application program file
XBT-L1000= V 4.42 version of the XBT 1000 software
Firmware= V 3.1 version of the HMI firmware
1639505EN-05 04/2015 289

Use
Controller Page (1-to-many)
Overview
The Controller page presents information and commands for the LTM R controller that was selected in
either the Controller Currents page or the Controller Status page (see Controller Currents Page,
page 288).
The Controller page is the only page located in level 3 of the menu structure.
Use the Controller page to:
z monitor dynamically changing current, voltage, and power values for a single, selected LTM R controller
z navigate to editable parameter settings for an LTM R controller
z navigate to read-only statistics and product information for an LTM R controller
z execute the Self Test command for an LTM R controller
Controller Page
The Controller page displays dynamically changing parameter values, and contains the command lines,
as follows:
Level 3 Parameter name / Description

Page header indicating LTM R controller address (1–8).
Avg Current= xxxx%FLC Average Current Ratio

L1 Current= xxxx%FLC L1 Current Ratio
GRCurr= xxxx.x%FLCmin Ground Current Ratio
Curr Ph Imb= xxx%Imb Current Phase Imbalance
Th Capacity= xxxxx% Thermal Capacity Level
Time To Trip= xxxxSec Time To Trip
Avg Voltage= xxxx%FLCmin Average Voltage
L1-L2 Volts= xxxxxV L1-L2 Voltage
Volt Ph Imb= xxx%Imb Voltage Phase Imbalance
Power Factor= xx.xx Power Factor
Active Pwr= xxxx.xkW Active Power
React Pwr= xxxx.xkVAR Reactive Power
Temp Sensor= xxxx.xΩ Motor Temp Sensor
Settings Links to editable settings for the LTM R controller.
Statistics Links to read-only statistics for the LTM R controller.
Self Test v Executes the Self Test command. See Self Test with Motor On, page 462.
Product ID Links to product reference numbers and firmware versions for the LTM R
controller and expansion module.
290 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use
Settings (1-to-many)
Overview
The Magelis® XBTN410 HMI provides several pages of editable parameter settings, nested in levels 4, 5
and 6 of the menu structure. The settings page is your starting place for locating and editing settings,
including:
z motor
z local control
z transfer mode
z reset (fault)
z current
z voltage
z power
z load shed
z rapid cycle lockouts
z communication loss
The settings page is located in level 4 of the menu structure. To navigate to the settings page, use one of
the following paths:
Level From this page... Select...

1 Home page Controller currents, or Controller status
2 Controller Currents page, or Controller Status page LTM R controller number
3 Controller page Settings
Motor, Control, and Transfer Settings

Use the settings page to navigate to and edit the following motor, local control and transfer mode settings:
Level 4 Level 5 Parameter name

Settings Addr. 1-8 –
Motor Nom Voltage Motor Nominal Voltage
Nom Power (kW) Motor Nominal Power (expressed in kW)
Nom Power (hp) Motor Nominal Power (expressed in hp)
DirTrans Control Direct Transition
TransTime Motor Transition Timeout
2step Level Motor Step 1 to 2 Threshold
2step Time Motor Step 1 to 2 Timeout
Aux Fan Motor Auxiliary Fan Cooled
TEMP SENSOR –
Fault Motor Temp Sensor Fault Enable
Fault Level Motor Temp Sensor Fault Threshold
Warn Motor Temp Sensor Warning Enable
Warn Level Motor Temp Sensor Warning Threshold
Local Control Control Local Channel Setting
Transfer Mode Control Transfer Mode
1639505EN-05 04/2015 291

Use
Fault Reset Settings

Use the settings page to navigate to and edit the following fault reset settings:

Settings Addr.1-8 –
Reset Manual Fault Reset Mode
Remote
Automatic
Net Port Network Port Endian Setting
AUTO GROUP 1 –
Attempts Auto-Reset Attempts Group 1 Setting
Reset Time Auto-Reset Group 1 Timeout
AUTO GROUP 2 –
AUTO GROUP 3 –
292 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use
Current Settings
From the settings page, you can navigate to and edit the following current settings:
Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Parameter name

Current Th Overload Fault Thermal Overload Fault Enable
FLC1-OC1 Motor Full Load Current Ratio
FLC2-OC2 Motor High Speed Full Load Current Ratio
Trip Class Motor Trip Class
Reset Level Thermal Overload Fault Reset Threshold
Def O-Time Thermal Overload Fault Definite Timeout (O-Time)
Def D-Time Long Start Fault Timeout (D-Time)
Warn Thermal Overload Warning Enable
Warn Level Thermal Overload Warning Threshold
Phase Imb/Loss/Rev CURR PH IMB –
Fault Current Phase Imbalance Fault Enable
Fault Level Current Phase Imbalance Fault Threshold
FltTimeStrt Current Phase Imbalance Fault Timeout Starting
FltTimeRun Current Phase Imbalance Fault Timeout Running
Warn Current Phase Imbalance Warning Enable
Warn Level Current Phase Imbalance Warning Threshold
CURR PH LOSS –
Fault Current Phase Loss Fault Enable
Fault Time Current Phase Loss Timeout
Warn Current Phase Loss Warning Enable
CURR PH REV –
Fault Current Phase Reversal Fault Enable
Long Start Fault Long Start Fault Enable
Fault Level Long Start Fault Threshold
Fault Time Long Start Fault Timeout
Jam Fault Jam Fault Enable
Fault Level Jam Fault Threshold
Fault Time Jam Fault Timeout
Warn Jam Warning Enable
Warn Level Jam Warning Threshold
1639505EN-05 04/2015 293

Use

Current Under/Over Curr UNDER CURR –
(continued) Fault Undercurrent Fault Enable
Fault Level Undercurrent Fault Threshold
Fault Time Undercurrent Fault Timeout
Warn Undercurrent Warning Enable
Warn Level Undercurrent Warning Threshold
OVER CURR –
Fault Overcurrent Fault Enable
Fault Level Overcurrent Fault Threshold
Fault Time Overcurrent Fault Timeout
Warn Overcurrent Warning Enable
Warn Level Overcurrent Warning Threshold
Ground Current Fault Ground Current Mode
IntFltLvl Internal Ground Current Fault Threshold
IntFltTime Internal Ground Current Fault Timeout
ExtFltLvl External Ground Current Fault Threshold
ExtFltTime External Ground Current Fault Timeout
Warn Ground Current Warning Enable
IntWarnLvl Internal Ground Current Warning Threshold
ExtWarnLvl External Ground Current Warning Threshold
294 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use
Voltage Settings
From the settings page, you can navigate to and edit the following voltage settings:

Voltage Phase Imb/Loss/Rev VOLT PH IMB –
Fault Voltage Phase Imbalance Fault Enable
Fault Level Voltage Phase Imbalance Fault Threshold
FltTimeStart Voltage Phase Imbalance Fault Timeout Starting
FltTimeRun Voltage Phase Imbalance Fault Timeout Running
Warn Voltage Phase Imbalance Warning Enable
Warn Level Voltage Phase Imbalance Warning Threshold
VOLT PH LOSS –
Fault Voltage Phase Loss Fault Enable
Fault Time Voltage Phase Loss Fault Timeout
Warn Voltage Phase Loss Warning Enable
VOLT PH REV –
Fault Voltage Phase Reversal Fault Enable
Under/Over Voltage UNDER VOLT –
Fault Undervoltage Fault Enable
Fault Level Undervoltage Fault Threshold
Fault Time Undervoltage Fault Timeout
Warn Undervoltage Warning Enable
Warn Level Undervoltage Warning Threshold
OVER VOLT –
Fault Overvoltage Fault Enable
Fault Level Overvoltage Fault Threshold
Fault Time Overvoltage Fault Timeout
Warn Overvoltage Warning Enable
Warn Level Overvoltage Warning Threshold
1639505EN-05 04/2015 295

Use
Power Settings
From the settings page, you can navigate to and edit the following power settings:

Power Under/Over Power UNDER POWER –
Fault Underpower Fault Enable
Fault Level Underpower Fault Threshold
Fault Time Underpower Fault Timeout Starting
Warn Underpower Warning Enable
Warn Level Underpower Warning Threshold
OVER POWER –
Fault Overpower Fault Enable
Fault Level Overpower Fault Threshold
Fault Time Overpower Fault Timeout
Warn Overpower Warning Enable
Warn Level Overpower Fault Enable
Under/Over PowFact UNDER POW FACTOR –
Fault Under Power Factor Fault Enable
Fault Level Under Power Factor Fault Threshold
Fault Time Under Power Factor Fault Timeout
Warn Under Power Factor Warning Enable
Warn Level Under Power Factor Warning Threshold
OVER POW FACTOR –
Fault Over Power Factor Fault Enable
Fault Level Over Power Factor Fault Threshold
Fault Time Over Power Factor Fault Timeout
Warn Over Power Factor Warning Enable
Warn Level Over Power Factor Warning Threshold
Load Shed, Diagnostic, Rapid Cycle Lockouts, Communication Ports Settings

From the settings page, you can navigate to and edit the following load shed, diagnostic, rapid cycle
lockout, and communication ports settings:

Load Shed Fault Load Shedding
Fault Level Voltage Dip Threshold
Fault Time Load Shedding Timeout
RestartLvl Voltage Dip Restart Threshold
RestartTime Voltage Dip Restart Timeout
Diagnostic DIAG FAULT
Fault Diagnostic Fault Enable
Warn Diagnostic Warning Enable
WIRING CT REVERSAL
Fault Wiring fault enable
Rapid Cycle Lockout Time Rapid Cycle Lockout Timeout
296 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use

Comm Ports Net Port Network Port Endian Setting
HMI Port HMI Port Endian Setting
NET PORT COMM LOSS –
Fault Network Port Fault Enable
Fault Time Network Port Comm Loss Timeout
Warn Network Port Warning Enable
HMI PORT COMM LOSS –
Fault HMI Port Fault Enable
Warn HMI Port Warning Enable
1639505EN-05 04/2015 297

Use
Statistics (1-to-many)
Overview
The Magelis® XBTN410 HMI provides read-only statistics pages–nested in levels 4 and 5 of the menu
structure–for a selected LTM R controller.
To navigate to the statistics page, use one of the following paths:

2 Controller Currents page, or Controller Status LTM R controller number
page
3 Controller page Statistics
Statistics
From the settings page, you can navigate to and read the following statistics:

Statistics Addr. 1-8 –
CntrlTempMax Controller Internal Temperature Max
OperTime Operating Time
MtrStarts Motor Starts Count
LastStartDur Motor Last Start Duration
LastStart Motor Last Start Current
All Faults Faults Count
Th Ovld Flt Thermal Overload Faults Count
Th Ovld Warn Thermal Overload Warnings Count
Curr Imb Flt Current Phase Imbalance Faults Count
LongStart Flt Long Start Faults Count
UnderCurr Flt Undercurrent Faults Count
Ground Faults Ground Current Faults Count
VoltPhImb Flt Voltage Phase Imbalance Faults Count
Under Volt Flt Undervoltage Faults Count
Over Volt Flt Overvoltage Faults Count
HMI Loss Flt HMI Port Faults Count
Ntwk Int Flt Network Port Internal Faults Count
Ntwk Cnfg Flt Network Port Config Faults Count
Ntwk Port Flt Network Port Faults Count
Cntrl Int Flt Controller Internal Faults Count
InterPort Flt Internal Port Faults Count
298 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use

Statistics Addr. 1-8 –
Fault n-0 Fault Code Fault Code n-0
Date (MMDDYYYY) Date And Time n-0
Time (HHMMSS) Date And Time n-0
FLC Ratio Motor Full Load Current Ratio n-0
FLC Max Motor Full Load Current Max n-0
Avg Current Average Current n-0
L1 Current L1 Current Ratio n-0
GRCurr Ground Current Ratio n-0
Curr Ph Imb Current Phase Imbalance n-0
Th Capacity Thermal Capacity Level n-0
Avg Volts Average Voltage n-0
L1-L2 Volts L1-L2 Voltage n-0
Volt Ph Imb Voltage Phase Imbalance n-0
Frequency Frequency n-0
Active Pwr Active Power n-0
Power Factor Power Factor n-0
Temp Sensor Motor Temp Sensor n-0
Fault n-1 Fault Code Fault Code n-1
Date (MMDDYYYY) Date And Time n-1
Time (HHMMSS) Date And Time n-1
FLC Ratio Motor Full Load Current Ratio n-1
FLC Max Motor Full Load Current Max n-1
Avg Current Average Current n-1
GRCurr Ground Current Ratio n-1
Curr Ph Imb Current Phase Imbalance n-1
Th Capacity Thermal Capacity Level n-1
Avg Volts Average Voltage n-1
Volt Ph Imb Voltage Phase Imbalance n-1
Frequency Frequency n-1
Active Pwr Active Power n-1
Power Factor Power Factor n-1
Temp Sensor Motor Temp Sensor n-1
1639505EN-05 04/2015 299

Use
Product ID (1-to-many)
Overview
The Magelis® XBTN410 HMI provides a description of the product number and firmware for both the
LTM R controller and LTM E expansion module.
To navigate to the Product ID page, use one of the following paths:

2 Controller Currents page, or Controller Status LTM R controller number
page
3 Controller page Product ID
Product ID
In the Product ID page, you can read the following information about the LTM R controller and LTM E
expansion module:
Level 4 Parameter name / description

Product ID Addr. 1-8 –
Controller Catalog Ref Controller Commercial Reference (product number)
Controller Firmware Controller Firmware Version
Exp Module Catalog Ref Expansion Commercial Reference (product number)
Exp Module Firmware Expansion Firmware Version
Network Type Network Port ID Code
Network Firmware Network Port Firmware Version
300 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use
Monitoring (1-to-many)
Overview
Use the Magelis® XBTN410 HMI, in a 1-to-many configuration, to monitor:
z operating status and average current for multiple LTM R controllers, or
z current, voltage and power parameters for a selected LTM R controller.
Monitoring Multiple LTM R Controllers

Navigate to the following pages to simultaneously monitor these dynamically changing values for all LTM R
controllers:
Page Value
Controller currents page Average current ratio
Controller status page Operating status (On, Off, Fault)
For more information on both pages, see Controller Currents Page, page 288.
Monitoring a Single LTM R Controller

Navigate to the Controller page for a selected LTM R controller to monitor the dynamically changing values
of the following parameters:
z Current:
z Average Current Ratio
z L1 Current Ratio
z L2 Current Ratio
z L3 Current Ratio
z Current Phase Imbalance
z Thermal
z Time To Trip
z Motor Temp Sensor
z Voltage
z Average Voltage
z L1-L2 Voltage
z L2-L3 Voltage
z L3-L1 Voltage
z Voltage Phase Imbalance
z Power
z Power Factor
z Active Power
z Reactive Power
For more information on the Controller page, see Controller Page (1-to-many), page 290.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 301

Use
Fault Management (1-to-many)
Overview
When a fault occurs, the Magelis® XBTN410 HMI automatically opens a fault display, consisting of 1 page
for each active fault. Each page contains the:
z fault name
z address of the LTM R controller experiencing the fault
z total number of unresolved faults
Fault Display Pages

A typical fault display page looks like this:
1 fault display page number

2 total number of active faults
3 fault name (flashing)
4 address of LTM R controller experiencing the fault (flashing)
If more than 1 fault is active, use the and keypad buttons to move back and forth through the
fault display pages.
Because some fault messages contain more than 4 lines of text, you may need to use the and
keypad buttons to scroll up and down within a fault display page and display the entire fault message.
Opening / Closing the Fault Display

The 1-to-many HMI automatically opens the fault display whenever a fault occurs. When you remove the
cause of a specific fault and execute a fault reset command, that fault no longer appears in the fault display.
You can also close the fault display by clicking the ESC keypad button. This does not fix the underlying
cause of any fault, nor it does not clear any fault. You can re-open the fault display at any time by navigating
to the Home page, scrolling to the Faults command line, then clicking the keypad button.
If you open the fault display when no faults are active, the HMI displays the message "No Faults Present".
Magelis® XBT Communication Loss

If a key is pressed while the Magelis® XBT HMI device loses communication, the keypad update will not
be complete. When the communication with the LTM R is back, the following message displays: "#203
Cannot connect to controller". Press any key or power cycle the device.
302 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use
Service Commands (1-to-many)
Overview
The Magelis® XBTN410, in 1-to-many configuration, provides the following service commands:
Command Description Location / Reference

Self Test Performs an internal check of the Level 3, Controller page. See Controller Page,
LTM R controller and LTM E page 290 and Self Test with Motor On,
expansion module. page 462.
Reset to Defaults: Statistics Executes the Clear Statistics Level 2, Reset to Defaults page. See Reset to
Command for a selected LTM R Defaults Page, page 289.
controller.
Reset to Defaults: Settings Executes the Clear Controller Level 2, Reset to Defaults page. See Reset to
Settings Command for a selected Defaults Page, page 289.
LTM R controller.
Remote Reset Performs remote fault reset for a Level 2, Remote Reset page. See Remote
selected LTM R controller Reset Page, page 288.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 303

Use
Section 7.5
Using SoMove with the TeSys T DTM
Using SoMove with the TeSys T DTM
Overview
The following topics show you how to use the LTM R controller when it is connected to a PC running
SoMove with the TeSys T DTM.

Topic Page
Presentation of SoMove with the TeSys T DTM 305
Installing SoMove and the TeSys DTM Library 306
304 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use
Presentation of SoMove with the TeSys T DTM
Aim of the Software

SoMove software is a Microsoft® Windows®-based application, using the open FDT/DTM technology.
SoMove contains DTMs for different devices. The TeSys T DTM is a specific DTM that enables the
configuration, monitoring, control, and customization of the control functions of the LTM R controller, as
part of the TeSys T motor management system.
Functions
The TeSys T DTM can be used to:
z configure parameters for the LTM R controller,
z display information about the LTM R controller configuration and operation,
z display the status of detected faults and warnings in the LTM R controller,
z control the motor,
z customize operating modes.
For More Information

See the TeSys T DTM for SoMove FDT Container Online Help embedded in the DTM software.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 305

Use
Installing SoMove and the TeSys DTM Library
Overview
The installation of SoMove includes some DTMs such as the TeSys DTM library.
The TeSys DTM library includes:
z TeSys T DTM
z TeSys U DTM
These DTM are automatically installed during the SoMove installation process.
Downloading SoMove
SoMove can be downloaded from the Schneider Electric website (www.schneider-electric.com) by
entering SoMove Lite in the Search field.
Installing SoMove
Step Action
1 Unzip the downloaded file: the SoMove file is unzipped in a folder named SoMove_Lite - V.X.X.X.X
(where X.X.X.X is the version number). Open this folder and double-click setup.exe.
2 In the Choose Setup Language dialog box, select the installation language.
3 Click OK.
4 In the Welcome to the Installation Wizard for SoMove Lite dialog box, click the Next button.
5 If an Install Shield Wizard dialog box appears and informs you that you must install Modbus driver,
click the Install button.
Result: Modbus driver is installed automatically.
6 In the Readme and Release Notes dialog box, click the Next button.
7 In the Readme dialog box, click the Next button.
8 In the License Agreement dialog box:
z Read carefully the license agreement.
z Select I accept the terms in the license agreement option.
z Click the Next button.
9 In the Customer Information dialog box:

z Enter the following information in the corresponding fields:
z First name
z Last name
z Company name
z Select an installation option:

z Either the Anyone who uses this computer option if SoMove Lite is used by all users of this
computer, or
z Only for me if SoMove Lite is used only by you.
10 In the Destination Folder dialog box:

z If necessary, modify the SoMove Lite destination folder by clicking the Change button.
11 In the Shortcuts dialog box:

z If you want to create a shortcut on the desktop and/or in the quick launch bar, select the
corresponding options.
12 In the Ready to Install the Program dialog box, click the Install button.
Result: The SoMove Lite components are installed automatically:
z Modbus communication DTM library which contains the communication protocol
z DTM libraries which contain different drive catalogs
z SoMove Lite itself
13 In the Installation Wizard Completed dialog box, click the Finish button.
Result: SoMove Lite is installed on your computer.
306 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use
Section 7.6
Using Ethernet Services
Using Ethernet Services
Overview
This section describes the Ethernet services, and the related Ethernet configuration parameters, supported
by EtherNet/IP and Modbus®/TCP.
NOTE: Changes in parameter settings for any Ethernet service take effect only after a power cycle of the
LTM R controller.
WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
(1) For additional information, refer to NEMA ICS 1.1 (latest edition), "Safety Guidelines for the Application,
Installation, and Maintenance of Solid State Control".
WARNING
UNEXPECTED RESTART OF THE MOTOR
Check that the PLC application software
z considers the change from local to remote control,
z manages appropriately the motor control commands during those changes.
z manages appropriately the motor control to avoid contradictory commands from all possible Ethernet
connections
When switching to the Network control channels, depending on the communication protocol
configuration, the LTM R controller can take into account the latest known state of the motor control
commands issued from the PLC and restart automatically the motor.

Topic Page
Configuration of the LTM R Ethernet Network Port 308
Ethernet Link Management 310
Master IP 311
IP Addressing 312
Faulty Device Replacement 317
Discovery Procedure 322
Ethernet Diagnostics 323
Simple Network Management Protocol 328
1639505EN-05 04/2015 307

Use
Configuration of the LTM R Ethernet Network Port
Communication Parameters
Before network port communication can begin, configure the following Ethernet communication services
and settings:
z Master IP address setting
z Frame type setting
z Stored IP addressing settings
z Network port endian setting
z Faulty device replacement (FDR) service
z Network Protocol selection
z Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP)
z SNMP service
z Communication loss settings
z Configuration control
NOTE: Only the TeSys T DTM software can configure all of these services and settings. Other HMI
devices can configure all settings and all services except SNMP.
Master IP Address Setting

Configure the Ethernet Master IP Address Setting parameter to add the IP address of the client device
(see page 311) dedicated to remotely control the motor. This parameter consists of 4 integer values, from
0 to 255, separated by dots (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx).
Frame Type Setting

Configure the Network Port Frame Type Setting parameter by selecting an Ethernet frame type:
z Ethernet II (Factory setting)
z 802.3 (recommended)
IP Addressing Settings
Unique IP address settings must be assigned to the LTM R controller (including an IP address, a subnet
mask, and a gateway address) to be able to communicate over an Ethernet network. The positions of the
controller’s 2 rotary switches determine the source of the controller’s IP address settings (see page 312),
which can be:
z a DHCP server
z a BootP server
z stored IP address settings
If the controller’s Ones rotary switch is set to Stored IP, the controller will apply its stored IP address
settings (see page 313).
To input the LTM R controller’s stored IP address settings, configure the following parameters:
z Ethernet IP Address Setting
z Ethernet Subnet Mask Setting
z Ethernet Gateway Address Setting
Each of these parameters consists of 4 integer values, from 0 to 255, separated by dots (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx).
Network Port Endian Setting

The Network port endian setting allows to swap the 2 words in a double word.
z 0 = least significant word first (little endian)
z 1 = most significant word first (big endian, factory setting)
Faulty Device Replacement Service

The Faulty Device Replacement (see page 317) (FDR) service stores the LTM R controller’s operating
parameters on a remote server and, if the controller fails and is replaced, sends the replacement controller
a copy of the original device’s operating parameters.
To insure the server always contains an accurate, updated copy of the controller’s operating parameters,
the FDR service can be configured to automatically backup these parameter settings to the FDR server.
308 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use
To enable the automatic backup of the controller’s operating parameters to the FDR server, configure the
following parameters:
z Network Port FDR Auto Backup Enable parameter. It can be set to:
z no auto backup
z automatic backup (copies the parameters from the controller to the FDR server)
z Network Port FDR Controller Interval parameter: the time (in seconds) between automatic backup
transmissions.
z Range = 1...65535s
z Factory setting = 120s
Network Protocol Setting

Select with this parameter the network protocol you want to use:
z Modbus/TCP
z EtherNet/IP
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol

The Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) service manages the state on every port of each device in the
local area network (LAN) loop. The RSTP is configured to respond, and resolve a communication loss of
a device on the network from 50...150 ms for 16 to 32 devices. Reconnection performances vary
depending on PLC, services used, and IP address mode.
To enable the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) service, set the parameter RSTP Disable to No.
On every network topology change, RSTP recalculates the optimum network path. It is important that
network configuration does not change during RSTP operation. Following actions should be avoided on an
operating network or network configuration that can be temporarily impacted:
z a network cable plug-in/plug-out or device power on/off in less than 2 s
z a daisy chain loop, remove/add 2 nodes in less than 30 s
SNMP Service
The LTM R controller supports the simple network management protocol (see page 328) (SNMP). The
LTM R controller includes a configurable SNMP agent, that can communicate with up to 2 SNMP
managers.
NOTE: SNMP parameters can be configured only using the TeSys T DTM software.
Refer to the topic Configuring the SNMP Service (see page 329) for more information about configuring
SNMP parameters.
Network Port Comm Loss Settings

Configure the following parameters to determine how the LTM R controller will handle communication loss
with the PLC:
z Network Port Comm Loss Timeout: the length of time communication with the PLC defined as Master
IP must be lost before the controller will trigger a fault or warning.
z Range = 0...9999 s
z Increments = 0.01 s
z Factory setting = 2 s
z Network Port Fallback Setting: determines—with the controller’s operating mode (see page 164)—the
behavior of logic outputs 1 and 2, when communication with the PLC is lost. For more information, refer
to the explanation of the Fallback Condition (see page 53). Values include:
z Hold
z Run
z O.1, O.2 off
z O.1, O.2 on
z O.1 on
z O.2 on
The factory setting is O.1, O.2 off.

z Network Port Fault Enable: reports a network fault after the Network Port Comm Loss Timeout setting
has expired.
z Network Port Warning Enable: reports a network warning after the Network Port Comm Loss Timeout
setting has expired.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 309

Use
Ethernet Link Management
Overview
The LTM R controller can receive or provide Ethernet services only if an Ethernet communications link
exists. An Ethernet communications link can exist only when a cable connects one of the controller’s
network ports to the network. If no network cable connection exists, no Ethernet service can start.
The behavior of the controller is described in each of the following situations:
z The LTM R powers up with no network cable connected.
z A network cable is connected to a previously unconnected controller after startup.
z All network cables are disconnected from the controller after startup.
z One (or more) network cables are re-connected to a controller after all network cables had previously
been disconnected.
No link while LTM R is powered up

When the LTM R powers up with no network cable connected, the LTM R
z goes into an FDR Fault if the rotary switches are in DHCP position,
z goes into an FDR Fault for 10s and then clears the fault automatically if the rotary switches are in Stored,
BootP, ClearIP or Disabled positions.
No Link at Startup
When, after controller startup, an Ethernet network cable is initially attached to a previously unconnected
controller
z the controller starts its IP addressing service (see page 312), which
z obtains IP address settings,
z validates IP address settings,
z checks that the obtained IP address settings are not duplicate,
z assigns the received IP address settings to the controller.
z after its IP address settings are assigned, the controller

z starts the FDR service and obtains its operating parameter settings, then
z starts its Modbus service.
The time to recover the link and start Ethernet services takes about 1 second.
Link Disconnected After Startup

When all Ethernet network cables are disconnected from the controller after startup:
z the FDR service is disabled,
z all Modbus service connections are re-set,
z if a Master IP connection exists and:
z the link cannot be re-established, i.e., the cable is not plugged back into the controller, before the
Network Port Comm Loss Timeout expires, the controller enters its pre-configured fallback state if
the LTM R is in Network control,
z the link is re-established before the Network Port Comm Loss Timeout expires, the connection to the
Master IP is maintained and the controller does not enter its fallback state.
Link Reconnected After Disconnection

When one or more Ethernet network cables are re-attached to the controller, after all network cables had
been detached after startup, the controller performs many, but not all, of the same tasks as when there is
No Link at Startup (see page 310). Specifically, the controller
z presumes the previously obtained IP address settings remain valid, then
z checks that the IP address settings are not duplicate,
z re-assigns the IP address settings to the controller.
z after the IP address settings are assigned, the controller

z starts its FDR service and obtains its operating parameter settings, then
z starts its Modbus service.
The time to recover the link and start Ethernet services takes about 1 second.
310 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use
Master IP
Overview
Each LTM R controller, in its role as communication server, could be configured to recognize another
Ethernet device (typically a PLC) as the client device that controls the motor. This device is usually a device
that initiates communication to exchange Process Data (control and status). The Master IP is the IP
address of this device.
The PLC should continuously maintain at least 1 connection, called a virtual connection (see page 332) or
socket, with the communication server.
If all connections between the communication clients and the LTM R server fail, the LTM R controller waits
a prescribed time, the Network Port Comm Loss Timeout, for a new connection to be established and
messages sent between the PLC and the communication server.
If a connection is not opened and messages are not received, the LTM R controller assumes its fallback
state, set by the Network Port Fallback Setting.
WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
z Configure a server IP on the Ethernet network.
z Do not use an IP address other than Master IP to send network start and stop commands to the LTM R
controller.
z Design the Ethernet network to block unauthorized network start and stop commands sent to the
LTM R controller.
Prioritized Master IP Connections with Modbus/TCP

Connections between the LTM R controller and the Modbus client has a priority over connections between
the controller and other Ethernet devices.
After the controller has reached its maximum number of 8 simultaneous Modbus connections, the
controller must close an existing connection to be able to open a new connection. The controller closes
existing connections based on the time of a connection’s most recent transaction, closing the connection
whose most recent transaction is the oldest.
However, all connections between the LTM R controller and the Modbus client are preserved. The
controller will not close a connection with the Modbus server in order to open a new connection.
Configuring Master IP
To enable connections to be made to a Modbus client, use a configuration tool to configure the following
parameters:

Ethernet Master IP address setting (3010-3011) Valid Class A, B, and C addresses 0.0.0.0
in the range:
0.0.0.0...223.255.255.255
Network port comm loss timeout (693) 0...9999 s 2s
in increments of 0.01 s
Network port fallback setting (682) z Hold O.1, O.2 Off
z Run
z O.1, O.2 Off
z O.1, O.2 On
z O.1 Off
z O.2 Off
1639505EN-05 04/2015 311

Use
IP Addressing
Overview
The LTM R controller must obtain a unique IP address, subnet mask and gateway address to communicate
over an Ethernet network. The settings of the 2 rotary switches on the front of the LTM R controller
determine the source of these essential settings. These settings are applied only on power-up. The rotary
switches look like this:
The settings of the rotary switches determine the source of the LTM R controller’s IP address parameters
and the FDR service activation, as follows:
Left switch (Tens) Right switch (Ones) Source of IP parameters
0 to 15(1) (1)
0 to 9 DHCP server and FDR service
N/A(2) BootP BootP server
N/A(2) Stored The rotary switch is not used to determine IP

parameters. LTM R configured settings are used. If
none, IP parameters are derived from the MAC address.
Modbus service is disabled.
N/A(2) Clear IP Clears the stored IP settings. No IP addressing settings

are assigned. The network port is disabled.
N/A(2) Disabled The LTMR controller is not available for network

communication. The LTMR controller does not initiate
any IP acquisition process (host register, DHCP...) or
announcements of IP on the network. Network related
errors do not occur.
However, the LTMR controller stays active on at the
Ethernet switch level allowing the daisy chain to function
normally.
(1) The 2 switches yield a value from 000 to 159, which uniquely identifies the device to the DHCP server. In the above
figure, this value is 084, which is the concatenation of the:
z Tens switch (08), and the
z Ones switch (4)
The individual values of each rotary switch - in this case 08 and 4 - are incorporated into the device name, as
described below.
(2) The left (Tens) rotary switch is not used. The right (Ones) rotary switch alone determines the source of IP
parameters.
IP settings are assigned to the following parameters:

z Ethernet IP Address
z Ethernet subnet Mask
z Ethernet Gateway
Getting IP Parameters from a DHCP Server

To obtain IP parameters from a DHCP server, point each rotary switch to a numerical setting, as follows:
Step Description
1 Set the left–Tens–switch to a value from 0 to 15, and
2 Set the right–Ones–switch to a value from 0 to 9
312 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use
Device Name: The settings of the 2 rotary switches are used to determine each LTM R controller’s device
name. The device name consists of a fixed part ("TeSysT") and a dynamic part, composed of:
the two-digit value (00 to 15) of the Tens rotary switch (xx), and
the one-digit value (0 to 9) of the Ones rotary switch (y)
The DCHP server must be pre-configured with the LTM R controller’s device name and its associated IP
parameters. When the DHCP server receives the LTM R controller’s broadcast request, it returns:
z the LTM R controller’s:
z IP address
z subnet mask
z gateway address
z the DHCP server’s IP address

NOTE: While the IP address is not provided by the DHCP server, the TeSys T product declares a major
fault network port FDR (Alarm LED steady red).
NOTE: The LTM R controller uses the DHCP server’s IP address during the Faulty Device Replacement
(FDR) process (see page 312), when making an FTP or TFTP request for device configuration
parameters.
In the figure, above, the device name is: TeSysT084.
NOTE: The DHCP server can provide an IP address to a server device only after the DHCP server has
been configured with the Device Name, described above, for a server device.
Getting IP Parameters from a BootP Server

To obtain IP parameters from a BootP server, point the right—Ones—rotary switch to either of the 2 BootP
settings. (The left—Tens—rotary switch is not used.) The LTM R controller broadcasts a request for IP
parameters to a BootP server, and includes its MAC address in the request.
The BootP server must be pre-configured with the LTM R controller’s MAC address and associated IP
parameters. When the BootP server receives the LTM R controller’s broadcast request, it returns to the
LTM R controller its:
z IP address
z subnet mask
z gateway address
NOTE: The Faulty Device Replacement (FDR) service is not available if the LTM R controller is configured
to receive IP parameters from a BootP server.
Using Stored IP Parameters

You can configure the LTM R controller to apply IP settings that have been previously configured and
stored in the device itself. These stored IP parameters can be configured using your choice of configuration
tool.
To apply stored IP parameters set the right–Ones–switch to either of the Stored positions. (The left—
Tens—switch is not used.)
The LTM R controller uses as its:
z IP address: the Ethernet IP Address Setting parameter
z Subnet mask: the Ethernet Subnet Mask Setting parameters
z Gateway address: the Ethernet Gateway Address Setting parameter
NOTE: If these parameters are not pre-configured, the LTM R controller cannot apply stored settings, but
instead applies default IP parameters, as described below.
NOTE: The FDR service is not available when the LTM R controller is configured to use stored IP
parameters.
Configuring Default IP Parameters from the MAC Address

The LTM R controller derives its default IP parameters from its MAC address, (stored in the device’s
Ethernet MAC Address parameter). The MAC address is a unique identifier associated with the device’s
network interface card (NIC).
As a prerequisite for using the default IP address, all bytes of the configured IP address must be set to zero.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 313

Use
To apply the LTM R controller’s default IP parameters, you must proceed in two steps:
Step Action
1 Clear the existing IP address by setting the right—Ones—rotary switch to Clear IP, then cycle power.
2 Apply the stored IP address settings by setting the right—Ones—rotary switch to Stored, then cycle
power.
The default IP parameters are generated as follows:

z the first 2 byte values of the IP address are always 85.16
z the last 2 byte values of the IP address are derived from the last 2 bytes of the MAC address
z the default subnet mask are always 255.0.0.0
z the default gateway is the same as the device’s default IP address
For example, for a device with a hexadecimal MAC address of 0x000054EF1001, the last two bytes are
0x10 and 0x01. These hexadecimal values translate to decimal values of "16" and "01". The default IP
parameters for this MAC address are:
z IP address: 85.16.16.01
z subnet mask: 255.0.0.0
z gateway address: 85.16.16.01
NOTE: Both the Faulty Device Replacement (FDR) service and the Modbus service are not available when
default IP parameters are used.
314 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use
IP Assignment Process
As depicted in the following graphic, the LTM R controller performs a sequence of inquiries to determine
its IP address:
NOTE: Both the Faulty Device Replacement (FDR) service and the Modbus service are not available when
default IP parameters are used.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 315

Use
The following diagram depicts the assign default IP address process, referenced above:
IP Assignment and STS/NS LED

During the IP address assignment process, while the LTM R is operating normally and is not experiencing
an internal fault, the green STS/NS LED may indicate the following conditions:
Switch setting(s) STS/NS LED behavior Description

BootP Flashes 5 times, then repeats The controller sent a BootP request, but the BootP server did
not deliver valid, unique IP address settings. Waiting for
BootP server.
Flashes 5 times, then solid ON The controller sent a BootP request, and the BootP server
delivered valid and unique IP address settings.
Stored Solid ON The LTM R controller is configured with valid, unique stored
IP address settings.
Flashes 6 times, then repeats No valid, unique IP parameters are stored. Default IP
settings are generated using the MAC address.
Clear IP Flashes 2 times, then repeats IP address settings have been cleared. No IP address
settings are available. Controller cannot communicate using
its Ethernet network ports.
Disabled Solid ON The LTM R controller is configured with valid, unique stored
IP address settings.
Flashes 6 times, then repeats No valid, unique IP parameters are stored. Default IP
settings are generated using the MAC address.
Left (Tens) switch Flashes 5 times, then repeats The controller sent a DHCP request for device name
set to 0-15 (xx) (TeSysTxxy), but the DHCP server did not deliver valid,
Right (Ones) switch unique IP address settings. Waiting for DHCP server.
set to 0-9 (y) Flashes 5 times, then solid ON The controller sent a DHCP request for device name
(TeSysTxxy), and the DHCP server delivered valid and
unique IP address settings.
NOTE: A repeating series of 8 flashes by the STS/NS LED indicates an unrecoverable FDR fault condition.
The causes and potential cures for an unrecoverable FDR fault include:
z An internal communication failure within the LTM R controller: Cycle power to the controller; if that fails,
replace the controller.
z An invalid configuration of the Ethernet properties (typically IP address settings or the Master IP
address): Verify the IP address parameter settings.
z An invalid or corrupt operating parameter file: Transfer a corrected parameter file from the controller to
the parameter file server (see page 320). Refer to the topic Handling Unrecoverable FDR Faults
(see page 252) for additional information. The transfer of a parameter file to the FDR server is only
available with the LTM R controller Ethernet version.
316 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use
Faulty Device Replacement
Overview
The FDR service employs a central server to store both the IP addressing parameters and the operating
parameters for an LTM R controller. When a failed LTM R controller is replaced, the server automatically
configures the replacement LTM R controller with the same IP addressing and operating parameters as
the failed controller.
NOTE: The FDR service is available only when the controller’s Ones rotary switch is set to integers. The
FDR service is not available when the Ones rotary switch is set to BootP, Stored, Clear IP, or Disabled.
The FDR service includes configurable commands and settings that you can access using your choice of
configuration tool. These commands and settings include:
z Commands that let you manually:
z backup the LTM R controller’s operating parameters, by uploading a copy of the device’s parameter
file to the server from the controller, or
z restore the LTM R controller’s parameters, by downloading a copy of the device’s operating
parameter file from the server to the controller.
z Settings that cause the FDR server to automatically synchronize the operating parameter files, in both
the LTM R controller and the server, at configurable time intervals. If a difference is detected, a
parameter file is sent from the controller to the FDR server (auto backup).
Preconditions to FDR
Before the FDR service can function, the FDR server must be configured with:
z the LTM R controller’s network address and related IP addressing parameters, this is done as part of
the IP addressing service (see page 312),
z a copy of the LTM R controller’s operating parameter file, this can be sent from the controller to the
server either manually or automatically, as described below.
FDR and Custom Logic File

The FDR service save custom logic to the operating parameters file if the custom logic file size is lower
than 3 kbytes.
If the custom logic file size is bigger than 3 kbytes, only the operating parameters file is saved.
In this case, when you are replacing a device with a custom logic file size bigger than 3 kbytes, the STS/NS
LED of the new device flashes 8 times signaling a critical error.
To resolve the error and resume operations:
Step Action
1 Use the TeSys T DTM software to download the configuration
2 Cycle power to the LTM R controller
FDR Process
The FDR process consists of 3 parts:
z the assignment of IP address settings,
z a check of the operating parameter file at every LTM R controller startup,
z if auto-synchronization is enabled, periodic checks of the LTM R controller’s operating parameter file.
These 3 processes are described below:
IP address settings assignment process:
Sequence Event
1 Your service personnel uses the rotary switches on the front of the replacement LTM R controller to
assign it the same network address (000 to 159) as the failed device.
2 Your service personnel places the replacement LTM R controller on the network.
3 The LTM R controller automatically sends a DHCP request to the server for its IP parameters.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 317

Use
Sequence Event
4 The server sends the LTM R controller:
z IP parameters, including:
z IP address
z subnet mask
z gateway address
z the server’s IP address
5 The LTM R controller applies its IP parameters.
Startup FDR process:
Sequence Event
6 z If FDR is enabled in the FDR configuration screen:
a The controller sends a request to the FDR server for a copy of the served configuration file.
b The FDR server sends the controller a copy of the served file.
c The controller checks the served file’s version number and size for compatibility with the device.
If the served file is
z compatible, the served file is applied,
z not compatible, the controller enters a critical internal error state(1).
Notes:
1. Because the factory setting of FDR Enable is selected, a new LTM R controller always downloads
and attempts to apply a served file on initial startup.
2. If the downloaded file is empty, the controller will use its local file and send a copy of that file to
the server.
z If FDR Enable is de-selected: The controller applies the operating parameter file stored in the
LTM R controller’s non-volatile memory.
7 The LTM R controller resumes operation.
(1) In the event of an internal critical error, the underlying problem must be resolved and power must be cycled to the
controller before operations can resume.
Auto-synchronization FDR process:
Sequence Event
8 The controller checks the Network Port FDR Auto Backup Period Setting (697) parameter to
determine if the FDR auto-synchronization timer has expired.
9 If the timer has:
z Not expired: No action is taken.
z Expired: The controller checks the Network Port FDR Auto Backup Enable (690.3) parameter.
10 If the Network Port FDR Auto Backup Enable (690.3) parameter is:
z Auto backup (1): The controller sends a copy of the local file to the FDR server.
z No synchro (0): The controller takes no action.
11 The LTM R controller resumes operation.
318 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use
The following diagrams describe the controller’s FDR processes after the assignment of an IP address:
1639505EN-05 04/2015 319

Use
Configuring FDR
The FDR service monitors the operating parameter file maintained in your LTM R controller and compares
it against the corresponding operating parameter file stored in the server.
When the FDR service detects a discrepancy between these 2 files:
z the Network Port FDR Status (see page 321) parameter is set, and
z the 2 operating parameter files, 1 in the server, the other in the controller, must be synchronized.
Synchronizing operating parameter files can be performed either automatically or manually, using your
choice of configuration tool.
Automatically Backup Settings: By setting the following parameters, you can configure your LTM R
controller to automatically synchronize its operating parameters with the FDR server:
Parameter Name Description

Network Port FDR Auto Backup Enable Use this setting to enable/disable automatic synchronization of the
operating parameter files. Selections are:
z No auto backup: Automatic file synchronization is turned OFF
(parameter = 0).
z Auto backup: Automatic file synchronization is turned ON, and
the file in the controller will be copied to the server in case of
discrepancy (parameter = 1).
Network Port FDR Auto Backup Period The frequency, in seconds, between comparisons of the parameter
Setting file in the controller against the parameter file stored in the server.
z Range = 1...65535 s
z Increments = 1 s
z Factory setting = 120 s
NOTE: When automatic synchronization is enabled, it is recommended to set the Network Port FDR Auto
Backup Period Setting parameter to a value greater than 120 s.
Manually Backup and Restore Settings: By executing the commands described below, you can
manually synchronize the operating parameter files in the controller and server:
Command Name Description

FDR Data Backup Command Copies the operating parameter file in the controller to the server.
FDR Data Restore Command Copies the operating parameter file in the server to the controller.
NOTE:
z If FDR Data Backup Command and FDR Data Restore Command bits are set to 1 simultaneously, an
FDR Data Restore Command is proceeded.
z FDR Data Restore Command is active whether Config via network is enabled or not.
z FDR Data Restore Command cannot be done while the LTM R detects line currents.
z Any time the LTM R controller configuration changes, you should manually backup the new
configuration file to the server by clicking Device → File transfert → backup command.
Error Recovery
When the LTM R controller experiences a critical error during the FDR startup process, the STS/NS LED
flashes as follows:
Number of flashes... Indicates the error is...

8 flashes per second unrecoverable
10 flashes per second recoverable
Recoverable errors:
Operations can resume after fixing the error. Recoverable errors include:
z No file on the parameter server (Network Port FDR Status = 3)
z The parameter file server, or TFTP service, is down (Network Port FDR Status = 2)
320 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use
Unrecoverable errors:
When the parameter file in the server is invalid or corrupt, the error is not recoverable. Operations can
resume only after a new parameter file is manually copied from the controller to the server using the
FDR Data Backup Command and power is cycled to the controller. Non-recoverable errors include:
z Version mismatch of the parameter file on the parameter server and the LTM R controller
(Network Port FDR Status = 13)
z CRC mismatch between parameter file on the server and the LTM R controller
(Network Port FDR Status = 9)
z Content of the parameter file is invalid (Network Port FDR Status = 4)
FDR Status
The Network Port FDR Status parameter describes the state of the FDR service, as described below.
NOTE: FDR status values are valid only when the LTM R controller is in an error condition.
FDR Status:
Value Description
0 Ready, IP available, no error
1 No response from IP server
2 No response from parameter server
3 No file on parameter server
4 Corrupt file on parameter server
5 Empty file on parameter server
6 Internal communication fault (from network port to HMI port)
7 Write error copying settings to parameter server
8 Invalid settings provided by the controller
9 CRC mismatch between parameter server and controller
10 Invalid IP
11 Duplicate IP
12 FDR disabled
13 Device Parameter File Version Mismatch (for example, when attempting to replace an LTM R 08EBD
with an LTM R 100 EBD)
1639505EN-05 04/2015 321

Use
Discovery Procedure
Overview
Discovery is an automated method to identify and connect to a device with an unknown IP address, using
a direct PC connection and a web page access interface.
Discovery is only available on MS Windows Vista, 7 and 8 operating systems.
Step Automated Action

1 Connect the PC to the TeSys T using a RJ45 cable.
2 z Open Windows Explorer
z Expand Network to view all network connections
z The Connected device should appear in the list within a few seconds
3 Double-click the connected TeSys T.

The name of the TeSys T is:
z TeSys T-XXYYZZ (where XXYYZZ are the last 3 bytes of MAC address in hexadecimal
format) if TeSys T is not configured in DHCP mode.
z TeSys T-XYZ (where XY is the position of Tens rotary switch and Z is the position of Ones
rotary switch) if TeSys T is configured in DHCP mode.
4 Access the TeSys T in the webpage interface.
NOTE: If the product cannot be detected, deactivate the antivirus and the firewall and then retry. Do not
forget to restart the antivirus when finished.
322 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use
Ethernet Diagnostics
Overview
The LTM R controller reports diagnostic data describing its Ethernet network communications interface,
including:
z data parameters that describe the controller’s:
z IP addressing settings
z IP address assignment processes
z virtual connections
z communication history
z communication services and their status
z one parameter that describes the validity of the data in each data parameter
NOTE: It is recommended to read the diagnostics registers every second.
NOTE: The response to the first request contains either all zeroes or old data. The response to the second
and subsequent requests contains current network port diagnostic data.
Ethernet Basic HW Diag Validity

The Ethernet Basic HW Diag Validity parameter evaluates and reports the validity of Ethernet network
diagnostic data. A bit in this parameter represents the state of an associated Ethernet network data
parameter.
Bit values are:
Value Indicates the parameter data is...

0 invalid
1 valid
The Ethernet Basic HW Diag Validity parameter is 32 bits long.

The bits of this parameter represent the validity of the following Ethernet data parameters:
Bit Describes the validity of data in this parameter...

0 IP address assignment mode
1 Ethernet device name
2 Ethernet MB messages received counter
3 Ethernet MB messages sent counter
4 Ethernet MB error messages sent counter
5 Ethernet opened servers counter
6 Ethernet opened clients counter
7 Ethernet transmitted correct frames counter
8 Ethernet received correct frames counter
9 Ethernet frame format
10 Ethernet MAC address
11 Ethernet gateway
12 Ethernet subnet mask
13 Ethernet IP address
14 Ethernet service status
15 (not applicable - always 0)
16 Ethernet services
17 Ethernet global status
18...31 (Reserved - always 0)
1639505EN-05 04/2015 323

Use
Ethernet Global Status

The Ethernet Global Status parameter indicates the status of the following services provided by the LTM R
controller:
z faulty device replacement (FDR)
z SNMP network management
z Modbus port 502 messaging (Modbus/TCP only)
This parameter is 2 bits long.
Parameter values are:
Bit Indicates...
0 at least 1 enabled service is operating with an unresolved error
1 all enabled services are operating without error
Ethernet Global Status is cleared on power cycle and controller reset.
Ethernet Services Validity

The Ethernet Services Validity parameter indicates whether the LTM R controller supports the port 502
messaging service.
NOTE: Port 502 is exclusively reserved for Modbus messages.
The Ethernet Supported Services parameter is 1 bit long.
Value Indicates the port 502 messaging service is...

0 not supported
1 supported
Ethernet Services Status

The Ethernet Services Status parameter indicates the status of the Ethernet Supported Services
parameter, i.e., the status of the controller’s port 502 messaging service.
Value Indicates the port 502 messaging service is...

1 idle
2 operational
Ethernet Services Status is cleared on power cycle and controller reset.
Ethernet IP Address
The Ethernet IP Address parameter describes the IP address that has been assigned to the LTM R
controller by the IP address assignment process (see page 312).
The Ethernet IP Address consists of 4 byte values, in dot-decimal notation. Each byte value is an integer
from 000 to 255.
Ethernet Subnet Mask

The Ethernet Subnet Mask parameter is applied to the Ethernet IP Address value to define the host
address of the LTM R controller.
The Ethernet Subnet Mask consists of 4 byte values, in dot-decimal notation. Each byte value is an integer
from 000 to 255.
Ethernet Gateway Address

The Ethernet Gateway Address parameter describes the address of the default gateway, i.e., the node that
serves as an access point to other networks for communications from or to the LTM R controller.
The Ethernet Gateway Address consists of 4 byte values, in dot-decimal notation. Each byte value is an
integer from 000 to 255.
324 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use
Ethernet MAC Address

The Ethernet MAC Address parameter describes the media access control (MAC) address, or hardware
identifier, uniquely assigned to an LTM R controller.
The Ethernet MAC Address consists of 6 hexadecimal byte values, from 0x00 to 0xFF.
Ethernet II Framing
The Ethernet II Framing parameter describes the Ethernet frame formats supported by the LTM R
controller, including:
z capability: can the device support a frame format?
z configuration: is the device configured to support a frame format?
z operational: is the configured frame format operating successfully?
NOTE: The Ethernet frame type, Ethernet II or 802.3, is configured using the Network Port Frame Type
Setting parameter.
This parameter is 3 words long.
Ethernet II framing data is stored as follows:
Word Bit Description Values

1 0 Ethernet II framing supported z 0 = not supported
z 1 = supported
1 Ethernet II framing receiver supported z 0 = not supported

z 1 = supported
2 Ethernet II framing sender supported z 0 = not supported

z 1 = supported
3 Ethernet auto detection supported z 0 = not supported

z 1 = supported
4-15 (Reserved) always 0

2 0 Ethernet II framing configured z 0 = not configured
z 1 = configured
1 Ethernet II framing receiver configured z 0 = not configured

z 1 = configured
2 Ethernet II framing sender configured z 0 = not configured

z 1 = configured
3 Ethernet auto detection configured z 0 = not configured

z 1 = configured

3 0 Ethernet II framing operational z 0 = not operational
z 1 = operational
1 Ethernet II framing receiver operational z 0 = not operational

z 1 = operational
2 Ethernet II framing sender operational z 0 = not operational

z 1 = operational
3 Ethernet auto detection operational z 0 = not operational

z 1 = operational
Ethernet Received Correct Frames Counter

The Ethernet Received Correct Frames Counter parameter contains a count of the total number of
Ethernet frames that have been successfully received by the LTM R controller.
This parameter is an UDInt parameter. It is cleared on power cycle and controller reset.
The Ethernet Received Correct Frames Counter consists of 4 hexadecimal values, from 0x00 to 0xFF.
Ethernet Transmitted Correct Frames Counter

The Ethernet Transmitted Correct Frames Counter parameter contains a count of the total number of
Ethernet frames that have been successfully transmitted by the LTM R controller.
The Ethernet Transmitted Correct Frames Counter consists of 4 hexadecimal values, from 0x00 to 0xFF.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 325

Use
Ethernet Opened Clients Counter

The Ethernet Opened Clients Counter parameter contains a count of the number of open TCP client
connections. It applies only to devices with TCP clients.
This parameter is an UInt parameter. It is cleared on power cycle and controller reset.
The Ethernet Opened Clients Counter consists of 2 hexadecimal values, from 0x00 to 0xFF.
Ethernet Opened Servers Counter

The Ethernet Opened Servers Counter parameter contains a count of the number of open TCP server
connections. It applies only to devices with TCP servers.
This parameter is an UInt parameter. It is cleared on power cycle and controller reset.
The Ethernet Opened Servers Counter consists of 2 hexadecimal values, from 0x00 to 0xFF.
Ethernet MB Error Messages Sent Counter

The Ethernet MB Error Messages Sent Counter parameter contains a count of the number of:
z EtherNet/IP or Modbus/TCP request packets with errors in the header that have been received by this
LTM R controller (does not count errors in the data portion of EtherNet/IP or Modbus/TCP request
packets)
z EtherNet/IP or Modbus/TCP exceptions due to incorrect combination of physical port and Unit ID
(see page 333)
Ethernet MB Messages Sent Counter

The Ethernet MB Messages Sent Counter parameter contains the total number of Modbus messages,
excluding Modbus error messages, that have been sent by this LTM R controller.
Ethernet MB Messages Received Counter

The Ethernet MB Messages Received Counter parameter contains the total number of Modbus messages
that have been received by this LTM R controller.
Ethernet Device Name

The Ethernet Device Name parameter contains the 16 character string used to identify the LTM R
controller.
This parameter is 16 bytes long.
Ethernet IP Assignment Capability

The Ethernet IP Assignment Capability parameter describes the available IP addressing sources for the
LTM R controller. Up to 4 different IP addressing sources can be described.
The Ethernet IP Assignment Capability parameter stores data as follows:
Bit IP addressing source... Values

0 A DHCP server, using the device name set by the 2 rotary switches z 0 = not available
z 1 = available
1 Derived from the MAC address. The Ones rotary switch is set to z 0 = not available
BootP, but no IP address was received from the server. z 1 = available
2 Derived from the MAC address. Both rotary switches are set to z 0 = not available
integers, but no IP address was received from the DHCP server. z 1 = available
3 The stored configuration parameters: z 0 = not available

z Ethernet IP Address Setting z 1 = available
326 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use
Ethernet IP Assignment Operational

The Ethernet IP Assignment Operational parameter describes how the current IP address was assigned
to the LTM R controller. Only 1 (of 4) different IP address sources can be operational at any one time.
The Ethernet IP Assignment Operational parameter stores data as follows:
Bit IP addressing source... Values

0 A DHCP server, using the device name set by the 2 rotary switches z 0 = not operational
z 1 = operational
1 Derived from the MAC address. The Ones rotary switch is set to z 0 = not operational
BootP, but no IP address was received from the server. z 1 = operational
2 Derived from the MAC address. Both rotary switches are set to z 0 = not operational
integers, but no IP address was received from the DHCP server. z 1 = operational
3 The stored configuration parameters: z 0 = not operational

z Ethernet IP Address Setting z 1 = operational
1639505EN-05 04/2015 327

Use
Simple Network Management Protocol
Overview
The LTM R controller includes an SNMP version 3.0 agent that can connect to and communicate with an
SNMP manager via the UDP transport protocol over port 161.
The SNMP service includes:
z automatic discovery and identification of the LTM R by an SNMP manager over an Ethernet network
z authentication checking, by the LTM R controller, of any SNMP manager that sends requests to the
controller
z management of event, or trap, reporting by the LTM R controller, including the identification of 2 SNMP
managers authorized to receive reports
z full support of MIB-II (standard TCP/IP) parameters
NOTE: Access to, and configuration of, the SNMP parameters is available only using the TeSys T DTM.
SNMP Agents and Managers

The SNMP management model uses the following terms and definitions:
z manager, the client application (for example, Connexium Network Manager, (CNM) or a simple MIB
browser) running on the PC
z agent, the server application running on a network device, in this case the LTM R controller
An SNMP manager communicates with an agent by sending queries for the purpose of reading data from,
and writing data to, the agent. An SNMP manager uses UDP to establish communications with an agent
via an open Ethernet interface.
Agents can also initiate communications with a manager by sending unsolicited trap messages, which
report the occurrence of specific events.
SNMP Messages
SNMP supports the following types of messages between the manager and the agent:
z Get: the manager requests an agent to send information.
z Set: the manager requests an agent to change information stored by the agent.
z Response: the client replies to a Get or Set request.
z Trap: the agent sends an unsolicited report to the manager that an event has occurred.
MIB-II defines the agent properties that the manager can Get or Set.
Trap Reporting
A trap is an agent-detected event that indicates either
z a change has occurred in the status of the agent, or
z an unauthorized manager device has attempted to get data from, or change data on, the agent
Configure the LTM R controller’s SNMP agent to report traps to 1 or 2 authorized SNMP managers. Allows
to enable or to disable certain traps.
The LTM R controller supports the following traps:
Trap Description Configurable in the

TeSys T DTM?
Authentication Failure The agent received a request from an unauthorized manager. Yes (enable/disable)
Cold Start The agent is re-initializing and its configuration may be altered. No (always enabled)
Link Down One of the agent’s communication links has failed. No (always enabled)
Link Up One of the agent’s communication links has turned on. No (always enabled)
Warm Start The agent’s configuration has changed. No (always enabled)
328 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use
Security
SNMP uses community names to provide security against the unauthorized access to the LTM R’s
configuration settings and trap notifications. A community name acts a password. Each type of
communication (Get, Set and Trap) can be separately configured with a password.
Both the manager and the agent must be configured with the same password, for a communication type,
to permit:
z the agent to accept get or set requests from the manager, and
z the manager to accept trap notifications from the agent
Configuring the SNMP Service

Using the TeSys T DTM, you can access the following SNMP-related parameters:
TeSys T DTM Field Name Parameter Name Value

SNMP Manager Address 1 Ethernet SNMP Manager Address 1 Setting. 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
default = 0.0.0.0
SNMP Manager Address 2 Ethernet SNMP Manager Address 2 Setting. 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
default = 0.0.0.0
SNMP System Name(1) Ethernet SNMP System Name Setting. LTMR••E••
SNMP System Location(1) Ethernet SNMP System Location Setting. 0...32 characters
SNMP System Contact (1) Ethernet SNMP System Contact Setting. 0...32 characters
GET Community Name Ethernet SNMP Community Name Get Setting. 0...16 characters;
default = public
SET Community Name Ethernet SNMP Community Name Set Setting. 0...16 characters;
default = private
TRAP Community Name Ethernet SNMP Community Name Trap Setting. 0...16 characters;
default = public
"Authentication failure" Trap Network Port SNMP Trap Authentication Failure Yes/No; default = Yes
Enable.
(1) It is recommended practice that any change to these parameter values be made using the TeSys T DTM software,
and not via the SNMP manager.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 329

Use
Section 7.7
Using the Modbus®/TCP Communication Protocol
Using the Modbus®/TCP Communication Protocol
Overview
This section describes how to use the controller over a Modbus®/TCP communication protocol network.
WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
WARNING
Check that the PLC application software:

Topic Page
®
Modbus /TCP Protocol Principle 331
Modbus /TCP Requests ® 333
Modbus Exception Management 334

I/O Scanning Configuration 335
330 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use
Modbus®/TCP Protocol Principle
Overview
The Modbus/TCP protocol is a client/server protocol:
1 client (PLC, PC, or communication module)

2 Straight or crossed category 5 shielded/unshielded twisted pair Ethernet cable with RJ45 connector
Only 1 device can transmit in one direction over a segment at any time.
The client manages and initiates the exchange. It interrogates each of the server s in succession. No server
can send a message unless it is invited to do so.
The client repeats the question when there is an incorrect exchange, and declares the interrogated server
absent if no response is received within a given time period.
If a server does not understand a message, it does nothing. It sends an exception response to the client
when a message is understood but contains errors, or when the server is not able to handle the request
(e.g. due to resource problems). The client may or may not retransmit the request.
NOTE: For further details on Modbus function codes visit the web site: http://modbus.org/specs.php
Modbus/TCP Dialog
Modbus/TCP supports only unicast dialogs, comprising requests made by a client to a server and the
server’s response.
Direct server-to-server communications are not possible. For server-to-server communication, the client
must therefore interrogate a server and send back data received to the other server.
Modbus/TCP Messaging
Modbus/TCP is the Modbus protocol encapsulated in TCP. The Modbus/TCP communications protocol
combines the:
z Modbus application layer protocol (layer 7 of OSI model), which provides the messaging structure for
organizing and interpreting data, and
z TCP transport layer protocol (layer 4 of the TCP/IP stack), which provides a reliable transmission
medium for communications between devices on an Ethernet network
The TCP frame, with embedded Modbus data, is sent via TCP to system port 502, which is exclusively
reserved for Modbus applications, and added to a TCP/IP Ethernet data packet for network transmission.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 331

Use
Virtual Connections
Although there can be either 1 or 2 physical connections between a client and a server—depending upon
the network topology (star (see page 240) or daisy chain (see page 241))—Modbus/TCP supports the use
of multiple virtual connections.
A virtual connection - or socket - combines:
z the client IP address (e.g., the Modbus/TCP client)
z a unique port on the server
z the server IP address (the LTM R controller server)
z a unique port on the client
z the TCP protocol
Multiple virtual connections enable multiple simultaneous - instead of serial - transactions between the
client and the server.
Modbus/TCP supports several types of simultaneous client/server transactions, as follows:
Transaction type Limits on the number of simultaneous virtual connections

Modbus 8 maximum
Notes:
z If a new connection is created when 8 connections already exist, the new connection
replaces the pre-existing connection, whose most recent transaction is the oldest.
z You can identify a connection as a Master IP connection, thereby preventing it from being
automatically replaced when the maximum number of connections is exceeded.
SNMP unlimited
FDR 1 maximum
FTP 1 minimum
332 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use
Modbus®/TCP Requests
Modbus/TCP Requests
You can use all physical ports—the LTM E/HMI port and either of the 2 Ethernet communications ports—
to send and receive Modbus/TCP requests. However, specific communications functions can be
performed only using specific combinations of:
z physical port, and
z Unit ID
NOTE: Failure to use the correct combination of physical port and Unit ID will cause the LTM R controller
to report a Modbus/TCP exception.
Modbus/TCP supports the following requests, which can be performed using the physical ports and Unit
ID codes set forth below:
Function Using these port and Unit ID combinations...

Request description
code/subcode Ethernet ports LTM E/HMI port
3/- Read N output words (multiple registers) Unit ID = 0 to 254 Modbus address = 1 to 247
6/- Write 1 output word (single register) Unit ID = 0 to 254 Modbus address= 1 to 247
8/22 Read or clear diagnostic data Unit ID = 255 (Not available)
16/- Write N output words (multiple registers) Unit ID = 0 to 254 Modbus address = 1 to 247
23/- Read / write multiple registers Unit ID = 0 to 254 Modbus address = 1 to 247
43/14 Read identification (identification register) (Reserved) Modbus address = 1 to 247
The maximum number of registers per request is limited to 100.

NOTE: For further details on Modbus function codes visit the following web site:
http://modbus.org/specs.php
WARNING
Use of this device on a Modbus network that uses the broadcast function should be considered with
caution.
This device has a large number of registers that must not be modified during normal operation.
Unintended writing of these registers by the broadcast function may cause unexpected and unwanted
product operation.
For more information, refer to the Communication variables list.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 333

Use
Modbus Exception Management
Overview
The LTM R controller generally follows the Modbus requirements for the Exception Management.
3 special cases apply to the LTM R controller:
z Bit-Field Registers
z Exception Code 02 - Illegal Data Address
z Exception Code 03 - Illegal Data Value
Bit-Field Registers
Some registers in the Register Map are bit-field. Based on the LTM R controller state, some bits in those
registers shall not be writable. In this case, the LTM R controller shall reject the write to those bits meaning
that no exception shall be returned. For example, bits that can be written only in configuration mode will be
ignored (no exception returned) if the LTM R controller is out of the Sys Config State. The write to the bits
not constrained by the LTM R controller state shall however occur.
Exception Code 02 - Illegal Data Address

In general, the LTM R controller shall return an illegal data address exception code, if the address is out of
range or inaccessible. Specifically, the LTM R controller shall return an illegal data address if:
z A Write request is sent to a Read only register.
z The permission to write a register is not granted because of the LTM R controller state: this is the case,
for example, when a register that can be written only in configuration mode is written while the LTM R
controller is out of Sys Config state.
Exception Code 03 - Illegal Data Value

In general, the LTM R controller shall return an illegal data value exception code if there is a problem with
the structure of the message, such as an invalid length. The LTM R controller shall also use this exception
code if:
z The data to be written is out of range (for standard and bit-field registers): this is the case if a write
request of 100 is sent to a R/W register with a range of 0 to 50.
z A reserved bit or register is written to a value different than 0.
z Motor low speed command (bit 704.6) is set while the motor controller mode selected is not a two-speed
mode of operation.
334 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use
I/O Scanning Configuration
Mirroring High Priority Registers

The LTM R controller provides a block of 9 contiguous registers dedicated to scanning that mirror the
values and functionality of selected high priority registers (see page 422).
The LTM R controller reads the values of all high priority registers whenever it detects a change to any
single high priority register, and writes the values of all high priority registers to the mirroring registers.
Because the mirroring registers are contiguous, it is possible to execute a single Modbus block read or
block write request to these registers, thereby saving the time it would take to make separate Modbus
read/write requests directly to each underlying high priority register.
Mirroring Status
Mirroring status (see page 422) is the first register, in the sequence of eight contiguous mirroring registers.
Bits 0...2 of this register describe the status of read-only commands, and bits 8...10 describe the status of
read/write commands (see page 422).
NOTE: Use only the 2 Ethernet ports to read mirroring status register bit values. Using the HMI/LTM E port
produces an invalid, constant value of 0 for each bit.
All other mirroring status registers can be read accurately using either the HMI/LTM E port or the
2 Ethernet ports.
Configuring I/O Scanning

Your success in configuring I/O scanning of registers depends upon:
z the register type
z the I/O scanning period
z the I/O scanning health timeout period
The following table describes the I/O scanning and I/O scanning health timeout settings for read and write
transactions for registers of varying types with only 1 connection on the LTM R controller:
Transaction Register Type I/O Scan Period I/O Scan Health

(Minimum) Timeout (Minimum)
Any combination of 100 Any register except: 200 ms 500 ms
read/write transactions Mirroring, FDR, or diagnostic
10 max, and 5 max write Any register except: 50 ms 200 ms
transactions Mirroring, FDR, or diagnostic
Read transactions Mirroring registers: 5 ms 100 ms
2500 to 2505 address range
Write transactions Mirroring registers: 50 ms 200 ms
2506 to 2508 address range
Read/Write transaction Mirroring registers: 50 ms 200 ms
z 2500 to 2505 address range: read
z 2506 to 2508 address range: write
Any number of read FDR registers: 200 ms 500 ms

transactions 10001 to 10010 address range
Any number of read Diagnostic registers: 1000 ms 2000 ms
transactions 2000 to 2039 address range
NOTE: Any settings for I/O scan period or I/O scan health timeout, lower than described above, can cause
the LTM R controller to send Modbus exception packets.
If there are multiple connections to the LTM R Controller, the I/O scanning and I/O scanning health timeout
settings for read and write transactions for registers are reduced. Total number of registers accessed
(Read and write ) in IO scan (counting the repeated registers also) should not exceed 500 registers per
second.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 335

Use
For example, with 8 connections:
Connection Start of Read Number of Read Start of Write Number of Scan Rate
Register Register Register Write
Registers
1 2500 7 – – 64
2 451 64 2506 3 256
3 900 99 – – 256
4 2000 39 – – 1024
5 1001 10 – – 512
6 600 20 – – 512
7 660 20 – – 512
8 680 20 – – 512
336 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use
Section 7.8
Using the EtherNet/IP Communication Protocol
Using the EtherNet/IP Communication Protocol
Overview
This section describes how to use the controller over an EtherNet/IP communication protocol network.
WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
WARNING

Topic Page
EtherNet/IP Protocol Principles 339
Connections and Data Exchange 340
Device Profiles and EDS Files 341
Object Dictionary 342
Identity Object 343
Message Router Object 345
Assembly Object 347
Connection Manager Object 353
TCP/IP Object 355
Ethernet Link Object 357
Control Supervisor Object 359
Overload Object 363
Periodically Kept Acyclic Words (PKW) Objects 365
TeSys T Monitoring Control Object 368
EtherNet/IP Interface Diagnostic Object 369
1639505EN-05 04/2015 337

Use
Topic Page
I/O Connection Diagnostic Object 372
Explicit Connection Diagnostic Object 374
Explicit Connection Diagnostic List Object 376
338 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use
EtherNet/IP Protocol Principles
Overview
EtherNet/IP is an application layer protocol treating devices on the network as a series of objects. It is an
implementation of the common industrial protocol (CIP) over TCP/IP.
The network carries control data and the properties of the device being controlled. It enables you to operate
either in a client/server mode or a peer-to-peer mode.
Two main types of messages can be exchanged:
z I/O messaging, dedicated to fast exchanges of process data.
z Explicit messaging, dedicated to slower exchanges such as configuration, settings, or diagnostics data.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 339

Use
Connections and Data Exchange
I/O Messaging
I/O messages contain application-specific data. They are communicated across single or multicast
connections between an application producer and its corresponding consuming application. Because
I/O messages carry time-critical messages, they have high-priority identifiers.
An I/O Message consists of a Connection ID and associated I/O data. The meaning of the data within an
I/O Message is implied by the associated Connection ID. The connection endpoints are assumed to have
knowledge of the intended use or meaning of the I/O Message.
Connection ID
Connection ID is the identifier assigned to a transmission that is associated with a particular connection
between producers and consumers that identifies a specific piece of an application information.
I/O Message Types

Slave devices are configured to produce a cyclic I/O message.
They produce their data at a precisely defined interval. This type of I/O messaging enables to configure the
system to produce data at a rate appropriate for the application. Depending on the application this can
reduce the amount of traffic on the wire and more efficiently use the available bandwidth.
The following connections are defined:
ID Name Output Assembly Input Assembly

1 Basic Overload Instance 2 Instance 50
2 Extended Overload Instance 2 Instance 51
3 Basic Motor Starter Instance 3 Instance 52
4 Extended Contactor Instance 4 Instance 53
5 Extended Motor Starter 1 Instance 4 Instance 54
6 Extended Motor Starter 2 Instance 5 Instance 54
7 LTM R Control and Monitoring Instance 100 Instance 110
8 PKW Instance 101 Instance 111
9 PKW and Extended Motor Starter Instance 102 Instance 112
10 PKW and LTM1 Management Instance 103 Instance 113
11 E_TeSys T Fast Access Instance 105 Instance 115
12 EIOS_TeSys T Instance 106 Instance 116
Explicit Messaging
Explicit messaging connections provide multipurpose point-to-point communication paths between
2 particular devices. Explicit messages are used to command the performance of a particular task and to
report the results of performing the task. You can, therefore, use explicit messaging connections to
configure nodes and diagnose problems.
RPI Parameter
The Request Packet Interval (RPI) parameter defines the rate at which a remote device periodically sends
its data.
In daisy chain, adapt RPI value according to number of information exchanged per device and number of
devices connected:
z with 5 devices connected, the RPI value is 30 ms for 5 devices in Basic Overload profile selected (value
is calculated with M340 and NOC card (BMX NOC0401)).
z with 16 devices connected, the RPI value is 80 ms for 16 devices in Basic Overload profile selected
(value is calculated with M340 and NOC card (BMX NOC0401)).
340 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use
Device Profiles and EDS Files
Device Profiles
EtherNet/IP’s device models define the physical connections and promote interoperability among standard
devices.
Devices that implement the same device model must support common identity and communications status
data. Device-specific data is contained in device profiles that are defined for various device types.
Typically, a device profile defines the device’s:
z object model
z I/O data format
z configurable parameters
The above information is made available to other vendors through the device’s EDS (electronic data
sheet).
For a full description of the objects in the LTM R device profile, see LTM R Object Dictionary, page 342.
What is an EDS?
The EDS is a standardized ASCII file that contains information about a network device’s communications
functionalities and the contents of its object dictionary (see page 342), as defined by ODVA (Open
EtherNet/IP Vendor Association). The EDS also defines device-specific and manufacturer-specific objects.
Using the EDS, you can use standardized tools to:
z configure EtherNet/IP devices
z design networks for EtherNet/IP devices
z manage project information on different platforms
The parameters of a particular device depend on those objects (parameter, application, communications,
emergency, and other objects) that reside on the device.
LTM R Controller EDS Files

EDS files and associated icons that describe the various configurations of the LTM R controller can be
downloaded from www.schneider-electric.com website (Products and Services > Automation and Control
> Product offers > Motor Control > TeSys T > Downloads > Software/Firmware > EDS&GSD).
EDS files and icons are grouped in a single compressed Zip file that you must unzip to a single directory
on your hard disk drive.
Selection Criteria for TeSys® T LTM R Controller Variants

There are 4 EDS files corresponding to the 4 possible configurations of the TeSys® T Motor Management
Controller system:
Choose... When you want to use...

SE TeSys T MMC L EIP A TeSys® T Motor Management Controller system without an expansion module,
configurable via the HMI port. This variant enables you to preserve your local
configuration.
SE TeSys T MMC L A TeSys® T Motor Management Controller system with expansion module, configurable
EV40 EIP via the HMI port. This variant enables you to preserve your local configuration.
SE TeSys T MMC R EIP A TeSys® T Motor Management Controller system without expansion module
configurable via the network.
SE TeSys T MMC R A TeSys® T Motor Management Controller system with expansion module configurable
EV40 EIP via the network.
In local configuration mode, the parameter Config via Network Port Enable must be disabled. This mode
preserves the local configuration made using the LTMCU or SoMove with the TeSys T DTM through the
HMI port and prevents PLC configuration via the network.
In remote configuration mode the parameter Config via Network Port Enable must be enabled. This
enables the PLC to remotely configure the L R controller.
NOTE: The parameters overwritten by the PLC will be lost. Remote mode is useful when replacing faulty
devices.
The Config via Network Port Enable parameter is set by default.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 341

Use
Object Dictionary
Overview
The EtherNet/IP protocol is used for object modeling. Object modeling organizes related data and
procedures into one entity: the object.
An object is a collection of related services and attributes. Services are procedures an object performs.
Attributes are characteristics of objects represented by values, which can vary. Typically, attributes provide
status information or govern the operation of an object. The value associated with an attribute may or may
not affect the behavior of an object. An object’s behavior is an indication of how the object responds to
particular events.
Objects within a class are called object instances. An object instance is the actual representation of a
particular object within a class. Each instance of a class has the same set of attributes, but has its own set
of attribute values, which makes each instance in the class unique. The Object Dictionary describes the
attribute values of each object in the device profile.
LTM R Object Dictionary

The general breakdown of the LTM R Ethernet brick object dictionary is the same for all EtherNet/IP
devices:
Class code Object Description

0x01 Identity Object Identifiers, such as device type, vendor ID, and
serial number.
0x02 Message Router Object Provides a message connection point.
0x04 Assembly Object Provides collection of other object’s attributes
(frequently used for I/O messaging).
0x06 Connection Manager Object Provides for and manages the run-time exchange
of messages.
0x64 - 0x96 Communication Variables Provides the details of the communication
variables.
0xF5 TCP/IP Object Provides description of an opened explicit
connection and associated communicator.
0xF6 Ethernet link Object Manages the functionality of the physical
attachment to the Ethernet network.
0x29 Control Supervisor Object Manages controller functions, operational states,
and control.
0x2C Overload Object Implements overload behavior.
0xC5 Periodically Kept Acyclic Words (PKW) Object Enables cyclic I/O messaging for manufacturer
specific registers.
0xC6 EtherNet/IP Monitoring Object Used to select monitoring data available on
Assembly 110.
0x350 EtherNet/IP Interface Diagnostic Object Provides an overall diagnostic of the EIP
communication of the EIP Interface of a device.
0x352 I/O Connection Diagnostic Object Provides the detailed diagnostic of each
configured CIP I/O connection viewed from a
scanner, and of each opened CIP I/O connection
viewed from an adapter.
0x353 Explicit Connection Diagnostic Object Provides a description of an opened Explicit
Connection and associated communication.
0x354 Explicit Connection Diagnostic List Object Provides a snapshot of the list of instantiated
"Explicit Connection Diagnostic” objects.
These objects are described in detail in the following pages.
342 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use
Identity Object
Description
This object, present in all EtherNet/IP products, provides identification of, and general information about,
the device.
Class Code
The class code is 0x01 as defined by CIP.
Class Attributes
Attribute ID Name Access Description

0x01 Revision R The Identity objects implementation revision.
Returns 0x01.
0x02 Max Instance R The largest instance number.
Returns 0x01.
0x03 Number of Instances R The number of object instances.
Returns 0x01.
0x04 Optional Instance R Not supported
Attribute List
0x06 Max Class Attribute R The largest class attributes value.
Returns 0x07.
0x07 Max Instance R The largest instance attributes value.
Attribute Returns 0x07.
Class Services
Service code Name Description

0x01 Get Attribute All Returns the value of all class attributes.
0x0E Get Attribute Single Returns the value of the specified attribute.
Instance Codes
Only one instance is implemented.
Instance Attributes

0x01 Vendor ID R Vendor ID (243: Schneider Electric)
0x02 Device Type R Motor starter profile (22)
0x03 Device Code R TeSys T EtherNet/IP code:
z 48: LTM R in Remote configuration mode
z 49: LTM R and LTMEV40 in Remote configuration
mode
z 304: LTM R in Local configuration mode
z 305: LTM R and LTMEV40 in Local configuration
mode
0x04 Identity Revision R Product version. product communication version
0x05 Identity Status R Current status of the device
0x06 Device Serial Number R Based on device entity and MAC:
z 0x20: Byte 0 (Entity ID for TeSys T)
z Bytes 1...3: Last 3 bytes of MAC address
0x07 Product Name R Commercial reference
1639505EN-05 04/2015 343

Use
Instance Services

0x01 Get Attribute All Returns the value of all instance attributes with the access
type of R.
0x05 Reset Emulates device reset (only 0–1 are supported).
0x0E Get Attribute Single Returns the value of the specified identity attribute with the
access type of R.
344 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use
Message Router Object
Description
The Message Router Object provides a messaging connection point through which a Client may address
a service to any object class or instance in the physical device.
Class Code
The Class code is 0x02 as defined by CIP.
Class Attributes

0x01 Revision R The Message Router Object implementation revision.
Returns 0x01.
Returns 0x01.
Returns 0x01.
0x04 Optional Attribute List R The number and list of the optional attributes.
The first word contains the number of attributes to follow and
every word that follows contains another attribute code.
You can include the Current Packets per Second and Total
Traffic attributes from the EtherNet/IP Statistics section in this
list. For more details, see the instance attributes
(see page 345).
0x05 Optional Service List R The number and list of any implemented optional services.
Only the Multiple Service request (0x0A) is supported for
now.
0x06 Max Class Attribute R The largest Class Attribute value. Returns 0x07.
0x07 Max Instance Attribute R The largest Instance Attribute value. Returns 0x77.
Class Services

Instance Codes
Instance Attributes

0x01 Implemented Object List R Implemented Object list. The first 2 bytes contain
the number of implemented objects.
In the following list of objects, every 2 bytes
represent another implemented class number:
z Identity
z Message Router
z Assembly
z Connection Manager
z QoS
z TCP/IP
z Ethernet Link
z Control Supervisor
z Overload
z PKW
z KMC
0x02 Max Connection Number R Maximum number of concurrent CIP (Class 1 or

Supported Class 3) connections supported. Returns 32.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 345

Use

0x64 Total incoming Class 1 packets R Total number of incoming packets received for all
received during the last second implicit (Class 1) connections during the last
second.
0x65 Total outgoing Class 1 packets sent R Total number of outgoing packets sent for all
during the last second implicit (Class 1) connections during the last
second.
0x66 Total incoming Class 3 packets R Total number of incoming packets for all explicit
received during the last second (Class 3) connections during the last second.
0x67 Total outgoing Class 3 packets sent R Total number of Class 3 packets sent for all
during the last second explicit connections.
0x68 Total incoming unconnected R Total number of incoming unconnected packets
packets received during the last received during the last second.
second
0x69 Total outgoing unconnected R Total number of unconnected responses sent
packets sent during the last second during the last second.
0x6A Total incoming EtherNet/IP packets R Total unconnected, Class 1, or Class 3 packets
received during the last second received during the last second.
0x6B Total outgoing EtherNet/IP packets R Total unconnected, Class 1, or Class 3 packets
sent during the last second sent during the last second.
0x6C Total incoming Class 1 packets R Total number of incoming packets received for all
received implicit (Class 1) connections.
0x6D Total outgoing Class 1 packets sent R Total number of outgoing packets sent for all
implicit (Class 1) connections.
0x6E Total incoming Class 3 packets R Total number of incoming packets for all explicit
received (Class 3) connections. This number includes the
packets that would return with a detected error
(listed in the next two rows).
0x6F Total incoming Class 3 packets R Total number of incoming Class 3 packets that
Invalid Parameter Value targeted not supported
service/class/instance/attribute/member.
0x70 Total incoming Class 3 packets R Total number of incoming Class 3 packets that
invalid format had an invalid format.
0x71 Total outgoing Class 3 packets sent R Total number of packets sent for all explicit (Class
3) connections.
0x72 Total incoming unconnected R Total number of incoming unconnected packets.
packets received This number includes the packets that returns
with a detected error (listed in the next two rows).
packets Invalid Parameter Value that targeted not supported
service/class/instance/attribute/member.
packets Invalid Format that had an invalid format.
0x75 Total outgoing unconnected R Total number of all unconnected packets sent.
packets sent
0x76 Total incoming EtherNet/IP packets R Total unconnected, Class 1 or Class 3 packets
received.
0x77 Total outgoing EtherNet/IP packets R Total unconnected, Class 1 or Class 3 packets
sent.
Instance Services

0x01 Get Attribute All Returns the value of all instance attributes.
0x0A Multiple Service Provides an option to execute the Multiple Service request.
0x0E Get Attribute Single Returns the value of the specified instance attribute.
346 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use
Assembly Object
Description
The Assembly Object binds attributes of multiple objects, which enables each object’s data to be sent or
received over a single connection. Assembly objects can be used to bind input data or output data. The
terms "input" and "output" are defined from the network’s point of view. An input sends (produces) data on
the network, and an output receives (consumes) data from the network.
Only static assemblies are supported.
Class Code
The class code is 0x04 as defined by CIP.
Class Attributes

0x01 Revision R The revision of this CIP Object.
Returns 0x02.
0x02 Max Instance R The maximum numeric value of the instance number.
Returns 116.
0x03 Number of Instances R The number of supported assembly instances.
Returns 21.
0x04 Optional Attribute List R The number and list of the optional attributes. The first word
contains the number of attributes to follow and every word
that follows contains another attribute code.
One optional attribute is supported
((ASSEMBLY_INSTANCE_SIZE (4)).
0x06 Max Class Attribute R The numeric value of the highest class attributes (7).
0x07 Max Instance Attribute R The numeric value of the highest instance attributes (4).
Class Services

Instance Codes
Only one instance of the class, 0x04 is supported
Instance Attributes

0x01 Number of members R Number of members in this instance returned in a
word value.
Not supported.
0x02 Assembly_Member_List R/W Array of Structures where each structure represents
one member and consists of data size, path size,
and path of that member.
Not supported.
Assembly_Member_Data_Size A word containing the member data size in bits.
Assembly_Member_Path_Size A word containing the byte size of the EPATH to
follow. 0 for the unused space between the
members.
Assembly_Member_Path EPATH representing the member.
For example, "20 04 24 65 30 03 28 01" for the
member 1 of the instance 101.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 347

Use

0x03 Assembly_Instance_Data R/W Instance data returned as an array of bytes. Access
is Read Only for the input data assemblies and
Read/Write for the output data assemblies.
0x04 Instance Data Size R A word representing the instance data size in bytes.
NOTE:
z Setting Member List (attribute 2) is not supported for static assembly as the static assembly members
are created at the startup depending on the personality/host assembly map and cannot be changed at
runtime.
z Setting Instance Data (attribute 3) is not supported for producing assembly instance (input assembly).
Instance Services

0x10 Set Attribute Single Modifies an assembly object instance attribute value.
Output Assembly Data

Instance 2: Basic Overload
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

0 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved FaultReset Reserved Reserved
Instance 3: Basic Motor Starter

0 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved FaultReset Reserved Run 1
Instance 4: Extended Contactor

0 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Run 2 Run 1
Instance 5: Extended Motor Starter

0 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved FaultReset Run 2 Run 1
NOTE: FaultReset, Run1, and Run2 are commands in the Control register 1.
Instance 100: LTM R Control Registers
This assembly contains several control registers commonly used with an LTM R device.
Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5

path: 6C : 01 : 05 path: 6C : 01 : 04 path: 6C : 01 : 01
(Register 704) (Register 703) (Register 700)
LSB (least significant MSB (most significant LSB MSB LSB MSB
bit) bit)
Instance 101: PKW Request Object

This assembly is vendor specific. It is used to implement the request object of PKW protocol.
Byte 7 Byte 6 Byte 5 Byte 4 Byte 3 Byte 2 Byte 1 Byte 0

See PKW (see page 365) for details.
348 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use
Instance 102: PKW Request and Extended Motor Starter

This assembly is vendor specific.
Bytes 0 to 7 Byte 8 Byte 9

See Instance 101 above. Reserved (value=0) See Instance 5 above.
Instance 103: PKW Request and LTM R Control Registers

Bytes 0 to 7 Byte 8 to 13
See Instance 101 above. See Instance 100 above.
Instance 105: E_TeSys T FastAccess Output

This assembly is vendor specific. All registers are in little endian.

Instance 106: EIOS_TeSys T Output


(Register 700) Reserved (value = 0) Reserved (value = 0)
Byte 6 Byte 7 Byte 8 Byte 9

path: 6C : 01 : 04 path: 6C : 01 : 05
Reserved (value = 0) (Register 704)
Input Assembly Data

Instance 50: Basic Overload

0 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Faulted/Trip
Instance 51: Extended Overload

0 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved FaultReset Warning Faulted/Trip
Instance 52: Basic Motor Starter

0 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Running1 Reserved Faulted/Trip
Instance 53: Extended Motor Starter 1

0 Reserved Reserved CntrlfromNet Ready Reserved Running1 Warning Faulted/Trip
Instance 54: Extended Motor Starter 2

0 Reserved Reserved CntrlfromNet Ready Running2 Running1 Warning Faulted/Trip
NOTE: The instances contain data processed from the System status register 1 and the Control register 1:
z CntrlfromNet = NOT control via HMI (status bit)
z Ready = System ready (status bit)
1639505EN-05 04/2015 349

Use
z Running2 = Motor running (status bit) AND Motor run reverse command (control bit)
z Running1 = Motor running (status bit) AND Motor run forward command (control bit)
z Warning = System warning (status bit)
z Fault/Trip = System fault (status bit) OR System tripped (status bit)
Instance 110: LTM R Monitoring Registers (with dynamic configuration)
This assembly contains several monitoring registers commonly used with an LTM R device. You can
choose registers by setting 1-3 attributes of TeSys T Monitoring Control Object. See TeSys T Monitoring
and Control Object (see page 369) for more information.

Register pointed using path: Register pointed using path: Register pointed using path: Register pointed using path:
C6 : 01 : 05 C6: 01 : 06 C6 : 01 : 07 C6 : 01 : 08
LSB MSB LSB MSB LSB MSB LSB MSB
Instance 111: PKW Response Object

This assembly is vendor specific. It is used to implement the response object of PKW protocol.

See PKW (see page 365) for details.
Instance 112: PKW Request and Extended Motor Starter

Bytes 0 to 7 Byte 8 Byte 9

See Instance 111 above. Reserved (value=0) See Instance 54 above.
Instance 113: PKW Request and LTM R Monitoring Registers

Bytes 0 to 7 Byte 8 to 15
See Instance 111 above. See Instance 110 above.
Instance 115: E_TeSys T FastAccess Input



Instance 116: EIOS_TeSys T Input


path: 68 : 01 : 02 path: 68 : 01 : 03 path: 68 : 01 : 04 path: 68 : 01 : 05
(Register 451) (Register 452) (Register 453) (Register 454)


path: 68 : 01 : 0A path: 68 : 01 : 0B path: 68 : 01 : 0C path: 68 : 01 : 0D
350 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use

path: 68 : 01 : 0E path: 68 : 01 : 0F path: 68 : 01 : 10 path: 68 : 01 : 11








1639505EN-05 04/2015 351

Use
352 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use
Connection Manager Object
Description
The Connection Object provides for and manages the run-time exchange of messages.
Class Code
Class Attributes

0x01 Revision R The connection manager implementation revision.
Returns 0x01.
Returns 0x01.
Returns 0x01.
0x04 Optional Attribute List R The number and list of the optional attributes. The first word
contains the number of attributes to follow and every word
that follows contains another attribute code.
Following optional attributes are included in this list:
z Total number of incoming connection open requests.
z The number of incoming connection open requests
rejected because of the unexpected format of the
Forward Open.
rejected because of the insufficient resources.
rejected because of the parameter value sent with the
Forward Open.
z The number of Forward Close requests received.
z The number of Forward Close requests with invalid
format.
z The number of Forward Close requests that could not
be matched to an active connection.
z The number of connections that has timed out because
the other side stopped producing or there was a network
interruption.
0x06 Max Class Attribute R The largest class attributes value.
Returns 0x07.
0x07 Max Instance Attribute R The largest instance attributes value.
Returns 0x08.
Class Services

Instance Codes
Instance Attributes

0x01 Incoming Forward Open R/W Total number of incoming connection open requests.
requests count
0x02 Forward Open Format Failure R/W The number of Forward Open requests rejected
count because of the unexpected format of the Forward Open
request.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 353

Use

0x03 Forward Open Resource R/W The number of Forward Open requests rejected
Failure count because of insufficient resources.
0x04 Forward Open Parameter R/W The number of Forward Open requests rejected
Value count because of the parameter value sent with Forward
Open.
0x05 Incoming Forward Close R/W Total number of incoming connection close requests.
requests count
0x06 Forward Close Format Failure R/W The number of Forward Close requests that has invalid
count format.
0x07 Forward Close Matching R/W The number of Forward Close requests that could not
Failure count be matched to an active connection.
0x08 Timed out Connections count R/W The number of connections that has timed out because
the other side stopped producing or there was a
network interruption.
Instance Services

0x02 Set Attribute All Sets the values of all instance attributes.
0x10 Set Attribute Single Sets the value of the specified instance attribute.
0x4E Forward Close Closes an existing connection.
0x52 Unconnected Send Used to send a multi-hop not connected request.
0x54 Forward Open Opens a new connection.
0x5A Get Connection Server Returns the owner information for the specified connection.
0x5B Large Forward Open Opens a new connection with maximum size buffer.
354 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use
TCP/IP Object
Description
This object provides description of an opened explicit connection and associated communicator.
Class Code
The Class code is 0xF5 as defined by CIP.
Class Attributes

0x01 Revision R The TCP/IP objects implementation revision.
Returns 0x03.
0x02 Max Instance R Indicate that there is only one host IP address.
Returns 0x01.
Returns 0x01.
0x04 Optional Instance R The first two bytes contain the number of optional
Attribute List instance attributes. Each byte pair that follows
represents the number of a different optional instance
attribute.
Not supported.
0x06 Max Class Attribute R The largest class attribute value.
Returns 0x07.
0x07 Max Instance Attribute R The largest instance attribute value.
Returns 0x06.
Class Services

0x01 Get Attribute All Returns the value of all class attributes
Instance Codes
Instance Attributes

0x01 Configuration Status R Indicates whether you configured TCP/IP object and its
parameters or not.
0x02 Configuration R Indicates whether TCP/IP object with all parameters can
Capability be configured using DHCP or BOOTP, and whether it
can resolve the host names using the DNS server.
Returns 0x00000025.
BootP client
DHCP client
Hardware configurable
0x03 Configuration Control R Indicates the configuration of device on startup, that is,
the first attempt initiated.
This returns the following values:
z 0: To use stored IP address.
z 1: To attempt the BootP first.
z 2: To use the DHCP attempt first.
0x04 Physical Link R Returns electronic path to the physical link object, which
is the Ethernet Link class. The first word contains the
size of the EPATH in words. The path that follows
specifies instance 1 of the Ethernet Link object
(0x20 0xF6 0x24 0x01).
1639505EN-05 04/2015 355

Use

0x05 Configuration R TCP/IP parameters including the following:
Parameters z DWORD containing the device IP address.
z DWORD containing the subnet mask.
z DWORD containing the gateway address.
z DWORD containing the name server IP address.
z DWORD containing the second name server IP
address.
z WORD containing number of ASCII characters in the
domain name.
z ASCII string which contains the domain name.
0x06 Host Name R The first word contains the number of ASCII bytes in the
device host name. The ASCII host name string follows.
Returns the product name as the identity object.
Instance Services

0x01 Get Attribute All Returns the value of all instance attributes
356 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use
Ethernet Link Object
Description
This object provides the characteristics for each Ethernet links of the product.
Class Code
The Class code is 0xF6 as defined by CIP.
Class Attributes

0x01 Revision R The Ethernet Link object implementation revision.
Returns 0x03.
0x02 Max Instance R Returns 0x02 to represent two Ethernet port instances.
Returns 0x02 to represent two Ethernet port instances.
0x04 Optional Instance R The first two bytes contain the number of optional
Attribute List instance attributes. Each byte pair that follows
represents the number of a different optional instance
attribute.
Returns 0x07, 0x08, and 0x0A as 3 optional attributes.
Returns 0x07.
Returns 0x0A.
Class Services

0x01 Get Attribute All Returns the value of all class attributes
Instance Codes
Two instances are implemented for the Ethernet Link object. Each instance represents one of the two
Ethernet ports.
Instance Attributes

0x01 Interface Speed R Interface speed in Mbps (10 or 100 Mbps).
0x02 Interface Flags R Returns a word, where the bits are set depending on:
z Link state (active/inactive).
z Negotiation state.
z Link faults.
z Full/half duplex connection type.
Duplex mode is reflected in bit 1.
0x03 MAC Address R Returns 6 bytes with the device MAC address.
z Port 1: Identical to device MAC address.
z Port 2: Device MAC + 1.
0x07 Interface Type R Indicates the type of interface, for example, twisted pair,
fiber, internal.
Returns 0x02 to indicate twisted fiber.
0x08 Interface State R Indicates the current state of the interface, for example,
operational (0x01), disabled (0x02).
0x0A Interface Label R Readable identification.
z Port 1: “Port 1”
z Port 2: “Port 2”
1639505EN-05 04/2015 357

Use
Instance Services

358 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use
Control Supervisor Object
Description
This object models all the management functions for devices within the Hierarchy of Motor Control Devices.
Class Code
Class Attributes

0x01 Revision R The EtherNet Link object implementation revision.
Returns 0x01.
0x02 Max Instance R Returns 0x01 to represent a single instance.
0x03 Number of Instances R Returns 0x01 to represent a single instance.
Returns 0x07.
Returns 0x11.
Class Services

Instance Codes
Only one instance is supported.
Instance Attributes

0x03 Run 1 Get/Set Motor run forward command
0x04 Run 2 Get/Set Motor run reverse command
0x06 State Get 0 = Vendor specific
1 = Startup
2 = Not ready
3 = Ready
4 = Enabled
5 = Stopping
6 = Fault stop
7 = Faulted
0x07 Running 1 Get Motor running and
Motor run forward command
0x08 Running 2 Get Motor running and
Motor run reverse command
0x09 Ready Get System ready
0x0A Faulted Get System fault
0x0B Warning Get System warning
0x0C Fault Reset Get/Set Fault reset command
0x0D Fault Code Get Fault code
0x0E Warning Code Get Warning code
0x0F Control from Network Get Control local
1639505EN-05 04/2015 359

Use

0x10 Fault Mode Get Action on loss of EtherNet/IP:
0 = Fault + Stop (Network port fallback setting
NPTS = 2)
1 = Ignore (NPTS = 0)
2 = Manufacturer specific
Signal following fallbacks:
z Frozen (NPTS = 1)
z Unchanged (NPTS = 3)
z Force FW (NPTS = 4)
z Force RV (NPTS = 5)
Instance Service

0x05 Reset Resets the drive to the start-up state.
NOTE: This service is not identical to Reset of the Identity object.
Control Supervisor State Event

The following diagram shows the control supervisor state event matrix:
360 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use
The following table describes the run/stop event matrix:
Event State (N/A = No action)

Non- Startup Not_Ready Ready Enabled Stopping Fault- Faulted
exist Stop
Switch Off N/A Transition Transition Transition Transition Transition Transition Transition
to Non- to Non-exist to Non-exist to Non- to Non- to Non- to Non-
exist exist exist exist exist
Switch On Transition N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
to Startup
Initialization N/A Transition N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Complete to
Not_Ready
Main Power N/A N/A Transition N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
On to Ready
Run N/A N/A N/A Transition N/A Transition N/A N/A
to Enable to Enable
Stop N/A N/A N/A N/A Transition N/A N/A N/A
to
Stopping
Stop N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Transition N/A N/A
Complete to Ready
Reset N/A N/A Transition Transition Transition Transition Transition Transition
to Startup to Startup to Startup to Startup to Startup to Startup
Main Power N/A N/A N/A Transition Transition Transition Transition N/A
Off to to Faulted to Faulted to Faulted
Not_Ready
Fault N/A Transition Transition Transition Transition Transition N/A N/A
Detected to Faulted to Faulted to Faulted to to
Fault_Stop Fault_Stop
Fault_Stop N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Transition
Complete to Faulted
Fault Reset N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Transition
to
Not_Ready
Attribute 5 (NetCtrl) is used to request that Run Stop events be controlled from the network. You may inhibit
these events, however, if you do not wish to allow Run Stop control from the network under certain
circumstances, or if your application does not permit it. Only when attribute 15 (CtrlFromNet) is set to 1 by
the device in response to a NetCtrl request, is Run Stop control actually enabled from the network.
If attribute 15 (CtrlFromNet) is 1, then the events Run and Stop are triggered by a combination of the Run1
and Run2 attributes, as shown in the following table. Note that Run1 and Run2 have different contexts for
different device types.
The following table shows the Run1 and Run2 contexts for the devices within the motor control hierarchy:
Run Drives and Servos

Run1 RunFwd
Run2 RunRev
If Control From Network is 0, Run and Stop events must be controlled using local input(s) provided by the
vendor.
Run1 Run2 Trigger event Run type

0 0 Stop N/A
0 -> 1 0 Run Run1
0 0 -> 1 Run Run2
0 -> 1 0 -> 1 No action N/A
1639505EN-05 04/2015 361

Use
Run1 Run2 Trigger event Run type

1 1 No action N/A
1 -> 0 1 Run Run2
1 1 -> 0 Run Run1
NOTE: Local stop and run signals could override or be interlocked with the run/stop control through
Ethernet/IP.
362 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use
Overload Object
Description
This object models all the functions specific to an AC motor overload protection device.
Class Code
The Class code is 0x2C as defined by CIP.
Class Attributes

0x01 Revision R The EtherNet link objects implementation revision.
Returns 0x01.
0x03 Number of Instances R Returns 0x01 to represent a single instance.
Returns 0x07.
Returns 0xB2.
Class Service

Instance Codes
Instance Attributes

0x01 Attribute count R Returns the supported attribute count (46).
0x02 Attribute list R Returns the list of supported instance attributes.
0x03 TripFLCSet R/W % of FLA max
0x04 TripClass R/W Trip Class Setting (0...200 s)
0x05 AvgCurrent R 0.1 A
0x06 %PhImbal R % Phase imbalance
0x07 %Thermal R % Thermal capacity
0x08 IL1 Current R 0.1 A
0x0A IL3 Current R 0.1 A
0x0B Ground Current R 0.1 A
0x68 Ground Current R 0.1 A
0x69 IL1 Current Ratio R % of FLC
0x6A IL2 Current Ratio R % of FLC
0x6B IL3 Current Ratio R % of FLC
0x6C IAV Average Current Ratio R % of FLC
0x6D Thermal Capacity Level R % TripLevel
0x6E Ground Current R 0.1 A
0x6F Current phase imbalance R % Imbalance
1639505EN-05 04/2015 363

Use

0x70 Time to trip R Seconds
0x71 Time to Reset R Seconds
0x7F Single/Three Ph R/W 0 = Single phase
1 = Three phases
0x80 TripFLCSet R/W % of FLA max
0x81 Trip Class R/W Seconds
0x84 Thermal Warn Level R/W % Trip Level
0x85 PL Inhibit Time R/W 0.1 seconds
0x86 PL Trip Delay R/W 0.1 seconds
0x88 GF Trip Delay R/W 0.1...25.0 seconds
0x89 GF Trip Level R/W 20...500% FLC
0x8A GF Warn Level R/W 20...500% FLC
0x8B Stall Enabled Time R/W 1...200 seconds
0x8C Stall Trip Level R/W 100...800 % FLC
0x8E Jam Trip Delay R/W 1...30 seconds
0x8F Jam Trip Level R/W 100...800 % FLC
0x90 Jam Warn Level R/W 100...800 % FLC
0x92 UL Trip Delay R/W 1...200 seconds
0x93 UL Trip Level R/W 30...100 % FLC
0x94 UL Warn Level R/W 30...100 % FLC
0x95 CI Inhibit Time R/W 0.1 seconds
0x96 CI Trip Delay R/W 0.1 seconds
0x97 CI Trip Level R/W 0...70 % Imbalance
0x98 CI Warn Level R/W 0...70 % Imbalance
0xB2 CT Ratio R –
NOTE: In the table above:

z PL = Current phase loss
z GF = Ground fault
z Stall = Long start
z UL = Underload
z CI = Current phase imbalance
Instance Service

364 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use
Periodically Kept Acyclic Words (PKW) Objects
Overview
The LTM R controller supports PKW (Periodically Kept in acyclic Words). The PKW feature consists of:
z 4 input words mapped in input assembly objects 111, 112 and 113
z 4 output words mapped in output assembly objects 101, 102 and 103
These 4 words tables enable a EtherNet/IP scanner to read or write any register using I/O messaging.
As shown in the table below, the PKW area is located at the beginning of the corresponding assembly
objects 112, 113, 102 and 103.
PKW OUT Data

PKW OUT data requests from the EtherNet/IP scanner to the LTM R are mapped in assembly objects 101,
102 and 103.
To access registers, select one of the following function codes:
z R_REG_16 (0x25) to read 1 register
z R_REG_32 (0x26) to read 2 registers
z W_REG_16 (0x2A) to write 1 register
z W_REG_32 (0x2B) to write 2 registers
Word 1 Word 2 Word 3 Word 4

MSB LSB
Register address Toggle bit Function bits (bits 8 - 14) Not used Data to write
(bit 15) (bits 0 - 7)
Register number 0/1 R_REG_16Code 0x25 0x00 – –
R_REG_32Code 0x26 – –
W_REG_16Code 0x2A Data to write –
in register
W_REG_32Code 0x2B Data to write Data to write in
in register 1 register 2
Any change in the function code triggers the handling of the request (unless Function code
[bit 8 to bit 14] = 0x00).
NOTE: The highest bit of function code (bit 15) is a toggle bit. It is changed for each consecutive request.
This mechanism enables the request initiator to detect that a response is ready by polling bit 15 of the
function code in word 2. When this bit in the OUT data becomes equal to the response emitted toggle bit
in the IN data (when starting the request), then the response is ready.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 365

Use
PKW IN Data
PKW IN data response from the LTM R to the EtherNet/IP scanner are mapped in assembly objects 111,
112 and 113.
The LTM R echoes the same register address and function code or, eventually, an error code.
Word 1 Word 2 Word 3 Word 4

MSB LSB
Register address Toggle bit Function bits (bits 8 - 14) Not used Data to write
(bit 15) (bits 0 - 7)
Same register number Same as in ErrorCode 0x4E 0x00 Error code
as in the request the request R_REG_16Code 0x25 – –
R_REG_32Code 0x26 Data read in –
register
W_REG_16Code 0x2A Data read in Data read in
register 1 register 2
W_REG_32Code 0x2B – –
If the initiator tries to write a TeSys T object or register to an unauthorized value, or tries to access an
inaccessible register, an error code is returned (Function code = toggle bit + 0x4E). The exact error code
can be found in words 3 and 4. The request is not accepted and the object/register remains at the old value.
To retrigger exactly the same command, you need to:
1. reset the Function code to 0x00,
2. wait for the response frame with the function code equal to 0x00,
3. reset it to its previous value.
This is useful for a limited master like an HMI.
Another way of retriggering exactly the same command is to invert the toggle bit in the function code byte.
The response is valid when the toggle bit of the response is equal to the toggle bit written in the answer
(this is a more efficient method, but it requires higher programming capabilities).
PKW Error Codes

Case of a write error:
Error code Error name Explanation

1 FGP_ERR_REQ_STACK_FULL External request: sends back an error frame
3 FGP_ERR_REGISTER_NOT_FOUND Register not managed (or the request needs
super user access rights)
4 FGP_ERR_ANSWER_DELAYED External request: answer postponed
7 FGP_ERR_NOT_ALL_REGISTER_FOUND One or both registers cannot be found
8 FGP_ERR_READ_ONLY Register not authorized to be written
10 FGP_ERR_VAL_1WORD_TOOHIGH Written value not in the range of the register
(word value is too high)
11 FGP_ERR_VAL_1WORD_TOOLOW Written value not in the range of the register
(word value is too low)
12 FGP_ERR_VAL_2BYTES_INF_TOOHIGH Written value not in the range of the register
(MSB value is too high)
13 FGP_ERR_VAL_2BYTES_INF_TOOLOW Written value not in the range of the register
(MSB value is too low)
16 FGP_ERR_VAL_INVALID Written value not a valid value
20 FGP_ERR_BAD_ANSWER External request: sends back an error frame
Case of a read error:

1 FGP_ERR_REQ_STACK_FULL External request: sends back an error frame
3 FGP_ERR_REGISTER_NOT_FOUND Register not managed (or the request needs
super user access rights)
366 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use

4 FGP_ERR_ANSWER_DELAYED External request: answer postponed
7 FGP_ERR_NOT_ALL_REGISTER_FOUND One or both registers cannot be found
Class Code
The class code is 0xC5 as defined by CIP.
Class Attributes

0x01 Revision R The EtherNet link object implementation revision.
Returns 0x01.
0x02 Max instance R Returns 0x01 to represent a single instance.
0x03 Number of instances R The number of object instances.
Returns 0x01.
0x06 Max class attribute R The largest class attribute value.
Returns 0x07.
0x07 Max instance attribute R The largest instance attribute value.
Returns 0x02.
Class Services

0x01 Get attribute all Returns the value of all class attributes.
0x0E Get attribute single Returns the value of the specified attribute.
Instance Codes
Instance Attributes

0x01 Request object R/W Array of 8 bytes to represent the PKW request.
0x02 Response object R Array of 8 bytes to represent the PKW response.
Instance Services

0x0E Get attribute single Returns the value of the specified instance attribute.
0x10 Set attribute all Modifies the instance attribute value with the access type
of R/W.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 367

Use
TeSys T Monitoring Control Object
Description
This object allows selection of 4 different LTMR internal data to monitor.
Class Code
The Class Code is 0xC6.
Class Attributes

0x01 Revision R The EtherNet Link object implementation revision.
Returns 0x02.
Returns 0x01.
Returns 0x07.
Returns 0x04.
Class Services

Instance Codes
Instance Attributes

0x01 TeSys T Monitoring R/W UINT type to represent the TeSys T Monitoring Word 0.
Word 0 At power up, it is defaulted to 455.
Instance Services

0x10 Set Attribute All Modifies the instance attribute value with the access type
of R/W.
368 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use
EtherNet/IP Interface Diagnostic Object
Description
This object enables you to select the data that will be exchanged on the network through I/O messaging.
A single instance (instance 1) of the EtherNet/IP Interface Object is supported.
Class Code
The Class Code is 0x350 as defined by CIP.
Class Attributes

0x01 Revision R The EtherNet/IP Interface Diagnostic object
implementation revision.
Returns 0x01.
0x02 Max Instance R Returns 0x01 to indicate that there is only one instance.
Returns 0x01.
0x04 Optional Instance R Returns 0 to indicate no optional attributes.
Attribute List
0x05 Optional Services List R Returns 0 to indicate no optional services.
Returns 0x07.
Returns 0x07.
Class Services

Instance Codes
Only one instance is implemented for the EtherNet/IP Interface Diagnostic object.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 369

Use
Instance Attributes
The following instance attributes are supported:
Attribute Name Access Description

ID
0x01 Protocols supported Get Protocol(s) supported.
Returns a 16 bit value with bits 0 and 1 set to indicate that
EtherNet/IP and Modbus TCP/IP protocols are supported.
0x02 Connection diagnostics Get Returns all the connection diagnostics which includes the
following information:
z Max CIP IO Connections opened (UINT): Maximum
number of CIP IO Connections opened.
z Current CIP IO Connections (UINT): Number of CIP IO
Connections currently opened.
z Max CIP Explicit Connections opened (UINT): Maximum
number of CIP Explicit Connections opened.
z Current CIP Explicit Connections (UINT): Number of CIP
Explicit Connections currently opened.
z CIP Connections Opening Errors (UINT): Incremented at
each attempt to open a CIP connection that fails.
z CIP Connections Timeout Errors (UINT): Incremented
when a CIP connection is timed out.
z Max EtherNet IP TCP Connections opened (UINT):
Maximum number of TCP connections opened and used
for EtherNet IP communication.
z Current EtherNet IP TCP Connections (UINT): Number of
TCP connections currently opened and used for EtherNet
IP communication.
0x03 I/O Messaging Diagnostics Get/Clear Returns all the IO messaging diagnostics which includes the
z IO Production Counter (UDINT): Incremented each time a
Class 0/1 CIP message is sent.
z IO Consumption Counter (UDINT): Incremented each time
a Class 0/1 CIP message is received.
z IO Production Send Errors Counter (UINT): Incremented
each time a Class 0/1 message is not sent.
z IO Consumption Receive Errors Counter (UINT):
Incremented each time consumption is received with an
error.
0x04 Explicit Messaging Get/Clear Returns all the explicit messaging diagnostics which includes
Diagnostics the following information:
z Class3 Message Send Counter (UDINT): Incremented
each time a Class 3 CIP Message is sent.
z Class3 Message Receive Counter (UDINT): Incremented
each time a Class 3 CIP Message is received.
z UCMM Message Send Counter (UDINT): Incremented
each time an UCMM Message is sent.
z UCMM Message Receive Counter (UDINT): Incremented
each time an UCMM Message is received.
0x05 Communication Capacity Get Returns the communication capacity data which includes the
z Max CIP Connections (UINT): Max supported CIP
Connections.
z Max TCP Connections (UINT): Max supported TCP
Connections.
z Max Urgent priority rate (UINT): Max CIP transport class
0/1 Urgent priority messages packet(s).
z Max Scheduled priority rate (UINT): Max CIP transport
class 0/1 Scheduled priority messages Packet(s).
z Max High priority rate (UINT): Max CIP transport class 0/1
High priority messages Packet(s).
z Max Low priority rate (UINT): Max CIP transport class 0/1
Low priority messages Packet(s).
z Max Explicit Messaging rate (UINT): Max CIP transport
class 2/3 or other EIP messages Packet(s).
370 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use

ID
0x06 Bandwidth Diagnostics Get Returns the bandwidth diagnostics which includes the
z Current sending Urgent priority rate (UINT): CIP transport
class 0/1 Urgent priority messages Packet(s) sent.
z Current reception Urgent priority rate (UINT): CIP transport
class 0/1 Urgent priority messages Packet(s) received.
z Current sending Scheduled priority rate (UINT): CIP
transport class 0/1 Scheduled priority messages Packet(s)
sent.
z Current reception Scheduled priority rate (UINT): CIP
transport class 0/1 Scheduled priority messages Packet(s)
received.
z Current sending High priority rate (UINT): CIP transport
class 0/1 High priority messages Packet(s) sent.
z Current sending Low priority rate (UINT): CIP transport
class 0/1 Low priority messages Packet(s) sent.
z Current reception low priority rate (UINT): CIP transport
class 0/1 Low priority messages Packet(s) received.
z Current sending Explicit rate (UINT): CIP transport class
2/3 or other EIP messages Packet(s) sent.
z Current reception Explicit rate (UINT): CIP transport class
2/3 or other EIP messages Packet(s) received.
0x07 Modbus Diagnostic Get Returns the modbus diagnostics which includes the following
information:
z Max Modbus TCP Connections opened (UINT): Maximum
number of TCP connections opened and used for Modbus
communication.
z Current Modbus TCP Connections (UINT): Number of
TCP connections currently opened and used for Modbus
communication.
z Modbus TCP Message Send Counter (UDINT):
Incremented each time a Modbus TCP/IP Message is sent.
z Modbus TCP Message Receive Counter (UDINT):
Incremented each time a Modbus TCP/IP Message is
received.
Instance Services

0x4C Get and Clear Single Returns the value of the specified instance attribute and
clears the same.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 371

Use
I/O Connection Diagnostic Object
Description
This object provides the detailed diagnostic of each configured CIP I/O connection viewed from a Scanner
and of each opened CIP I/O connection viewed from an Adapter.
Class Code
Class Attributes

0x01 Revision Get The I/O Connection Diagnostic object implementation
revision.
Returns 0x01.
0x02 Max Instance Get Returns the maximum instance number created, that
varies from 0 to N (N = maximum number of CIP I/O
connections = 32).
0x03 Number of Instances Get Returns the number of instances created, that varies
from 0 to N (N = maximum number of CIP I/O
connections = 32).
0x04 Optional Instance Get Returns 0 to indicate no optional attributes.
Attribute List
0x05 Optional Services List Get Returns 0 to indicate no optional services.
0x06 Max Class Attribute Get The largest class attribute value.
Returns 0x07.
0x07 Max Instance Attribute Get The largest instance attribute value.
Returns 0x02.
Class Services

Instance Codes
The number of instances created varies from 0 to N, where N is the maximum number of CIP I/O
connections.
372 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use
Instance Attributes

0x01 IO Communication Get/Clear Returns the I/O communication diagnostics data which
Diagnostics contains the following information:
z IO Production Counter(UDINT): Incremented at each
production.
z IO Consumption Counter (UDINT): Incremented at each
consumption.
z IO Production Send Errors Counter (UINT): Incremented
each time a production is not sent.
z IO Consumption Receive Errors Counter (UINT):
Incremented each time consumption is received with an
error.
z CIP Connection Timeout Errors (UINT): Incremented when
a connection is timed out.
z CIP Connection Opening Errors (UINT): Incremented at
each attempt to open a connection that fails.
z CIP Connection State (UINT): State of the CIP I/O
connection.
z CIP Last Error General Status (UINT): “General Status” of
the last error detected on the connection.
z CIP Last Error Extended Status (UINT): “Extended Status”
of the last error detected on the connection.
z Input Com Status (UINT): Communication status of the
inputs.
z Output Com status (UINT): Communication status of the
outputs.
0x02 Connection Diagnostics Get Returns all the connection diagnostics which includes the
z Production Connection ID (UDINT): Connection ID for
production.
z Consumption Connection ID (UDINT): Connection ID for
consumption.
z Production RPI (UDINT): RPI for production.
z Production API (UDINT): API for production.
z Consumption RPI (UDINT): RPI for consumption.
z Consumption API (UDINT): API for consumption.
z Production Connection Parameters (UDINT): Connection
parameters for production.
z Consumption Connection Parameters (UINT): Connection
parameters for consumption.
z Local IP (UDINT).
z Local UDP Port (UINT).
z Remote IP (UDINT).
z Remote UDP Port (UINT).
z Production Multicast IP (UDINT): Multicast IP used for
production.
z Consumption Multicast IP (UDINT): Multicast IP used for
consumption.
z Protocols supported (UINT): Protocol(s) supported on the
connection.
Instance Services

0x4C Get and Clear Single Returns the value of the specified instance attribute and
clears the same.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 373

Use
Explicit Connection Diagnostic Object
Description
This object provides a description of an opened Explicit Connection and associated communication.
Class Code
The Class Code is 0x353 as defined by CIP.
Class Attributes

0x01 Revision Get The Explicit Connection Diagnostic object
Returns 0x01.
varies from 0 to N (N = maximum number of CIP explicit
connections = 32).
from 0 to N (N = maximum number of CIP explicit
connections = 32).
Attribute List
Returns 0x07.
Returns 0x08.
Class Services

Instance Codes
The number of instances created varies from 0 to N, where N is the maximum number of CIP explicit
connections which is 32 at present.
Instance Attributes

ID
0x01 Originator Get O -> T Connection ID
Connection ID
0x02 Originator IP Get –
0x03 Originator TCP Port Get –
0x04 Target Get T -> O Connection ID
Connection ID
0x05 Target IP Get –
0x06 Target TCP Port Get –
0x07 Message Send Counter Get Incremented each time a Class3 CIP message is sent on the
connection.
0x08 Message Receive Counter Get Incremented each time a Class3 CIP message is received on
the connection.
374 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use
Instance Services

1639505EN-05 04/2015 375

Use
Explicit Connection Diagnostic List Object
Description
This object provides a snapshot of the list of instantiated Explicit Connection Diagnostic objects.
Class Code
Class Attributes

0x01 Revision Get The Explicit Connection Diagnostic List object
Returns 0x01.
varies from 0 to N (N = maximum number of concurrent
list access supported = 2).
from 0 to N (N = maximum number of concurrent list
access supported = 2).
Attribute List
Returns 0x07.
Returns 0x02.
Class Services

Instance Codes
The number of instances created varies from 0 to N, where N is the maximum number of concurrent list
access supported, which are 2.
Instance Attributes

0x01 Number of Connections Get Total number of opened Explicit connections.
0x02 Explicit Messaging Get Array of structures that represents the contents of instantiated
Connections Diagnostic “Explicit Connection Diagnostic” objects.
List Each of these objects has the following information:
z Originator Connection ID (UDINT): O -> T Connection ID.
z Originator IP (UDINT).
z Originator TCP Port (UINT).
z Target Connection ID (UDINT): T -> O Connection ID.
z Target IP (UDINT).
z Target TCP Port (UINT).
z Message Send Counter (UDINT): Incremented each time a
Class3 CIP message is sent on the connection.
z Message Receive Counter (UDINT): Incremented each
time a Class3 CIP message is received on the connection.
376 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use
Instance Services

0x08 Create This service creates an instance of the “Explicit Connections
Diagnostic List” object.
0x09 Delete This service deletes an instance of the “Explicit Connections
Diagnostic List” object.
0x33 Explicit Connections This service reads the explicit connections diagnostics data
Diagnostic Read from the list.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 377

Use
Section 7.9
Communication Variables
Communication Variables
Overview
This section describes the communication variables for EtherNet/IP and for Modbus/TCP communication
protocols.
WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
WARNING

Topic Page
Communication Parameter Clear Commands 379
Simplified Control and Monitoring 381
Organization of Communication Variables 383
Data Formats 385
Data Types 386
Identification Variables 392
Statistics Variables 393
Monitoring Variables 400
Configuration Variables 409
Command Variables 418
User Map Variables 419
Custom Logic Variables 421
Mirroring Variables 422
378 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use
Communication Parameter Clear Commands
Clear Commands Overview

You can clear communication parameters as follows:
z Using the LTM R rotary switches to clear its IP addressing settings
z Using the following parameter-based commands:
z Clear all command
z Clear network port settings command
You can clear other parameters using the following parameter-based commands:
z Clear statistics command
z Clear thermal capacity level command
z Clear controller setting command
Clear IP Using the Rotary Switch

To clear IP addressing settings, set the Ones, or right, rotary switch on the LTM R controller to Clear IP
(see below):
This clears the following Ethernet parameters:

z IP Address
z Subnet Mask
z Gateway
The position of the Tens, or left, switch does not affect the Clear IP function.
Clear All Command

If you want to change the configuration of the LTM R controller, you may want to clear all existing
parameters in order to set new parameters for the controller.
To clear all parameters, set to 1 the bit 0 of:
z Modbus/TCP register address 705
z or EtherNet/IP object address 6C : 01 : 06
This forces the controller to enter configuration mode. A power-cycle is performed to restart correctly in this
mode. This enables the controller to pick up the new values for the cleared parameters.
When you clear all parameters, static characteristics are also lost. Only the following parameters are not
cleared after a Clear All Command:
Clear Statistics Command

To clear statistics parameters, set to 1 the bit 1 of:
Statistics parameters are cleared without the LTM R controller being forced into configuration mode. Static
1639505EN-05 04/2015 379

Use
The following parameters are not cleared after a Clear Statistics Command:
Clear Thermal Capacity Level Command

To clear thermal memory parameters, set to 1 the bit 2 of:
This action clears the following parameters:
Thermal memory parameters are cleared without the LTM R controller being forced into configuration
mode. Static characteristics are preserved.
NOTE: This bit is writeable at any time, even when the motor is running.
For more information about the Clear Thermal Capacity Level Command, see Reset for Emergency
Restart, page 88.
Clear Controller Settings Command

The Clear Controller Settings Command restores the LTM R controller protection factory setting (timeouts
and thresholds).
To clear controller settings parameters, set: to 1 the bit 3 of:
The following settings are not cleared by this command:
z Controller characteristics
z Connections (CT, temperature sensor, and I/O settings)
z Operating mode
Clear Network Port Settings Command

The Clear Network Port Settings command restores the network port factory settings (address, and so on).
To clear controller settings parameters, set to 1 the bit 4 of:
characteristics are preserved. Only the network communication becomes ineffective.
380 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use
Simplified Control and Monitoring
Overview
In this section there are 2 simplified examples of the main registers which control and monitor a Motor
Management Controller, one with Modbus/TCP communication protocol and one with EtherNet/IP
communication protocol.
Modbus/TCP Registers for Simplified Operation

The illustration below provides basic setup information, using the following registers: configuration, control
and monitoring (system status, measurements, faults and warnings, acknowledgement).
1639505EN-05 04/2015 381

Use
EthernNet/IP Registers for Simplified Operation

The illustration below provides basic setup information, using the following registers: configuration, control
and monitoring (system status, measurements, faults and warnings, acknowledgement).
382 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use
Organization of Communication Variables
Introduction
Communication variables are listed in tables. They belong to groups (identification, statistics,
monitoring,...). They are associated with an LTM R controller, which may or may not have an LTM E
expansion module attached.
Communication Variable Groups

Communication variables are grouped according to the following criteria:
Variable Groups Modbus/TCP (Register EtherNet/IP (Object addresses)

addresses)
Identification variables 00 to 99 64 : 01 : 32 to 64 : 01 : 61
Statistics variables 100 to 449 65 : 01 : 01 to 67 : 01 : 83
Monitoring variables 450 to 539 68 : 01 : 01 to 68 : 01 : 4A
Configuration variables 540 to 699 69 : 01 : 01 to 6B : 01 : 32
Command variables 700 to 713 6C : 01 : 01 to 6C : 01 : 0A
User map variables 800 to 999 6D : 01 : 01 to 6E : 01 : 64
Custom logic variables 1250 to 1399 71 : 01 : 33 to 71 : 01 : C8
Extended monitoring variables for 2000 to 2099 82 : 01 : 01 to 82 : 01 : 27
communication
Mirroring variables 2500 to 2599 8C : 01 : 01 to 8C : 01 : 15
Extended configuration variables for 3000 to 3120 96 : 01 : 01 to 96 : 01 : 77
communication
Table Structure
Communication variables are listed in 5-column tables:
Column 1 Column 2 Column 3 Column 4 Column 5

Modbus/TCP EtherNet/IP Object Variable type: integer, Variable name and access Note: code for
Register address (in address (class : word, word[n], via Read only or additional
decimal) instance : attribute) DT_type (see Read/Write requests information
Identification
Variables, page 392)
Note
The Note column gives a code for additional information.
Variables without a code are available for all hardware configurations, and without functional restrictions.
The code can be:
z numerical (1 to 9), for specific hardware combinations
z alphabetical (A to Z), for specific system behaviors
If the note is... Then the variable is...

1 available for the LTM R + LTM EV40 combination
2 always available but with a value equal to 0 if no LTM EV40 is connected
3-9 Not used
If the note is... Then...

A the variable can be written only when the motor is off
B the variable can be written only in configuration mode
C the variable can be written only with no fault
D-Z the variable is available for future exceptions
1639505EN-05 04/2015 383

Use
Unused Addresses
Unused addresses fall into 3 categories:
z Not significant, in Read only tables, means that you should ignore the value read, whether equal to 0
or not.
z Reserved, in Read/Write tables, means that you must write 0 in these variables.
z Forbidden, means that read or write requests are rejected, that these addresses are not accessible at
all.
384 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use
Data Formats
Overview
The data format of a communication variable can be integer, Word, or Word[n], as described below. For
more information about a variable size and format, see Data Types, page 386.
Integer (Int, UInt, DInt, IDInt)

Integers fall into the following categories:
z Int: signed integer using one register (16 bits)
z UInt: unsigned integer using one register (16 bits)
z DInt: signed double integer using 2 registers (32 bits)
z UDInt: unsigned double integer using 2 registers (32 bits)
For all integer-type variables, the variable name is completed with its unit or format, if necessary.
Example:
Register 474 or object 68 : 01: 19, UInt, Frequency (x 0.01 Hz).
Word
Word: Set of 16 bits, where each bit or group of bits represents command, monitoring or configuration
data.
Example:
Register 455 or object 68 : 01 : 06, Word, System Status Register 1.
bit 0 System ready

bit 1 System on
bit 2 System fault
bit 3 System warning
bit 4 System tripped
bit 5 Fault reset authorized
bit 6 (Not significant)
bit 7 Motor running
bits 8-13 Motor average current ratio
bit 14 Control via HMI
bit 15 Motor starting (in progress)
Word[n]
Word[n]: Data encoded on contiguous registers.
Examples:
Registers 64 to 69 or objects 64 : 01 : 41 to 64 : 01 : 46, Word[6], Controller Commercial Reference (see
DT_CommercialReference (see page 386)).
Registers 655 to 658 or objects 6B : 01 : 06 to 6B : 01 : 09, Word[4], Date and Time setting (see
DT_DateTime (see page 387)).
1639505EN-05 04/2015 385

Use
Data Types
Overview
Data types are specific variable formats which are used to complement the description of internal formats
(for instance, in case of a structure or of an enumeration). The generic format of data types is DT_xxx.
List of Data Types

Here is the list of the most commonly used data types:
z DT_ACInputSetting
z DT_CommercialReference
z DT_DateTime
z DT_ExtBaudRate
z DT_ExtParity
z DT_FaultCode
z DT_FirmwareVersion
z DT_Language5
z DT_OutputFallbackStrategy
z DT_PhaseNumber
z DT_ResetMode
z DT_WarningCode
These data types are described below.
DT_ACInputSetting
DT_ACInputSetting format is an enumeration that improves AC input detection:
Value Description
0 None (factory setting)
1 < 170 V 50 Hz
2 < 170 V 60 Hz
3 > 170 V 50 Hz
4 > 170 V 60 Hz
DT_CommercialReference
DT_CommercialReference format is Word[6] and indicates a Commercial Reference:
Word MSB LSB

1 character 1 character 2
Example:
Registers 64 to 69 or objects 64 : 01 : 41 to 64 : 01 : 46, Word[6], Controller Commercial Reference.
If Controller Commercial Reference = LTM R:
Modbus/TCP (Register EtherNet/IP (Object MSB LSB

addresses) addresses)
64 64 : 01 : 41 L T
65 64 : 01 : 42 M (space)
66 64 : 01 : 43 R
67 64 : 01 : 44
68 64 : 01 : 45
69 64 : 01 : 46
386 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use
DT_DateTime
DT_DateTime format is Word[4] and indicates Date and Time:
Word Bits 12-15 Bits 8-11 Bits 4-7 Bits 0-3

1 S S 0 0
2 H H m m
3 M M D D
4 Y Y Y Y
Where:
z S = second
The format is 2 BCD digits.
The value range is [00-59] in BCD.
z 0 = unused
z H = hour
z m = minute
z M = month
z D = day
The value range is (in BCD):
[01-31] for months 01, 03, 05, 07, 08, 10, 12
[01-30] for months 04, 06, 09, 11
[01-29] for month 02 in a leap year
[01-28] for month 02 in a non-leap year.
z Y = year
The format is 4 Binary Coded Decimal (BCD) digits.
Data entry format and value range are:
Data entry format DT#YYYY-MM-DD-HH:mm:ss

Minimum value DT#2006-01-01:00:00:00 January 1, 2006
Maximum value DT#2099-12-31-23:59:59 December 31, 2099
Note: If you give values outside the limits, the system will return an error.
Example:
Registers 655 to 658 or objects 6B : 01 : 06 to 6B : 01 : 09, Word[4], Date and Time setting.
If date is September 4, 2008 at 7 a.m., 50 minutes and 32 seconds:
Modbus/TCP EtherNet/IP (Object 15 12 11 8 74 30

(Register addresses) addresses)
655 6B : 01 : 06 3 2 0 0
656 6B : 01 : 07 0 7 5 0
657 6B : 01 : 08 0 9 0 4
658 6B : 01 : 09 2 0 0 8
With data entry format: DT#2008-09-04-07:50:32.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 387

Use
DT_ExtBaudRate
DT_ExtbaudRate depends on the bus used:
DT_ModbusExtBaudRate format is an enumeration of possible baud rates with Modbus network:
Value Description
1200 1200 Baud
2400 2400 Baud
4800 4800 Baud
9600 9600 Baud
19200 19,200 Baud
65535 Autodetection (factory setting)
DT_ProfibusExtBaudRate format is an enumeration of possible baud rates with PROFIBUS DP

network:
Value Description
65535 Autobaud (factory setting)
DT_DeviceNetExtBaudRate format is an enumeration of possible baud rates with DeviceNet network:
Value Description
0 125 kBaud
1 250 kBaud
2 500 kBaud
3 Autobaud (factory setting)
DT_CANopenExtBaudRate format is an enumeration of possible baud rates with CANopen network:
Value Description
0 10 kBaud
1 20 kBaud
2 50 kBaud
3 125 kBaud
4 250 kBaud (factory setting)
5 500 kBaud
6 800 kBaud
7 1000 kBaud
8 Autobaud
9 Factory setting
DT_ExtParity
DT_ExtParity depends on the bus used:
DT_ModbusExtParity format is an enumeration of possible parities with Modbus network:
Value Description
0 None
1 Even
2 Odd
DT_FaultCode
DT_FaultCode format is an enumeration of fault codes:

0 No error
3 Ground current
388 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use

4 Thermal overload
5 Long start
6 Jam
8 Undercurrent
10 Test
11 HMI port error
12 HMI port communication loss
13 Network port internal error
16 External fault
18 On-Off diagnostic
19 Wiring diagnostic
20 Overcurrent
22 Current phase reversal
26 Voltage phase reversal
27 Undervoltage
28 Overvoltage
29 Underpower
30 Overpower
33 LTME configuration
34 Temperature sensor short-circuit
35 Temperature sensor open-circuit
36 CT reversal
37 Out of boundary CT ratio
46 Start check
47 Run checkback
48 Stop check
49 Stop checkback
51 Controller internal temperature error
55 Controller internal error (Stack overflow)
56 Controller internal error (RAM error)
57 Controller internal error (RAM checksum error)
58 Controller internal error (Hardware watchdog fault)
60 L2 current detected in single-phase mode
64 Non volatile memory error
65 Expansion module communication error
66 Stuck reset button
67 Logic function error
100-104 Network port internal error
109 Network port comm error
111 Faulty device replacement fault
555 Network port configuration error
1639505EN-05 04/2015 389

Use
DT_FirmwareVersion
DT_FirmwareVersion format is an XY000 array that describes a firmware revision:
z X = major revision
z Y = minor revision.
Example:
Register 76 or object 64 : 01 : 4D, UInt, Controller firmware version.
DT_Language5
DT_Language5 format is an enumeration used for language display:
Language code Description

1 English (factory setting)
2 Français
4 Español
8 Deutsch
16 Italiano
Example:
Register 650 or object 6B : 01 : 01, Word, HMI language.
DT_OutputFallbackStrategy
DT_OutputFallbackStrategy format is an enumeration of motor output states when loosing
communication.
Value Description Motor modes

0 Hold LO1 LO2 For all modes
1 Run For 2-step mode only
2 LO1, LO2 Off For all modes
3 LO1, LO2 On Only for overload, independent and custom operating modes
4 LO1 On For all modes except 2-step
5 LO2 On For all modes except 2-step
DT_PhaseNumber
DT_PhaseNumber format is an enumeration, with only 1 bit activated:
Value Description
1 1 phase
2 3 phases
DT_ResetMode
DT_ResetMode format is an enumeration of possible modes for thermal fault reset:
Value Description
1 Manual or HMI
2 Remote by network
4 Automatic
DT_WarningCode
DT_WarningCode format is an enumeration of warning codes:

0 No warning
3 Ground current
4 Thermal overload
5 Long start
390 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use

6 Jam
8 Undercurrent
10 HMI port
11 LTM R internal temperature
18 Diagnostic
19 Wiring
20 Overcurrent
27 Undervoltage
28 Overvoltage
29 Underpower
30 Overpower
33 LTM E configuration
46 Start check
47 Run checkback
48 Stop check
49 Stop checkback
109 Network port comm loss
555 Network port configuration
1639505EN-05 04/2015 391

Use
Identification Variables
Identification Variables
Identification variables are described below:
Modbus/TCP EtherNet/IP Variable Read-only variables Note,

(Register (Object type page 383
0-34 64 : 01 : 01 - (Not significant)
64 : 01 : 23
35-40 64 : 01 : 24 - Word[6] Expansion commercial reference 1
64 : 01 : 29 (See DT_CommercialReference, page 386)
41-45 64 : 01 :2A - Word[5] Expansion serial number 1
64 : 01 : 2E
46 64 : 01 : 2F UInt Expansion ID code 1
47 64 : 01 : 30 UInt Expansion firmware version 1
(See DT_FirmwareVersion, page 390)
48 64 : 01 : 31 UInt Expansion compatibility code 1
49-60 64 : 01 : 32 - (Not significant)
64 : 01 : 3D
61 64 : 01 : 3E Ulnt Network port ID code
62 64 : 01 : 3F Ulnt Network port firmware version
63 64 : 01 : 40 Ulnt Network port compatibility code
64-69 64 : 01 : 41 - Word[6] Controller commercial reference
64 : 01 : 46 (See DT_CommercialReference, page 386)
70-74 64 : 01 : 47 - Word[5] Controller serial number
64 : 01 : 4B
75 64 : 01 : 4C Ulnt Controller ID code
76 64 : 01 : 4D Ulnt Controller firmware version
77 64 : 01 :4E Ulnt Controller compatibility code
78 64 : 01 : 4F Ulnt Current scale ratio (0.1 %)
79 64 : 01 : 50 Ulnt Current sensor max
80 64 : 01 : 51 (Not significant)
81 64 : 01 : 52 Ulnt Current range max (x 0.1 A)
82-94 64 : 01 : 53 - (Not significant)
64 : 01 : 5F
95 64 : 01 : 60 Ulnt Load CT ratio (x 0.1 A)
96 64 : 01 : 61 Ulnt Full load current max (maximum FLC range, FLC = Full
Load Current) (x 0.1 A)
97-99 64 : 01 : 62 - (Forbidden)
64 : 01 : 64
392 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use
Statistics Variables
Statistics Overview
Statistics variables are grouped according to the following criteria. Trip statistics are contained into a
main table and an extension table.
Statistics variable groups Modbus/TCP (Register EtherNet/IP (Object addresses)

addresses)
Global statistics 100 - 121 65 : 01 : 01 - 65 : 01 : 16
LTM monitoring statistics 122 - 149 65 : 01 : 17 - 65 : 01 : 32
Last trip statistics 150 - 179 66 : 01 : 01 - 66 : 01 : 1E
and extension 300 - 309 67 : 01 : 01 - 67 : 01 : 0A
Trip n-1 statistics 180 - 209 66 : 01 : 1F - 66 : 01 : 3C
and extension 330 - 339 67 : 01 : 1F - 67 :01 : 28
Trip n-2 statistics 210 - 239 66 : 01 : 3D - 66 : 01 : 5A
and extension 360 - 369 67 : 01 : 3D - 67 : 01 : 46
Trip n-3 statistics 240 - 269 66 : 01 : 5B - 66 : 01 : 78
and extension 390 - 399 67 : 01 : 5B - 67 : 01 : 64
Trip n-4 statistics 270 - 299 66 : 01 : 79 - 66 : 01 : 96
and extension 420 - 429 67 : 01 : 79 - 67 : 01 : 82
Global Statistics
The global statistics are described below:
Modbus/TCP EtherNet/IP Variable type Read-only variables Note,

(Register (Object page 383
100-101 65 : 01 : 01 - (Not significant)
65 : 01 : 02
102 65 : 01 : 03 Ulnt Ground current faults count
103 65 : 01 : 04 Ulnt Thermal overload faults count
104 65 : 01 : 05 Ulnt Long start faults count
105 65 : 01 : 06 Ulnt Jam faults count
106 65 : 01 : 07 Ulnt Current phase imbalance faults count
107 65 : 01 : 08 Ulnt Undercurrent faults count
109 65 : 01 : 0A Ulnt HMI port faults count
110 65 : 01 : 0B Ulnt Controller internal faults count
111 65 : 01 : 0C Ulnt Internal port faults count
112 65 : 01 : 0D Ulnt (Not significant)
113 65 : 01 : 0E Ulnt Network port config faults count
114 65 : 01 : 0F Ulnt Network port faults count
115 65 : 01 : 10 Ulnt Auto-resets count
116 65 : 01 : 11 Ulnt Thermal overload warnings count
117-118 65 : 01 : 12 - UDlnt Motor starts count
65 :: 01 : 13
119-120 65 : 01 : 14 - UDlnt Operating time (s)
65 :: 01 : 15
121 65 : 01 : 16 lnt Controller internal temperature max (°C)
1639505EN-05 04/2015 393

Use
LTM Monitoring Statistics

The LTM monitoring statistics are described below:

122 65 : 01 : 17 Ulnt Faults count
123 65 : 01 : 18 Ulnt Warnings count
124-125 65 : 01 : 19 - UDlnt Motor LO1 closings count
65 : 01 : 1A
126-127 65 : 01 : 1B - UDlnt Motor LO2 closings count
65 : 01 : 1C
128 65 : 01 : 1D Ulnt Diagnostic faults count
129 65 : 01 : 1E Ulnt (Reserved)
130 65 : 01 : 1F Ulnt Overcurrent faults count
131 65 : 01 : 20 Ulnt Current phase loss faults count
132 65 : 01 : 21 Ulnt Motor temperature sensor faults count
133 65 : 01 : 22 Ulnt Voltage phase imbalance faults count 1
134 65 : 01 : 23 Ulnt Voltage phase loss faults count 1
135 65 : 01 : 24 Ulnt Wiring faults count 1
136 65 : 01 : 25 Ulnt Undervoltage faults count 1
137 65 : 01 : 26 Ulnt Overvoltage faults count 1
138 65 : 01 : 27 Ulnt Underpower faults count 1
139 65 : 01 : 28 Ulnt Overpower faults count 1
140 65 : 01 : 29 Ulnt Under power factor faults count 1
141 65 : 01 : 2A Ulnt Over power factor faults count 1
142 65 : 01 : 2B Ulnt Load sheddings count 1
143-144 65 : 01 : 2C - UDlnt Active power consumption (kWh) 1
65 : 01 : 2D
145-146 65 : 01 : 2E - UDlnt Reactive power consumption (kVARh) 1
65 : 01 : 2F
147 65 : 01 : 30 Ulnt Auto restart immediate count
148 65 : 01 : 31 Ulnt Auto restart delayed count
149 65 : 01 : 32 Ulnt Auto restart manual count
Last Fault (n-0) Statistics

The last fault statistics are completed by variables at register addresses 300 to 310.

150 66 : 01 : 01 Ulnt Fault code n-0
151 66 : 01 : 02 Ulnt Motor full load current ratio n-0 (% FLC max)
152 66 : 01 : 03 Ulnt Thermal capacity level n-0 (% trip level)
153 66 : 01 : 04 Ulnt Average current ratio n-0 (% FLC)
154 66 : 01 : 05 Ulnt L1 current ratio n-0 (% FLC)
157 66 : 01 : 08 Ulnt Ground current ratio n-0 (x 0.1 % FLC min)
158 66 : 01 : 09 Ulnt Full load current max n-0 (x 0.1 A)
159 66 : 01 : 0A Ulnt Current phase imbalance n-0 (%)
160 66 : 01 : 0B Ulnt Frequency n-0 (x 0.1 Hz)
161 66 : 01 : 0C Ulnt Motor temperature sensor n-0 (x 0.1 Ω)
162-165 66 : 01 : OD - Word[4] Date and time n-0
66 : 01 : 10 (See DT_DateTime, page 387)
394 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use

166 66 : 01 : 11 Ulnt Average voltage n-0 (V) 1
167 66 : 01 : 12 Ulnt L3-L1 voltage n-0 (V) 1
170 66 : 01 : 15 Ulnt Voltage phase imbalance n-0 (%) 1
171 66 : 01 : 16 Ulnt Active power n-0 (x 0.1 kW) 1
172 66 : 01 : 17 Ulnt Power factor n-0 (x 0.01) 1
173-179 66 : 01 : 18 - (Not significant)
66 : 01 : 1E
N-1 Fault Statistics

The n-1 fault statistics are completed by variables at register addresses 330 to 340.

180 66 : 01 : 1F Ulnt Fault code n-1
181 66 : 01 : 20 Ulnt Motor full load current ratio n-1 (% FLC max)
182 66 : 01 : 21 Ulnt Thermal capacity level n-1 (% trip level)
189 66 : 01 : 28 Ulnt Current phase imbalance n-1 (%)
190 66 : 01 : 29 Ulnt Frequency n-1 (x 0.1 Hz)
191 66 : 01 : 2A Ulnt Motor temperature sensor n-1 (x 0.1 Ω)
192-195 66 : 01 : 2B - Word[4] Date and time n-1
66 : 01 : 2E (See DT_DateTime, page 387)
196 66 : 01 : 2F Ulnt Average voltage n-1 (V) 1
203-209 66 : 01 : 36 - Ulnt (Not significant)
66 : 01 : 3C


210 66 : 01 : 3D Ulnt Fault code n-2
211 66 : 01 : 3E Ulnt Motor full load current ratio n-2 (% FLC max)
212 66 : 01 : 3F Ulnt Thermal capacity level n-2 (% trip level)
1639505EN-05 04/2015 395

Use

221 66 : 01 : 48 Ulnt Motor temperature sensor n-2 (x 0.1 Ω)
222-225 66 : 01 : 49 - Word[4] Date and time n-2
66 : 01 : 4C (See DT_DateTime, page 387)
226 66 : 01 : 4D Ulnt Average voltage n-2 (V) 1
227 66 : 01 : 4E Ulnt L3-L1 voltage n-2 (V) 1
228 66 : 01 : 4F Ulnt L1-L2 voltage n-2 (V) 1
233-239 66 : 01 : 54 - (Not significant)
66 : 01 : 5A


240 66 : 01 : 5B Ulnt Fault code n-3
241 66 : 01 : 5C Ulnt Motor full load current ratio n-3 (% FLC max)
242 66 : 01 : 5D Ulnt Thermal capacity level n-3 (% trip level)
243 66 : 01 : 5E Ulnt Average current ratio n-3 (% FLC)
244 66 : 01 : 5F Ulnt L1 current ratio n-3 (% FLC)
248 66 : 01 : 63 Ulnt Full load current max n-3 (0.1 A)
66 : 01 : 6A (See DT_DateTime, page 387)
256 66 : 01 : 6B Ulnt Average voltage n-3 (V) 1
257 66 : 01 : 6C Ulnt L3-L1 voltage n-3 (V) 1
258 66 : 01 : 6D Ulnt L1-L2 voltage n-3 (V) 1
259 66 : 01 : 6E Ulnt L2-L3 voltage n-3 (V) 1
260 66 : 01 : 6F Ulnt Voltage phase imbalance n-3 (%) 1
263-269 66 : 01 : 72 - (Not significant)
66 : 01 : 78
396 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use


270 66 : 01 : 79 Ulnt Fault code n-4
271 66 : 01 : 7A Ulnt Motor full load current ratio n-4 (% FLC max)
272 66 : 01 : 7B Ulnt Thermal capacity level n-4 (% trip level)
273 66 : 01 : 7C Ulnt Average current ratio n-4 (% FLC)
274 66 : 01 : 7D Ulnt L1 current ratio n-4 (% FLC)
275 66 : 01 : 7E Ulnt L2 current ratio n-4 (% FLC)
276 66 : 01 : 7F Ulnt L3 current ratio n-4 (% FLC)
66 : 01 : 88 (See DT_DateTime, page 387)
286 66 : 01 : 89 Ulnt Average voltage n-4 (V) 1
287 66 : 01 : 8A Ulnt L3-L1 voltage n-4 (V) 1
288 66 : 01 : 8B Ulnt L1-L2 voltage n-4 (V) 1
289 66 : 01 : 8C Ulnt L2-L3 voltage n-4 (V) 1
290 66 : 01 : 8D Ulnt Voltage phase imbalance n-4 (%) 1
291 66 : 01 : 8E Ulnt Active power n-4 (x 0.1 kW) 1
292 66 : 01 : 8F Ulnt Power factor n-4 (x 0.01) 1
293-299 66 : 01 : 90 - (Not significant)
66 : 01 : 96
Last Fault (n-0) Statistics Extension

The last fault main statistics are listed at register addresses 150-179.

300-301 67 : 01 : 01 - UDlnt Average current n-0 (x 0.01 A)
67 : 01 : 02
302-303 67 : 01 : 03 - UDlnt L1 current n-0 (x 0.01 A)
67 : 01 : 04
67 : 01 : 06
67 : 01 : 08
308-309 67 : 01 : 09 - UDlnt Ground current n-0 (mA)
67 : 01 : 0A
310 67 : 01 : 0B Ulnt Motor temperature sensor degree n-0 (°C)
1639505EN-05 04/2015 397

Use
N-1 Fault Statistics Extension

The n-1 fault main statistics are listed at register addresses 180-209.

330-331 67 : 01 : 1F - UDlnt Average current n-1 (x 0.01 A)
67 : 01 : 20
67 : 01 : 22
67 : 01 : 24
67 : 01 : 26
67 : 01 : 28
340 67 : 01 : 29 Ulnt Motor temperature sensor degree n-1 (°C)


360-361 67 : 01 : 3D - UDlnt Average current n-2 (x 0.01 A)
67 : 01 : 3E
362-363 67 : 01 : 3F - UDlnt L1 current n-2 (x 0.01 A)
67 : 01 : 40
67 : 01 : 42
67 : 01 : 44
67 : 01 : 46


390-391 67 : 01 : 5B - UDlnt Average current n-3 (x 0.01 A)
67 : 01 : 5C
392-393 67 : 01 : 5D - UDlnt L1 current n-3 (x 0.01 A)
67 : 01 : 5E
67 : 01 : 60
67 : 01 : 62
67 : 01 : 64
398 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use


420-421 67 : 01 : 79 - UDlnt Average current n-4 (x 0.01 A)
67 : 01 : 7A
422-423 67 : 01 : 7B - UDlnt L1 current n-4 (x 0.01 A)
67 : 01 : 7C
424-425 67 : 01 : 7D - UDlnt L2 current n-4 (x 0.01 A)
67 : 01 : 7E
67 : 01 : 80
67 : 01 : 82
1639505EN-05 04/2015 399

Use
Monitoring Variables
Monitoring Overview
Monitoring variables are grouped according to the following criteria:
Monitoring Variable groups Modbus/TCP (Register EtherNet/IP (Object addresses)

addresses)
Monitoring of faults 450 to 454 68 : 01 : 01 to 68 : 01 : 05
Monitoring of status 455 to 459 68 : 01 : 06 to 68 : 01 : 0A
Monitoring of warnings 460 to 464 68 : 01 : 0B to 68 : 01 : 0F
Monitoring of measurements 465 to 539 68 : 01 : 10 to 68 : 01 : 5A
Extended monitoring for communication 2000 to 2099 82 : 01 : 01 to 82 : 01 : 64
Monitoring of Faults
Variables for monitoring of faults are described below:

450 68 : 01 : 01 Ulnt Minimum wait time (s)
451 68 : 01 : 02 Ulnt Fault code (code of the last fault, or of the fault that
takes priority)
(See DT_FaultCode, page 388.)
452 68 : 01 : 03 Word Fault register 1
bits 0-1 (Reserved)
bit 2 Ground current fault
bit 3 Thermal overload fault
bit 4 Long start fault
bit 5 Jam fault
bit 6 Current phase imbalance fault
bit 7 Undercurrent fault
bit 8 (Reserved)
bit 9 Test fault
bit 10 HMI port fault
bit 11 Controller internal fault
bit 12 Internal port fault
bit 14 Network port config fault
bit 15 Network port fault
400 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use

bit 0 External system fault
bit 1 Diagnostic fault
bit 2 Wiring fault
bit 3 Overcurrent fault
bit 4 Current phase loss fault
bit 5 Current phase reversal fault
bit 6 Motor temperature sensor fault 1
bit 7 Voltage phase imbalance fault 1
bit 8 Voltage phase loss fault 1
bit 9 Voltage phase reversal fault 1
bit 10 Undervoltage fault 1
bit 11 Overvoltage fault 1
bit 12 Underpower fault 1
bit 13 Overpower fault 1
bit 14 Under power factor fault 1
bit 15 Over power factor fault 1
bit 0 LTM E configuration fault
bits 1-15 (Reserved)
Monitoring of Status
Variables for monitoring of status are described below:

455 68 : 01 : 06 Word System status register 1
bit 0 System ready
bit 1 System on
bit 2 System fault
bit 3 System warning
bit 4 System tripped
bit 5 Fault reset authorized
bit 6 Controller power
bit 7 Motor running (with detection of a current, if
greater than 10% FLC)
bits 8-13 Motor average current ratio
32 = 100% FLC - 63 = 200% FLC
bit 14 Control via HMI
bit 15 Motor starting (start in progress)
0 = descending current is less than 150% FLC
1 = ascending current is greater than 10% FLC
1639505EN-05 04/2015 401

Use

456 68 : 01 : 07 Word System status register 2
bit 0 Auto-reset active
bit 2 Fault power cycle requested
bit 3 Motor restart time undefined
bit 4 Rapid cycle lockout
bit 5 Load shedding 1
bit 6 Motor speed
0 = FLC1 setting is used
bit 7 HMI port comm loss
bit 8 Network port comm loss
bit 9 Motor transition lockout
bits 10-15 (Not significant)
457 68 : 01 : 08 Word Logic inputs status
bit 0 Logic input 1
bit 1 Logic input 2
bit 2 Logic input 3
bit 3 Logic input 4
bit 4 Logic input 5
bit 5 Logic input 6
bit 6 Logic input 7
bit 7 Logic input 8 1
458 68 : 01 : 09 Word Logic outputs status
bit 0 Logic output 1
bit 4 Logic output 5 1
402 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use

459 68 : 01 : 0A Word I/O status
bit 0 Input 1
bit 1 Input 2
bit 2 Input 3
bit 3 Input 4
bit 4 Input 5
bit 5 Input 6
bit 6 Input 7
bit 7 Input 8
bit 8 Input 9
bit 9 Input 10
bit 10 Input 11
bit 11 Input 12
bit 12 Output 1 (13-14)
bit 13 Output 2 (23-24)
bit 14 Output 3 (33-34)
bit 15 Output 4 (95-96, 97-98)
Monitoring of Warnings
Variables for monitoring of warnings are described below:

460 68 : 01 : 0B UInt Warning code
(See DT_WarningCode, page 390.)
461 68 : 01 : 0C Word Warning register 1
bit 2 Ground current warning
bit 3 Thermal overload warning
bit 5 Jam warning
bit 6 Current phase imbalance warning
bit 7 Undercurrent warning
bit 10 HMI port warning
bit 11 Controller internal temperature warning
bit 15 Network port warning
1639505EN-05 04/2015 403

Use

462 68 : 01 : 0D Word Warning register 2
bit 1 Diagnostic warning
bit 2 (Reserved)
bit 3 Overcurrent warning
bit 4 Current phase loss warning
bit 5 Current phase reversal warning
bit 6 Motor temperature sensor warning
bit 7 Voltage phase imbalance warning 1
bit 8 Voltage phase loss warning 1
bit 10 Undervoltage warning 1
bit 11 Overvoltage warning 1
bit 12 Underpower warning 1
bit 13 Overpower warning 1
bit 14 Under power factor warning 1
bit 15 Over power factor warning 1
463 68 : 01 : 0E Word Warning register 3
bit 0 LTM E configuration warning
464 68 : 01 : 0F Ulnt Motor temperature sensor degree (°C)
Monitoring of Measurements
Variables for monitoring of measurements are described below:

465 68 : 01 : 10 UInt Thermal capacity level (% trip level)
466 68 : 01 : 11 UInt Average current ratio (% FLC)
467 68 : 01 : 12 UInt L1 current ratio (% FLC)
470 68 : 01 : 15 UInt Ground current ratio (x 0.1 % FLC min)
471 68 : 01 : 16 UInt Current phase imbalance (%)
472 68 : 01 : 17 Int Controller internal temperature (°C)
473 68 : 01 : 18 UInt Controller config checksum
474 68 : 01 : 19 UInt Frequency (x 0.01 Hz) 2
475 68 : 01 : 1A UInt Motor temperature sensor (x 0.1 Ω)
476 68 : 01 : 1B UInt Average voltage (V) 1
477 68 : 01 : 1C UInt L3-L1 voltage (V) 1
478 68 : 01 : 1D UInt L1-L2 voltage (V) 1
479 68 : 01 : 1E UInt L2-L3 voltage (V) 1
480 68 : 01 : 1F UInt Voltage phase imbalance (%) 1
481 68 : 01 : 20 UInt Power factor (x 0.01) 1
482 68 : 01 : 21 UInt Active power (x 0.1 kW) 1
483 68 : 01 : 22 UInt Reactive power (x 0.1 kVAR) 1
404 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use

484 68 : 01 : 23 Word Auto restart status register
bit 0 Voltage dip occurred
bit 1 Voltage dip detection
bit 2 Auto restart immediate condition
bit 3 Auto restart delayed condition
bit 4 Auto restart manual condition
485 68 : 01 : 24 Word Controller last power off duration
486-489 68 : 01 : 25 - (Not significant)
68 : 01 : 28
490 68 : 01 : 29 Word Network port monitoring
bit 0 Network port communicating
bit 1 Network port connected
bit 2 Network port self-testing
bit 3 Network port self-detecting
bit 4 Network port bad config
491 68 : 01 : 2A UInt Network port baud rate
(See DT_ExtBaudRate, page 388.)
492 68 : 01 : 2B (Not significant)
493 68 : 01 : 2C UInt Network port parity
(See DT_ExtParity, page 388.)
494-499 68 : 01 : 2D - (Not significant)
68 : 01 : 32
500-501 68 : 01 : 33 - UDInt Average current (x 0.01 A)
68 : 01 : 34
502-503 68 : 01 : 35 - UDInt L1 current (x 0.01 A)
68 : 01 : 36
68 : 01 : 38
68 : 01 : 3A
508-509 68 : 01 : 3B - UDInt Ground current (mA)
68 : 01 : 3C
510 68 : 01 : 3D UInt Controller port ID
511 68 : 01 : 3E UInt Time to trip (x 1 s)
512 68 : 01 : 3F UInt Motor last start current ratio (% FLC)
513 68 : 01 : 40 UInt Motor last start duration (s)
514 68 : 01 : 41 UInt Motor starts per hour count
515 68 : 01 : 42 Word Phase imbalances register
bit 0 L1 current highest imbalance
bit 3 L1-L2 voltage highest imbalance 1
516-523 68 : 01 : 43 - (Reserved)
68 : 01 : 5A
524-539 68 : 01 : 4B - (Forbidden)
68 : 01 : 5A
1639505EN-05 04/2015 405

Use
Extended Monitoring for Communication

Variables for extended monitoring for communication are described below:

2000-2001 82 : 01 : 01 - Word[2] Ethernet Basic HW Diag Validity
82 : 01 : 02 Register 2000:
bit 0: Ethernet services available (1=Yes)
bit 1: Ethernet global status available (1=Yes)
bits 2 to 14: (Reserved)
bit 15: Ethernet field extended 1 available (1=Yes)
Register 2001:
bit 0: Ethernet IP assignment mode available (1=Yes)
bit 1: Ethernet device name available (1=Yes)
bit 2: Ethernet MB messages received counter available
(1=Yes)
bit 3: Ethernet MB messages sent counter available
(1=Yes)
bit 4: Ethernet MB error messages sent counter available
(1=Yes)
bit 5: Ethernet opened servers counter available (1=Yes)
bit 6: Ethernet opened clients counter available (1=Yes)
bit 7: Ethernet transmitted correct frames counter
available (1=Yes)
bit 8: Ethernet received correct frames counter available
(1=Yes)
bit 9: Ethernet frame format available (1=Yes)
bit 10: Ethernet MAC address available (1=Yes)
bit 11: Ethernet gateway available (1=Yes)
bit 12: Ethernet subnet mask available (1=Yes)
bit 13: Ethernet IP address available (1=Yes)
bit 14: Ethernet services status available (1=Yes)
bit 15: Ethernet field extended 2 available (1=Yes)
2002 82 : 01 : 03 Word Ethernet global status
bits 0-1: Ethernet global status
1= at least 1enabled service is operating with an
unresolved error
2 = all enabled services are operating without error
bits 2-15: (Reserved)
2003 82 : 01 : 04 Word Ethernet services validity
bit 0: Ethernet port 502 messaging available (1=Yes)
2004 82 : 01 : 05 Word Ethernet services status
bits 0-2: Ethernet port 502 messaging
1 = idle
2 = operational
2005 - 2006 82 : 01 : 06 - UDInt Ethernet IP address
82 : 01 : 07
Register 2005:
bits 0-7: first byte
bits 8-15: second byte
Register 2006:
bits 0-7: third byte
bits 8-15: fourth byte
406 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use

2007 - 2008 82 : 01 : 08 - UDInt Ethernet subnet mask
82 : 01 : 09
Register 2007:
Register 2008:
2009 - 2010 82 : 01 : 0A - UDInt Ethernet gateway address
82 : 01 : 0B
Register 2009:
Register 2010:
2011 - 2013 82 : 01 : 0C - Word[3] Ethernet MAC Address
82 : 01 : 0E Register 2011:
bits 0-7: first hex byte
bits 8-15: second hex byte
Register 2012:
bits 0-7: third hex byte
bits 8-15: fourth hex byte
Register 2013:
bits 0-7: fifth hex byte
bits 8-15: sixth hex byte
2014 - 2016 82 : 01 : 0F- Word[3] Ethernet II framing registers
82 : 01 : 11
Register 2014:
bit 0: Ethernet II framing supported (1=Yes)
bit 1: Ethernet II framing receiver supported (1=Yes)
bit 2: Ethernet II framing sender supported (1=Yes)
bit 3: Ethernet auto-detection supported (1=Yes)
Register 2015:
bit 0: Ethernet II framing configured (1=Yes)
bit 1: Ethernet II framing receiver configured (1=Yes)
bit 2:Ethernet II framing sender configured (1=Yes)
bit 3: Ethernet auto-detection configured (1=Yes)
Register 2016:
bit 0: Ethernet II framing operational (1=Yes)
bit 1: Ethernet II framing receiver operational (1=Yes)
bit 2: Ethernet II framing sender operational (1=Yes)
bit 3: Ethernet auto-detection operational (1=Yes)
2017 - 2018 82 : 01 : 12 - UDInt Ethernet received correct frames counter
82 : 01 : 13
2019 - 2020 82 : 01 : 14 - UDInt Ethernet transmitted correct frames counter
82 : 01 : 15
2021 82 : 01 : 16 UInt Ethernet opened clients counter
2022 82 : 01 : 17 UInt Ethernet opened servers counter
1639505EN-05 04/2015 407

Use

2023 - 2024 82 : 01 : 18 UDInt Ethernet MB error messages sent counter
2025 - 2026 82 : 01 : 1A - UDInt Ethernet MB messages sent counter
82 : 01 : 1B
2027 - 2028 82 : 01 : 1C - UDInt Ethernet MB messages received counter
82 : 01 : 1D
2029 - 2036 82 : 01 : 1E - Word[8] Ethernet device name
82 : 01 : 25
2037 82 : 01 : 26 Word Ethernet IP assignment capability
bit 0: Ethernet IP served by name available (1=Yes)
bit 1: Ethernet IP served by MAC BootP available
(1=Yes)
bit 2: Ethernet IP served by MAC DHCP available
(1=Yes)
bit 3: Ethernet IP served by stored assignment available
(1=Yes)
2038 82 : 01 : 27 Word Ethernet IP assignment operational
bit 0: Ethernet IP served by name available (1=Yes)
bit 1: Ethernet IP served by MAC BootP available
(1=Yes)
bit 2: Ethernet IP served by MAC DHCP available
(1=Yes)
bit 3: Ethernet IP served by stored assignment available
(1=Yes)
2039 - 2099 82 : 01 : 28 - (Reserved)
82 : 01 : 64
408 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use
Configuration Variables
Configuration Overview
Configuration variables are grouped according to the following criteria
Configuration variable groups Modbus/TCP (Register EtherNet/IP (Object addresses)

addresses)
Configuration 540 to 649 69 : 01 : 01 to 6A : 01 : 32
Setting 650 to 699 6B : 01 : 01 to 6B : 01 : 32
Extended settings for communication 3000 to 3120 96 : 01 : 01 to 96 : 01 : 79
Configuration Variables
The configuration variables are described below:
Modbus/TCP EtherNet/IP Variable Read/Write variables Note,

540 69 : 01 : 01 UInt Motor operating mode B
2 = 2-wire overload
3 = 3-wire overload
4 = 2-wire independent
5 = 3-wire independent
6 = 2-wire reverser
7 = 3-wire reverser
8 = 2-wire 2-step
9 = 3-wire 2-step
10 = 2-wire 2-speed
11 = 3-wire 2-speed
256-511 = Custom logic program (0-255)
541 69 : 01 : 02 UInt Motor transition timeout (s)
542-544 69 : 01 : 03 - (Reserved)
69 : 01 : 05
545 69 : 01 : 06 Word Controller AC inputs setting register
bits 0-3 Controller AC logic inputs configuration
(See DT_ACInputSetting, page 386)
546 69 : 01 : 07 UInt Thermal overload setting B
bits 0-2 Motor temperature sensor type:
0 = None
1 = PTC binary
2 = PT100
3 = PTC analog
4 = NTC analog
bits 3-4 Thermal overload mode:
0 = Definite
2 = Inverse thermal
547 69 : 01 : 08 UInt Thermal overload fault definite timeout (s)
548 69 : 01 : 09 (Reserved)
549 69 : 01 : 0A UInt Motor temperature sensor fault threshold (x 0.1 Ω)
550 69 : 01 : 0B UInt Motor temperature sensor warning threshold (x 0.1 Ω)
551 69 : 01 : 0C UInt Motor temperature sensor fault threshold degree (°C)
552 69 : 01 : 0D UInt Motor temperature sensor warning threshold degree (°C)
553 69 : 01 : 0E UInt Rapid cycle lockout timeout (s)
554 69 : 01 : 0F (Reserved)
555 69 : 01 : 10 UInt Current phase loss timeout (x 0.1 s)
556 69 : 01 : 11 UInt Overcurrent fault timeout (s)
557 69 : 01 : 12 UInt Overcurrent fault threshold (% FLC)
558 69 : 01 : 13 UInt Overcurrent warning threshold (% FLC)
1639505EN-05 04/2015 409

Use

559 69 : 01 : 14 Word Ground current fault configuration B
bit 0 Ground current mode
560 69 : 01 : 15 UInt Ground CT primary
561 69 : 01 : 16 UInt Ground CT secondary
562 69 : 01 : 17 UInt External ground current fault timeout (x 0.01 s)
563 69 : 01 : 18 UInt External ground current fault threshold (x 0.01 A)
564 69 : 01 : 19 UInt External ground current warning threshold (x 0.01 A)
565 69 : 01 : 1A UInt Motor nominal voltage (V) 1
566 69 : 01 : 1B UInt Voltage phase imbalance fault timeout starting (x 0.1 s) 1
567 69 : 01 : 1C UInt Voltage phase imbalance fault timeout running (x 0.1 s) 1
568 69 : 01 : 1D UInt Voltage phase imbalance fault threshold (% imb) 1
569 69 : 01 : 1E UInt Voltage phase imbalance warning threshold (% imb) 1
570 69 : 01 : 1F UInt Overvoltage fault timeout (x 0.1 s) 1
571 69 : 01 : 20 UInt Overvoltage fault threshold (% Vnom) 1
572 69 : 01 : 21 UInt Overvoltage warning threshold (% Vnom) 1
573 69 : 01 : 22 UInt Undervoltage fault timeout (x 0.1 s) 1
574 69 : 01 : 23 UInt Undervoltage fault threshold (% Vnom) 1
575 69 : 01 : 24 UInt Undervoltage warning threshold (% Vnom) 1
576 69 : 01 : 25 UInt Voltage phase loss fault timeout (x 0.1 s) 1
577 69 : 01 : 26 Word Voltage dip setting 1
bit 0 Load shedding enable
bit 1 Auto-restart enable
578 69 : 01 : 27 UInt Load shedding timeout (s) 1
579 69 : 01 : 28 UInt Voltage dip threshold (% Vnom) 1
580 69 : 01 : 29 UInt Voltage dip restart timeout (s) 1
581 69 : 01 : 2A UInt Voltage dip restart threshold (% Vnom) 1
582 69 : 01 : 2B Ulnt Auto restart immediate timeout (x 0.1 s)
583 69 : 01 : 2C UInt Motor nominal power (x 0.1 kW) 1
584 69 : 01 : 2D UInt Overpower fault timeout (s) 1
585 69 : 01 : 2E UInt Overpower fault threshold (% Pnom) 1
586 69 : 01 : 2F UInt Overpower warning threshold (% Pnom) 1
587 69 : 01 : 30 UInt Underpower fault timeout (s) 1
588 69 : 01 : 31 UInt Underpower fault threshold (% Pnom) 1
589 69 : 01 : 32 UInt Underpower warning threshold (% Pnom) 1
590 69 : 01 : 33 UInt Under power factor fault timeout (x 0.1 s) 1
591 69 : 01 : 34 UInt Under power factor fault threshold (x 0.01 PF) 1
592 69 : 01 : 35 UInt Under power factor warning threshold (x 0.01 PF) 1
593 69 : 01 : 36 UInt Over power factor fault timeout (x 0.1 s) 1
594 69 : 01 : 37 UInt Over power factor fault threshold (x 0.01 PF) 1
595 69 : 01 : 38 UInt Over power factor warning threshold (x 0.01 PF) 1
596 69 : 01 : 39 UInt Auto restart delayed timeout (s)
597-599 69 : 01 : 3A - (Reserved)
69 : 01 : 3C
600 6A : 01 : 01 (Not significant)
410 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use

601 6A : 01 : 02 Word General configuration register 1
bit 0 Controller system config required: A
0 = exit the configuration menu
1 = go to the configuration menu
bits 1-7 (Reserved)
Control mode configuration, bits 8-10 (one bit is set to 1):
bit 8 Config via HMI keypad enable
bit 9 Config via HMI engineering tool enable
bit 10 Config via network port enable
bit 11 Motor star-delta B
bit 12 Motor phases sequence:
0=ABC
1=ACB
bits 13-14 Motor phases B
(See DT_PhaseNumber, page 390)
bit 15 Motor auxiliary fan cooled (factory setting = 0)
602 6A : 01 : 03 Word General configuration register 2
bits 0-2 Fault reset mode C
(See DT_ResetMode, page 390)
bit 3 HMI port parity setting:
0 = none
1 = even (factory setting)
bits 4-8 (Reserved)
bit 9 HMI port endian setting
bit 10 Network port endian setting
bit 11 HMI motor status LED color
603 6A : 01 : 04 Ulnt HMI port address setting
604 6A : 01 : 05 Ulnt HMI port baud rate setting (Baud)
605 6A : 01 : 06 (Reserved)
606 6A : 01 : 07 Ulnt Motor trip class (s)
607 6A : 01 : 08 (Reserved)
608 6A : 01 : 09 Ulnt Thermal overload fault reset threshold (% trip level)
609 6A : 01 : 0A Ulnt Thermal overload warning threshold (% trip level)
610 6A : 01 : 0B UInt Internal ground current fault timeout (x 0.1 s)
611 6A : 01 : 0C UInt Internal ground current fault threshold (% FLCmin)
612 6A : 01 : 0D UInt Internal ground current warning threshold (% FLCmin)
613 6A : 01 : 0E UInt Current phase imbalance fault timeout starting (x 0.1 s)
614 6A : 01 : 0F UInt Current phase imbalance fault timeout running (x 0.1 s)
615 6A : 01 : 10 UInt Current phase imbalance fault threshold (% imb)
616 6A : 01 : 11 UInt Current phase imbalance warning threshold (% imb)
617 6A : 01 : 12 UInt Jam fault timeout (s)
618 6A : 01 : 13 UInt Jam fault threshold (% FLC)
619 6A : 01 : 14 UInt Jam warning threshold (% FLC)
620 6A : 01 : 15 UInt Undercurrent fault timeout (s)
621 6A : 01 : 16 UInt Undercurrent fault threshold (% FLC)
622 6A : 01 : 17 UInt Undercurrent warning threshold (% FLC)
623 6A : 01 : 18 UInt Long start fault timeout (s)
624 6A : 01 : 19 UInt Long start fault threshold (% FLC)
625 6A : 01 : 1A (Reserved)
1639505EN-05 04/2015 411

Use

626 6A : 01 : 1B UInt HMI display contrast setting
bits 0-7 HMI display contrast setting
HMI display brightness setting
627 6A : 01 : 1C UInt Contactor rating (0.1 A)
628 6A : 01 : 1D UInt Load CT primary B
629 6A : 01 : 1E UInt Load CT secondary B
630 6A : 01 : 1F UInt Load CT multiple passes (passes) B
631 6A : 01 : 20 Word Fault enable register 1
bits 0-1 (Reserved)
bit 2 Ground current fault enable
bit 3 Thermal overload fault enable
bit 4 Long start fault enable
bit 5 Jam fault enable
bit 6 Current phase imbalance fault enable
bit 7 Undercurrent fault enable
bit 8 (Reserved)
bit 9 Self test enable
0 = disable
1 = enable (factory setting)
bit 10 HMI port fault enable
bit 15 Network port fault enable
632 6A : 01 : 21 Word Warning enable register 1
bit 1 (Reserved)
bit 2 Ground current warning enable
bit 3 Thermal overload warning enable
bit 4 (Reserved)
bit 5 Jam warning enable
bit 6 Current phase imbalance warning enable
bit 7 Undercurrent warning enable
bits 8-9 (Reserved)
bit 10 HMI port warning enable
bit 11 Controller internal temperature warning enable
bit 15 Network port warning enable
412 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use

633 6A : 01 : 22 Word Fault enable register 2
bit 0 (Reserved)
bit 1 Diagnostic fault enable
bit 2 Wiring fault enable
bit 3 Overcurrent fault enable
bit 4 Current phase loss fault enable
bit 5 Current phase reversal fault enable
bit 6 Motor temperature sensor fault enable
bit 7 Voltage phase imbalance fault enable 1
bit 8 Voltage phase loss fault enable 1
bit 9 Voltage phase reversal fault enable 1
bit 10 Undervoltage fault enable 1
bit 11 Overvoltage fault enable 1
bit 12 Underpower fault enable 1
bit 13 Overpower fault enable 1
bit 14 Under power factor fault enable 1
bit 15 Over power factor fault enable 1
634 6A : 01 : 23 Word Warning enable register 2
bit 0 (Reserved)
bit 1 Diagnostic warning enable
bit 2 (Reserved)
bit 3 Overcurrent warning enable
bit 4 Current phase loss warning enable
bit 5 (Reserved)
bit 6 Motor temperature sensor warning enable
bit 7 Voltage phase imbalance warning enable 1
bit 8 Voltage phase loss warning enable 1
bit 9 (Reserved) 1
bit 10 Undervoltage warning enable 1
bit 11 Overvoltage warning enable 1
bit 12 Underpower warning enable 1
bit 13 Overpower warning enable 1
bit 14 Under power factor warning enable 1
bit 15 Over power factor warning enable 1
635-636 6A : 01 : 24 - (Reserved)
6A : 01 : 25
637 6A : 01 : 26 UInt Auto-reset attempts group 1 setting
638 6A : 01 : 27 UInt Auto-reset group 1 timeout
639 6A : 01 : 28 UInt Auto-reset attempts group 2 setting
640 6A : 01 : 29 UInt Auto-reset group 2 timeout
641 6A : 01 : 2A UInt Auto-reset attempts group 3 setting
642 6A : 01 : 2B UInt Auto-reset group 3 timeout
643 6A : 01 : 2C UInt Motor step 1 to 2 timeout
644 6A : 01 : 2D UInt Motor step 1 to 2 threshold
645 6A : 01 : 2E UInt HMI port fallback setting
(See DT_OutputFallbackStrategy, page 390)
646-649 6A : 01 : 2F - (Reserved)
6A : 01 : 32
1639505EN-05 04/2015 413

Use
Setting Variables
The setting variables are described below:

650 6B : 01 : 01 Word HMI language setting register:
bit 0-4 HMI language setting
(See DT_Language5, page 390)
651 6B : 01 : 02 Word HMI display items register 1
bit 0 HMI display average current enable
bit 1 HMI display thermal capacity level enable
bit 2 HMI display L1 current enable
bit 5 HMI display ground current enable
bit 6 HMI display motor status enable
bit 7 HMI display current phase imbalance enable
bit 8 HMI display operating time enable
bit 9 HMI display I/O status enable
bit 10 HMI display reactive power enable
bit 11 HMI display frequency enable
bit 12 HMI display starts per hour enable
bit 13 HMI display control mode enable
bit 14 HMI display start statistics enable
bit 15 HMI motor temperature sensor enable
652 6B : 01 : 03 Ulnt Motor full load current ratio, FLC1 (% FLCmax)
653 6B : 01 : 04 Ulnt Motor high speed full load current ratio, FLC2 (% FLCmax)
654 6B : 01 : 05 Word HMI display items register 2
bit 0 HMI display L1-L2 voltage enable 1
bit 3 HMI display average voltage enable 1
bit 4 HMI display active power enable 1
bit 5 HMI display power consumption enable 1
bit 6 HMI display power factor enable 1
bit 7 HMI display average current ratio enable
bit 8 HMI display L1 current ratio enable 1
bit 11 HMI display thermal capacity remaining enable
bit 12 HMI display time to trip enable
bit 13 HMI display voltage phase imbalance enable 1
bit 14 HMI display date enable
bit 15 HMI display time enable
655-658 6B : 01 : 06 - Word[4] Date and time setting
6B : 01 : 09 (See DT_DateTime, page 387)
659 6B : 01 : 0A Word[4] HMI display items register 3
bit 0 HMI display temperature sensor degree CF
660-681 6B : 01 : 0B - (Reserved)
6B : 01 : 20
414 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use

682 6B : 01 : 21 Ulnt Network port fallback setting
(See DT_OutputFallbackStrategy, page 390)
683 6B : 01 : 22 Word Control setting register (see page 155)
bits 0-1 (Reserved)
bits 2 Control remote local default mode (with LTM CU)
0 = remote
1 = local
bit 3 (Reserved)
bit 4 Control remote local buttons enable (with LTM CU)
0 = disable
1 = enable
bits 5-6 Control remote channel setting (with LTM CU)
0 = network
1 = terminal strip
2 = HMI
bit 7 (Reserved)
bit 8 Control local channel setting
0 = terminal strip
1 = HMI
bit 9 Control direct transition
0 = stop required during transition
1 = stop not required during transition
bit 10 Control transfer mode
0 = bump
1 = bumpless
bit 11 Stop terminal strip disable
0 = enable
1 = disable
bit 12 Stop HMI disable
0 = enable
1 = disable
684-694 6B : 01 : 23 - (Reserved)
6B : 01 : 2D
695 6B : 01 : 2E Ulnt Network port baud rate setting (Baud)
(See DT_ExtBaudRate, page 388)
696 6B : 01 : 2F Ulnt Network port address setting
697-699 6B : 01 : 30 - (Not significant)
6B : 01 : 32
Extended Configuration Variables for Communication

The extended configuration variables are described below:

3000-3001 96 : 01 : 01 - UDlnt Ethernet IP address setting
96 : 01 : 02
3002-3003 96 : 01 : 03 - UDlnt Ethernet subnet mask setting
96 : 01 : 04
3004-3005 96 : 01 : 05 - UDlnt Ethernet gateway address setting
96 : 01 : 06
3006-3009 96 : 01 : 07 - (Reserved)
96 : 01 : 09
3010-3011 96 : 01 : 0B - UDlnt Ethernet master IP address setting
96 : 01 : 0C
1639505EN-05 04/2015 415

Use

3012-3013 96 : 01 : 0D - UDlnt Ethernet SNMP manager address 1 setting
96 : 01 : 0E
3014-3015 96 : 01 : 0F - UDlnt Ethernet SNMP manager address 2 setting
96 : 01 : 10
3016-3031 96 : 01 : 11 - Word[16] Ethernet SNMP system name setting
96 : 01 : 20
3032-3047 96 : 01 : 21 - Word[16] Ethernet SNMP system location setting
96 : 01 : 30
3048-3063 96 : 01 : 31 - Word[16] Ethernet SNMP system contact setting
96 : 01 : 40
3064-3071 96 : 01 : 41 - Word[8] Ethernet SNMP community name get setting
96 : 01 : 48
3072-3079 96 : 01 : 49 - Word[8] Ethernet SNMP community name set setting
96 : 01 : 50
3080-3087 96 : 01 : 51 - Word[8] Ethernet SNMP community name trap setting
96 : 01 : 58
3088 96 : 01 : 59 (Reserved)
3089 96 : 01 : 5A Word Ethernet RSTP bridge priority
3090 96 : 01 : 5B Word Ethernet RSTP hello time
3091 96 : 01 : 5C Word Ethernet RSTP max age time
3092 96 : 01 : 5D Word Ethernet RSTP transmit count
3093 96 : 01 : 5E Word Ethernet RSTP forward delay
3094 96 : 01 : 5F Word Ethernet RSTP port count
3095 96 : 01 : 60 Word Ethernet RSTP port 1 priority
3096-3097 96 : 01 : 61 - UDInt Ethernet RSTP port 1 past cost
96 : 01 : 62
3098 96 : 01 : 63 Word Ethernet RSTP port 1 select
3099 96 : 01 : 64 Word Ethernet RSTP port 2 priority
3100-3101 96 : 01 : 65 - UDInt Ethernet RSTP port 2 path cost
96 : 01 : 66
3102 96 : 01 : 67 Word Ethernet RSTP port 2 select
3103 96 : 01 : 68 Word Ethernet extended configuration control
3104 96 : 01 : 69 Word Ethernet broadcast storm protection
3105 96 : 01 : 6A Word Ethernet QoS control
3106 96 : 01 : 6B Word Ethernet QoS CIP class 0/1 urgent
bits 0-3 Ethernet QoS CIP class 0/1 urgent queue priority
bits 4-7 Ethernet QoS CIP class 0/1 urgent 8021 priority
bits 8-11 Ethernet QoS CIP class 0/1 urgent DSCP
3107 96 : 01 : 6C Word Ethernet QoS CIP class 0/1 scheduled
bits 0-3 Ethernet QoS CIP class 0/1 scheduled queue
priority
bits 4-7 Ethernet QoS CIP class 0/1 scheduled 8021
priority
bits 8-11 Ethernet QoS CIP class 0/1 scheduled DSCP
3108 96 : 01 : 6D Word Ethernet QoS CIP class 0/1 high
bits 0-3 Ethernet QoS CIP class 0/1 high queue priority
bits 4-7 Ethernet QoS CIP class 0/1 high 8021 priority
bits 8-11 Ethernet QoS CIP class 0/1 high DSCP
416 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use

3109 96 : 01 : 6E Word Ethernet QoS CIP class 0/1 low
bits 0-3 Ethernet QoS CIP class 0/1 low queue priority
bits 4-7 Ethernet QoS CIP class 0/1 low 8021 priority
bits 8-11 Ethernet QoS CIP class 0/1 low DSCP
3110 96 : 01 : 6F Word Ethernet QoS CIP UCMM class 3
bits 0-3 Ethernet QoS CIP UCMM class 3 queue priority
bits 4-7 Ethernet QoS CIP UCMM class 3 8021 priority
bits 8-11 Ethernet QoS CIP UCMM class 3 DSCP
3111 96 : 01 : 70 Word Ethernet QoS PTP general
bits 0-3: Ethernet QoS PTP general queue priority
bits 4-7: Ethernet QoS PTP general 8021 priority
bits 8-11: Ethernet QoS PTP general DSCP
3112 96 : 01 : 71 Word Ethernet QoS PTP event
bits 0-3: Ethernet QoS PTP event queue priority
bits 4-7: Ethernet QoS PTP event 8021 priority
bits 8-11: Ethernet QoS PTP event DSCP
3113 96 : 01 : 72 Word Ethernet QoS default outbound priority
3114 96 : 01 : 73 Word Ethernet QoS number of ports
3115 96 : 01 : 74 Word Ethernet QoS port 1 default inbound priority
3116 96 : 01 : 75 Word Ethernet QoS port 2 default inbound priority
3117 96 : 01 : 76 Word Ethernet QoS device control
3118 96 : 01 : 77 UDInt EthernetIP capabilities control
1639505EN-05 04/2015 417

Use
Command Variables
Command Variables
Command variables are described below:

700 6C : 01 : 01 Word Logic outputs command register
bit 0 Logic output 1 command
bit 4 Logic output 5 command 1
701-703 6C : 01 : 02 - (Reserved)
6C : 01 : 04
704 6C : 01 : 05 Word Control register 1
bit 0 Motor run forward command
bit 1 Motor run reverse command
bit 2 (Reserved)
bit 3 Fault reset command
bit 4 (Reserved)
bit 5 Self test command
bit 6 Motor low speed command
705 6C : 01 : 06 Word Control register 2
bit 0 Clear all command
Clear all parameters, except:
z Motor LO1 closings count
z Motor LO2 closings count
z Controller internal temperature max
z Thermal capacity level
bit 1 Clear statistics command

bit 2 Clear thermal capacity level command
bit 3 Clear controller settings command
bit 4 Clear network port settings command
706-709 6C : 01 : 07 - (Reserved)
6C : 01 : 0A
710-799 6C : 01 : 08 - (Forbidden)
6C : 01 : 64
418 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use
User Map Variables
Overview
User Map variables are designed to optimize the access to several non-contiguous registers in one single
request.
You can define several read and write areas.
The user map can be defined via:
z a PC running SoMove with TeSys T DTM
User Map Variables

User Map Variables are described below:
User map variable groups Modbus/TCP (Register addresses) EtherNet/IP (Object addresses)
User Map addresses 800 - 899 6D : 01 : 01 - 6D : 01 : 64
User Map values 900 - 999 6E : 01 : 01 - 6E : 01 : 64
Modbus/TCP EtherNet/IP Variable type Read/Write variables Note, page 383

(Register (Object
800-898 6D : 01 : 01 - Word[99] User map addresses setting
6D : 01 : 63
899 6D : 01 : 64 Word (Reserved)
Modbus/TCP EtherNet/IP Variable type Read/Write variables Note, page 383

(Register (Object
900-998 6E : 01 : 01 - Word[99] User map values
6E : 01 : 63
999 6E : 01 : 64 Word (Reserved)
The User Map Address group is used to select a list of addresses to read or write. It can be considered as
a configuration area.
The User Map Value group is used to read or write values associated to addresses configured in the User
Map Address area:
z Read or write of register 900 allows to read or write the register address defined in register 800
z Read or write of register 901 allows to read or write the register address defined in register 801,...
Example of Use
The User Map Address configuration below gives an example of user map address configuration to access
non-contiguous registers:
Modbus/TCP EtherNet/IP Value configured Read/Write variables

(Register (Object
800 6D : 01 : 01 452 Fault register 1
801 6D : 01 : 02 453 Fault register 2
802 6D : 01 : 03 461 Warning register 1
803 6D : 01 : 04 462 Warning register 2
804 6D : 01 : 05 450 Minimum wait time
805 6D : 01 : 06 500 Average current (0.01 A) MSW
806 6D : 01 : 07 501 Average current (0.01 A) LSW
1639505EN-05 04/2015 419

Use
Modbus/TCP EtherNet/IP Value configured Read/Write variables

(Register (Object
850 6D : 01 : 51 651 HMI display items register 1
851 6D : 01 : 52 654 HMI display items register 2
852 6D : 01 : 53 705 Control register 2
With this configuration, monitoring information is accessible with one single read request through register
addresses 900 to 906.
Configuration and command can be written with one single write using register addresses 950 to 952.
420 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use
Custom Logic Variables
Custom Logic Variables

Custom logic variables are described below:

1250 71 : 01 : 33 Word Custom logic setting register 1
bit 0 (Reserved)
bit 1 Logic input 3 external ready enable
1251-1269 71 : 01 : 34 - (Reserved)
71 : 01 : 46
1270 71 : 01 : 47 Word Custom logic command register 1
bit 0 Custom logic external fault command
1271-1279 71 : 01 : 48 - (Reserved)
71 : 01 : 50

1280 71 : 01 : 51 Word Custom logic monitoring register 1
bit 0 (Reserved)
bit 1 Custom logic system ready
1281-1300 71 : 01 : 52 - (Reserved)
71 : 01 : 65

1301-1399 71 : 01 : 66 - Word[99] General purpose registers for logic functions
71 : 01 : C8
1639505EN-05 04/2015 421

Use
Mirroring Variables
Mirroring Variables
Mirroring variables are updated to present—in a series of contiguous registers—the values of other high
priority status, I/O and control registers, as follows:

2500 8C : 01 : 01 Word Mirror status register
bit 0 Input table freshness
0 = table has been read within 100ms
1 = table has not been read within 100ms
bit 1 Input table validity
0 = table data is invalid
1 = table data is valid
bit 2 Input table changed
0 = table data is unchanged from last read
1 = table data is changed from last read
bits 3 - 7 (Reserved)
bit 8 Output table freshness
0 = table has been read within 100ms
1 = table has not been read within 100ms
bit 9 Output table validity
0 = table data is invalid
1 = table data is valid
bit 10 Output table changed
0 = table data is unchanged from last read
1 = table data is changed from last read
bits 11 - 15 (Reserved)
2501 8C : 01 : 02 Word (Reserved)
2502 8C : 01 : 03 Word Mirrors System Status Register 1 (register 455 or
object 68 : 01 : 06)
bit 0 mirrors System Ready
bit 1 mirrors System On
bit 2 mirrors System Fault
bit 3 mirrors System Warning
bit 4 mirrors System Tripped
bit 5 mirrors Fault Reset Authorized
bit 6 mirrors Controller Power
bit 7 mirrors Motor Running
(with detection of a current, if greater than 10% FLC)
bits 8-13 mirrors Motor Average Current Ratio
32 = 100% FLC - 63 = 200% FLC
bit 14 mirrors Control via HMI
bit 15 mirrors Motor Starting (start in progress)
0 = descending current is less than 150% FLC
1 = ascending current is greater than 10% FLC
422 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use

2503 8C : 01 : 04 Word Mirrors System Status Register 2 (register 456 or
object 68 : 01 : 07)
bit 0 mirrors Auto-reset Active
bit 2 mirrors Fault Power Cycle Requested
bit 3 mirrors Motor Restart Time Undefined
bit 4 mirrors Rapid Cycle Lockout
bit 5 mirrors Load Shedding 1
bit 6 mirrors Motor Speed
bit 7 mirrors HMI Port Comm Loss
bit 8 mirrors Network Port Comm Loss
bit 9 mirrors Motor Transition Lockout
2504 8C : 01 : 05 Word Mirrors Logic Inputs Status (register 457 or
object 68 : 01 : 08)
bit 0 mirrors Logic Input 1
bit 7 mirrors Logic Input 8 1
2505 8C : 01 : 06 Word Logic outputs status (register 458 or
object 68 : 01 : 09)
bit 0 mirrors Logic Output 1
bit 4 mirrors Logic Output 5 1
1639505EN-05 04/2015 423

Use

2506 8C : 01 : 07 Word Logic Outputs Command Register
(register 700 or object 6C : 01 : 01)
bit 0 mirrors Logic Output 1 Command
bit 4 mirrors Logic Output 5 Command 1
2507 8C : 01 : 08 Word Control Register 1 (register 704 or object 6C : 01 : 05)
bit 0 mirrors Motor Run Forward Command
bit 1 mirrors Motor Run Reverse Command
bit 2 (Reserved)
bit 3 mirrors Fault Reset Command
bit 4 (Reserved)
bit 5 mirrors Self Test Command
bit 6 mirrors Motor Low Speed Command
2508 8C : 01 : 09 Word Analog Output 1 Command (register 706 or
object 6C : 01 : 07)
2509 - 2599 8C : 01 : 0A - − (Reserved)
8C : 01 : 64
424 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use
Section 7.10
Using the Standard Web Server User Interface
Using the Standard Web Server User Interface
Overview
This section describes the functions of the standard Web server pages and how to use the data to operate
an LTM R controller with or without an LTM E expansion module.

Topic Page
Description of the Standard Web Server User Interface 426
Home Page 430
Login Page 432
Documentation Page 433
Monitoring Page 434
Product Status Page 435
Metering Page 437
Diagnostics Page 438
Ethernet Basic Page 439
Ethernet Extended Diagnostics Page 440
RSTP Bridge Statistics Page 441
RSTP Port Statistics Page 442
Faults & Warnings Page 443
Fault History Page 444
Maintenance Page 446
Counters Page 447
Setup Page 448
Product Thermal Settings Page 449
Product Current Settings Page 450
Product Voltage Settings Page 451
Product Power Settings Page 452
RSTP Configuration Page 453
Communication Page 454
Password Page 455
1639505EN-05 04/2015 425

Use
Description of the Standard Web Server User Interface
Overview
The standard Web server pages provide an LTM R embedded HMI which can be accessed using a
standard Web browser supported by:
z MS Internet Explorer version 8 or later
z Mozilla Firefox version 13 or later
z Google Chrome version 19 or later
Java Free Web Pages

The latest version of web pages are developed on a technology called as Light weight Web App (LWA).
The web pages are independent from Java backbone, works under any environment (XP, Windows 7,
Windows 8, and so on), and also on all web browsers (MS Internet Explorer, Mozzilla Firefox, and Google
Chrome). TeSys T new web pages works on PC without Java installation.
Functions of the Web Server User Interface

The following table describes all the functions of the Web server pages. Some functions are available
according to the configuration (for example functions available only if LTM E is connected).
Menu Information displayed Function

HOME Home page Identification of the connected product: LTM R controller
with/without LTM E expansion module
Language Display of the pages in the selected language
Identification Activation and deactivation of data modification mode
DOCUMENTATION References Link to the http://www.schneider-electric.com website
MONITORING Product status Display of information from input/output status and the
internal product status
Metering Display of measured data with numerical value and
graphical representation
DIAGNOSTICS Ethernet basic diagnostics Display of information on the IP parameters, FDR, device
name and the protocol
Ethernet extended diagnostics Display and reset (password-protected) of communication
statistics for each port
RSTP bridge Display and reset (password-protected) of statistics
RSTP port Display and reset (password-protected) of statistics and
status for the ports 1 and 2
Faults and warnings Display of fault and warning status and fault count, if any, for
each data, and reset (password-protected) of fault count
Fault history Display and reset (password-protected) of the thermal,
current, voltage, and power fault history
MAINTENANCE Counters Display and reset (password-protected) of statistics
SETUP Thermal settings Display and modification (password-protected) of editable
thermal settings
Current settings Display and modification (password-protected) of editable
current settings
Voltage settings Display and modification (password-protected) of editable
voltage settings
Power settings Display and modification (password-protected) of editable
power settings
RSTP settings Display and modification (password-protected) of editable
RSTP settings
Communication Display and modification (password-protected) of editable
communication settings
Password Modification of the password used to edit data
426 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use
Standard Web Server Structure

The diagram below shows the navigation in the standard Web server pages:
Access to the Standard Web Server
Step Action
1 Connect the LTM RModbus/TCP controller to your PC.
2 Open a Web browser.
3 In the address bar, enter the IP address assigned to the LTM R controller. If necessary, refer to the LTM R
IP addressing procedure (see page 312).
4 If connection is accepted, the Home page displays. You can navigate in the different pages via menus and
sub-menus.
5 If you want to modify parameter values, enter your password by clicking Login on the Home menu.
For information about
z entering the password, refer to the Login page (see page 432),
z changing the password, refer to the Password page (see page 455).
1639505EN-05 04/2015 427

Use
Standard Web Server User Interface

All Web server pages have the same appearance. A window is divided into 3 areas, as follows:
Legend Area Description

1 Menus Banner displayed on every page, showing links to the menus:
z Home
z Documentation
z Monitoring
z Diagnostics
z Maintenance
z Setup
2 Sub-menu treeview Links to the pages related to the selected menu.

The treeview
z always displays the menu name in which the user is navigating,
z allows the user to expand or collapse functions.
3 Page body Information related to the contextual page selected in the menu or sub-menu.
Clear Counters Button

A Clear Counters button is displayed in the following pages:
z Ethernet Extended Diagnostics page
z RSTP Bridge Statistics page
z RSTP Port Statistics page
z Fault History page
z Counters page
When clicking this button, in the Ethernet Extended Diagnostics, Fault History or Counters page (if
enabled), you perform a Clear Statistics Command and the LTM R controller’s statistics are reset. Thus,
the following parameters are reset on the Web server pages:
z all statistics on the Ethernet Extended Diagnostics page
z all fault counters on the Faults & Warnings Diagnostics page
z the 5 fault records on the Fault History page
z the Operating Time and Motor Start Counters on the Counters page
When clicking the Clear Counters button (if enabled) in the RSTP Bridge page it clears all the RSTP Bridge
Statistics.
428 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use
When clicking the Clear Counters button (if enabled) in the RSTP Port page it clears all the RSTP Port
Statistics data on both ports.
The Clear Counters button is:
z disabled by default
z enabled in modification mode (after entering the correct password in the Login page)
z Clear counters button in RSTP port and RSTP Bridge pages are enabled in modification mode only if
RSTP is enabled in the device
1639505EN-05 04/2015 429

Use
Home Page
Overview
Access to the Home Page

The Home page is displayed:
z after you connect to the standard Web server,
z when you click Home in the menu headers at any moment during navigation and from any page
displayed.
Home Page Sub-Menu

The Home page sub-menu contains the following items:
Level 1 Level 2 Function

Languages English Switch the page language to English
French Switch the page language to French
Spanish Switch the page language to Spanish
Custom Switch the page language to the Custom language (English by
default)
Identification Login Display the Login page to enter the password (see page 432)
Logout Deactivate the data modification mode
Language Selection
From the sub-menu zone, click one of the following languages to display the page content in this language:
z English
z French
z Spanish
z Custom (English by default)
Logout
Click Logout to disable the modification mode.
430 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use
Home Page Body

The Home page displays the following product elements:
z A view of the LTM R controller and LTM E expansion module when connected
z LTM R controller data:
z Vendor name: Schneider Electric
z Commercial reference
z Version
z Version of the communication interface

z LTM E expansion module data:
z Commercial reference
z Version
z DISCOVER button
NOTE: LTM E data is blank if no LTM E is connected.
DISCOVER Button
The DISCOVER button is displayed in the following pages:
z Home page
z Documentation page
z Monitoring page
z Diagnostics page
z Maintenance page
z Setup page
When clicking this button, the Network status LED of the LTM R controller blinks 10 times alternatively red
and green.
There is no visual modification on the Web page.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 431

Use
Login Page
Overview
Login Page Body

By default, the password protection is always enabled.
The Login page allows you to enter the user name and password required to activate the modification
mode:
z the user name is "USER" (uppercase),
z the password is an integer from 0000 to 9999, the default value is 0000.
NOTE: The Web pages’ password is the same as the LTM CU password.
Exiting the Modification Mode

To exit the modification mode and deactivate the password
z click Logout in the Identification sub-menu of the Home page, or
z close the Web browser.
432 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use
Documentation Page
Overview
Access to the Documentation Page

The Documentation page displays when you click Documentation in the menu headers at any moment
during navigation and from any page displayed.
Documentation Page Sub-Menu

The Documentation page sub-menu allows you to access the References page. You can download LTM R
technical publications and other technical information from our website at www.schneider-electric.com
using the hyperlink on the References page.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 433

Use
Monitoring Page
Overview
Access to the Monitoring Page

The Monitoring page displays when you click Monitoring in the menu headers at any moment during
navigation and from any page displayed.
Monitoring Page Sub-Menu

The Monitoring page sub-menu allows you to access the following pages:
z Product Status (see page 435)
z Metering (see page 437)
434 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use
Product Status Page
Overview
Product Status Page Body

The page displays
z the state of each I/O related to the dedicated connector pin on the product view (LTM R controller +
LTM E expansion module),
z general states and values.
The state indicators depend on the following color code:

z Inactive states are in gray.
z Active states are in green, orange, or red depending on the data.
The Product Status page contains the following read-only data:
Data name Parameter name

LI1 Logic Input 1
LI2 Logic Input 2
LI3 Logic Input 3
LI4 Logic Input 4
LI5 Logic Input 5
LI6 Logic Input 6
LI7(1) Logic Input 7
LO1 Logic Output 1

LO2 Logic Output 2
LO3 Logic Output 3
LO4 Logic Output 4
Wiring Fault Wiring Fault
System Ready System Ready
System ON System ON
System Fault System Fault
System Warning System Warning
1639505EN-05 04/2015 435

Use
Data name Parameter name

Fault Reset Authorized Fault Reset Authorized
Power Cycle Required Power Cycle Required
Minimum Wait Time Minimum Wait Time
Time To Thermal Fault Time To Trip
Motor Starting Motor Starting
Motor Running Motor Running
High Speed High Speed
Direction 1(2) Direction 1
Direction 2(2) Direction 2
Average Current (%FLC) Average Current

Average Current (A) Average Current
(1) If no LTM E expansion module is connected, the indicator is not displayed.
(2) The color in active state depends on the value of the HMI Motor Status LED Color parameter: red if value is 0,
green if 1, gray if inactive.
436 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use
Metering Page
Overview
Metering Page Body

The page displays the numerical value and graphical representation next to each data name.
The Metering page contains the following read-only data:
Group name Data name Parameter name

Thermal Thermal Capacity Level Thermal Capacity Level
Motor Temperature z Motor Temperature Sensor Degree:
z Motor Temperature Sensor Type is PT100
z Motor temperature displayed in °C or °F according to the
value of the HMI Display Temperature Sensor Degree CF
parameter
z Motor Temperature Sensor Ohm:
z Motor Temperature Sensor Type is not PT100
z Motor temperature displayed in Ohms
z No Motor Temperature Detected:

z Motor Temperature Data displays not connected
z Graph indicator shows 100%
Current Average Current Average Current

Ground Current Ground Current
Current Phase Imbalance Current Phase Imbalance
Voltage Average Voltage(1) Average Voltage
Frequency(1) Frequency
Voltage Phase Imbalance(1) Voltage Phase Imbalance
Power Active Power(1) Active Power
Power Factor(1) Power Factor
Reactive Factor(1) Reactive Power
(1) Not displayed if no LTM E expansion module is connected.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 437

Use
Diagnostics Page
Overview
Access to the Diagnostics Page

The Diagnostics page displays when you click Diagnostics in the menu headers at any moment during
Diagnostics Page Sub-Menu

The Diagnostics page sub-menu allows you to access the following pages:
Level 1 Level 2
Ethernet Basic (see page 439)
Extended (see page 440)
RSTP RSTP Bridge (see page 441)
RSTP Port (see page 442)
Product Faults & Warnings (see page 443)
Fault History (see page 444)
438 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use
Ethernet Basic Page
Overview
Ethernet Basic Page Body

The Ethernet Basic page contains the following read-only data:

Address MAC Address Ethernet MAC Address
IP Address Ethernet IP Address
Subnet Mask Ethernet Subnet Mask
Gateway Address Ethernet Gateway Address
Protocol Ethernet Capabilities Control
Product Identification Device Name Ethernet Device Name
Faulty Device Replacement Status FDR Status Network Port FDR Status
1639505EN-05 04/2015 439

Use
Ethernet Extended Diagnostics Page
Overview
Ethernet Extended Diagnostics Page Body

In the Port Number list, select the Ethernet port to display the related diagnostics.
The Clear Counters button located at the bottom of the page can be used to reset all statistics including
the Ethernet statistics counters (see page 428).
The Ethernet Extended Diagnostics page contains the following read-only data for each port:
Group name Data name

Transmit Statistics Frames Transmitted OK
Collisions
Excessive Collisions
Carrier Sense Errors
Link Speed
Duplex Mode
Receive Statistics Frames Received OK
CRC Errors
440 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use
RSTP Bridge Statistics Page
Overview
RSTP Bridge Statistics Page Body

The RSTP Bridge Statistic page contains the following data:

General Bridge Status
Bridge ID
Designated Root ID
Designated Root Port
Rootpath Cost
Total Topology Changes
Configured vs. learned Configured Hello Time
Learned Hello Time
Configured Forward Delay
Learned Forward Delay
Configure Max Age
Learned Max Age
1639505EN-05 04/2015 441

Use
RSTP Port Statistics Page
Overview
RSTP Port Statistics Page Body

In the Port Number list, select the RSTP port number in the field to display the related diagnostics.
The RSTP Port Statistics page contains the following data for each port:

Port Status Status
Role
Priority
Port Path Cost
Designated Port ID
Received RSTs
Transmitted RSTs
Received Configure
Transmitted Configure
Received TCNs
Transmitted TCNs
442 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use
Faults & Warnings Page
Overview
Faults & Warnings Page Body

The following items are displayed next to each data name: the warning or fault status and the faults counter
value, if any.
The color code of the indicators is as follows:
In case of... The indicator is...

warning orange
fault red
inactive warning or fault gray
The Clear Counters button located at the bottom of the page can be used to reset all statistics and fault
counters (see page 428).
The Faults & Warnings page contains read-only data.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 443

Use
Fault History Page
Overview
Fault History Page Body

In the Fault History list, select a fault number to display the history of LTM R controller data recorded at the
time of the last 5 detected faults. Fault N0 contains the most recent fault record, and fault N4 contains the
oldest retained fault record.
The Clear Counters and Fault History button located at the bottom of the page can be used to reset all
statistics including the 5 fault records (see page 428).
The Fault History page contains the following read-only parameters for fault N0:

Fault Selection Date-Time Date and Time N0
Fault Code Fault Code N0
Current FLC max Full Load Current max
FLC Ratio Motor Full Load Current Ratio
Average Current Average Current N0
L1 Current L1 Current N0
Ground Current Ground Current N0
Average Current Ratio Average Current ratio N0
L1 Current Ratio L1 Current Ratio N0
Ground Current Ratio Ground Current Ratio N0
Current Phase Imbalance Current Phase Imbalance N0
Thermal Thermal Capacity Thermal Capacity Level N0
Motor Temp Sensor Motor Temperature Sensor Degree N0
444 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use

Voltage Average Voltage Average Voltage N0
L1-L2 Voltage L1L2 Voltage N0
Voltage Phase Imbalance Voltage Phase Imbalance N0
Frequency Frequency N0
Power Active Power Active Power N0
Power Factor Power Factor N0
Faults N1–N4 fault record information in the same way as Fault N0. See corresponding N1–N4
parameters.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 445

Use
Maintenance Page
Overview
Access to the Maintenance Page

The Maintenance page displays when you click Maintenance in the menu headers at any moment during
Maintenance Page Sub-Menu

The Maintenance page sub-menu allows you to access the Counters page.
446 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use
Counters Page
Overview
Counters Page Body

The Clear Counters button located at the bottom of the page can be used to reset the operating time, the
motor starts counters, and statistics on other pages (see page 428). The other parameters displayed on
the Counters page are not reset.
The Counters page contains the following read-only data:

Control Unit Statistics MaxTemperature Controller Internal Temperature Maximum
LO1 Closing Count Motor LO1 Closings Count
LO2 Closing Count Motor LO2 Closings Count
Last Power Off Duration Controller Last Power Off Duration
Motor Statistics Operation Time Operating Time
Starts Count Motor Starts Count
Starts Per Hour Motor Starts Per Hour Count
Last Start Level Motor Last Start Current Ratio
Duration Motor Last Start Duration
1639505EN-05 04/2015 447

Use
Setup Page
Overview
Access to the Setup Page

The Setup page displays when you click Setup in the menu headers at any moment during navigation and
from any page displayed.
Setup Page Sub-Menu

The Setup page sub-menu allows you to access the following pages:
Level 1 Level 2
Product Thermal (see page 449)
Current (see page 450)
Voltage (see page 451)
Power (see page 452)
RSTP Configuration (see page 453)
Communication (see page 454)
Security Password (see page 455)
Modifying Values in the Settings Pages

To modify setting values in the 6 pages of the Product sub-menu, you must have entered the modification
mode (see page 432), otherwise the parameter values remain grayed.
448 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use
Product Thermal Settings Page
Overview
Thermal Settings Page Body

In the Protection Choice list, select the name of the desired protection group.
The modification of settings is allowed only after entry of the correct password on the Login page
(see page 432).
Apply button sets the LTM R configuration with the entered data. The data entered must be valid.
Undo button retrieves the current values of the LTM R configuration.
The Thermal Settings page contains the editable data.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 449

Use
Product Current Settings Page
Overview
Current Settings Page Body

(see page 432).
The Current Settings page contains editable data.
450 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use
Product Voltage Settings Page
Overview
Voltage Settings Page Body

(see page 432).
The Voltage Settings page contains editable data.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 451

Use
Product Power Settings Page
Overview
Power Settings Page Body

(see page 432).
The Power Settings page contains editable data.
452 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use
RSTP Configuration Page
Overview
RSTP Configuration Page Body

Reset to Default button restores the factory setting values of the LTM R configuration.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 453

Use
Communication Page
Overview
NOTE: This IP address is used only if the product is in stored IP mode (see page 312). Restart the device
in stored IP mode for the parameters in the page to take effect.
Communication Page Body

The Communication Settings page contains the following (password-protected) data:

Communication Parameters IP Address
Subnet Mask
Gateway Address
454 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Use
Password Page
Overview
Password Page
The Password page allows you to change the password required to modify the editable parameters in
some Web pages.
The password must be an integer from 0000 to 9999.
NOTE: The Web pages’ password is the same as the LTM CU password. If you change the password of
the LTM CU, the Web server pages’ password is set to this password and vice versa.
Changing the Password

Follow the procedure below to change the password:
Step Action
1 In the Password page, enter your current user name (USER).
2 Enter the new password twice (an integer from 0000 to 9999).
3 Confirm or cancel changes.
The password returns to factory setting:

z on a product Return to factory setting, or
z when a new firmware is downloaded in the product.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 455

Use
456 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Maintenance
1639505EN-05 04/2015
Chapter 8
Maintenance
Maintenance
Overview
This chapter describes the maintenance and self-diagnostic features of the LTM R controller and the
expansion module.
WARNING
The application of this product requires expertise in the design and programming of control systems. Only
persons with such expertise should be allowed to program, install, alter, and apply this product. Follow
all local and national safety codes and standards.

Topic Page
Detecting Problems 458
Troubleshooting 459
Preventive Maintenance 461
Replacing an LTM R Controller and LTM E Expansion Module 463
Communication Warnings and Faults 464
1639505EN-05 04/2015 457

Maintenance
Detecting Problems
Overview
The LTM R controller and the expansion module perform self-diagnostic checks at power-up and during
operation.
Problems with either the LTM R controller or expansion module can be detected using
z Power and Alarm LEDs on the LTM R controller,
z Power and Input LEDs on the expansion module,
z LCD Display on either a Magelis® XBTN410 HMI device or a TeSys® T LTM CU Control Operator Unit
connected to the LTM R controller’s HMI port, or
z SoMove with the TeSys T DTM running on a PC connected to the LTM R controller’s HMI port.
Device LEDs
The LEDs on the LTM R controller and expansion module can indicate the following problems:
LTM R LED LTM E LED Problem

Power Alarm PLC Alarm Power
Off Solid red - - Internal fault
On Solid red - - Protection fault
On Flashing red (2x per second) - - Protection warning
On Flashing red (5x per second) - - Load shed or rapid cycle
On - - Solid red Internal fault
Magelis® XBT HMI Device

The Magelis® XBTN410 HMI automatically displays information about a fault or warning, including LTM R
controller self-diagnostic faults and warnings, when it occurs.
For information about the display of faults and warnings when the HMI is used in a 1-to-many configuration,
see Fault Management (1-to-many), page 302.
LTM CU Control Operator Unit

The TeSys® T LTM CU Control Operator Unit automatically displays information about a fault or warning.
For more information, see Faults and Warnings Display in TeSys® T LTM CU Control Operator Unit User’s
Manual.
SoMove with the TeSys T DTM

SoMove with the TeSys T DTM displays a visual array of active faults and warnings, including LTM R
controller self-diagnostic faults and warnings, when these faults occur.
For information about this display of active faults and warnings, refer to the TeSys T DTM for SoMove FDT
Container Online help.
458 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Maintenance
Troubleshooting
Self-Diagnostic Tests
The LTM R controller performs self-diagnostic tests at power-up and during operation. These tests, the
errors they detect, and the steps to take in response to a problem are described below:
Type Error Action

Major internal Internal temperature fault This fault indicates a warning at 80°C, a minor fault at 85°C, and a major
faults fault at 100°C. Take steps to reduce ambient temperature, including:
z add an auxiliary cooling fan
z remount the LTM R controller and expansion module to provide
more surrounding free space.
If the condition persists:
1 Cycle power.
2 Wait 30 s.
3 If the fault persists, replace the LTM R controller.
CPU failure These faults indicate a hardware failure. Take the following steps:
1 Cycle power.
Program checksum error
2 Wait 30 s.
RAM test error 3 If the fault persists, replace the LTM R controller.
Stack overflow
Stack underflow
Watchdog timeout
Minor internal Invalid configuration error Indicates either a bad checksum (Config checksum error) or good
faults checksum but bad data (Invalid config error). Both caused by hardware
Configuration checksum
failure. Take the following steps:
(EEROM) error
1 Cycle power and wait 30 s.
2 Reset the configuration settings to factory settings.
Internal network These faults indicate a hardware failure. Take the following steps:
communications failure 1 Cycle power and wait 30 s.
A/D out of range error 2 If the fault persists, replace the LTM R controller.
Diagnostic Start command check Check the following:

errors z relay outputs
Stop command check
z all wiring, including:
Stop check back z control wiring circuit, including all electromechanical devices
Run check back z power wiring circuit, including all components
z load CT wiring.
After all checks are complete:

1 Reset the fault.
2 If the fault persists, cycle power and wait 30 s.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 459

Maintenance
Type Error Action

Wiring/config CT reversal error Correct the polarity of the CTs. Be sure that:
errors z all external CTs face the same direction
z all load CT wiring passes through windows in the same direction
After the check is complete:

1 Perform a fault reset.
3 If the fault still persists, replace the LTM R controller.
Current/Voltage phase Check:
reversal error z L1, L2 and L3 wiring connection to be sure wires are not crossed
z Motor Phases Sequence parameter setting (ABC versus ACB)
Phase configuration error
PTC connection error Check for:
z short circuit or open circuit in the motor temp sensor wiring
z wrong type of motor temp sensing device
z improper configuration of parameters for selected device.

Voltage phase loss error Check for:
z improper wiring, such as loose terminations
z blown fuse
z cut wire
z single-phase motor configured for 3-phase operation
z failure to wire a single phase motor through both A and C load CT
windows
z failure of power source (for example, utility power failure).

1 Perform fault reset.
460 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Maintenance
Preventive Maintenance
Overview
The following protective measures should be performed between major system checks, to help maintain
your system and protect it against irrecoverable hardware or software failure:
z Continuously review operating statistics,
z Save LTM R controller parameter configuration settings to a backup file,
z Maintain the LTM R controller’s operating environment,
z Periodically perform a LTM R controller self test,
z Check the LTM R controller internal clock to ensure accuracy.
Statistics
The LTM R controller collects the following types of information:
z real-time voltage, current, power, temperature, I/O and fault data
z a count of the number of faults, by fault type, that occurred since last power-up
z a time-stamped history of the state of the LTM R controller (displaying measures of voltage, current,
power, and temperature) at the moment that each of the previous 5 faults occurred
Use either SoMove with the TeSys T DTM, a Magelis® XBTN410 HMI, or a TeSys® T LTM CU Control
Operator Unit to access and review these statistics. Analyze this information to determine whether the
actual record of operations indicates a problem.
Configuration Settings
In the event of irrecoverable LTM R controller failure, you can quickly restore configuration settings if you
saved these settings to a file. When the LTM R controller is first configured, and every subsequent time
any configuration settings are changed, use SoMove with the TeSys T DTM to save the parameter settings
to a file.
To save a configuration file:
z Select File → Save As....
To restore the saved configuration file:
1. Open the saved file: Select File → Open (then navigate to the file).
2. Download the configuration to the new controller.
3. Select Communication → Store to Device.
Environment
Like any other electronic device, the LTM R controller is affected by its physical environment. Provide a
friendly environment by taking common-sense preventive measures, including:
z Scheduling periodic examinations of battery packs, fuses, power strips, batteries, surge suppressors,
and power supplies.
z Keeping the LTM R controller, the panel, and all devices clean. An unobstructed flow of air will prevent
dust build-up, which can lead to a short-circuit condition.
z Remaining alert to the possibility of other equipment producing electromagnetic radiation. Be sure no
other devices cause electromagnetic interference with the LTM R controller.
Self Test with Motor Off

Perform a self test by either
z holding down the Test/Reset button on the face of the LTM R controller for more than 3 seconds and
up to 15 seconds, or
z setting the Self Test Command parameter.
A self test can be performed only if

z no faults exist,
z the Self Test Enable parameter is set (factory setting).
The LTM R controller performs the following checks during a self test:
z Watchdog check
z RAM check
During the self-test sequence, the LTM R controller calibrates the thermal memory time constant, which
keeps track of time while it is not powered.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 461

Maintenance
If any of the above tests fails, a minor internal fault occurs. If not, the self test continues and the LTM R
controller performs:
z LTM E expansion module test (if it is connected to an expansion module). If this test fails, the LTM R
controller experiences a minor internal fault.
z Internal communication test. If this test fails, the LTM R controller experiences a minor internal fault.
z LED test: turns all LEDs off, then turns each LED on in sequence:
z HMI communication activity LED
z Power LED
z Fallback LED
z PLC communication activity LED
At the end of the test, all LEDs return to their initial state.
z Output relay test: opens all relays, and restores them to their original state only after a reset command
executes, or power is cycled.
If current is measured during the relay self test, the LTM R controller experiences a minor internal fault.
During the LTM R self test, a "self test" string displays on the HMI device.
During a self test, the LTM R controller sets the Self Test Command parameter to 1. When the self test
finishes, this parameter is reset to 0.
Self Test with Motor On

Perform a self test by using
z the Test/Reset button on the face of the LTM R controller,
z Menus command from the HMI connected to the RJ45 port,
z SoMove with the TeSys T DTM, or
z PLC.
When the motor is On, performing a self test simulates a thermal fault, in order to check if the logic output
O.4 is working correctly. It triggers a Thermal Overload fault.
During a self test, the LTM R controller sets the Self Test Command parameter to 1. When the self test
finishes, this parameter is reset to 0.
Internal Clock
To ensure an accurate record of faults, be sure to maintain the LTM R controller’s internal clock. The
LTM R controller time stamps all faults, using the value stored in the Date And Time Setting parameter.
Internal clock accuracy is +/-1 second per hour. If power is continuously applied for 1 year, the internal
clock accuracy is +/-30 minutes per year.
If power is turned Off for 30 minutes or less, the LTM R controller retains its internal clock settings, with
accuracy of +/- 2 minutes.
If power is turned Off for more than 30 minutes, the LTM R controller resets its internal clock to the time
when power was turned Off.
462 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Maintenance
Replacing an LTM R Controller and LTM E Expansion Module
Overview
Questions to consider in advance of replacing either an LTM R controller or an LTM E expansion module
are:
z is the replacement device the same model as the original?
z have the configuration settings of the LTM R controller been saved, and are they available to be
transferred to its replacement?
Be sure the motor is turned off before replacing either the LTM R controller or the LTM E expansion
module.
Replacing the LTM R Controller

The time to plan for the replacement of an LTM R controller is:
z when the LTM R controller settings are initially configured, and
z any time that one or more of its settings are subsequently re-configured
NOTE: The easiest way to reconfigure a replacement LTM R controller is by using the Faulty Device
Replacement Faulty Device Replacement (FDR) (see page 317) service.
If FDR is not available, you can also use the SoMove™ software with TeSys T DTM to save all of the
LTM R controller’s configured settings, except for date and time, to a file. Once saved, you can use the
SoMove™ software with TeSys T DTM to transfer these settings either to the original LTM R controller or
to its replacement.
NOTE: Only configured settings are saved. Historical statistical data is not saved, and therefore cannot be
applied to a replacement LTM R controller.
For information on how to use the SoMove software to create, save and transfer configuration setting files,
see the SoMove Lite online help.
Replacing the Expansion Module

The primary consideration in replacing an LTM E expansion module, is to replace it with the same model,
24 VDC or 110-240 VAC, as the original.
Retiring Devices
Both the LTM R controller and the LTM E expansion module contain electronic boards that require
particular treatment at the end of their useful life. When retiring a device be sure to observe all applicable
laws, regulations and practices.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 463

Maintenance
Communication Warnings and Faults
Introduction
Communication warnings and faults are managed in a standard way, like any other types of warnings and
faults.
The presence of a fault is signaled by various indicators:
z State of the LEDs, 3 of which are dedicated to communication (see page 258):
z 1 STS LED
z 2 LK/ACT LEDs, one for each network port connector
z State of the output relays

z Warning
z Message(s) displayed on HMI screen
z Presence of an exception code (such as a report from the PLC)
PLC Communication Loss

A communication loss is managed like any other fault.
The LTM R controller monitors the communication with the PLC. Using an adjustable network idle time
(timeout), the LTM R controller watchdog function can report a network loss (firmware watchdog).
In the event of a network loss, the LTM R controller can be configured to take certain actions. These
depend on the control mode that the LTM R controller was operating in prior to the network loss.
If PLC-LTM R controller communication is lost while the LTM R controller is in network control mode, the
LTM R controller enters the fallback state. If PLC- LTM R controller communication is lost while the LTM R
controller is in local control mode, and then the control mode is changed to network control, the LTM R
controller enters the fallback state.
If PLC-LTM R controller communication is restored while the control mode is set to network control, the
LTM R controller exits the fallback state. If the control mode is changed to local control, the LTM R exits
from the fallback state, regardless of the state of PLC-controller communications.
The table below defines the available actions that the LTM R controller can take during a communication
loss that the user can select when configuring the LTM R controller.
Network communication loss actions:
LTM R Controller Output Control Mode Available LTM R Actions After PLC-LTM R Controller Network Loss
Prior to Network Loss
Terminal Strip Fault and Warning control possibilities:
z Signal nothing
z Activate a warning
z Activate a fault
z Activate a fault and warning
HMI Fault and Warning control possibilities:

z Signal nothing
z Activate a fault
Network Fault and Warning control possibilities:

z Signal nothing
z Activate a fault
z The behavior of the LO1 and LO2 relays depends on the motor
controller mode and on the fallback strategy chosen
HMI Communication Loss

The LTM R controller monitors the communication with any approved HMI device. Using a fixed network
idle time (timeout), the LTM R controller watchdog function can report a network loss. In the event of a
communication loss, the LTM R controller can be configured to take certain actions. These depend on the
control mode that the LTM R controller was operating in prior to the communication loss.
If HMI-controller communication is lost while the LTM R controller is in HMI control mode, the LTM R
controller enters the fallback state. If HMI-LTM R controller communication is lost while the LTM R
controller is not in HMI control mode, and then the control mode is changed to HMI control, the LTM R
controller enters the fallback state.
464 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Maintenance
If HMI-controller communication is restored while the control mode is set to HMI control, the LTM R exits
from the fallback state. If the control mode is changed to Terminal Strip or Network control, the LTM R exits
from the fallback state, regardless of the state of HMI-controller communications.
The table below defines the available actions that the LTM R controller may take during a communication
loss. Select one of these actions when configuring the LTM R controller.
HMI communication loss actions:
LTM R Controller Output Control Mode Available LTM R Controller Actions After HMI-LTM R Controller
Prior to Network Loss Network Loss
Terminal Strip Fault and Warning control possibilities:
z Signal nothing
z Activate a fault
HMI Fault and Warning control possibilities:

z Signal nothing
z Activate a fault
Network Fault and Warning control possibilities:

z Signal nothing
z Activate a fault
z The behavior of the LO1 and LO2 relays depends on the motor
controller mode and on the fallback strategy chosen
NOTE: For more information about a communication loss and the fallback strategy, refer to the Fallback
Condition (see page 53) portion of the topic describing Communication Loss.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 465

Maintenance
466 1639505EN-05 04/2015

1639505EN-05 04/2015
Appendices
What Is in This Appendix?

The appendix contains the following chapters:
Chapter Chapter Name Page
A Technical Data 469
B Configurable Parameters 479
C Wiring Diagrams 493
1639505EN-05 04/2015 467

468 1639505EN-05 04/2015
Technical Data
1639505EN-05 04/2015
Appendix A
Technical Data
Technical Data
Overview
This appendix presents technical data related to the LTM R controller and the LTM E expansion module.

Topic Page
Technical Specifications of the LTM R Controller 470
Technical Specifications of the LTM E Expansion Module 473
Characteristics of the Metering and Monitoring Functions 475
Recommended Contactors 476
1639505EN-05 04/2015 469

Technical Data
Technical Specifications of the LTM R Controller
Technical Specifications
The LTM R controller meets the following specifications:
Certification(1) UL, CSA, CE, CTIC’K, CCC, NOM, GOST,

IACS E10 (BV, LROS, DNV, GL, RINA, ABS, RMRos), ATEX
Conformity to IEC/EN 60947-4-1, UL 508, CSA C22.2 no.14, IACS E10
Standards
European Community CE marking, satisfies the essential requirements of the low voltage (LV) machinery and
directives electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) directives.
Rated insulation According to IEC/EN 60947-1 Overvoltage category III, 690 V
voltage (Ui) degree of pollution: 3
According to UL508, CSA C22-2 no. 14 690 V
Rated impulse According to IEC60947-1 220 V power, input and 4.8 kV
withstand voltage 8.3.3.4.1 paragraph 2 output circuits
(Uimp)
24 V power, input and 0.91 kV
output circuits
Communication circuits 0.91 kV
PTC and GF circuits 0.91 kV
Withstand to short- According to IEC60947-4-1 100 kA
circuit
Degree of protection According to IEC60947-1 (protection against direct contact) IP20
Protective treatment IEC/EN 60068 "TH"
IEC/EN 60068-2-30 Cycle humidity 12 cycles
IEC/EN 60068-2-11 Salt spray 48 h
Ambient air Storage -40…+80 °C (-40…176 °F)
temperature around Operation -20…+60 °C (-4…140 °F)
the device
Maximum operating Derating accepted 4500 m (14,763 ft)
altitude
Without derating 2000 m (6,561 ft)
Fire resistance According to UL 94 V2
According to IEC60695-2-1 (Parts supporting live 960 °C (1,760 °F)
components)
(Other components) 650 °C (1,202 °F)
Half-sine mechanical According to IEC60068-2-27 (2) 15 gn
shock pulse = 11 ms
Resistance to According to IEC60068-2-6(2) Panel mounted 4 gn
vibration DIN rail mounted 1 gn
Immunity to According to EN61000-4-2 Through air 8 kV level 3
electrostatic discharge Over surface 6 kV level 3
Immunity to radiated According to EN61000-4-3 10 V/m level 3
fields
Immunity to fast According to EN61000-4-4 On power lines and relay 4 kV level 4
transient bursts outputs
All other circuits 2 kV level 3
Immunity to According to EN610-4-6(3) 10 V rms level 3
radioelectric fields
(1) Some certifications are in progress.
(2) Without modifying the state of the contacts in the least favorable direction.
(3) NOTE: This product has been designed for use in environment A. Use of this product in environment B may cause
unwanted electromagnetic disturbance, which may require the implementation of adequate mitigation measures.
470 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Technical Data
Surge immunity According to IEC/EN 61000-4-5 Common mode Differential mode

Power lines and relay outputs 4 kV (12 Ω/9 F) 2 kV (2 Ω/18 F)
24 VDC inputs and power 1 kV (12 Ω/9 F) 0.5 kV (2 Ω/18 F)
100-240 VAC inputs and power 2 kV (12 Ω/9 F) 1 kV (2 Ω/18 F)
Communication 2 kV (12 Ω/18 F) –
Temperature sensor (IT1/IT2) 1 kV (42 Ω/0.5 F) 0.5 kV (42 Ω/0.5 F)
Control Voltage Characteristics

The LTM R controller has the following control voltage characteristics:
Control voltage 24 VDC 100-240 VAC

Power consumption According to IEC/EN 60947-1 56...127 mA 8...62.8 mA
Control voltage range According to IEC/EN 60947-1 20.4...26.4 VDC 93.5...264 VAC
Overcurrent protection 24 V fuse 0.5 A gG 100-240 V fuse
0.5 A gG
Resistance to Microbreaks 3 ms 3 ms
Resistance to voltage dips According to IEC/EN 61000-4-11 70% of UC min. for 70% of UC min. for
500 ms 500 ms
Logic Inputs Characteristics
Nominal input values Voltage 24 VDC 100-240 VAC

Current 7 mA z 3.1 mA at 100 VAC
z 7.5 mA at 240 VAC
Input limit values At state 1 Voltage 15 V minimum 79 V < V < 264 V

Current 2 mA min to 15 mA max 2 mA min. at 110 VAC to
3 mA min. at 220 VAC
At state 0 Voltage 5 V maximum 0V < V < 40 V
Current 15 mA maximum 15 mA maximum
Response time Change to state 1 15 ms 25 ms
Change to state 0 5 ms 25 ms
IEC 61131-1 conformity Type 1 Type 1
Type of input Resistive Capacitive
Logic Outputs Characteristics
Rated insulation voltage 300 V

AC rated thermal load 250 VAC / 5 A
DC rated thermal load 30 VDC / 5 A
AC 15 rating 480 VA, 500,000 operations, Ie max = 2 A
DC 13 rating 30 W, 500,000 operations, Ie max = 1.25 A
Associated fuse protection gG at 4 A
Maximum operating rate 1,800 cycles/h
Maximum frequency 2 Hz (2 cycles/s)
Response time closing < 10 ms
Response time opening < 10 ms
Contact rating B300
1639505EN-05 04/2015 471

Technical Data
Altitude Derating
The following table provides the deratings to apply for dielectric strengths and maximum operating
temperature according to altitude.
Corrective factors for altitude 2000 m 3000 m 3500 m 4000 m 4500 m

(6,561.68 ft) (9,842.52 ft) (11,482.94 ft) (13,123.36 ft) (14,763.78 ft)
Dielectric Strength Ui 1 0.93 0.87 0.8 0.7
Max Operating Temperature 1 0.93 0.92 0.9 0.88
472 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Technical Data
Technical Specifications of the LTM E Expansion Module
Technical Specifications
The LTM E expansion module meets the following specifications:
Certifications(1) UL, CSA, CE, CTIC’K, CCC, NOM, GOST,

IACS E10 (BV, LROS, DNV, GL, RINA, ABS, RMRos), ATEX
Conformity to IEC/EN 60947-4-1, UL 508 - CSA C22-2, IACSE10
Standards
European Community CE marking. Satisfies the essential requirements of the low voltage (LV) machinery and
directives electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) directives.
Rated insulation According to IEC/EN 60947-1 Overvoltage category III, 690 V UI on voltage inputs
voltage (Ui) degree of pollution: 3
According to UL508, CSA C22-2 no. 14 690 V UI on voltage inputs
Rated impulse According to IEC60947-1 220 V inputs circuits 4.8 kV
withstand voltage 8.3.3.4.1 Paragraph 2 24 V inputs circuits 0.91 kV
(Uimp)
Communication circuits 0.91 kV
voltage input circuits 7.3 kV
Degree of protection According to 60947-1 (protection against direct contact) IP20
Protective treatment IEC/EN 60068 "TH"
IEC/EN 60068-2-30 Cycle humidity 12 cycles
IEC/EN 60068-2-11 Salt spray 48 h
Ambient air Storage -40…+80 °C (-40…176 °F)
temperature around
Operation (2) >40 mm (1.57 inches) -20…+60 °C (-4…140 °F)
the device
spacing
<40 mm (1.57 inches) but -20…+55 °C (-4…131 °F)
>9 mm (0.35 inches)
spacing
<9 mm (0.35 inches) -20…+45 °C (-4…113 °F)
spacing
Maximum operating Derating accepted 4500 m (14,763 ft)
altitude
Without derating 2000 m (6,561 ft)
Fire resistance According to UL 94 V2
According to IEC60695-2-1 (Parts supporting live 960 °C (1,760 °F)
components)
(Other components) 650 °C (1,202 °F)
Half-sine mechanical According to IEC60068-2-27(3) 30 g 3 axis and 6 directions
shock pulse = 11 ms
Resistance to According to IEC60068-2-6(3) 5 gn
vibration
Immunity to According to EN61000-4-2 Through air 8 kV Level 3
electrostatic discharge
Over surface 6 kV Level 3
Immunity to radiated According to EN61000-4-3 10V/m Level 3
fields
Immunity to fast According to EN61000-4-4 All circuits 4 kV Level 4
transient bursts 2 kV on all other circuits
Immunity to According to EN61000-4-6(4) 10 V rms Level 3
radioelectric fields
(2) he maximum rated ambient temperature of the LTM E expansion module depends on the installation spacing with
the LTM R controller.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 473

Technical Data
Surge immunity According to IEC/EN 61000-4-5 Common mode Differential mode

100-240 VAC inputs 4 kV (12 Ω) 2 kV (2 Ω)
24 VDC inputs 1 kV (12 Ω) 0.5 kV (2 Ω)
Communication 1 kV (12 Ω) –
(2) he maximum rated ambient temperature of the LTM E expansion module depends on the installation spacing with
the LTM R controller.
Logic Inputs Characteristics
Control voltage 24 VDC 115-230 VAC

Nominal input values Voltage 24 VDC 100-240 VAC
Current 7 mA z 3.1 mA at 100 VAC
z 7.5 mA at 240 VAC
Input limit values At state 1 Voltage 15 V maximum 79 V < V < 264 V

Current 2 mA min to 15 mA max 2 mA min. at 110 VAC to
3 mA min. at 220 VAC
At state 0 Voltage 5 V maximum 0V < V < 40 V
Current 15 mA maximum 15 mA maximum
Response time Change to state 1 15 ms (input only) 25 ms (input only)
Change to state 0 5 ms (input only) 25 ms (input only)
IEC61131-1 conformity Type 1 Type 1
Type of input Resistive Capacitive
Altitude Derating
The following table provides the deratings to apply for dielectric strengths and maximum operating
temperature according to altitude.
Corrective factors for altitude 2000 m 3000 m 3500 m 4000 m 4500 m

(6,561.68 ft) (9,842.52 ft) (11,482.94 ft) (13,123.36 ft) (14,763.78 ft)
Dielectric Strength Ui 1 0.93 0.87 0.8 0.7
Max Operating Temperature 1 0.93 0.92 0.9 0.88
474 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Technical Data
Characteristics of the Metering and Monitoring Functions
Measurement
Parameter Accuracy(1) Value saved on

power loss
L1 current (A) z +/– 1 % for 8 A and 27 A models No
L2 current (A) z +/– 2 % for 100 A models
L3 current (A)
L1 current ratio (% FLC)
Ground current ratio (% FLCmin) z Internal ground current: No
+/– 10 to 20 % for ground current greater than:
z 0.1 A on 8 A models
z External ground current: greater of +/– 5 % or

+/– 0.01 A
Average current (A) z +/– 1 % for 8 A and 27 A models No
Average current ratio (% FLCmin) z +/– 2 % for 100 A models
Current phase imbalance (% imb) z +/– 1.5 % for 8 A and 27 A models No

z +/– 3 % for 100 A models
Thermal capacity level (% trip level) +/– 1 % No

Time to trip (s) +/– 10 % No
Minimum wait time (s) +/– 1 % No
Motor temperature sensor (Ω) +/– 2 % No
Controller internal temperature (°C) +/– 4 % No
Frequency (Hz) +/– 2 % No
L1-L2 voltage (V) +/– 1 % No
L2-L3 voltage (V)
L3-L1 voltage (V)
Voltage phase imbalance (% imb) +/– 1.5 % No
Average voltage (V) +/– 1 % No
Power factor (cos ϕ) +/– 10 % No
Active power (kW) +/– 15 % No
Reactive power (kVAR) +/– 15 % No
Active power consumption (kWh) +/– 15 % No
Reactive power consumption (kVARh) +/– 15 % No
(1) Note: The accuracy levels presented in this table are typical accuracy levels. Actual accuracy levels may be lower
or greater than these values.
Motor History
Parameter Accuracy Value saved on power loss

Motor starts count +/– 1 Yes
Motor LO1 closings count
Motor LO2 closings count
Motor starts per hour count + 0/– 5 mn Yes
Load sheddings count +/– 1 Yes
Motor last start current ratio (% FLC) z +/– 1 % for 8 A and 27 A models Yes
z +/– 2 % for 100 A models
Motor last start duration (s) +/– 1 % No

Operating time (s) Yes
Controller internal temperature max (°C) +/– 4 °C Yes
1639505EN-05 04/2015 475

Technical Data
You can use the following contactor types:
® ®
z Schneider Electric IEC-style contactors, from the TeSys D or TeSys F ranges
z Square D NEMA-style contactors, from the S range
TeSys® D IEC Contactors

Catalog references and characteristics for TeSys® D IEC contactors are listed in the table below. Coil
voltages are grouped according to whether an interposing relay is required:
TeSys® D catalog Control Circuit VA or W Coil voltages

references Frequency maintained interposing relay not interposing relay required
(Hz) (max) required
LC1D09...LC1D38 50-60 7.5 AC = 24, 32, 36, 42, 48, 60, AC = 277, 380, 400, 415,
100, 127, 200, 208, 220, 440, 480, 575, 600, 690
230, 240
6 DC (std) = 24 DC (std) = 36, 48, 60, 72, 96,
100, 110, 125, 155, 220,
250, 440, 575
2.4 DC (low consumption) = 24 DC (low consumption) = 48,
72, 96, 110, 220, 250
LC1D40...LC1D95 26 AC = 24, 32, 42, 48, 110, AC = 256, 277, 380,
115, 120, 127, 208, 220, 380/400, 400, 415, 440,
220/230, 230, 240 480, 500, 575, 600, 660
22 DC = 24, 36, 48, 60, 72, 110,
125, 220, 250, 440
LC1D115 18 AC = 24, 32, 42, 48, 110, AC = 277, 380, 400, 415,
115, 120, 127, 208, 220, 440, 480, 500
230, 240
22 DC = 24, 48, 60, 72, 110,
125, 220, 250, 440
LC1D150 18 AC = 24, 32, 42, 48, 110, AC = 277, 380, 400, 415,
115, 120, 127, 208, 220, 440, 480, 500
230, 240
5 DC = 24, 48, 60, 72, 110,
125, 220, 250, 440
TeSys® F IEC Contactors

Catalog references and characteristics for TeSys® F IEC contactors are listed in the table below. Coil
TeSys® F catalog Control Circuit VA or W Coil voltages

(Hz) (max) required
LC1F115 50 45 AC = 24, 42, 48, 110/115, AC = 380/400, 415/440,
127, 220/230, 240 500, 660, 1000
60 45 AC = 24, 42, 48, 110/115,
127, 220/230, 240, 265/277,
380, 415, 460/480, 660,
1000
5 DC = 24, 48, 110, 125,
220/230, 250, 440/460
476 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Technical Data
TeSys® F catalog Control Circuit VA or W Coil voltages

(Hz) (max) required
LC1F150 50 45 AC = 24, 42, 48, 110/115, AC = 380/400, 415/440,
127, 220/230, 240 500, 660, 1000
60 45 AC = 24, 42, 48, 110/115,
127, 220/230, 240, 265/277,
380, 415, 460/480, 660,
1000
5 DC = 24, 48, 110, 125,
220/230, 250, 440/460
LC1F185(1) 50 55 AC = 24, 42, 48, 110/115, AC = 380/400, 415/440,

127, 220/230, 240 500, 660, 1000
60 55 AC = 24, 42, 48, 110/115,
127, 220/230, 240, 265/277,
380, 415, 460/480, 660,
1000
5 DC = 24, 48, 110, 125,
220/230, 250, 440/460
LC1F225(1) 50 55 AC = 24, 42, 48, 110/115, AC = 380/400, 415/440,

127, 220/230, 240 500, 660, 1000
60 55 AC = 24, 42, 48, 110/115, AC = 265/277, 380, 415,
127, 220/230, 240 460/480, 660, 1000
5 DC = 24, 48, 110, 125,
220/230, 250, 440/460
LC1F265 40...400(2) 10 AC = 24, 42, 48, 110/115, AC = 277, 380/415,
127, 220/230, 240 480/500, 600/660, 1000
5 DC = 24 DC = 48, 110, 125, 220/230,
250, 440/460
LC1F330 10 AC = 24, 42, 48, 110/115, AC = 277, 380/415,
127, 220/230, 240 480/500, 600/660, 1000
5 DC = 24 DC = 48, 110, 125, 220/230,
250, 440/460
LC1F400 15 AC = 48, 110/120, 125, 127, AC = 265, 277, 380/400,
200/208, 220/230, 230/240 415/480, 500, 550/600,
1000
8 DC = 48, 110, 125, 220, 250,
440
LC1F500 18 AC = 48, 110/120, 127,
200/208, 220/230, 230/240,
265, 277, 380/400, 415/480,
500, 550/600, 1000
8 DC = 48, 110, 125, 220, 250,
440
LC1F630 22 AC = 48, 110/120, 125, 127, AC = 265/277, 380/400,
200/208, 220/240 415/480, 500, 550/600,
1000
73 DC = 48, 110, 125, 220, 250,
440
LC1F780(1) 50 AC = 110/120, 127, AC = 265/277, 380,

200/208, 220/240 415/480, 500
52 DC = 110, 125, 220, 250,
440
LC1F800 15 AC = 110/127, 220/240 AC = 380/440
25 DC =110/127, 220/240,
380/440
(1) Dual-parallel contactors of this size require an interposing relay.

(2) Control circuit frequency may be 40-400 Hz; but power to contactors, monitored by CTs, must be 50 Hz
or 60 Hz in frequency.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 477

Technical Data
NEMA Type S Contactors

Catalog references and characteristics for NEMA Type S contactors are listed in the table below. Coil
NEMA size VA maintained Control Circuit Coil voltages

(max) Frequency interposing relay not interposing relay required
(Hz) required
00 33 50/60
00, 0,1 27
2 37 24, 115, 120, 208, 220, 240 277, 380, 440, 480, 550, 600
38
3 47
89
115, 120, 208, 220, 240 277, 380, 440, 480, 550, 600
4
5 15 115, 120, 208, 220, 240 277, 380, 440, 480
6 59 115, 120, 208, 220, 240 277, 380, 440, 480, 550, 600
7
478 1639505EN-05 04/2015

1639505EN-05 04/2015
Appendix B
Overview
The configurable parameters for the LTM R controller and the LTM E expansion module are described
below. The sequence of parameter configuration depends on the configuration tool utilized, either an
HMI device or SoMove with the TeSys T DTM.
Parameters are grouped according to the TeSys T DTM parameter list tab. To help you find the link with
the variable tables in the Use chapter, each parameter has its corresponding register number attached.
WARNING
RISK OF UNINTENDED CONFIGURATION AND OPERATION
When modifying parameter settings of the LTM R controller:
z Be especially careful if you change parameter settings when the motor is running.
z Disable network control of the LTM R controller to prevent unintended parameter configuration and
operation.

Topic Page
Main Settings 480
Control 481
Communication 483
Thermal 485
Current 486
Voltage 488
Power 490
HMI 491
1639505EN-05 04/2015 479

Main Settings
Phases

Motor phases z 3-phase motor 3-phase motor
z single-phase motor
Operating Mode

Motor operating mode z Overload 2-wire Independent 3-wire
z Overload 3-wire
z Independent 2-wire
z Independent 3-wire
z Reverser 2-wire
z Reverser 3-wire
z Two-step 2-wire
z Two-step 3-wire
z Two-speed 2-wire
z Two-speed 3-wire
z Custom
Motor star-delta 0 = disabled 0
1 = enabled
Contactor

Contactor rating 1...1,000 A in increments of 0.1 A 810 A
Motor

Motor nominal voltage 110…690 V 400 V
Motor nominal power 0.134...1339.866 HP 10.05 HP
Motor nominal power 0.1...999.9 kW in increments of 0.1 kW 7.5 kW
Motor auxiliary fan cooled z Disable Disable
z Enable
Motor full load current ratio (FLC1) 5...100 % FLCmax in increments of 1 % 5 % FLCmax
Motor full load current – –
Motor high speed full load current ratio 5...100 % FLCmax in increments of 1 % 5 % FLCmax
(FLC2)
Motor high speed full load current (FLC2) 0...100 A in increments of 1 A 5A
Load Current Transformer

Load CT primary 1...65,535 in increments of 1 1
Load CT secondary 1...500 in increments of 1 1
Load CT multiple passes 1...100 passes in increments of 1 1
Ground Current Transformer

Ground current mode z Internal Internal
z External
Ground CT primary 1...65,535 in increments of 1 1

Ground CT secondary 1...65,535 in increments of 1 1
480 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Control
Operating Mode

Control direct transition On / Off Off
Motor transition timeout 0...999.9 s 1s
Motor Step 1 to 2 threshold 20...800 % FLC in increments of 1 % 150 % FLC
Motor Step 1 to 2 timeout 0.1...999.9 s 5s
Inputs/Outputs

Controller AC logic inputs configuration z Unknown Unknown
z Lower than 170V 50Hz
z Lower than 170V 60Hz
z Greater than 170V 50Hz
z Greater than 170V 60Hz
Logic input 3 external ready enable z Disable Disable
z Enable
Rapid Cycle

Rapid cycle lockout timeout 0...9999 s in increments of 1 s 0s
Local/Remote Control

Control remote channel setting z Network Network
z Terminal strip
z HMI
Control local channel setting z Terminal strip Terminal strip

z HMI
Control transfer mode z Bump Bump

z Bumpless
Control remote local buttons enable z Disable Disable

z Enable
Control remote local default mode z Remote Remote

z Local
Stop HMI disable z Enable Disable

z Disable
Stop terminal strip disable z Enable Disable

z Disable
Diagnostic

Diagnostic fault enable z Disable Enable
z Enable
Diagnostic warning enable z Disable Enable

z Enable
Wiring fault enable z Disable Enable

z Enable
Motor phases sequence z ABC ABC

z ACB
1639505EN-05 04/2015 481

Fault and Warning

Fault reset mode z Manual or HMI Manual or HMI
z Remote by network
z Automatic
Auto-reset attempts group 1 setting 0 = manual, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 = unlimited 5

number of reset attempts
Auto-reset group 1 timeout 0...9,999 s in increments of 1 s 480 s
Auto-reset group 2 timeout 0...9999 s in increments of 1 s 1,200 s
Auto-reset group 3 timeout 0...9999 s in increments of 1 s 60 s
482 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Communication
Network Port

Ethernet IP address setting 0.0.0.0...255.255.255.255 0.0.0.0
Ethernet subnet mask setting 0.0.0.0...255.255.255.255 0.0.0.0
Ethernet gateway address setting 0.0.0.0...255.255.255.255 0.0.0.0
Network port frame type setting z Ethernet II Ethernet II
z 802.3
Network port endian setting z LSW first (little endian) MSW first (big endian)
z MSW first (big endian)
Ethernet master IP address setting 0.0.0.0...255.255.255.255 0.0.0.0

Network port comm loss timeout 0.01...99.99 s in increments of 0.01 s 2 s
Network port fallback setting z Hold LO1 LO2 LO1, LO2 off
z Run (2-step) or off
z LO1, LO2 off
z LO1, LO2 on (ovl, ind, cust) or off
z LO1 on or off (2-step)
Network port fault enable z Disable Disable
z Enable
Network port warning enable z Disable Disable

z Enable
Config via network port enable z Forbidden Allowed

z Allowed
FDR disable z No No
z Yes
FDR auto backup enable z Disable Enable

z Enable
FDR auto backup period setting 10...3600 s in increments of 10 s 120 s

SNMP manager address 1 setting 0.0.0.0...255.255.255.255 0.0.0.0
SNMP manager address 2 setting 0.0.0.0...255.255.255.255 0.0.0.0
SNMP system name setting (free text) Product reference
SNMP system location setting (free text) Grenoble, France
SNMP system contact setting (free text) Support team
SNMP community name get setting (free text) public
SNMP community name set setting (free text) private
SNMP community name trap setting (free text) public
SNMP trap authentication failure enable z Disable Enable
z Enable
NOTE:
z All network port settings can be configured via PLC write commands.
z The TeSys T DTM can configure all network port settings, except for the following SNMP trap enable
settings: warm start, cold start, link up, and link down.
z Other HMI devices can configure all network port settings, except for SNMP-related settings.
HMI Port

HMI port address setting 1...247 1
HMI port baud rate setting z 4800 19,200 bits/s
z 9600
z 19,200
z Self detection
HMI port parity setting z None Even
z Even
1639505EN-05 04/2015 483


HMI port endian setting z LSW first (little endian) MSW first (big endian)
z MSW first (big endian)
HMI port fallback setting z Hold LO1 LO2 LO1, LO2 off
z Run (2-step) or off
z LO1, LO2 off
z LO1, LO2 on (ovl, ind, cust) or off
HMI port fault enable z Disable Disable
z Enable
HMI port warning enable z Disable Disable

z Enable
Config via HMI engineering tool enable z Forbidden Allowed

z Allowed
Config via HMI keypad enable z Forbidden Allowed

z Allowed
484 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Thermal
Thermal Overload

Thermal overload mode z Definite Inverse thermal
z Inverse thermal
Motor trip class z Motor class 5 Motor class 5

z Motor class 10
z Motor class 15
z Motor class 20
z Motor class 25
z Motor class 30
Thermal overload fault enable z Disable Enable
z Enable
Thermal overload fault reset threshold 35...95 % in increments of 1 % 75 %

Thermal overload warning enable z Disable Enable
z Enable
Thermal overload warning threshold 10...100 % in increments of 1 % 85 %

Long start fault timeout 1...200 s in increments of 1 s 10 s
Thermal overload fault enable z Disable Enable
z Enable
Thermal overload fault definite timeout 1...300 s in increments of 1 s 10 s

Thermal overload warning enable z Disable Enable
z Enable
Motor Temperature
Parameters Setting range Factory setting

Motor temperature sensor type z None None
z PTC binary
z PT100
z PTC analog
z NTC analog
Motor temperature sensor fault enable z Disable Disable
z Enable
Motor temperature sensor fault threshold 20...6,500 Ω 20 Ω

Motor temperature sensor fault threshold degree 0...200 °C 0 °C
Motor temperature sensor warning enable z Disable Disable
z Enable
Motor temperature sensor warning threshold 20...6,500 Ω 20 Ω

Motor temperature sensor warning threshold 0...200 °C 0 °C
degree
1639505EN-05 04/2015 485

Current
Ground Current

Ground current disable while motor starting z No No
z Yes
Ground current fault enable z Disable Enable

z Enable
Internal ground current fault threshold 20...500 % FLCmin in increments of 30 % FLCmin

1%
Internal ground current fault timeout 0.5...25 s in increments of 0.1 s 1s
External ground current fault threshold 0.01...20 A in increments of 0.01 A 1A
External ground current fault timeout 0.1...25 s in increments of 0.01 s 0.5 s
Ground Current warning enable z Disable Enable
z Enable
Internal ground current warning threshold 50...500 % FLCmin in increments of 50 % FLCmin

1%
External ground current warning threshold 0.01...20 A in increments of 0.01 A 1A
Phases

Current phase imbalance fault enable z Disable Enable
z Enable
Current phase imbalance fault threshold 10...70 % in increments of 1 % 10 %

Current phase imbalance fault timeout starting 0.2...20 s in increments of 0.1 s 0.7 s
Current phase imbalance fault timeout running 0.2...20 s in increments of 0.1 s 5s
Current phase imbalance warning enable z Disable Disable
z Enable
Current phase imbalance warning threshold 10...70 % in increments of 1 % 10 %

Current phase loss fault enable z Disable Enable
z Enable
Current phase loss timeout 0.1...30 s in increments of 0.1 s 3s

Current phase loss warning enable z Disable Enable
z Enable
Current phase reversal fault enable z Disable Disable

z Enable
Long Start

Long start fault enable z Disable Enable
z Enable
Long start fault threshold 100...800 % FLC in increments of 1 % 100 % FLC

Long start fault timeout 1...200 s in increments of 1 s 10 s
486 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Jam

Jam fault enable z Disable Enable
z Enable
Jam fault threshold 100...800 % FLC in increments of 1 % 200 % FLC

Jam fault timeout 1...30 s in increments of 1 s 5s
Jam warning enable z Disable Disable
z Enable
Jam warning threshold 100...800 % FLC in increments of 1 % 200 % FLC
Undercurrent

Undercurrent Fault Enable z Disable Disable
z Enable
Undercurrent Fault Threshold 30...100 % FLC in increments of 1 % 50 % FLC

Undercurrent Fault Timeout 1...200 s in increments of 1 s 10 s
Undercurrent Warning Enable z Disable Disable
z Enable
Undercurrent Warning Threshold 30...100 % FLC in increments of 1 % 50 % FLC
Overcurrent

Overcurrent fault enable z Disable Disable
z Enable
Overcurrent Fault Threshold 20...800 % FLC in increments of 1 % 200 % FLC

Overcurrent fault timeout 1...250 s in increments of 1 s 10 s
Overcurrent warning enable z Disable Disable
z Enable
Overcurrent warning threshold 20...800 % FLC in increments of 1 % 200 % FLC
1639505EN-05 04/2015 487

Voltage
Phases

Voltage phase imbalance fault enable z Disable Disable
z Enable
Voltage phase imbalance fault threshold 3...15 % of the calculated imbalance 10 % imbalance
in increments of 1 %
Voltage phase imbalance fault timeout starting 0.2...20 s in increments of 1 s 0.7 s
Voltage phase imbalance fault timeout running 0.2...20 s in increments of 1 s 2s
Voltage phase imbalance warning enable z Disable Disable
z Enable
Voltage phase imbalance warning threshold 3...15 % of the calculated imbalance 10 % imbalance
in increments of 1 %
Voltage phase loss fault enable z Disable Disable
z Enable
Voltage phase loss fault timeout 0.1...30 s in increments of 0.1 s 3s

Voltage phase loss warning enable z Disable Disable
z Enable
Voltage phase reversal fault enable z Disable Disable

z Enable
Undervoltage

Undervoltage fault enable z Disable Disable
z Enable
Undervoltage fault threshold 70...99 % of Motor nominal voltage 85 % of Motor nominal

in increments of 1 % voltage
Undervoltage fault timeout 0.2...25 s in increments of 0.1 s 3s
Undervoltage warning enable z Disable Disable
z Enable
Undervoltage warning threshold 70...99 % of Motor nominal voltage 85 % of Motor nominal

in increments of 1 % voltage
Overvoltage

Overvoltage fault enable z Disable Disable
z Enable
Overvoltage fault threshold 101...115 % of Motor nominal 110 % of Motor

voltage in increments of 1 % nominal voltage
Overvoltage fault timeout 0.2...25 s in increments of 0.1 s 3s
Overvoltage warning enable z Disable Disable
z Enable
Overvoltage warning threshold 101...115 % of Motor nominal 110 % of Motor

voltage in increments of 1 % nominal voltage
Voltage Dip

Voltage dip mode z None None
z Load shedding
z Auto-restart
Voltage dip threshold 50...115 % of Motor nominal voltage in 65 % of Motor nominal

increments of 1 % voltage
Load shedding timeout 1...9999 s in increments of 1 s 10 s
488 1639505EN-05 04/2015


Voltage dip restart threshold 65...115 % of Motor nominal voltage in 90 % of Motor nominal
Voltage dip threshold 50...115 % of Motor nominal voltage in 65 % of Motor nominal
Voltage dip restart threshold 65...115 % of Motor nominal voltage in 90 % of Motor nominal
Auto restart immediate timeout 0...0.4 s in increments of 0.1 s 0.2 s
Auto restart delayed timeout 0...301 s in increments of 1 s 4s
1639505EN-05 04/2015 489

Power
Underpower

Underpower fault enable z Disable Disable
z Enable
Underpower fault threshold 20...800 % of Motor nominal power in 20 % of Motor nominal

increments of 1 % power
Underpower fault timeout 1...100 s in increments of 1 s 60 s
Underpower warning enable z Disable Disable
z Enable
Underpower warning threshold 20...800 % of Motor nominal power in 30 % of Motor nominal

increments of 1 % power
Overpower

Overpower fault enable z Disable Disable
z Enable
Overpower fault threshold 20...800 % of Motor nominal power 150 % of Motor

in increments of 1 % nominal power
Overpower fault timeout 1...100 s in increments of 1 s 60 s
Overpower warning enable z Disable Disable
z Enable
Overpower warning threshold 20...800 % of Motor nominal power 150 % of Motor

in increments of 1 % nominal power
Under Power Factor

Under power factor fault enable z Disable Disable
z Enable
Under power factor fault threshold 0...1 in increments of 0.01 0.6

Under power factor fault timeout 1...25 s in increments of 0.1 s 10 s
Under power factor warning enable z Disable Disable
z Enable
Under power factor warning threshold 0...1 in increments of 0.01 0.6
Over Power Factor

Over power factor fault enable z Disable Disable
z Enable
Over power factor fault threshold 0...1 in increments of 0.01 0.9

Under power factor fault timeout 1...25 s in increments of 0.1 s 10 s
Over power factor warning enable z Disable Disable
z Enable
Over power factor warning threshold 0...1 in increments of 0.01 0.9
490 1639505EN-05 04/2015

HMI
HMI Display

HMI language setting – English
HMI display contrast setting 0...255 127
HMI display brightness setting 0...255 127
HMI motor status LED color z Red Red
z Green
HMI Keyboard

Control remote local buttons enable z Disable Disable
z Enable
Stop HMI disable z Yes No

z No
HMI Display Scroll View

HMI display motor status enable z Hidden Hidden
z Displayed
HMI display date enable z Hidden Hidden

z Displayed
HMI display time enable z Hidden Hidden

z Displayed
HMI display operating time enable z Hidden Hidden

z Displayed
HMI display starts per hour enable z Hidden Hidden

z Displayed
HMI display I/O status enable z Hidden Hidden

z Displayed
HMI display control mode enable z Hidden Hidden

z Displayed
HMI display thermal capacity level enable z Hidden Hidden

z Displayed
HMI display thermal capacity remaining enable z Hidden Hidden

z Displayed
HMI display time to trip enable z Hidden Hidden

z Displayed
HMI motor temperature sensor enable z Hidden Hidden

z Displayed
HMI display temperature sensor degree CF z °C °C

z °F
HMI display average current enable z Hidden Displayed

z Displayed
HMI display L1 current enable z Hidden Hidden

z Displayed

z Displayed

z Displayed
HMI display average current ratio enable z Hidden Hidden

z Displayed
HMI display L1 current ratio enable z Hidden Hidden

z Displayed
1639505EN-05 04/2015 491


LHMI display L2 current ratio enable z Hidden Hidden
z Displayed
HMI display L3 current ratio enable z Hidden Hidden

z Displayed
HMI display current phase imbalance enable z Hidden Hidden

z Displayed
HMI display ground current enable z Hidden Hidden

z Displayed
HMI display start statistics enable z Hidden Hidden

z Displayed
HMI display average voltage enable z Hidden Hidden

z Displayed
HMI display L1-L2 voltage enable z Hidden Hidden

z Displayed

z Displayed

z Displayed
HMI display voltage phase imbalance enable z Hidden Hidden

z Displayed
HMI display frequency enable z Hidden Hidden

z Displayed
HMI display power factor enable z Hidden Hidden

z Displayed
HMI display active power enable z Hidden Hidden

z Displayed
HMI display reactive power enable z Hidden Hidden

z Displayed
HMI display power consumption enable z Hidden Hidden

z Displayed
492 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Wiring Diagrams
1639505EN-05 04/2015
Appendix C
Wiring Diagrams
Wiring Diagrams
Overview
The LTM R operating mode wiring diagrams can be drawn according to IEC or NEMA standards.
DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH
z Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on it.
z Apply appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE) and follow safe electrical work practices.
NOTICE
LOGIC INPUTS DESTRUCTION HAZARD
z Connect the LTM R controller’s inputs using the 3 Common (C) terminals connected to the A1 control
voltage via an internal filter.
z Do not connect the Common (C) terminal to the A1 or A2 control voltage inputs.

Section Topic Page
C.1 IEC Format Wiring Diagrams 494
C.2 NEMA Format Wiring Diagrams 513
1639505EN-05 04/2015 493

Wiring Diagrams
Section C.1
IEC Format Wiring Diagrams
IEC Format Wiring Diagrams
Overview
This section contains the wiring diagrams corresponding to the 5 pre-configured operating modes:
Overload Monitoring of the motor load where control (start/stop) of the motor load is
achieved by a mechanism other than the controller
Independent Direct-on-line (across-the-line) full-voltage non-reversing motor starting
applications
Reverser Direct-on-line (across-the-line) full-voltage reversing motor starting
applications
Two-Step Reduced voltage starting motor applications, including:
z Wye-Delta
Two-Speed Two-speed motor applications for motor types, including:

z Pole Changer
Each application is described individually, with:
1 complete application diagram 3-wire (impulse) terminal strip control

(including power and control)
3 partial diagrams 2-wire (maintained) terminal strip control
(control logic input wiring variants)
3-wire (impulse) terminal strip control with network control selectable
2-wire (maintained) terminal strip control with network control selectable

Topic Page
Overload Mode Wiring Diagrams 495
Independent Mode Wiring Diagrams 499
Reverser Mode Wiring Diagrams 501
Two-Step Wye-Delta Mode Wiring Diagrams 503
Two-Step Primary Resistor Mode Wiring Diagrams 505
Two-Step Autotransformer Mode Wiring Diagrams 507
Two-Speed Dahlander Mode Wiring Diagrams 509
Two-Speed Pole Changing Mode Wiring Diagrams 511
494 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Wiring Diagrams
Overload Mode Wiring Diagrams
Application Diagram with 3-Wire (Impulse) Terminal Strip Control

The following application diagram features a 3-wire (impulse) terminal strip control wiring diagram:
1639505EN-05 04/2015 495

Wiring Diagrams
Application Diagram with 2-Wire (Maintained) Terminal Strip Control

The following application diagram features a 2-wire (maintained) terminal strip control wiring diagram:
496 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Wiring Diagrams
Application Diagram with 3-Wire (Impulse) Terminal Strip Control with Network Control Selectable
The following application diagram features a 3-wire (impulse) terminal strip control with network control
selectable wiring diagram:
N Network
TS Terminal strip
1639505EN-05 04/2015 497

Wiring Diagrams
Application Diagram with 2-Wire (Maintained) Terminal Strip Control with Network Control Selectable
The following application diagram features a 2-wire (maintained) terminal strip control with network control
N Network
TS Terminal strip
498 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Wiring Diagrams
Independent Mode Wiring Diagrams


Stop Start
+/~ -/~
A1 A2 I.1 C I.2 I.3 C I.4 I.5 C I.6 97 98 95 96
O.4
1639505EN-05 04/2015 499

Wiring Diagrams
L ON
Start Stop
+/~ -/~
A1 A2 I.1 C I.2 I.3 C I.4 I.5 C I.6 97 98 95 96
O.4
L Terminal strip control

O Off
N Network control
L ON
+/~ -/~
A1 A2 I.1 C I.2 I.3 C I.4 I.5 C I.6 97 98 95 96
O.4

O Off
N Network control
500 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Wiring Diagrams
Reverser Mode Wiring Diagrams


1 The N.C. interlock contacts KM1 and KM2 are not mandatory because the controller electronically interlocks O.1
and O.2.

FW O RV
+/~ -/~
A1 A2 I.1 C I.2 I.3 C I.4 I.5 C I.6 97 98 95 96
O.4
FW Forward
O Off
RV Reverse
1639505EN-05 04/2015 501

Wiring Diagrams
L ON
Start Start
FW RV Stop
+/~ -/~
A1 A2 I.1 C I.2 I.3 C I.4 I.5 C I.6 97 98 95 96
O.4

O Off
N Network control
L ON
FW RV
+/~ -/~
A1 A2 I.1 C I.2 I.3 C I.4 I.5 C I.6 97 98 95 96
O.4

O Off
N Network control
FW Forward
RV Reverse
502 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Wiring Diagrams
Two-Step Wye-Delta Mode Wiring Diagrams

and O.2.

Stop Start
+/~ -/~
A1 A2 I.1 C I.2 I.3 C I.4 I.5 C I.6 97 98 95 96
O.4
1639505EN-05 04/2015 503

Wiring Diagrams
The following application diagram features 3-wire (impulse) terminal strip control with network control
L ON
Start Stop
+/~ -/~
A1 A2 I.1 C I.2 I.3 C I.4 I.5 C I.6 97 98 95 96
O.4

O Off
N Network control
The following application diagram features 2-wire (maintained) terminal strip control with network control
L ON
+/~ -/~
A1 A2 I.1 C I.2 I.3 C I.4 I.5 C I.6 97 98 95 96
O.4

O Off
N Network control
504 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Wiring Diagrams
Two-Step Primary Resistor Mode Wiring Diagrams


Stop Start
+/~ -/~
A1 A2 I.1 C I.2 I.3 C I.4 I.5 C I.6 97 98 95 96
O.4
1639505EN-05 04/2015 505

Wiring Diagrams
L ON
Start Stop
+/~ -/~
A1 A2 I.1 C I.2 I.3 C I.4 I.5 C I.6 97 98 95 96
O.4

O Off
N Network control
L ON
+/~ -/~
A1 A2 I.1 C I.2 I.3 C I.4 I.5 C I.6 97 98 95 96
O.4

O Off
N Network control
506 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Wiring Diagrams
Two-Step Autotransformer Mode Wiring Diagrams

and O.2.

Stop Start
+/~ -/~
A1 A2 I.1 C I.2 I.3 C I.4 I.5 C I.6 97 98 95 96
O.4
1639505EN-05 04/2015 507

Wiring Diagrams
L ON
Start Stop
+/~ -/~
A1 A2 I.1 C I.2 I.3 C I.4 I.5 C I.6 97 98 95 96
O.4

O Off
N Network control
L ON
+/~ -/~
A1 A2 I.1 C I.2 I.3 C I.4 I.5 C I.6 97 98 95 96
O.4

O Off
N Network control
508 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Wiring Diagrams
Two-Speed Dahlander Mode Wiring Diagrams

LS Low speed
HS High speed
1 A Dahlander application requires 2 sets of wires passing through the CT windows. The controller can also be placed
upstream of the contactors. If this is the case, and if the Dahlander motor is used in variable torque mode, all the
wires downstream of the contactors must be the same size.
and O.2.

LS O HS
+/~ -/~
A1 A2 I.1 C I.2 I.3 C I.4 I.5 C I.6 97 98 95 96
O.4
LS Low speed
O Off
HS High speed
1639505EN-05 04/2015 509

Wiring Diagrams
L ON
Start Start
LS HS Stop
+/~ -/~
A1 A2 I.1 C I.2 I.3 C I.4 I.5 C I.6 97 98 95 96
O.4

O Off
N Network control
LS Low speed
HS High speed
L ON
LS HS
+/~ -/~
A1 A2 I.1 C I.2 I.3 C I.4 I.5 C I.6 97 98 95 96
O.4

O Off
N Network control
LS Low speed
HS High speed
510 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Wiring Diagrams
Two-Speed Pole Changing Mode Wiring Diagrams

LS Low speed
HS High speed
1 A pole-changing application requires 2 sets of wires passing through the CT windows. The controller can also be
placed upstream of the contactors. If this is the case, all the wires downstream of the contactors must be the same
size.
2 The N.C. interlock contacts KM1 and KM2 are not mandatory because the controller firmware interlocks O.1 and
O.2.

LS O HS
+/~ -/~
A1 A2 I.1 C I.2 I.3 C I.4 I.5 C I.6 97 98 95 96
O.4
LS Low speed
O Off
HS High speed
1639505EN-05 04/2015 511

Wiring Diagrams
L ON
Start Start
LS HS Stop
+/~ -/~
A1 A2 I.1 C I.2 I.3 C I.4 I.5 C I.6 97 98 95 96
O.4

O Off
N Network control
Start LS Start Low speed
Start HS Start High speed
L ON
LS HS
+/~ -/~
A1 A2 I.1 C I.2 I.3 C I.4 I.5 C I.6 97 98 95 96
O.4

O Off
N Network control
LS Low speed
HS High speed
512 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Wiring Diagrams
Section C.2
NEMA Format Wiring Diagrams
NEMA Format Wiring Diagrams
Overview
This section contains the wiring diagrams corresponding to the 5 pre-configured operating modes:
Overload Monitoring of the motor load where control (start/stop) of the motor load is
achieved by a mechanism other than the controller
Independent Direct-on-line (across-the-line) full-voltage non-reversing motor starting
applications
Reverser Direct-on-line (across-the-line) full-voltage reversing motor starting
applications
Two-Step Reduced voltage starting motor applications, including:
z Wye-Delta
Two-Speed Two-speed motor applications for motor types, including:

z Pole Changer
Each application is described individually, with:
1 complete application diagram 3-wire (impulse) terminal strip control

(including power and control)
3 partial diagrams 2-wire (maintained) terminal strip control
(control logic input wiring variants)
3-wire (impulse) terminal strip control with network control selectable
2-wire (maintained) terminal strip control with network control selectable

Topic Page
Overload Mode Wiring Diagrams 514
Independent Mode Wiring Diagrams 518
Reverser Mode Wiring Diagrams 520
Two-Step Wye-Delta Mode Wiring Diagrams 522
Two-Step Primary Resistor Mode Wiring Diagrams 524
Two-Step Autotransformer Mode Wiring Diagrams 526
Two-Speed Mode Wiring Diagrams: Single Winding (Consequent Pole) 528
Two-Speed Mode Wiring Diagrams: Separate Winding 530
1639505EN-05 04/2015 513

Wiring Diagrams
Overload Mode Wiring Diagrams

514 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Wiring Diagrams

1639505EN-05 04/2015 515

Wiring Diagrams
H Hand (Terminal strip control)

O Off
A Automatic (Network control)
516 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Wiring Diagrams

O Off
1639505EN-05 04/2015 517

Wiring Diagrams
Independent Mode Wiring Diagrams


OFF ON
+/~ -/~
A1 A2 I.1 C I.2 I.3 C I.4 I.5 C I.6 97 98 95 96
O.4
518 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Wiring Diagrams
H O A
A1 I H O A
A2 I A1
A3 I Stop A2
A3
Start
+/~ -/~
A1 A2 I.1 C I.2 I.3 C I.4 I.5 C I.6 97 98 95 96
O.4

O Off
H O A
A1 I H O A
A2 I
A1
A2
+/~ -/~
A1 A2 I.1 C I.2 I.3 C I.4 I.5 C I.6 97 98 95 96
O.4

O Off
1639505EN-05 04/2015 519

Wiring Diagrams
Reverser Mode Wiring Diagrams

F Forward
R Reverse

F O R
A1 I
O
F R A2 I
A1
+/~ -/~ A2
A1 A2 I.1 C I.2 I.3 C I.4 I.5 C I.6 97 98 95 96
O.4
F Forward
O Off
R Reverse
520 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Wiring Diagrams
H O A O
H A
A1 I A1
A2 I Stop A2
A3 I
A3
F
R
+/~ -/~
A1 A2 I.1 C I.2 I.3 C I.4 I.5 C I.6 97 98 95 96
O.4
F Forward
R Reverse
O Off
H O A
A1 I
A2 I
F R O
H A
A1
A2
+/~ -/~
A1 A2 I.1 C I.2 I.3 C I.4 I.5 C I.6 97 98 95 96
O.4
F Forward
R Reverse
O Off
1639505EN-05 04/2015 521

Wiring Diagrams
Two-Step Wye-Delta Mode Wiring Diagrams


OFF ON
+/~ -/~
A1 A2 I.1 C I.2 I.3 C I.4 I.5 C I.6 97 98 95 96
O.4
522 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Wiring Diagrams
The following application diagram features 3-wire (impulse) terminal strip control with network control
H O A H O A
A1 I A1
A2 I Stop A2
A3 I
A3
Start
+/~ -/~
A1 A2 I.1 C I.2 I.3 C I.4 I.5 C I.6 97 98 95 96
O.4

O Off
The following application diagram features 2-wire (maintained) terminal strip control with network control
H O A
A1 I H O A
A2 I
A1
A2
+/~ -/~
A1 A2 I.1 C I.2 I.3 C I.4 I.5 C I.6 97 98 95 96
O.4

O Off
1639505EN-05 04/2015 523

Wiring Diagrams
Two-Step Primary Resistor Mode Wiring Diagrams


OFF ON
+/~ -/~
A1 A2 I.1 C I.2 I.3 C I.4 I.5 C I.6 97 98 95 96
O.4
524 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Wiring Diagrams
H O A H O A
A1 I A1
A2 I Stop A2
A3 I
A3
Start
+/~ -/~
A1 A2 I.1 C I.2 I.3 C I.4 I.5 C I.6 97 98 95 96
O.4

O Off
H O A
A1 I H O A
A2 I
A1
A2
+/~ -/~
A1 A2 I.1 C I.2 I.3 C I.4 I.5 C I.6 97 98 95 96
O.4

O Off
1639505EN-05 04/2015 525

Wiring Diagrams
Two-Step Autotransformer Mode Wiring Diagrams


OFF ON
+/~ -/~
A1 A2 I.1 C I.2 I.3 C I.4 I.5 C I.6 97 98 95 96
O.4
526 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Wiring Diagrams
H O A H O A
A1 I A1
A2 I Stop A2
A3 I
A3
Start
+/~ -/~
A1 A2 I.1 C I.2 I.3 C I.4 I.5 C I.6 97 98 95 96
O.4

O Off
H O A
A1 I H O A
A2 I
A1
A2
+/~ -/~
A1 A2 I.1 C I.2 I.3 C I.4 I.5 C I.6 97 98 95 96
O.4

O Off
1639505EN-05 04/2015 527

Wiring Diagrams
Two-Speed Mode Wiring Diagrams: Single Winding (Consequent Pole)

L Low
H High

L O H
A1 I
O
L H A2 I
A1
+/~ -/~ A2
A1 A2 I.1 C I.2 I.3 C I.4 I.5 C I.6 97 98 95 96
O.4
L Low speed
O Off
H High speed
528 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Wiring Diagrams
H O A O
H A
A1 I A1
A2 I STOP A2
A3 I
LS A3
HS
+/~ -/~
A1 A2 I.1 C I.2 I.3 C I.4 I.5 C I.6 97 98 95 96
O.4
LS Low speed
HS High speed
O Off
H O A
A1 I
A2 I
LS HS O
H A
A1
A2
+/~ -/~
A1 A2 I.1 C I.2 I.3 C I.4 I.5 C I.6 97 98 95 96
O.4
LS Low speed
HS High speed
O Off
1639505EN-05 04/2015 529

Wiring Diagrams
Two-Speed Mode Wiring Diagrams: Separate Winding

L Low
H High

L O H
A1 I
O
L H A2 I
A1
+/~ -/~ A2
A1 A2 I.1 C I.2 I.3 C I.4 I.5 C I.6 97 98 95 96
O.4
L Low speed
O Off
H High speed
530 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Wiring Diagrams
H O A O
H A
A1 I A1
A2 I STOP A2
A3 I
LS A3
HS
+/~ -/~
A1 A2 I.1 C I.2 I.3 C I.4 I.5 C I.6 97 98 95 96
O.4
LS Low speed
HS High speed
O Off
H O A
A1 I
A2 I
LS HS O
H A
A1
A2
+/~ -/~
A1 A2 I.1 C I.2 I.3 C I.4 I.5 C I.6 97 98 95 96
O.4
LS Low speed
HS High speed
O Off
1639505EN-05 04/2015 531

Wiring Diagrams
532 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Glossary
1639505EN-05 04/2015
Glossary
A
active power
Also known as real power, active power is the rate of producing, transferring or using electrical energy. It
is measured in watts (W) and often expressed in kilowatts (kW) or megawatts (MW).
analog
Describes inputs (e.g. temperature) or outputs (e.g. motor speed) that can be set to a range of values.
Contrast with discrete.
apparent power
The product of current and voltage, apparent power consists of both active power and reactive power. It is
measured in volt-amperes and often expressed in kilovolt-amperes (kVA) or megavolt-amperes (MVA).
C
CANopen
An open industry standard protocol used on the internal communication bus. The protocol allows the
connection of any standard CANopen device to the island bus.
CT
current transformer.
D
definite time
A variety of TCC or TVC where the initial magnitude of the trip time delay remains a constant, and does
not vary in response to changes in the value of the measured quantity (e.g. current). Contrast with inverse
thermal.
device
In the broadest terms, any electronic unit that can be added to a network. More specifically, a
programmable electronic unit (e.g. PLC, numeric controller or robot) or I/O card.
DeviceNet™
DeviceNet™ is a low-level, connection-based network protocol that is based on CAN, a serial bus system
without a defined application layer. DeviceNet, therefore, defines a layer for the industrial application of
CAN.
DIN
Deutsches Institut für Normung. The European organization that organizes the creation and maintenance
of dimensional and engineering standards.
DIN rail
A steel mounting rail, made pursuant to DIN standards (typically 35 mm wide), that allows for easier "snap-
on" mounting of IEC electrical devices, including the LTM R controller and the expansion module. Contrast
with screw mounting of devices to a control panel by drilling and tapping holes.
discrete
Describes inputs (e.g. switches) or outputs (e.g. coils) that can be only On or Off. Contrast with analog.
DPST
double-pole/single-throw. A switch that connects or disconnects 2 circuit conductors in a single branch
circuit. A DPST switch has 4 terminals, and is the equivalent of 2 single-pole/single-throw switches
controlled by a single mechanism, as depicted below:
1639505EN-05 04/2015 533

Glossary
E
endian setting (big endian)
‘big endian’ means that the high-order byte/word of the number is stored in memory at the lowest address,
and the low-order byte/word at the highest address (the big end comes first).
endian setting (little endian)
‘little endian’ means that the low-order byte/word of the number is stored in memory at the lowest address,
and the high-order byte/word at the highest address (the little end comes first).
EtherNet/IP
(Ethernet Industrial Protocol) is an industrial application protocol built on TCP/IP and CIP protocols. It is
mainly used on automated networks, it defines network devices as network objects as to allow the
communication between industrial control system and their components; (programmable automation
controller, programmable logic controller, I/O systems).
F
FLC
full load current. Also known as rated current. The current the motor will draw at the rated voltage and rated
load. The LTM R controller has 2 FLC settings: FLC1 (Motor Full Load Current Ratio) and FLC2 (Motor
High Speed Full Load Current Ratio), each set as a percentage of FLC max.
FLC1
Motor Full Load Current Ratio. FLC parameter setting for low or single speed motors.
FLC2
Motor High Speed Full Load Current Ratio. FLC parameter setting for high-speed motors.
FLCmax
Full Load Current Max. Peak current parameter.
FLCmin
Minimum Full Load Current. The smallest amount of motor current the LTM R controller will support. This
value is determined by the LTM R controller model.
H
hysteresis
A value—added to lower limit threshold settings or subtracted from upper limit threshold settings—that
retards the response of the LTM R controller before it stops measuring the duration of faults and warnings.
I
inverse thermal
A variety of TCC where the initial magnitude of the trip time delay is generated by a thermal model of the
motor and varies in response to changes in the value of the measured quantity (e.g. current). Contrast with
definite time.
M
Modbus®
Modbus® is the name of the master-slave/client-server serial communications protocol developed by
Modicon (now Schneider Automation, Inc.) in 1979, which has since become a standard network protocol
for industrial automation.
N
nominal power
Motor Nominal Power. Parameter for the power a motor will produce at rated voltage and rated current.
nominal voltage
Motor Nominal Voltage. Parameter for rated voltage.
534 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Glossary
NTC
negative temperature coefficient. Characteristic of a thermistor—a thermally sensitive resistor—whose
resistance increases as its temperature falls, and whose resistance decreases as its temperature rises.
NTC analog
Type of RTD.
P
PLC
programmable logic controller.
power factor
Also called cosine phi (or ϕ), power factor represents the absolute value of the ratio of active power to
apparent power in AC power systems.
PROFIBUS DP
An open bus system that uses an electrical network based on a shielded 2-wire line or an optical network
based on a fiber-optic cable.
PT100
Type of RTD.
PTC
positive temperature coefficient. Characteristic of a thermistor—a thermally sensitive resistor—whose
resistance increases as its temperature rises, and whose resistance decreases as its temperature falls.
PTC analog
Type of RTD.
PTC binary
Type of RTD.
R
reset time
Time between a sudden change in the monitored quantity (e.g. current) and the switching of the output
relay.
rms
root mean square. A method of calculating average AC current and average AC voltage. Because AC
current and AC voltage are bi-directional, the arithmetic average of AC current or voltage always equals 0.
RTD
resistance temperature detector. A thermistor (thermal resistor sensor) used to measure the temperature
of the motor. Required by the LTM R controller’s Motor Temp Sensor motor protection function.
T
TCC
trip curve characteristic. The type of delay used to trip the flow of current in response to a fault condition.
As implemented in the LTM R controller, all motor protection function trip time delays are definite time,
except for the Thermal Overload function, which also offers inverse thermal trip time delays.
TVC
trip voltage characteristic. The type of delay used to trip the flow of voltage in response to a fault condition.
As implemented by the LTM R controller and the expansion module, all TVCs are definite time.
1639505EN-05 04/2015 535

Glossary
536 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Index
1639505EN-05 04/2015
Index
A average voltage, 41, 69, 437

n-0, 299, 395, 445
active power, 42, 43, 69, 290, 404, 437
n-1, 299, 395
consumption, 44
n-2, 396
n-0, 299, 395, 445
n-3, 396
n-1, 299, 395
n-4, 397
n-2, 396
n-3, 396
n-4, 397 C
altitude derating
closings count
controller, 472
motor LO1, 447
LTM E expansion module, 474
motor LO2, 447
apparent power, 42
command
assembly object, 347
analog output 1, 424
auto restart
clear all, 47, 198, 253, 379, 418
delayed condition, 405
clear controller settings, 198, 289, 380, 418
delayed count, 394
clear IP, 379
delayed restart timeout, 489
clear network port settings, 199, 380, 418
delayed timeout, 139, 410
clear statistics, 60, 198, 289, 379, 418
enable, 410
clear thermal capacity level, 88, 191, 198, 380, 418
immediate condition, 405
fault reset, 288, 418, 424
immediate count, 394
FDR data backup, 320
immediate restart timeout, 489
FDR data restore, 320
immediate timeout, 139, 410
logic outputs register, 418, 424
manual condition, 405
motor low speed, 181, 418, 424
manual count, 394
motor run forward, 171, 173, 176, 181, 418, 424
status register, 405
motor run reverse, 173, 176, 181, 418, 424
auto-reset
self test, 418, 424, 462, 462
attempts group 1 setting, 192, 292, 413
statistics, 47
commissioning
first power-up, 253
count, 63
introduction, 250
group 1 timeout, 192, 292, 413
verify configuration, 261
verify wiring, 259
communication configuration
automatic fault reset
FDR auto backup enable, 483
attempts group1, 482
FDR auto backup period setting, 483
FDR disable, 483
via engineering tool enable, 484
timeout group1, 482
via HMI keyboard enable, 484
timeout group2, 482
via network port enable, 483
timeout group3, 482
communication loss, 53
automatic restart, 139
config via
average current, 436, 437
HMI engineering tool enable, 251, 411
n-0, 299, 397, 444
HMI keypad enable, 251, 411
n-1, 299, 398
HMI network port enable, 251
n-2, 398
network port enable, 411
n-3, 398
configurable settings, 84
n-4, 399
configuration checksum, 52
ratio, 290
configuration file, 185
average current ratio, 69, 288, 436
configuration software
n-0, 394, 444
EDS, 341
n-1, 395
contactor rating, 412, 480
n-2, 395
control
n-3, 396
direct transition, 175, 181, 291, 415
n-4, 397
principles, 165
register 1, 418, 424
register 2, 418
setting register, 415
transfer mode, 415
1639505EN-05 04/2015 537

Index
control channels, 154, 155 current highest imbalance

HMI, 155 L1, 405
network, 156 L2, 405
selecting, 155 L3, 405
terminal strip, 155 current phase imbalance, 35, 69, 106, 404, 437
control circuit fault enable, 107, 293, 486
2-wire, 166 fault threshold, 107, 293, 411, 486
3-wire, 166 fault timeout running, 107, 293, 411, 486
control local fault timeout starting, 107, 293, 411, 486
channel setting, 291, 415 faults count, 64, 298
control mode n-0, 299, 394, 444
configuration, 411 n-1, 299, 395
control remote n-2, 396
channel setting, 415, 491 n-3, 396
local buttons enable, 415 n-4, 397
local default mode, 415 warning enable, 107, 293, 486
control supervisor object, 359 warning threshold, 107, 293, 411, 486
control transfer mode, 156, 291 current phase loss, 109
control via HMI, 401, 422 fault enable, 110, 293, 486
control voltage characteristics fault timeout, 486
LTM R controller, 471 faults count, 64
control wiring, 166 timeout, 110, 293, 409
controller warning enable, 110, 293, 486
AC inputs setting register, 409 current phase reversal, 111
AC logic inputs configuration, 409 fault enable, 111, 293, 486
altitude derating, 472 faults count, 64
commercial reference, 300, 392 phase sequence, 111
compatibility code, 392 current ratio
config checksum, 404 average, 34, 404
firmware version, 392 ground, 404
ID code, 392 L1, 31, 404
internal fault, 46 L2, 31, 404
internal faults count, 68 L3, 31, 404
internal temperature, 47, 404 custom logic
internal temperature max, 47, 298, 393 auxiliary 1 LED, 436
internal temperature maximum, 447 auxiliary 2 LED, 436
internal temperature warning enable, 47 custom logic command
last power off duration, 447 external fault, 421
port ID, 405 register 1, 421
power, 401, 422 custom logic monitoring
serial number, 392 register 1, 421
system config required, 253, 411 system ready, 421
controller internal custom logic setting
faults count, 298 register 1, 421
counter custom operating mode, 185
Ethernet MB error messages sent, 326
Ethernet MB messages received, 326
Ethernet MB messages sent, 326 D
Ethernet open clients, 326 date and time, 69
Ethernet opened servers, 326 n-0, 299, 394, 444
Ethernet received correct frames, 325 n-1, 299, 395
Ethernet transmitted correct frames, 325 n-2, 396
counters n-3, 396
communication loss, 67 n-4, 397
internal faults, 68 setting, 414
current definite time
average, 34, 405, 437 long start fault timeout, 485
ground, 405, 437 diagnostic
L1, 405 fault, 65
L2, 405 fault enable, 48, 296, 481
L3, 405 faults count, 65
phase imbalance, 290 warning enable, 296, 481
range max, 392 warning enables, 48
scale ratio, 392 diagnostic faults
sensor max, 392 wiring faults, 50
538 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Index
diagnostics Ethernet, 406, 406, 406

Ethernet, 323 auto-detection configured, 407
display enable auto-detection operational, 407
active power, 492 auto-detection supported, 407
average current, 491 basic HW diag validity, 323, 406
average current ratio, 491 broadcast storm protection, 416
average voltage, 492 capabilities control, 439
control mode, 491 device name, 326, 408, 439
current phase imbalance, 492 device name available, 406
date, 491 diagnostics, 323
frequency, 492 extended configuration control, 416
ground current, 492 field extended 1 available, 406
inputs/outputs, 491 frame format available, 406
L1 current, 491 frame status, 325
L1 current ratio, 491 gateway, 324
L1L2 voltage, 492 gateway address, 407, 439
L2 current, 491 gateway address setting, 308, 326, 415
L2 current ratio, 492 gateway available, 406
L2L3 voltage, 492 global status, 324, 406, 406
L3 current, 491 global status available, 406
L3 current ratio, 492 IP address, 324, 406, 439
L3L1 voltage, 492 IP address setting, 308, 326, 415
last start, 492 IP assignment capability, 326, 408
motor status, 491 IP assignment mode available, 406
motor temperature, 491 IP assignment operational, 327, 408
operating time, 491 IP served by MAC BootP available, 408, 408
power consumption, 492 IP served by MAC DHCP available, 408, 408
power factor, 492 IP served by name available, 408, 408
reactive power, 492 IP served by stored assignment available, 408,
remaining thermal capacity, 491 408
starts per hour, 491 MAC address, 325, 407, 439
temperature °C or °F, 491 MAC address available, 406
thermal capacity level, 491 master IP address setting, 311, 415
time, 491 MB error messages sent counter, 326, 408
time to trip, 491 MB error messages sent counter available, 406
voltage phase imbalance, 492 MB messages received counter, 326, 408
MB messages received counter available, 406
MB messages sent counter, 326, 408
E MB messages sent counter available, 406
EDS, 341 opened clients counter, 326, 407
electronic data sheet opened clients counter available, 406
basic, 341 opened servers counter, 326, 407
EDS, 341 opened servers counter available, 406
port 502 messaging, 406
QoS CIP class 0/1 high, 416
QoS CIP class 0/1 high 8021 priority, 416
QoS CIP class 0/1 high DSCPy, 416
QoS CIP class 0/1 high queue priority, 416
QoS CIP class 0/1 low, 417
QoS CIP class 0/1 low 8021 priority, 417
QoS CIP class 0/1 low DSCP, 417
QoS CIP class 0/1 low queue priority, 417
QoS CIP class 0/1 scheduled, 416
QoS CIP class 0/1 scheduled 8021 priority, 416
QoS CIP class 0/1 scheduled DSCP, 416
QoS CIP class 0/1 scheduled queue priority, 416
QoS CIP class 0/1 urgent, 416
QoS CIP class 0/1 urgent 8021 priority, 416, 416
QoS CIP class 0/1 urgent queue priority, 416
QoS CIP UCMM class 3, 417
QoS CIP UCMM class 3 8021 priority, 417
QoS CIP UCMM class 3 DSCP, 417
QoS CIP UCMM class 3 queue priority, 417
QoS control, 416
QoS default outbound priority, 417
1639505EN-05 04/2015 539

Index
QoS device control, 417 expansion

QoS number of ports, 417 commercial reference, 300, 392
QoS port 1 default inbound priority, 417 compatibility code, 392
QoS port 2 default inbound priority, 417 firmware version, 392
QoS PTP event, 417 ID code, 392
QoS PTP event 8021 priority, 417 serial number, 392
QoS PTP event DSCP, 417 expansion module
QoS PTP event queue priority, 417 physical description, 26
QoS PTP general, 417 external ground current, 123
QoS PTP general 8021 priority, 417 fault threshold, 124, 294, 410, 486
QoS PTP general DSCPy, 417 fault timeout, 124, 294, 410, 486
QoS PTP general queue priority, 417 warning threshold, 124, 294, 410, 486
received correct frames counter, 325, 407
received correct frames counter available, 406
RSTP bridge priority, 416 F
RSTP forward delay, 416 fallback
RSTP hello time, 416 control transition, 157
RSTP max age time, 416 fallback condition, 53
RSTP port 1 path cost, 416 fault
RSTP port 1 priority, 416 controller internal, 400
RSTP port 1 select, 416 current phase imbalance, 400
RSTP port 2 path cost, 416 current phase loss, 401
RSTP port 2 priority, 416 current phase reversal, 401
RSTP port 2 select, 416 diagnostic, 401
RSTP port count, 416 external system, 401
RSTP transmit count, 416 ground current, 400
services available, 406 HMI port, 400
services status, 324, 406 internal port, 400
services validity, 324, 406 jam, 400
SNMP community name get setting, 329, 416 long start, 400
SNMP community name set setting, 329, 416 LTM E configuration, 401
SNMP community name trap setting, 329, 416 motor temperature sensor, 401
SNMP manager address 1 setting, 329, 416 network port, 400
SNMP manager address 2 setting, 329, 416 network port config, 400
SNMP system contact setting, 329, 416 over power factor, 401
SNMP system location setting, 329, 416 overcurrent, 401
SNMP system name setting, 329, 416 overpower, 401
subnet mask, 324, 407, 439 overvoltage, 401
subnet mask available, 406 register 1, 400
subnet mask setting, 308, 326, 415 register 2, 401
transmitted correct frames counter, 325, 407 register 3, 401
transmitted correct frames counter available, 406 reset timeout, 90
Ethernet II test, 400
framing configured, 407 thermal overload, 400
framing operational, 407 under power factor, 401
framing receiver configured, 407 undercurrent, 400
framing receiver operational, 407 underpower, 401
framing receiver supported, 407 undervoltage, 401
framing registers, 407 voltage phase imbalance, 401
framing sender configured, 407 voltage phase loss, 401
framing sender operational, 407 voltage phase reversal, 401
framing sender supported, 407 wiring, 401, 435
framing supported, 407 fault code, 69, 196, 197, 400
EtherNet/IP n-0, 299, 394, 444
device profile, 341 n-1, 299, 395
explicit message, 340 n-2, 395
I/O message, 340 n-3, 396
EtherNet/IP interface diagnostic object, 369 n-4, 397
EthernetIP fault counters
capabilities control, 417 protection, 64
540 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Index
fault enable FDR (faulty device replacement), 317

current phase imbalance, 412 first power-up, 253
current phase loss, 413 FLC, 161, 181
current phase reversal, 413 FLC settings, 256
diagnostic, 413 FLC1, 181
ground current, 412 FLC2, 181
HMI port, 412 FLCmax, 256
jam, 412 FLCmin, 256
long start, 412 frequency, 38, 69, 404, 437
motor temperature sensor, 413 n-0, 299, 394, 445
network port, 412 n-1, 299, 395
over power factor, 413 n-2, 396
overcurrent, 413 n-3, 396
overpower, 413 n-4, 397
overvoltage, 413 full load current max, 69, 392, 444
register 1, 412 n-0, 394
register 2, 413 n-1, 395
thermal overload, 412 n-2, 396
under power factor, 413 n-3, 396
undercurrent, 412 n-4, 397
underpower, 413 full load current settings, 256
undervoltage, 413
voltage phase imbalance, 413
voltage phase loss, 413 G
voltage phase reversal, 413 general configuration
wiring, 413 register 1, 411
fault management, 186 register 2, 411
introduction, 187 general purpose registers for logic functions, 421
fault power cycle requested, 402, 423, 436 ground CT
fault reset primary, 32, 123, 410
authorized, 401, 422, 436 secondary, 32, 123, 410
auto-reset active, 402, 423 ground current, 32, 120, 437
fault reset mode, 288, 292, 411, 482 disable while motor starting, 486
automatic, 191 fault configuration, 410
manual, 189 fault enable, 120, 486
remote, 194 faults count, 64, 298
fault statistics, 59 ground fault disabled, 120
history, 69 mode, 32, 120, 121, 123, 294, 410, 480
faults count, 61, 298, 394 n-0, 397, 444
auto-resets, 393 n-1, 398
controller internal, 393 n-2, 398
current phase imbalance, 393 n-3, 398
current phase loss, 394 n-4, 399
diagnostic, 394 ratio, 32, 290
ground current, 393 warning enable, 120, 294, 486
HMI port, 393 ground current ratio, 69
internal port, 393 n-0, 299, 394, 444
jam, 393 n-1, 299, 395
long start, 393 n-2, 396
motor temperature sensor, 394 n-3, 396
network port, 393 n-4, 397
network port config, 393 ground current transformer
over power factor, 394 primary, 480
overcurrent, 394 secondary, 480
overpower, 394
overvoltage, 394
thermal overload, 393 H
under power factor, 394 hardware configuration, 265
undercurrent, 393 LTM R controller alone, 266
underpower, 394 high priority registers
undervoltage, 394 mirroring, 335
voltage phase loss, 394
wiring, 394
faulty device replacement (FDR), 317
1639505EN-05 04/2015 541

Index
HMI I
display brightness setting, 412
I/O scanning
display contrast setting, 412
configuring, 335
language setting, 414
I/O status, 403
language setting register, 414
inputs/outputs
HMI display
AC logic inputs configuration, 481
I/O status enable, 414
internal clock, 462
L1 current enable, 414
internal ground current, 121
active power enable, 414
fault threshold, 122, 294, 411, 486
average current enable, 414
fault timeout, 122, 294, 411, 486
average current ratio enable, 414
warning threshold, 122, 294, 411, 486
average voltage enable, 414
internal port
brightness setting, 491
faults count, 68, 298
contrast setting, 491
introduction, 13
control mode enable, 414
IP addressing, 312
current phase imbalance enable, 414
date enable, 414
frequency enable, 414
ground current enable, 414
J
items register 1, 414 jam, 114
items register 2, 414 fault enable, 114, 293, 487
L1 current ratio enable, 414 fault threshold, 114, 293, 411, 487
L1-L2 voltage enable, 414 fault timeout, 114, 293, 411, 487
L2 current enable, 414 faults count, 64
L2 current ratio enable, 414 warning enable, 114, 293, 487
L2-L3 voltage enable, 414 warning threshold, 114, 293, 411, 487
L3 current enable, 414
L3 current ratio enable, 414
L3-L1 voltage enable, 414
L
language setting, 491 L1 current
motor status enable, 414 n-0, 397, 444
motor temperature sensor enable, 414 n-1, 398
operating time enable, 414 n-2, 398
power consumption enable, 414 n-3, 398
power factor enable, 414 n-4, 399
reactive power enable, 414 L1 current highest imbalance, 106
start statistics enable, 414 L1 current ratio, 69, 290
starts per hour enable, 414 n-0, 299, 394, 444
thermal capacity level enable, 414 n-1, 299, 395
thermal capacity remaining enable, 414 n-2, 395
time enable, 414 n-3, 396
time to trip enable, 414 n-4, 397
voltage phase imbalance enable, 414 L1-L2 highest imbalance, 126
HMI display items register 3, 414 L1-L2 voltage, 69
HMI display temperature sensor degree CF, 37, 414 n-0, 299, 395, 445
HMI keys n-1, 299, 395
independent operating mode, 172 n-2, 396
overload operating mode, 170 n-3, 396
reverser operating mode, 175 n-4, 397
two-speed operating mode, 184 L2 current
two-step operating mode, 180 n-0, 397, 444
HMI motor status LED color, 411, 491 n-1, 398
HMI port n-2, 398
address setting, 272, 411, 483 n-3, 398
baud rate setting, 272, 289, 411, 483 n-4, 399
comm loss, 402, 423 L2 current highest imbalance, 106
comm loss timeout, 272 L2 current ratio, 69, 290
endian setting, 297, 411, 484 n-0, 299, 394, 444
fallback action setting, 484 n-1, 299, 395
fallback setting, 272, 413 n-2, 396
fault enable, 297, 484 n-3, 396
faults count, 67, 298 n-4, 397
parity setting, 272, 289, 411, 483 L2-L3 highest imbalance, 126
warning enable, 297, 484
hysteresis, 85
542 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Index
L2-L3 voltage, 69 logic output behavior, 167

n-0, 299, 395, 445 independent operating mode, 172
n-1, 299, 395 overload operating mode, 170
n-2, 396 reverser operating mode, 174
n-3, 396 two-speed operating mode, 184
n-4, 397 two-step operating mode, 180
L3 current logic outputs characteristics
n-0, 397, 444 LTM R controller, 471
n-1, 398 long start, 112
n-2, 398 fault enable, 112, 293, 486
n-3, 398 fault threshold, 112, 161, 293, 411, 486
n-4, 399 fault timeout, 93, 112, 161, 293, 293, 411, 486
L3 current highest imbalance, 106 faults count, 64, 298
L3 current ratio, 69, 290 LTM E expansion module
n-0, 299, 394, 444 technical specifications, 473
n-1, 299, 395 LTM R
n-2, 396 physical description, 24
n-3, 396 LTM R controller
n-4, 397 technical specifications, 470
L3-L1 highest imbalance, 126
L3-L1 voltage, 69
n-0, 299, 395, 445 M
n-1, 299, 395 Magelis XBT L1000 programming software
n-2, 396 file transfer, 275
n-3, 396 install, 273
n-4, 397 software application files, 274
line currents, 31 Magelis XBTN410
link programming, 271
ethernet, 310 Magelis XBTN410 (1-to-many), 276
load CT command lines, 280
multiple passes, 412 controller page, 290
primary, 412 controllers currents page, 288
ratio, 392 controllers status page, 288
secondary, 412 editing values, 282
load current transformer fault management, 302
multiple passes, 480 home page, 287
primary, 480 keypad, 277
secondary, 480 LCD, 278
load shedding, 137, 296, 402, 423 menu structure - level 2, 288
enable, 410 menu structure overview, 286
timeout, 137, 296, 410, 488 monitoring, 301
load sheddings count, 73, 394 navigating the menu structure, 281
local control physical description, 277
channel setting, 481 product ID page, 300
local/remote control remote reset page, 288
default mode, 481 reset to defaults page, 289
key enable, 481 service commands, 303
stop key disable, 481 settings page, 291
transfer mode, 481 statistics page, 298
logic file, 185 value write command, 285
logic input, 435 XBTN reference page, 289
logic input 3 external ready, 481 maintenance, 457
logic input 3 detecting problems, 458
external ready enable, 421 troubleshooting, 459
logic input behavior, 166 master IP, 311
independent operating mode, 172 metering and monitoring functions, 29
overload operating mode, 170 minimum wait time, 400, 436
reverser operating mode, 174
two-speed operating mode, 183
two-step operating mode, 179
logic inputs characteristics
LTM R controller, 471
logic output, 435
1639505EN-05 04/2015 543

Index
mirroring motor history, 70

input table changed, 422 last start max current, 75
input table freshness, 422 last start time, 76
input table validity, 422 motor operating time, 77
output table changed, 422 motor starts, 71
output table freshness, 422 motor starts per hour, 72
output table validity, 422 motor operating mode
status register, 422 independent, 166
system status register 1, 422 overload, 166
mirroring high priority registers, 335 reverser, 166
Modbus two-speed, 166
master IP, 311 two-step, 166
motor motor phases sequence, 111
auxiliary fan cooled, 87, 90, 291, 411 motor predefined operating mode
average current ratio, 401, 422 independent, 171
full load current, 480 overload, 169
full load current high speed, 480 reverser, 173
full load current ratio, 69, 89, 93, 181, 293, 414, two-speed, 181
480 two-step, 176
full load current ratio high speed, 480 motor protection functions, 84
full load power, 144, 146 current phase imbalance, 106
high speed full load current ratio, 89, 93, 181, 293, current phase loss, 109
414 current phase reversal, 111
last start current, 298, 405, 447 external ground current, 123
last start current ratio, 75 ground current, 120
last start duration, 76, 298, 405, 447 internal ground current, 121
LO1 starts count, 71 jam, 114
LO2 starts count, 71 long start, 112
lockout timeout, 409 motor temperature sensor, 94
nominal power, 291, 410, 480, 480, 480 motor temperature sensor-NTC analog, 101
nominal voltage, 132, 134, 291, 410, 480 motor temperature sensor-PT100, 97
operating mode, 409, 480 motor temperature sensor-PTC analog, 99
phases, 50, 411 motor temperature sensor-PTC binary, 95
phases number, 480 operation, 84
phases sequence, 131, 411 over power factor, 150
predefined operating mode, 166 overcurrent, 118
rapid cycle lockout timeout, 481 overpower, 146
restart time undefined, 402, 423 overvoltage, 134
running, 401, 422 thermal overload, 87
speed, 402, 423 thermal overload - definite time, 92
star-delta, 411, 480 thermal overload - inverse thermal, 88
starting, 401, 422 under power factor, 148
starts count, 71 undercurrent, 116
starts per hour count, 72, 405, 447 underpower, 144
step 1 to 2 threshold, 176, 291, 481 undervoltage, 132
step 1 to 2 timeout, 176, 291, 481 voltage phase imbalance, 126
temperature sensor, 290 voltage phase loss, 129
temperature sensor fault threshold, 409 voltage phase reversal, 131
temperature sensor type, 409 motor running, 79, 436
temperature sensor warning threshold, 409 motor starting, 79, 436
transition lockout, 402, 423 motor starts count, 298, 393, 447
transition mode, 481 motor step 1 to 2
transition timeout, 175, 176, 181, 291, 481 threshold, 413
trip class, 89, 293, 411 timeout, 413
motor control functions, 153 motor temperature
motor full load current max fault enable, 485
n-0, 299 fault threshold Ω, 485
n-1, 299 sensor threshold °C, 485
motor full load current ratio, 444 sensor type, 485
n-0, 299, 394 warning enable, 485
n-1, 299, 395 warning threshold °C, 485
n-2, 395 warning threshold Ω, 485
n-3, 396
n-4, 397
motor high speed, 436
544 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Index
motor temperature sensor, 69, 94, 404 NTC analog, 101

display degree CF, 98
fault enable, 94, 291
fault threshold, 99, 101, 291 O
fault threshold degree, 98, 409 object
faults count, 64 EtherNet/IP interface, 369
n-0, 299 objects
n-1, 299 assembly, 347
PT100, 97 control supervisor, 359
type, 50, 94, 95, 99, 101 identity, 343
warning, 94 message router, 345
warning enable, 291 overload, 363
warning threshold, 99, 101, 291 on level current, 161
warning threshold degree, 98, 409 operating modes, 164
motor temperature sensor custom, 185
n-0, 394 independent, 171
n-1, 395 introduction, 166
n-2, 396 overload, 169
n-3, 396 reverser, 173
n-4, 397 two speed, 181
motor temperature sensor degree, 404, 437 two-step, 176
n-0, 397, 399, 444 operating states, 154, 158
n-1, 398 chart, 159
n-2, 398 not ready, 158
n-3, 398 protection functions, 159
ready, 158
run, 158
N start, 158
network port operating time, 77, 298, 393, 447
address setting, 415 over power factor, 150
bad config, 405 fault enable, 150, 296, 490
baud rate, 405 fault threshold, 150, 296, 410
baud rate setting, 415 fault timeout, 150, 296, 410, 490
comm loss, 402, 423 faults count, 64
comm loss timeout, 297, 309, 310, 311 warning enable, 150, 296, 490
communicating, 405 warning threshold, 150, 296, 410, 490
communication loss timeout, 483 overcurrent, 118
compatibility code, 392 fault enable, 118, 294, 487
config faults count, 67, 298 fault threshold, 118, 294, 409, 487
connected, 405 fault timeout, 118, 294, 409, 487
endian setting, 292, 297, 411, 483 faults count, 64
ethernet gateway address setting, 483 warning enable, 118, 294, 487
ethernet IP address setting, 483 warning threshold, 118, 294, 409, 487
ethernet master IP address setting, 483 overload object, 363
ethernet subnet mask setting, 483 overpower, 146
fallback action setting, 483 fault enable, 146, 296, 490
fallback setting, 309, 311, 415 fault threshold, 146, 296, 410, 490
fault enable, 297, 309, 483 fault timeout, 146, 410, 490
faults count, 67, 298 fault timeout starting, 296
FDR auto backup enable, 320 faults count, 64
FDR auto backup period setting, 320 warning enable, 146, 296, 490
FDR controller interval, 309 warning threshold, 146, 296, 410, 490
FDR status, 320, 321, 439 overvoltage, 134
FDR synchro setting, 309 fault enable, 135, 295, 488
firmware version, 300, 392 fault threshold, 135, 295, 410, 488
frame type, 308, 325 fault timeout, 135, 295, 410, 488
ID code, 300, 392 faults count, 64, 298
internal faults count, 67, 298 warning enable, 135, 295, 488
monitoring, 405 warning threshold, 135, 295, 410, 488
network port frame type setting, 483
parity, 405
self-detecting, 405 P
self-testing, 405 parameters
SNMP trap authentication failure enable, 329 configurable, 479
warning enable, 297, 309, 483 Periodic Registers Service Objects, 365
1639505EN-05 04/2015 545

Index
phase imbalances register, 405 SNMP

physical description community name get setting, 483
expansion module, 26 community name set setting, 483
LTM R, 24 community name trap setting, 483
PKW, 365 manager address 1 setting, 483
Periodic Registers Service Objects, 365 manager address 2 setting, 483
power consumption system contact setting, 483
active, 394 system location setting, 483
reactive, 394 system name setting, 483
power factor, 42, 69, 290, 404, 437 trap authentication failure enable, 483
n-0, 299, 395, 445 SNMP (simple network management protocol), 328
n-1, 299, 395 start cycle, 161
n-2, 396 starts count
n-3, 396 motor LO1, 394
n-4, 397 motor LO2, 394
predefined operating modes stop
control wiring and fault management, 168 key disable, 491
preventive maintenance, 461 stop HMI
configuration settings, 461 disable, 415
environment, 461 stop terminal strip
statistics, 461 disable, 415
protection functions, 83 system
communication, 188 fault, 288, 401, 422, 435
configuration, 159, 188 on, 288, 401, 422, 435
current, 105, 160, 188 ready, 401, 422, 435
customized, 83 tripped, 401, 422
diagnostic, 159, 188 warning, 401, 422, 435
faults, 83 system and device monitoring
internal, 160, 188 faults, 45
motor temperature sensor, 160, 188 system and device monitoring faults
operating states, 159 control command diagnostic errors, 48
power, 143, 160, 188 system operating status, 78
thermal , 86 minimum wait time, 80
thermal overload, 160, 188 motor state, 79
voltage, 125, 160, 188 system ready, 79
warnings, 83 system selection guide, 21
wiring, 159, 188 system status
PT100, 97 logic inputs, 402, 423
PTC analog, 99 logic outputs, 402, 423
PTC binary, 95 register 1, 401
register 2, 402, 423
R
rapid cycle T
lockout, 103, 423 technical specifications
lockout timeout, 103, 296, 409 LTM E expansion module, 473
rapid cycle LTM R controller, 470
lockout, 402 terminal strip
reactive power, 43, 290, 404, 437 terminal strip for stop disable, 481
consumption, 44 TeSys T
remote control motor management system, 14
channel setting, 481 thermal capacity level, 36, 69, 88, 90, 290, 404, 437
replacement n-0, 299, 394, 444
expansion module, 463 n-1, 299, 395
LTM R controller, 463 n-2, 395
n-3, 396
n-4, 397
S
self test, 412, 461, 462
enable, 461
simple network management protocol (SNMP), 328
546 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Index
thermal overload, 87 V
definite time, 92
voltage
fault, 90
average, 41, 290, 404
fault definite timeout, 93, 293, 409
L1-L2, 39, 290, 404
fault enable, 87, 293, 485, 485
L2-L3, 39, 290, 404
fault reset mode, 187
L3-L1, 39, 290, 404
fault reset threshold, 89, 187, 293, 411, 485
phase imbalance, 290, 404
fault reset timeout, 187
voltage dip
fault timeout, 485
detection, 405
faults count, 64, 90, 92, 298
mode, 488
inverse thermal, 88
occurred, 405
mode, 87, 409, 485
restart threshold, 137, 139, 296, 410, 489, 489
motor class, 485
restart timeout, 137, 139, 296, 410, 489, 489
setting, 409
setting, 410
time to trip, 55
threshold, 137, 139, 296, 410, 488, 489
warning, 90
voltage dip mode, 139
warning enable, 87, 293, 485, 485
voltage highest imbalance
warning threshold, 89, 93, 293, 411, 485
L1-L2, 405
warnings count, 64, 90, 92, 298
L2-L3, 405
time stamp, 462
L3-L1, 405
time to trip, 55, 290, 405, 436
voltage imbalance, 40
voltage mode, 137
U voltage phase imbalance, 40, 69, 126, 437
fault enable, 127, 295, 488
under power factor, 148
fault timeout running, 127, 295, 410, 488
fault threshold, 148, 296, 410, 490, 490
fault timeout starting, 127, 295, 410, 488
fault timeout, 148, 296, 410, 490
faults count, 64
n-0, 299, 395, 445
warning enable, 148, 296, 490
n-1, 299, 395
n-2, 396
undercurrent, 116
n-3, 396
n-4, 397
fault timeout, 116, 294, 411, 487
fault timeout, 130, 295, 410, 488
underpower, 144
faults count, 64
voltage phase reversal, 131
fault timeout, 144, 296, 410, 490
faults count, 64
faults count, 64, 111, 131
undervoltage, 132
fault timeout, 133, 295, 410, 488
use, 263
LTM R controller alone, 264
programming the Magelis XBTN410, 271
user map addresses setting, 419
user map values, 419
1639505EN-05 04/2015 547

Index
W
warning
controller internal temperature, 403
current phase imbalance, 403
current phase loss, 404
current phase reversal, 404
diagnostic, 404
ground current, 403
HMI port, 403
jam, 403
LTM E configuration, 404
motor temperature sensor, 404
network port, 403
over power factor, 404
overcurrent, 404
overpower, 404
overvoltage, 404
register 1, 403
register 2, 404
register 3, 404
thermal overload, 403
undercurrent, 403
underpower, 404
undervoltage, 404
warning code, 403
warning counters
protection, 64
warning enable
controller internal temperature, 412
current phase balance, 412
current phase loss, 413
diagnostic, 413
ground current, 412
HMI port, 412
jam, 412
motor temperature sensor, 413
network port, 412
over power factor, 413
overcurrent, 413
overpower, 413
overvoltage, 413
register 1, 412
register 2, 413
undercurrent, 412
underpower, 413
undervoltage, 413
warnings count, 62, 64, 394
wiring
fault, 50, 435
faults count, 66
motor phase sequence, 481
548 1639505EN-05 04/2015

Index
1639505EN-05 04/2015 549

Index
550 1639505EN-05 04/2015

1639505EN-05
Schneider Electric Industries SAS As standards, specifications and designs change from time to time, please ask for confirmation
35, rue Joseph Monier of the information given in this publication.
CS30323
F - 92506 Rueil Malmaison Cedex
www.schneider-electric.com 04/2015

Tesys T Ethernet Ip

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Tesys T Ethernet Ip

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TeSys T LTM R Ethernet Modbus TCP/EtherNet IP

TeSys T LTM R Ethernet

This manual is intended for:

Title of Documentation Reference Number

Introducing the TeSys T Motor Management System

What Is in This Chapter?

Presentation of the TeSys T Motor Management System

Aim of the Product

Examples of Supported Machine Segments

Machine Segment Examples

Metal, Minerals, and Mining

Industry Sectors Application

Industry Sectors Application

TeSys T Motor Management System

LTM R Controller Functional Description Reference Number

LTM E Expansion Module

LTM E Functional Description Reference Number

HMI Device: Magelis® XBTN410

Magelis® XBTN410 Functional Description Reference Number

z configures the system through menu entries XBTN410 (HMI)

HMI Device: LTM CU Control Operator Unit

LTM CU Functional Description Reference Number

SoMove with the TeSys T DTM

SoMove with the Functional Description Reference Number

Load Current Transformers

Schneider Electric Load Primary Secondary Inside Diameter Reference Number

Square D Lug-lug Kit Description Reference Number

Ground Fault Current Transformers

Schneider Electric Vigirex™ Type Maximum Inside Diameter Transformation Reference

TA30 65 A 30 1.18 1000:1 50437

Cable Description Reference Number

LTM R/LTM E to Magelis® HMI device connection cable XBTZ938

Cable Description Reference Number

Cable kit, includes LTM E / LTM R / LTM CU to PC TCSMCNAM3M002P

EtherNet/IP and Modbus/TCP Communication Protocols

Communication Protocols Structure

LTM R EtherNet/IP User Application

z Data Management Services: Explicit Messaging and I/O Messaging

Parameters in Object Library

System Selection Guide

Function LTM R Controller LTM R with LTM E

– The function is not available

Function LTM R Controller LTM R with LTM E

– The function is not available

Functions LTM R Controller LTM R with LTM E

– The function is not available

Control functions LTM R Controller LTM R with LTM E

– The function is not available

Physical Description of the LTM R Ethernet Controller

Phase Current Inputs

1 Windows for phase current measurement

1 Test / Reset button

5 LTM R status-indicating LEDs

Test / Reset Button

HMI Device/Expansion Module/PC Port

LTM R status-indicating LEDs

LED name Description

Ethernet Port Link and Activity LEDs

LED name Description

Physical Description of the LTM E Expansion Module

LTM E Expansion module LTM E Expansion module connected to an LTM R controller

LV1 LV2 LV3

Power I.7 I.8 I.9 I.10